Dell™ C5765dn
Color Laser Multifunction Printer
User’s Guide
Regulatory Model: C5765dn
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server,
Windows Vista, Microsoft Network, and Internet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries; NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries; EtherTalk,
Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, and PostScript are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2
are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation; ThinPrint is a registered trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other
countries; RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and
conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369;
DES: This product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman,
Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms;
TIFF (libtiff): Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little cms): Copyright
(c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
NuanceTM OCR © 1994-2013 Nuance Communications. All Rights Reserved.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their
products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
The printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
As for RSA BSAFE
This printer includes RSA® BSAFE® Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject
to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013
and in applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
August 2013 Rev. A01
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
Before Using the Machine .................................................................................................................... 15
Preface....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Types of Manuals..................................................................................................................................... 17
Using This Guide...................................................................................................................................... 18
Organization of This Guide............................................................................................................... 18
Conventions......................................................................................................................................... 20
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................... 21
Dell™ Technical Support Policy..................................................................................................... 21
Warranty and Return Policy............................................................................................................. 21
Contacting Dell................................................................................................................................... 21
About License........................................................................................................................................... 22
RSA BSAFE .......................................................................................................................................... 22
Heimdal................................................................................................................................................ 22
JPEG Code ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Libcurl .................................................................................................................................................. 23
FreeBSD ............................................................................................................................................... 23
OpenLDAP............................................................................................................................................ 24
DES........................................................................................................................................................ 26
AES........................................................................................................................................................ 26
TIFF (libtiff) .......................................................................................................................................... 26
ICC Profile (Little cms) ...................................................................................................................... 26
XML Paper Specification (XPS)....................................................................................................... 26
Cyrus SASL .......................................................................................................................................... 26
Legal Notice.............................................................................................................................................. 28
2
Product Overview ................................................................................................................................... 29
Machine Components ............................................................................................................................. 30
Power Source........................................................................................................................................... 34
Switching the Main Power On ........................................................................................................ 34
Switching the Power On................................................................................................................... 34
Switching the Power Off .................................................................................................................. 35
Switching the Main Power Off........................................................................................................ 36
Ground Fault Interrupter ......................................................................................................................... 37
Power Saver Mode.................................................................................................................................. 38
Entering the Power Saver Mode ..................................................................................................... 38
Exiting the Power Saver Mode........................................................................................................ 39
Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Screens and Buttons Displayed ...................................................................................................... 42
About the [Home] Screen ....................................................................................................................... 43
Entering Text............................................................................................................................................. 46
Paper Output ............................................................................................................................................. 47
3
Copy ........................................................................................................................................................... 49
Copying Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 50
3
Step 1 Loading Documents ...............................................................................................................50
Step 2 Selecting Features .................................................................................................................52
Step 3 Entering a Quantity.................................................................................................................53
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job ............................................................................................................54
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ..............................................................................55
Operations during Copying .....................................................................................................................56
Stopping the Copy Job .......................................................................................................................56
Changing the Number of Copies ......................................................................................................57
Interrupting the Copy Job..................................................................................................................58
Simple Copy...............................................................................................................................................59
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ..........................................................................59
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...............................................................60
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies).....................................................................................61
Black & White / Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)............................................................62
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) ...............................................................................62
2 Pages per Side (Copying Two Pages onto One Sheet).............................................................62
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)................................63
Copy.............................................................................................................................................................64
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...............................................................64
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ..........................................................................67
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying).............................................................................70
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) .....................................................................................74
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ..................................................................................74
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ........................................................74
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) ...............................................................................75
Image Quality ............................................................................................................................................76
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) ..............................................................................76
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density/Sharpness/Saturation of Images) ............................78
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)....78
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)....................................................................................79
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)......................................................................................80
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ............................................................................................82
Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................................................83
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) .....................................................................................84
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)...................................................85
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) ............................................86
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document) .......................................................88
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................89
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .......................................90
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)...................................................................................92
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) .....................................................................95
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)................................96
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) ................................................................97
Output Format ............................................................................................................................................99
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) .....................................................................................99
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) ...........................................................................................99
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies) ............................................................................................102
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ......................................................103
4
Table of Contents
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets) ............................................ 104
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ........................................................... 106
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)....................................... 107
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies).......................... 107
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ............................................................................... 109
ID Card Copy (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ...................................................................... 111
Job Assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 113
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ............. 113
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ......................................................... 117
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .................................................................................. 118
Delete Outside / Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area) ............. 121
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job).............................................. 122
4
Fax............................................................................................................................................................ 123
Fax Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 124
Step 1 Loading Documents............................................................................................................. 124
Step 2 Selecting Features............................................................................................................... 126
Step 3 Specifying Destinations ..................................................................................................... 127
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job ............................................................................................................ 128
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status .............................................................................. 129
Operations during Faxing..................................................................................................................... 130
Stopping the Fax Job....................................................................................................................... 130
Changing the Scan Settings........................................................................................................... 131
5
Scan ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
Scanning Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 134
Step 1 Loading Documents............................................................................................................. 134
Step 2 Selecting the Features........................................................................................................ 136
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job.......................................................................................................... 138
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ........................................................................... 140
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ................................................................................................... 140
Operations during Scanning................................................................................................................ 141
Stopping the Scan Job .................................................................................................................... 141
Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job ................................................................ 142
Changing Scan Settings.................................................................................................................. 143
6
Job Flow Sheets .................................................................................................................................... 145
Job Flow Procedure .............................................................................................................................. 146
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ........................................................................... 146
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet............................................................................................... 146
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet ...................................................................... 147
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .............................................................................................. 147
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet .............................................................................................. 148
7
Stored Programming............................................................................................................................. 151
Stored Programming Overview........................................................................................................... 152
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs .......................................................................... 153
Registering Stored Programs......................................................................................................... 154
Notes and Restrictions on Registering Stored Programs......................................................... 155
5
Registering Stored Programs for Build Job.................................................................................156
Deleting Stored Programs...............................................................................................................157
Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name ...............................................................................157
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ........................................................................158
Calling a Stored Program......................................................................................................................159
Calling a Stored Program for Build Job .......................................................................................160
8
Web Applications ..................................................................................................................................161
Web Applications Overview ................................................................................................................162
Accessing Web Applications...............................................................................................................163
Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the [Home] Screen.........................................................164
9
Media Print (Text and Photos).............................................................................................................165
Overview of Media Print .......................................................................................................................166
Supported Media and File Formats ...............................................................................................167
Notes and Restrictions on Media Print ........................................................................................167
Media Print - Text...................................................................................................................................169
Selecting Files...................................................................................................................................169
[Select From List] Screen ................................................................................................................170
Media Print - Photos ..............................................................................................................................171
Selecting Files...................................................................................................................................171
[Select From List] Screen ................................................................................................................172
Selecting the Printing Options.............................................................................................................173
Media Print - Photos ........................................................................................................................173
Media Print - Text.............................................................................................................................174
Index Print..........................................................................................................................................175
10 Job Status................................................................................................................................................177
Job Status Overview..............................................................................................................................178
Checking Current/Pending Jobs..........................................................................................................179
Checking Completed Jobs ....................................................................................................................181
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs ......................................................................................................182
Secure Print .......................................................................................................................................182
Sample Set .........................................................................................................................................184
Delayed Print .....................................................................................................................................186
Charge Print .......................................................................................................................................187
Private Charge Print .........................................................................................................................190
Public Folder......................................................................................................................................192
Undelivered Faxes............................................................................................................................193
Printing Pending Jobs ...........................................................................................................................195
Handling Error Terminations ................................................................................................................196
11 Computer Operations ............................................................................................................................197
Features Overview .................................................................................................................................198
12 Paper and Other Media.........................................................................................................................199
Print Media Guidelines .........................................................................................................................200
Paper ...................................................................................................................................................200
6
Table of Contents
Transparencies................................................................................................................................. 202
Envelopes .......................................................................................................................................... 203
Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 204
Storing Print Media ......................................................................................................................... 204
Identifying Print Media and Specifications................................................................................ 205
Loading Paper......................................................................................................................................... 207
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4......................................................................................................... 207
Loading an Envelope in Trays 1 to 4 ............................................................................................. 209
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)......................................................................................... 211
Loading an Envelope in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ............................................................................. 212
Changing the Paper Settings ............................................................................................................... 214
13 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 217
Replacing Consumables....................................................................................................................... 218
Replacing Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................... 219
Replacing Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 221
Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M, Y, or K .................................................................................... 223
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-AB1)........................................................................... 227
Replacing Fusing Unit .................................................................................................................... 228
Replacing Transfer Belt Unit ......................................................................................................... 230
Replacing Transfer Roller ............................................................................................................. 234
Replacing Separator Rollers.......................................................................................................... 236
Cleaning the Machine........................................................................................................................... 240
Cleaning the Exterior....................................................................................................................... 240
Cleaning the Interior (Laser Scanners)........................................................................................ 240
Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) Sensor.................................................. 241
Cleaning the Touch Screen............................................................................................................ 245
Cleaning Document Cover and Document Glass ....................................................................... 246
Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass ........................................ 246
Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers.............................................................................................. 247
Executing Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 248
Adjusting Color Registration ............................................................................................................... 251
Auto Color Registration................................................................................................................... 251
Side Color Registration................................................................................................................... 253
Printing a Report/List ............................................................................................................................ 254
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID........................................................ 255
Setting Restore Tool.............................................................................................................................. 256
14 Machine Status ..................................................................................................................................... 257
Overview of Machine Status ............................................................................................................... 258
Machine Information............................................................................................................................. 259
General Information......................................................................................................................... 259
Paper Tray Status............................................................................................................................. 260
Print Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 260
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists............................................................................................. 268
Overwrite Hard Disk........................................................................................................................ 269
Print Mode......................................................................................................................................... 269
7
Fax Receiving Mode ........................................................................................................................272
Faults.........................................................................................................................................................273
Supplies....................................................................................................................................................274
Billing Information .................................................................................................................................275
Billing Information ...........................................................................................................................275
User Account Billing Information..................................................................................................276
15 Tools.........................................................................................................................................................279
System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................................................280
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode ............................................................................280
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode ..........................................280
Step 3 Selecting [Tools] ..................................................................................................................281
Step 4 Selecting a Tab on the [Tools] Screen .............................................................................281
Step 5 Setting a Feature ..................................................................................................................283
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...............................................................................283
Tools Menu List.......................................................................................................................................284
Common Service Settings.....................................................................................................................295
Machine Clock/Timers ....................................................................................................................295
Audio Tones .......................................................................................................................................298
Screen/Button Settings ...................................................................................................................299
Paper Tray Settings ..........................................................................................................................301
Image Quality Adjustment...............................................................................................................304
Reports................................................................................................................................................305
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................307
Notify Job Completion by E-mail ...................................................................................................308
Plug-in Settings ................................................................................................................................308
Other Settings....................................................................................................................................308
Copy Service Settings............................................................................................................................316
Copy Tab - Features Allocation......................................................................................................316
Preset Buttons ...................................................................................................................................317
Copy Defaults.....................................................................................................................................317
Copy Control.......................................................................................................................................321
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................................................322
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................................................323
Custom Colors....................................................................................................................................323
Connectivity & Network Setup ............................................................................................................324
Port Settings ......................................................................................................................................324
Protocol Settings ..............................................................................................................................328
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name ........................................................................................331
Proxy Server Settings ......................................................................................................................332
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings ..............................................................................................333
Remote Authentication/Directory Service...................................................................................334
Security Settings ..............................................................................................................................340
Other Settings....................................................................................................................................344
Print Service Settings............................................................................................................................345
Allocate Memory ..............................................................................................................................345
Delete Form........................................................................................................................................347
8
Table of Contents
Other Settings ................................................................................................................................... 347
Scan Service Settings........................................................................................................................... 352
First Tab ............................................................................................................................................. 352
Scan Defaults.................................................................................................................................... 353
Scan to PC Defaults ......................................................................................................................... 355
Original Size Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 355
Output Size Defaults ........................................................................................................................ 356
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ................................................................................................................. 356
Other Settings ................................................................................................................................... 356
Fax Service Settings ............................................................................................................................. 359
Screen Defaults................................................................................................................................ 359
Fax Defaults ...................................................................................................................................... 360
Fax Control ........................................................................................................................................ 360
Fax Received Options...................................................................................................................... 365
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ................................................................................................................. 365
Original Size Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 366
Local Terminal Information............................................................................................................ 366
E-mail Service Settings ........................................................................................................................ 368
E-mail Control ................................................................................................................................... 368
Folder Service Settings ........................................................................................................................ 371
Job Flow Service Settings ................................................................................................................... 372
Media Print Service Settings .............................................................................................................. 373
Stored File Settings ............................................................................................................................... 374
Web Applications Service Setup........................................................................................................ 376
Server Setup...................................................................................................................................... 377
Other Settings ................................................................................................................................... 378
Web Browser Setup .............................................................................................................................. 379
Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 381
Create Folder..................................................................................................................................... 381
Stored Programming........................................................................................................................ 383
Create Job Flow Sheet.................................................................................................................... 383
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword................................................................................................... 390
Add Address Book Entry ................................................................................................................. 390
Create Fax Group Recipients ......................................................................................................... 396
Add Fax Comment ............................................................................................................................ 397
Paper Tray Attributes ...................................................................................................................... 397
Accounting.............................................................................................................................................. 398
Create/View User Accounts........................................................................................................... 398
View Accounts ................................................................................................................................. 401
Reset User Accounts ....................................................................................................................... 401
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs) ................................................................................ 402
Accounting Type .............................................................................................................................. 402
Accounting Login Screen Settings ............................................................................................... 403
Fax Billing Data................................................................................................................................ 404
Accounting/Billing Device Settings............................................................................................. 405
Authentication/Security Settings ....................................................................................................... 407
9
System Administrator Settings ......................................................................................................407
Authentication...................................................................................................................................408
Job Status Default ............................................................................................................................415
Overwrite Hard Disk.........................................................................................................................415
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings..................................................................................417
Installation of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ........................................................................418
Preparations ......................................................................................................................................418
Configuration on the Machine .......................................................................................................419
Starting Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool...................................................................................420
Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ...............................421
17 Printer Environment Settings...............................................................................................................425
Print Overview ........................................................................................................................................426
Installation When Using USB Port ......................................................................................................429
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................429
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...........................................................................................429
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................430
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................430
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)..............................................................................431
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................431
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...........................................................................................431
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................432
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................432
Installation When Using NetWare ......................................................................................................434
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................434
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...........................................................................................434
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................435
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................436
Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB) .......................................................................437
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................437
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...........................................................................................437
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................438
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................438
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) ..............................................................439
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................439
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...........................................................................................439
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................440
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................440
Installation When Using EtherTalk .....................................................................................................441
Step 1 Preparations ..........................................................................................................................441
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ..........................................................................................441
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..........................................................................................442
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ...................................................................442
18 E-mail Environment Settings ...............................................................................................................443
E-mail Overview .....................................................................................................................................444
Preparations ............................................................................................................................................445
10
Table of Contents
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................ 447
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP................................................................................ 447
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment ....................................................................................... 448
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items................................................................... 450
19 Scanner Environment Settings ........................................................................................................... 451
Scan Service Overview ........................................................................................................................ 452
Configuration of Store to Folder.......................................................................................................... 453
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP................................................................................ 453
Step 2 Registering a Folder ............................................................................................................ 454
Step 3 Configuring a Computer...................................................................................................... 454
Configuration of Scan to PC................................................................................................................. 455
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................... 455
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP................................................................................ 456
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ......................................................................................... 457
Configuration of Store to USB ............................................................................................................. 458
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices....................................................................................... 458
Step 2 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items....................................................... 458
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets ...................................................................................................... 459
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP.............................................................................. 459
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port................................................................................................ 460
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ......................................................................................... 460
Configuration of Store & Send Link.................................................................................................... 461
Step 1 Configuring E-mail............................................................................................................... 461
Step 2 Enabling Authentication..................................................................................................... 461
Step 3 Other Settings....................................................................................................................... 461
Step 4 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items....................................................... 462
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings ....................................................................................... 463
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview ..................................................................................... 464
Types of Certificate.......................................................................................................................... 464
Encryption Features for Communication ..................................................................................... 464
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files....................................................... 465
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption....................................................................... 466
Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 466
Step1 Configuration on the Machine............................................................................................ 466
Step2 Configuration on the Computer .......................................................................................... 467
Configuration of Encryption using IPSec .......................................................................................... 468
Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 468
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate......................................................................... 468
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPSec) ............................................... 469
Step3 Configuration on the Computer .......................................................................................... 470
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature .................................................................... 471
Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 471
Step1 Configuration on the Machine............................................................................................ 471
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient ........................................................................... 473
Configuration of PDF/XPS Signature.................................................................................................. 475
11
Installation Overview ......................................................................................................................475
Step1 Configuration on the Machine ............................................................................................475
Step2 Configuration on the Computer...........................................................................................476
21 Authentication and Accounting Features .........................................................................................477
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature .....................................................................478
Overview of Authentication Feature .............................................................................................478
Overview of Accounting Feature ...................................................................................................479
Authentication.........................................................................................................................................480
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature .......................................................................480
User Roles and Authorization Groups...........................................................................................480
Types of Authentication ..................................................................................................................481
Types of Account Administration ..................................................................................................482
Authentication and Accounting Relationship.............................................................................483
Services Controlled by Authentication ..............................................................................................484
Overview ............................................................................................................................................484
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication ..........................................................................484
Services Restricted by the Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID
Authentication...................................................................................................................................486
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders .............................................................................489
Overview ............................................................................................................................................489
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled ............................................................................491
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled .............................................................................494
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration .................................................................................497
Configuration for Authentication.........................................................................................................500
Installation Overview ......................................................................................................................500
Enabling Authentication..................................................................................................................500
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings..................................................................503
Creating an Authorization Group ...................................................................................................503
Configuration for Account Administration.........................................................................................505
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type...........................................................................................505
Step 2 Registering User Information .............................................................................................505
User Authentication Operations ..........................................................................................................507
Authenticating Login Users ............................................................................................................507
Changing Passcode..........................................................................................................................508
22 Problem Solving.....................................................................................................................................509
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................................510
Machine Trouble ....................................................................................................................................511
Image Quality Trouble ...........................................................................................................................516
Trouble during Copying .........................................................................................................................521
Unable to Copy ..................................................................................................................................521
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected ...............................................................................522
Trouble during Printing .........................................................................................................................525
Unable to Print...................................................................................................................................525
The Print Result is Not What was Expected ...............................................................................526
Trouble during Faxing............................................................................................................................528
12
Table of Contents
Sending Problems............................................................................................................................ 528
Receiving Problems......................................................................................................................... 530
Trouble during Scanning...................................................................................................................... 532
Unable to Scan with the Machine ................................................................................................ 532
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer........................................................... 532
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB) .................................... 534
Unable to Send E-mail..................................................................................................................... 535
The Image is not What was Expected.......................................................................................... 535
Network-related Problems .................................................................................................................. 537
When using SMB ............................................................................................................................. 537
When using NetWare...................................................................................................................... 539
When using TCP/IP .......................................................................................................................... 543
When using EtherTalk..................................................................................................................... 544
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Problems.......................................................................... 545
E-mail Features Problems .............................................................................................................. 546
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems ....................................................................................... 547
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems............................................................................................. 548
Media Print - Text Trouble................................................................................................................... 551
Media Print - Photos Trouble .............................................................................................................. 552
Status Code ............................................................................................................................................. 553
Other Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 616
Paper Jams ............................................................................................................................................. 617
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4.............................................................................................................. 617
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) ...................................................................................................... 619
Paper Jams in Fusing Unit.............................................................................................................. 620
Paper Jams in Duplex Module ...................................................................................................... 621
Paper Jams in Finisher-AB1 .......................................................................................................... 622
Paper Jams in H Transport Unit .................................................................................................... 623
Document Jams...................................................................................................................................... 624
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C.................................................................................. 624
Stapler Faults.......................................................................................................................................... 626
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-AB1) .................................................................. 627
23 Install Operation for Eco copy/My Forms ......................................................................................... 629
Before Installation................................................................................................................................. 630
Environment Settings ...................................................................................................................... 630
SSL / TLS Settings in Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ..................................................... 632
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................ 635
Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 635
Uninstallation/Version Upgrade.................................................................................................... 637
About License......................................................................................................................................... 638
About OSS.......................................................................................................................................... 638
24 Using Eco copy ...................................................................................................................................... 651
About Eco copy....................................................................................................................................... 652
Eco copy Procedure .............................................................................................................................. 653
Problem Solving..................................................................................................................................... 655
13
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................655
View Detailed Information..............................................................................................................655
Notes and Restrictions ..........................................................................................................................656
25 Using My Forms......................................................................................................................................657
About My Forms ......................................................................................................................................658
Setup .........................................................................................................................................................659
Creating Folders on the Machine ..................................................................................................659
Storing Files in a Folder on the Machine .....................................................................................659
Using My Forms ......................................................................................................................................660
Printing Forms from the Folders on the Machine .......................................................................660
Problem Solving......................................................................................................................................661
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................661
View Detailed Information..............................................................................................................661
Notes and Restrictions ..........................................................................................................................662
Index.................................................................................................................................................................663
14
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as legal notice you should read before
using the machine.
• Preface ....................................................................................................................................16
• Types of Manuals ..................................................................................................................17
• Using This Guide....................................................................................................................18
• Technical Support .................................................................................................................21
• About License.........................................................................................................................22
• Legal Notice ...........................................................................................................................28
1 Before Using the Machine
Preface
Thank you for selecting the Dell C5765dn Color Laser Multifunction Printer (hereafter
referred to as "the machine").
This guide is written for users who are new to the machine and provides information on
copying, printing, scanning, and faxing operations, as well as troubleshooting, daily
maintenance, and precautions users should take when operating the machine.
The guide assumes that you are familiar with a personal computer and that you are
knowledgeable of computer networks. When you need additional information, refer to the
manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network products.
For information on optional components for the print feature, also refer to the guide
provided with each optional accessory.
After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case
you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
16
Types of Manuals
Types of Manuals
The following guides are provided with the machine.
Accompanying Manuals
PostScript User Guide (PDF)
The guide describes how to install the print driver and configure the functions in order to
use the machine as a PostScript printer. This guide is included in the "PostScript Driver
Library" CD-ROM.
Driver CD Kit Documentation (HTML)
The documentation describes installation and configuration procedures for print drivers and
the printer environment. This documentation is included in the Driver CD Kit.
Print Driver Help
The help describes print features and operations.
Guides for Optional Components
Optional components are available for the machine. Some of them come with user guides.
The guides for optional components describe all the necessary steps for using the optional
components and installing the software.
17
1 Before Using the Machine
Using This Guide
This guide is intended for first time users of the machine. It provides information on
copying, printing, e-mail, and faxing operations, as well as troubleshooting, daily
maintenance, and precautions users should take when operating the machine.
Organization of This Guide
This guide consists of the following chapters:
1
Before Using the Machine
Describes how to use this guide, as well as legal notices and other important information you
should read before using the machine.
2
Product Overview
Describes the basic information of the machine, such as the names of components, how to
use the touch screen, how to switch the machine on and off, and how to exit the Power Saver
mode.
3
Copy
Describes the basic operations and features for the Copy service.
4
Fax
Describes the basic operations and features for the Fax services.
5
Scan
Describes the basic operations and features for the Scan services.
6
Job Flow Sheets
Describes the operations to use a job flow created on a remote system.
7
Stored Programming
Describes the Stored Programming service that enables you to store customized job settings.
8
Web Applications
Describes the operations to connect to web applications.
9
Media Print (Text and Photos)
Describes the basic operations and features of Media Print that allows you to print image
data and document files.
10
Job Status
Describes how to check job status and how to delete jobs.
11
Computer Operations
Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing documents, importing
scanned files, using Direct Fax, and operating Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
12
Paper and Other Media
Describes the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and how to
load media in a tray.
18
Using This Guide
13
Maintenance
Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.
14
Machine Status
Describes how to check the faults that occurred on the machine and to print various reports/
lists.
15
Tools
Describes the procedures to set up the system.
16
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings
Describes how to use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
17
Printer Environment Settings
Describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.
18
E-mail Environment Settings
Describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the machine.
19
Scanner Environment Settings
Describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.
20
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Describes how to configure the machine to use the Encryption and the Digital Signature
features with your communications and documents.
21
Authentication and Accounting Features
The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for each
feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the Login
Type selected.
22
Problem Solving
Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine.
23
Install Operation for Eco copy/My Forms
Describes how to install Eco copy and My Forms.
24
Using Eco copy
Describes how to use Eco copy.
25
Using My Forms
Describes how to use My Forms.
19
1 Before Using the Machine
Conventions
• The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine
configuration and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen shots
may not be displayed or available depending on the configuration of your machine.
• The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software being
used due to the upgrades.
• In this guide, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
• The following term is used in this guide:
Note
: Additional information on operations or features.
• The following symbols are used in this guide:
"
"
: • A cross-reference included in this guide.
• Names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages
and input text.
[
]
: • Folders, files, applications, button or menu names
displayed on the touch screen.
• Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes
displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and
menu names.
<
> button
: Hardware buttons on the control panel.
<
> key
: Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
>
: • Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control
panel.
For example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools]
> [Setup] > [Create Folder]", this means that you need
to select [Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Create
Folder].
• Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for
files and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or
Folders]", this means that you need to click [Start], click
[Search], and then click [For Files or Folders] to search for
files and folders.
• Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation
when viewed from the front of the machine.
, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation
when viewed from the front of the machine.
20
LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Technical Support
Technical Support
The following provides the technical support information for this product.
Dell™ Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the
customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system,
software program, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from
Dell, and verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed
hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support
is available at dell.com/support. Additional technical support options may be available for
purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and
peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original
manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals
(DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services at dell.com.
You can access Dell Support through dell.com/support.
The Dell C5765dn Color Laser Multifunction Printer with High Capacity Feeder is Blue
Angel certified for Germany. You can access the Blue Angel techsheet at
dell.com/support/manuals.
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and
components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard
practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, see dell.com/support.
Recycling Information
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors,
printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods
include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or
materials.
For specific information on Dell’s worldwide recycling programs, see dell.com/recycle.
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at dell.com/support.
To contact Dell for technical support, sales, and customer service issues,
see dell.com/contactdell.
21
1 Before Using the Machine
About License
This section describes information about licenses. Be sure to read through it.
RSA BSAFE
This product includes RSA® BSAFE® Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.
Heimdal
Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology,
Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
JPEG Code
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
22
About L icense
Libcurl
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without
fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
FreeBSD
This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.
The FreeBSD Copyright
Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD
PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
23
1 Before Using the Machine
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
OpenLDAP
Copyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the
distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or subject
to additional restrictions.
This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information
concerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.
This work also contains materials derived from public sources.
Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.
--Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.
Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.
Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
--Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.
Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.
Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that this notice is preserved.
24
About L icense
The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software is provided
''as is'' without express or implied warranty.
--Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is
preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name
of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or
implied warranty.
-----------------------------------------The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and
notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.
Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms
of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS
CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior
permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright
holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
25
1 Before Using the Machine
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All
Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is
granted.
DES
This product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au)
AES
Copyright (c) 2003. Dr Brian Gladman. Worcester. UK. All rights reserved. This product
uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms.
TIFF (libtiff)
Lib TIFF copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam leffler
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics. Inc.
ICC Profile (Little cms)
Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria
XML Paper Specification (XPS)
This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The
terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be
found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.
Cyrus SASL
Copyright (c) 1998-2003 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For permission or any other
legal details, please contact
Office of Technology Transfer
Carnegie Mellon University
5000 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
26
About L icense
tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
4. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon
University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON
UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
27
1 Before Using the Machine
Legal Notice
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or
imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items
that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.
• Currency
• Banknotes and checks
• Bank and government bonds and securities
• Passports and identification cards
• Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
• Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy.
In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.
28
2 Product Overview
This chapter describes the basic information of the machine, such as machine components,
how to switch the machine on and off, and how to use the touch screen.
• Machine Components...........................................................................................................30
• Power Source.........................................................................................................................34
• Ground Fault Interrupter.......................................................................................................37
• Power Saver Mode................................................................................................................38
• Control Panel..........................................................................................................................40
• About the [Home] Screen .....................................................................................................43
• Entering Text ..........................................................................................................................46
• Paper Output...........................................................................................................................47
2 Product Overview
Machine Components
The following describes machine components and their functions.
Front View
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
10
No.
Component
Function
1
Center output tray
Copies and prints are delivered here, facing down.
2
Right hand cover
Open this cover to replace the consumables or clear paper jams.
3
Waste toner container
Collects waste toner.
4
Inner cover
Open this cover to replace the consumables.
5
550-sheet feeder (optional)
Load paper here.
Note
6
1100-sheet feeder (optional)
• The machine allows for a maximum of 4 trays (Standard tray, 550-sheet
feeder, and 1100-sheet feeder (2 trays)).
Load paper here.
Note
• The machine allows for a maximum of 4 trays (Standard tray, 550-sheet
feeder, and 1100-sheet feeder (2 trays)).
7
Front cover
Open this cover to replace the consumables.
8
Standard tray
Load paper here.
9
Toner cartridges
Contains Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), and Yellow (Y) toner (image
forming powder).
10
Drum cartridges
Contains Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), and Yellow (Y) drums.
Note
• The following combinations of trays are available:
- Standard tray
- Standard tray + 550-sheet feeder x 1
- Standard tray + 550-sheet feeder x 1 + 1100-sheet feeder x 1
- Standard tray + 1100-sheet feeder x 1
30
Machine Components
Right View
1
2
7
3
6
No.
5
4
Component
Function
1
Fusing unit
Fuses toner on paper. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.
2
Transfer roller
Transfers toner from the drum to the paper.
3
Paper thickness lever
Used for printing on envelopes.
4
Main power switch
Switches the main power on/off of the machine. Always follow the
instructions by the system administrator.
Note
• Always switch the power off before switching the main power off. Refer to
"Power Source" (P.34).
5
Multiple sheet inserter
(Bypass)
Used for loading non-standard paper, such as thick-stock paper and other
special media, that cannot be loaded in trays.
6
Right hand cover handle
Use this handle to open the right hand cover.
7
Power switch
Switches the power of the machine on and off.
Refer to "Power Source" (P.34).
Left View (Finisher-AB1 (Optional))
1
2
4
3
No.
Component
Function
1
Finisher-AB1
Staples copies or prints.
2
Knob
Rotate the knob to clear paper jams.
31
2 Product Overview
No.
Component
Function
3
Staple cartridge
Contains staples. Remove this cartridge when replacing or adding staples, or
clearing staple jams.
4
Left tray
Stapled outputs are delivered here.
Rear View
1
2
3
4
5
9
8
No.
32
7
6
Component
Function
1
Ethernet connector
Connects to a network cable.
2
EP port
Connects to a smart card reader.
3
USB connector (device)
Connects to the cable of the PC.
4
USB connector (host)
Connects to a USB cable.
5
Fax kit (optional)
Enables you to connect the machine to a telephone device.
6
Test button
Used for checking if the Reset button works properly.
7
RESET button
Automatically switches the machine off when a current leakage is detected.
8
Power connector for the
machine
Connects to the power cable of the machine.
9
Power connector for the
optional Finisher-AB1
Connects to the power cable of the optional Finisher-AB1.
Machine Components
Top View (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
1
2
3 4
5
6
8
7
9
No.
Component
Function
1
Confirmation indicator
Lights up when a document is loaded correctly.
2
Left cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
3
Inner cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
4
Knob
Rotate this knob to clear paper jams.
5
Document guides
Use these guides to align the edges of documents.
6
Document input tray
Load documents here.
7
Document output tray
Scanned documents are delivered here.
8
Document stopper
Prevents outputs from falling off.
9
Constant velocity transport
glass
Scans a loaded document.
Note
• In this guide, "document feeder" means the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder.
33
2 Product Overview
Power Source
The machine is provided with the power switch and the main power switch.
Power switch
Main Power
Switch
To use the machine, press the power switch to
the [ | ] position to switch its power on. You can
start operations after the machine warms up.
Main power switch
Power Switch
Press the main power switch to the [ ]
position. The <Main Power> indicator goes
out on the right side of the control panel, and
the machine powers off. Do not switch the main
power off except when you connect a cable to the machine or clean the machine. Switching
off the main power may erase the data in the memory when using the Fax service.
Switching the Main Power On
The following describes how to switch the main power on.
Note
1
2
• Do not switch off the main power immediately after switching on the main power. This may damage
the hard disk and the memory or cause a machine malfunction.
Make sure that the power cord is plugged in correctly.
Press the main power switch to the [ | ]
position to switch the main power on.
The <Main Power> indicator lights up on the
control panel.
Switching the Power On
The following describes how to switch the power on.
The machine takes approximately 35 seconds to warm up and to be ready to copy or print
after switching the power on. This may take more time depending on the configuration of
your machine.
Switch the power off at the end of the day or when not using the machine for an extended
period of time.
You can also use the Power Saver feature to save power consumption while the machine is
not in use.
For information on the Power Saver feature, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.38).
Note
34
• If the power is switched off, all the services of the machine will stop. When using the machine
throughout the day for jobs such as receiving fax, do not switch the power off.
Power Source
1
Press the power switch to the [ | ] position to switch
the power on.
If the machine does not power on, check the
following:
Reset Button
- The power cord is plugged in.
- The main power is switched on.
- The <RESET> button is set on and is in the
depressed position.
Switching the Power Off
The following describes how to switch the power off.
1
Before switching the power off, make sure that the machine has completed all copy or print
jobs. Then, make sure that the <Data> indicator is not blinking.
Note
• Do not switch the power off in the following situations. If the power is switched off, the data being
processed may be erased.
- While data is being received
- While a job is being printed
- While a job is being copied
- While a job is being scanned
• When switching the power off, wait 5 seconds after outputs have been delivered.
2
Press the power switch to the [
Note
] position.
• Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power is switched
off. Therefore, do not switch the main power off immediately after switching the power off.
• When powering the machine on after it has been switched off, wait 10 seconds after the touch screen
has gone dark.
35
2 Product Overview
Switching the Main Power Off
The following describes how to switch the main power off.
Note
• Do not switch the main power off when a screen is displayed on the touch screen or while the
<Power Saver> button is blinking. Switching off the main power under such circumstances may
damage the hard disk and the memory or cause a machine malfunction.
• Switch the main power off first when unplugging the power cord. Unplugging the power cord with the
main power on may damage the hard disk and the memory or cause a machine malfunction.
1
2
Make sure that the power is switched off.
3
Press the main power switch to the [ ]
position to switch the main power off.
Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Power Saver> button is not lit.
The <Main Power> indicator goes out on the
control panel.
36
Ground Fault Interrupter
Ground Fault Interrupter
The machine is provided with a ground fault interrupter.
In the event of a current leakage, the ground fault interrupter will automatically cut off the
power circuit to prevent fire from occurring.
Check that the ground fault interrupter works properly at least once a month.
Be sure to establish a ground for the machine. Without a proper ground, the ground fault
interrupter may be disabled, causing a risk of electric shock.
If you have any problems with the ground fault interrupter, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
The following describes how to check the ground fault interrupter.
1
Press the power switch to the [
switch the power off.
2
Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Power Saver> button does not light up.
3
Press the main power switch to the [ ]
position to switch the main power off.
4
Press the <RESET> button. The button will
be depressed even after the pushing force is
released.
5
] position to
Reset Button
Test Button
Press the <TEST> button lightly with a sharp
edge such as a pen tip. The depressed
<RESET> button will stick out again. This is
the end of the check procedure.
Ground Fault Interrupter
6
Press the <RESET> button back to the depressed position.
37
2 Product Overview
Power Saver Mode
The machine is installed with the Power Saver feature that will automatically reduce power
consumption of the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.
The Power Saver feature has two modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode.
The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is
left unused for a fixed period of time.
The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.
To enter the Power Saver mode, press the <Power Saver> button on the control panel.
Low Power Mode
In this mode, the power to the control panel and fusing unit is lowered to save power.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights up.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out
to indicate that the Low Power mode is exited.
Sleep Mode
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights up.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out
to indicate that the Sleep mode is exited.
Entering the Power Saver Mode
The following describes how to enter the Power Saver mode.
Note
1
• To enter the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver> button, specify a longer time period in
[From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] than in [From Last Operation to Low Power Mode] under [Power
Saver Timers]. For information on [Power Saver Timers], refer to de"Power Saver Timers" (P.297).
Press the <Power Saver> button.
Note
• The machine will not enter the Power Saver
mode while a job is being processed. Press
the <Power Saver> button after the job is
completed.
<Power Saver> button
38
Power Saver Mode
Exiting the Power Saver Mode
The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.
The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:
• Pressing the <Power Saver> button
• Receiving a job
• Selecting [Apply] in Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
• Setting a document in the document feeder
• Opening the document cover
When the following device is connected to the machine and a user performs the following
operation, the Low Power mode can be deactivated without pressing the <Power Saver>
button.
• Placing a smart card on the smart card reader
Note
1
• If the machine is in the Sleep mode, however, the Sleep mode will not be deactivated by the operation
above. To take full advantage of the feature that deactivate the Low Power mode without pressing the
<Power Saver> button, it is recommended to set the time to elapse until the machine enters the Sleep
mode long enough.
Press the <Power Saver> button.
<Power Saver> button
39
2 Product Overview
Control Panel
The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
21
No.
201918
Component
17 16 1514 13 12 11
Function
1
<Home> button
Press this button to display the [Home] screen.
2
Touch screen
Displays messages required for operation, and buttons for various features.
You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set
features.
3
<Log In/Out> button
Lights up when a user is authenticated in the System Administration mode,
the Authentication mode, or the Accounting mode. Displays the User ID
entry screen for entering the System Administration mode, the
Authentication mode, or the Accounting mode. Press this button to exit
these modes.
4
<Job Status> button
Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print stored
jobs, or to check completed jobs.
5
<Machine Status> button
Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status
of consumables, and to print reports.
6
<Power Saver> button
When the machine is not used for a while, it enters the Power Saver mode to
reduce power consumption. When the Power Saver mode is active, the
<Power Saver> button lights up.
Press this button to enter or exit the Power Saver mode.
7
<Interrupt> button
Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the
machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt>
button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt
mode and resumes the suspended job.
8
<Clear All> button
Returns the settings you made to the default values. The machine returns to
the same state as when it is powered on.
9
<Stop> button
Press this button to pause the current job or communications.
10
<Start> button
Press this button to start scanning a document.
11
<Main Power> indicator
Lights up when the main power is switched on.
Note
12
<Error> indicator
• If the main power is not switched on, the machine will not be powered on
even when the power is switched on.
Blinks if a system error occurs.
This indicator lights up when a problem other than a system error occurs
with the machine, including paper jams and running out of paper or toner.
If the <Error> indicator blinks, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
If the <Error> indicator lights up, refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.511).
40
Control Panel
No.
13
Component
<Data> indicator
Function
Blinks when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.
This indicator lights up when data is stored in the machine's memory, when
received faxes are waiting to be printed, or when faxes are stored in a folder.
You can check stored scan files in a Folder List. For information on the
Folder List, refer to "Folder List" (P.266).
You can check stored fax files in a Stored File List. For information on the
Stored File List, refer to "Stored File List" (P.261).
You can change the lighting pattern of the <Data> indicator. For more
information, refer to "Data Indicator" (P.314).
14
<Speed Dial> button
Press this button to specify a recipient with an address number when sending
a fax or e-mail.
15
<C (Clear)> button
Press this button to cancel a numerical value you have entered with the
numeric keypad.
16
<Dial Pause> button
Press this button to insert a pause into a destination number.
17
Numeric keypad
Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies,
passcodes, and other numerical values.
18
Custom Button 1 (Copy)
"Copy" is assigned to this button by default.
Press this button to display the [Copy] screen.
19
Custom Button 2 (Shortcut
1)
Press this button to call its associated service.
To the button, you can assign [Language] or any service displayed on the
[Home] screen.
20
Custom Button 3 (Shortcut
2)
"Review" is assigned to this button by default.
On the [Review] screen, you can check a list of the status of Copy, Fax, and
Scan services whose settings have been changed from the defaults. You can
also check the details of fax and e-mail recipients.
21
USB memory slot
Insert a USB 2.0 memory device here.
41
2 Product Overview
Screens and Buttons Displayed
You can register or change the services and buttons displayed on the touch screen. You can
customize the following screens:
Note
• The following screens and buttons may have been changed by the system administrator. Use the
machine according to the changes that have been made.
Setting the Initial Screen
You can set the screen displayed after switching the power on or exiting the Power Saver
mode.
Setting the Screen Displayed after Auto Clear
You can select [Last Selection Screen] or [Home] for the screen to be displayed after Auto
Clear.
Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons
You can assign services to the Custom buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.
By assigning frequently-used services to the Custom buttons, you can switch to the services
without returning to the [Home] screen.
Note
• By default, "Copy" is assigned to <Copy>, and "Review" is assigned to <Shortcut 2>. No service is
assigned to <Shortcut 1>.
Customizing the [Home] Screen
You can customize the layout of services and buttons on the [Home] screen that is displayed
when you press the <Home> button on the control panel.
42
About the [Home] Screen
About the [Home] Screen
This section describes the [Home] screen, which can be displayed by pressing the <Home>
button.
Login information field
Message field
Additional feature buttons
Service buttons
Next page
Message Field
Displays a message.
Login Information Field
Select this field in the upper right corner of the touch screen to display the User ID entry
screen for entering the System Administration mode, the Authentication mode, or the
Accounting mode.
When a user is authenticated, the login information is displayed in this field.
Note
• You can also press the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel to enter the Authentication mode.
• To exit the Authentication mode, press the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel. You can also
select the login information field in the upper right corner of the touch screen.
For information on the Authentication or Accounting mode, refer to "Authentication and Accounting
Features" (P.477).
Service Buttons
Allows you to set the features for each service.
Copy
You can set the features for the Copy service.
For more information, refer to "Copy" (P.49).
Fax
You can set the features for the Fax service.
For more information, refer to "Fax" (P.123).
E-mail
You can scan documents and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
43
2 Product Overview
Simple Copy
You can set the features for the Copy service. Selecting [Simple Copy] allows you to simply
specify the basic copy features on a single screen.
For more information, refer to "Simple Copy" (P.59).
Simple Fax
You can set the features for the Fax service. Selecting [Simple Fax] allows you to easily
specify the basic fax features on a single screen.
Scan to PC
You can scan documents and send the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or
SMB protocol.
Store to Folder
You can scan documents and save the scanned data in a folder of the machine.
Send from Folder
You can operate files stored in a folder of the machine.
Stored Programming
You can operate stored programs.
Stored Programming is a service that allows you to store settings that you expect to use
frequently and call them with a single button operation.
For more information, refer to "Stored Programming" (P.151).
Store & Send Link
After you scan documents, the machine temporarily saves the scanned data and sends you e­
mail attached with two URLs: one is for the location to retrieve the scanned data, and the
other is for the location to delete the data.
Note
• This service appears when using the Authentication feature.
Store to USB
You can scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB memory device.
Media Print - Text
You can print document files (PDF, TIFF, XML Paper Specification (XPS), and JPG (JFIF))
after retrieving the files from a CompactFlash card or a USB memory device. You can also
print the scan data stored with the Store to USB service.
For more information, refer to "Media Print - Text" (P.174).
Media Print - Photos
You can print image data (DCF1.0) taken with a digital camera. You can retrieve the data
only from a CompactFlash card.
For more information, refer to "Media Print - Photos" (P.173).
Job Flow Sheets
You can scan documents using a job flow sheet.
Job Flow Sheets is a service that allows you to set a flow of transfer settings of scan data for
the efficient routine transfer.
For more information, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.145).
44
About the [Home] Screen
Web Applications
You can access web applications via a network using the browser on the machine in order to
display and store data.
For more information, refer to "Web Applications" (P.161).
Additional Feature Buttons
Allows you to set the additional features that are not related to jobs.
Language
You can select the language to be displayed on the touch screen.
The setting here will be reset when the power is switched off and on.
Note
• When you select [English], only ASCII characters can be used.
• When you set [Language] to [English] on the [Home] screen and an address book entry or contents of
[Details] of Job Flow Sheets is entered in other than ASCII characters, the characters may not be
displayed properly. When you use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to import a CSV file* that
includes the characters other than those used for the language selected in [Language], the characters
in the file may be garbled or the import may fail.
* : CSV (Comma Separated Values) is a file format that is often used for saving data by spreadsheets and
database programs.
• Under [Default Language] in the System Administration mode, you can select the standard language
displayed on the touch screen when the power is switched on. For more information on how to set
[Default Language], refer to "Default Language" (P.300).
Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the touch screen.
Lock Out Printer/Release Printer
You can set the machine to temporarily enable printing during the printer lockout period or
to temporarily disable printing while [Release Printer] is displayed.
Note
• You can assign this button when [Printer Lockout] is set to [On] under [Tools] > [Common Service
Settings] > [Machine Clock / Timers] and the [Allow User to Lock Out] check box is selected. For
information on how to assign the feature to the button, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.299).
Setup
You can create or update folders, job flows, and the Address Book.
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.381).
Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors when the reproducibility of density or color
in copies and prints deteriorates.
For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
Activity Report
You can print an Activity Report to check if a transmission is successfully completed.
Fax Receiving Mode
You can specify a mode for receiving faxes.
For more information, refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.272).
Print Mode
You can register a print mode and change its settings.
For more information, refer to "Print Mode" (P.269).
45
2 Product Overview
Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes
how to enter text.
You can enter the following characters: numerals, alphabets, and symbols.
Item
Description
Entering alphabets and numerals
To enter uppercase letters, select [Shift]. To return to the
lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols
Select [More Characters].
Note
46
• Depending on the keyboard, you can select a symbol
from the pull-up options displayed on the bottom left of
the screen.
Entering a space
Select [Space].
Deleting characters
Select [Backspace] to delete one character at a time.
Select [Delete Text] to delete all characters.
Paper Output
Paper Output
When the number of output paper exceeds the output tray capacity, to prevent paper jams,
the following error message is displayed, and the machine stops outputting paper.
Removing the output paper clears the error message, and the machine resumes outputting
paper automatically.
Note
• The output tray capacity is 500 sheets when 80 gsm paper is used.
47
2 Product Overview
48
3 Copy
This chapter describes the basic operation and features for the Copy service.
• Copying Procedure................................................................................................................50
• Operations during Copying ..................................................................................................56
• Simple Copy............................................................................................................................59
• Copy..........................................................................................................................................64
• Image Quality .........................................................................................................................76
• Layout Adjustment.................................................................................................................83
• Output Format .........................................................................................................................99
• Job Assembly .......................................................................................................................113
3 Copy
Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section
for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................50
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................52
Step 3 Entering a Quantity........................................................................................................53
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.....................................................................................................54
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ........................................................................55
Step 1 Loading Documents
The following two methods are available to load documents:
Document Feeder
• Single sheet
• Multiple sheets
Document Glass
• Single sheet
• Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 125 x
85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 356 mm (Standard size: A4, 8.5 x 11").
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size
documents, enter the size on the [Original Size] screen.
Note
• The minimum supported paper size for 2-sided copying: 125 x 110mm (Standard size: A5, A5
).
For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically and how to enter a non­
standard document size, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.88).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on [Paper Size Settings], refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309).
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Number of Sheets
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 gsm)
110 sheets
Plain paper (50 - 80 gsm)
110 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 gsm)
75 sheets
Note
• To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or wrinkled documents, cut-and-pasted
documents, curled paper, or back carbon paper.
• The lightweight paper of 38 - 49 gsm cannot be scanned 2 sided.
For information on how to copy mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.89).
1
50
Remove any paper clips and staples before loading a document.
Copying Procedure
2
Load the document face up (when the
document is 2-sided, load the front side up) in
the center of the document feeder.
Note
Confirmation indicator
• The confirmation indicator lights up when the
document is loaded correctly. If the indicator
does not light, load the document again.
3
Adjust the document guides to match the size
of the document loaded.
4
Pull out the document stopper.
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents with a size
from 15 x 15 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 356 mm (Standard size: A4).
Note
• Always close the document cover after using the document glass.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size
documents, enter the size on the [Original Size] screen.
For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically and how to enter a non­
standard document size, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.88).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309).
1
Open the document cover.
Note
• Ensure that the touch screen is active, and
then load a document. Otherwise, the machine
may not properly detect the document size.
51
3 Copy
2
Load the document face down, and align it
against the top left corner of the document
glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size document is loaded on the document glass, the size of the document is
displayed in the message field.
Step 2 Selecting Features
The following two services are available to copy documents.
Simple Copy
Allows you to only select basic features to copy documents.
Copy
Allows you to make detailed settings to copy documents.
The following describes how to select features on the [Copy] screen.
For information on Simple Copy, refer to "Simple Copy" (P.59).
Note
• The features displayed on the screen depend on the configuration of your machine.
• When the Authentication or Accounting feature is enabled, a user ID and passcode may be required.
Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
52
Select [Copy].
Copying Procedure
3
If the previous settings still remain, press the
<Clear All> button.
<Clear All> button
4
Select each tab, and configure features as
necessary.
The following shows the reference section for each tab.
"Copy" (P.64)
"Image Quality" (P.76)
"Layout Adjustment" (P.83)
"Output Format" (P.99)
"Job Assembly" (P.113)
Step 3 Entering a Quantity
The following describes how to enter the number of copy sets. You can enter up to 999 sets.
1
Enter the number of copies using the numeric
keypad.
The number of copies entered appears on the
upper right of the touch screen.
Numeric keypad
2
If you have entered an incorrect value, press the
<C (Clear)> button and then enter the correct
value.
<C (Clear)> button
53
3 Copy
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job
The following describes how to start a copy job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• If the document has been loaded in the
document feeder, do not hold down the
document while it is being conveyed.
• Move the lever of the fusing unit down to set
to the Envelope mode before copying on an
envelope. Return the lever to its original
position before copying on other types of
papers. Any type of paper other than envelope
cannot be copied while the lever is set to the
<Start> button
Envelope mode position. For information on
how to switch the lever of the fusing unit, refer
to "Loading an Envelope in Trays 1 to 4" (P.209) or "Loading an Envelope in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.212).
• If a problem occurs, an error message appears on the touch screen. Solve the problem according to
the message.
• You can set the next job during copying.
If you have more documents
If you have more documents to copy, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of
data.
2
Select [Next Original] while scanning is in
progress.
Note
• When using the document feeder, load the
next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When [Next Original] is displayed on the
screen shown on the right and no operation is
performed for a certain period of time, the
machine automatically assumes that there are
no more documents.
• You can change the number of copies by
selecting [Change Quantity] that is displayed
after selecting [Delete].
54
3
Load the next document.
4
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Copying Procedure
5
When all documents have been scanned, select
[Last Original].
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status
If copies are not output after you start the copy job, the job may be in pending status. Use
the following procedure to confirm the job status.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Confirm the job status.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
55
3 Copy
Operations during Copying
This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the
reference section for each operation.
Stopping the Copy Job...............................................................................................................56
Changing the Number of Copies ..............................................................................................57
Interrupting the Copy Job .........................................................................................................58
Stopping the Copy Job
To cancel a copy job in progress, use the following procedure.
1
Press either the <Stop> button on the control
panel or [Delete] on the touch screen.
<Stop> button
2
Select [Delete].
If [Delete] does not appear on the screen:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
56
Operations during Copying
2
Select the job to cancel.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
3
Select [Delete].
4
Select [Delete].
Changing the Number of Copies
To change the number of copy sets during scanning or copying, use the following procedure.
1
Press either the <Stop> button on the control
panel or [Delete] on the touch screen.
<Stop> button
57
3 Copy
2
Select [Change Quantity].
3
Specify the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad.
The new quantity must include the number of copies that have already been printed. You
cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.
4
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• If you enter the same value as the number of copies that have already been printed, the machine will
not execute a copy job even when you press the <Start> button.
Interrupting the Copy Job
You can temporarily stop the copy job to have the machine process another job.
Note
1
• Press the <Interrupt> button only after all the documents have been scanned. The machine does not
accept another job while it is scanning the documents, or when [Next Original] has been selected.
Press the <Interrupt> button.
The <Interrupt> button lights up to indicate
that the machine is in the Interrupt mode.
<Interrupt> button
2
3
4
5
Load a document and set features if necessary.
Specify the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad.
Press the <Start> button.
After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.
The <Interrupt> button goes out to indicate that the Interrupt mode is exited.
Note
6
• If you used the document glass to copy the document, remove the document from the document glass.
Press the <Start> button.
The suspended copy job is resumed.
58
Simple Copy
Simple Copy
You can select [Copy] or [Simple Copy] on the [Home] screen to set the features for the
Copy service.
This section describes the features you can select on the [Simple Copy] screen. [Simple
Copy] allows you to use only basic features to easily copy documents. The following shows
the reference section for each feature.
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ..................................................................... 59
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ........................................................... 60
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies).............................................................................. 61
Black & White / Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)...................................................... 62
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) ....................................................................... 62
2 Pages per Side (Copying Two Pages onto One Sheet)......................................................... 62
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ........................... 63
1
Select [Simple Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Simple Copy] screen.
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)
This feature allows you to select the paper tray for copying.
1
Select [Paper Supply].
59
3 Copy
2
Select a paper tray to be used.
Auto Select
Automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the document
size and the specified copy ratio.
Note
• This cannot be selected together with [Auto %] under [Reduce / Enlarge].
Tray 1, and Trays 2 to 4 (optional)
Allows you to directly select the desired tray.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper in the Paper Tray
The icon displayed beside the tray number indicates the amount of paper remaining in the
paper tray.
You can view the icons to check the
remaining amount of paper in a tray.
: Indicates that the remaining amount of paper is 25 to 100%.
: Indicates that the remaining amount of paper is 25% or less.
: Indicates that no paper is remaining in the paper tray.
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)
This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to enlarge or reduce the size of copies.
1
60
Select [Reduce / Enlarge].
Simple Copy
2
Select a copy ratio.
100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
Auto %
Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size
specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note
• This cannot be selected together with [Auto Select] under [Paper Supply].
Ratios
Allows you to select from preset copy ratios.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
This feature allows you to copy 1-sided and 2-sided documents on one side or both sides of
paper.
1
Select any option.
1j1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of the paper.
1j2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of the paper.
2j2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of the paper.
61
3 Copy
Black & White / Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)
This feature allows you to select a color mode.
1
Select [Black & White] or [Color].
Black & White
Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.
Color
Copies in full color.
Note
• Some colors may be restricted and may not be used for printing the copy. For more information, refer
to "Account Limit" (P.399).
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)
This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels.
1
Use [
] and [
] to select a density level.
2 Pages per Side (Copying Two Pages onto One Sheet)
This feature allows you to copy two pages of a document on one side of a single sheet of
paper.
When you select [2 Pages per Side], [Auto %] is automatically selected in [Reduce /
Enlarge]. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so
that they fit on the selected paper.
Note
• When you deselect [Auto %] in [Reduce / Enlarge] (when you select another copy ratio), image loss
may occur depending on the image size of the document.
• Select a tray other than [Auto Select] in [Paper Supply]. When you select [Auto Select], the tray
containing A4 paper is selected. If no tray contains A4 paper, the machine select a tray based on the
[Auto Paper Off] setting. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "Auto Paper Off" (P.321).
For information on how to copy four or eight pages of a document together onto a single sheet of
paper, refer to "Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)" (P.103).
62
Simple Copy
1
Select [2 Pages per Side].
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)
This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document so that the machine can
identify the top of the document.
Note
1
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
Select [Original Orientation].
Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
63
3 Copy
Copy
You can select [Copy] or [Simple Copy] on the [Home] screen to set the features for the
Copy service.
This section describes the features you can select on the [Copy] screen. The following shows
the reference section for each feature.
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)............................................................64
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)......................................................................67
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying).....................................................................70
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ..............................................................................74
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)..........................................................................74
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) .....................................................74
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................................75
You can customize the layout of the features displayed on the [Copy] screen. For more information,
refer to "Copy Tab - Features Allocation" (P.316).
1
Select [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Copy] screen.
Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)
This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to enlarge or reduce the size of copies.
1
Specify a copy ratio. You can use the numeric
keypad to specify a value, or [+] and [-] to
specify reduction/enlargement ratios directly.
100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
Auto %
Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size
specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
64
Copy
• This cannot be selected together with [Auto Select] under [Paper Supply].
Note
Ratios (3rd to 4th buttons on the screen)
Displays preset copy ratios.
You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to
"Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4" (P.317).
More
Displays the [Reduce / Enlarge] screen on which you can set [Proportional %] and
[Independent X - Y%].
For information on the settings on the [Reduce / Enlarge] screen, refer to "When [Proportional %] is
Selected" (P.65) or "When [Independent X - Y%] is Selected" (P.66).
When [Proportional %] is Selected
You can select a ratio from the standard copy ratios, or can enter a ratio directly.
1
Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.
Variable %
Specify a ratio in the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments. To specify a value, use the
numeric keypad or [+] and [-]. Specifying "100%" allows you to make copies at the same
image size as the original document.
When you make enlarged/reduced copies from standard sized documents on standard sized
paper, the following copy ratios will be applied.
Copy
/
Original
A5
B5
A4
A5
100%
122%
141%
B5
81%
100%
115%
A4
70%
86%
100%
How to load a document depends on the size and orientation of a document. For more information,
refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.50).
For information on paper that can be loaded, refer to "Print Media Guidelines" (P.200).
65
3 Copy
Preset %
Select a copy ratio from the following options.
• 100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
• Auto %
Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size
specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note
• This cannot be selected together with [Auto Select] under [Paper Supply].
• Preset ratios
Select from the preset ratios.
You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.323).
SlightReduction (Improves Fit)
Select this check box to slightly reduce the specified copy ratio to copy the complete image
onto the paper.
Note
• If you select [SlightReduction (Improves Fit)] and you do not want to erase the edges of the document,
set the amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the copied
document may get dirty. You can set [Edge Erase] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. For more
information, refer to "Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)" (P.90).
When [Independent X - Y%] is Selected
You can specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length individually.
1
Select any option.
Variable %
• Width - X%, Length - Y%
Allows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length in the range
from 25 to 400% in 1% increments. Use [+] and [-] or the numeric keypad to specify a
ratio.
Lock X - Y%
Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same time.
Preset %
• Width: 100% Length: 100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
• Auto X - Y%
Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so
that the document image fits in the paper.
66
Copy
• Fit Image to Paper Size X-Y%
Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so
that the document image fits in the paper, and then slightly reduces the ratios so that the
complete image is copied onto the paper.
• Width: XX% Length: XX%
Allows you to specify the preset reduction/enlargement ratios.
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)
This feature allows you to select the tray that holds the paper you want to use.
1
Select a paper tray.
Auto Select
Automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the document
size and the specified copy ratio.
Note
• This cannot be selected together with [Auto %] under [Reduce / Enlarge].
Trays (2nd to 5th buttons on the screen)
Allows you to directly select the desired tray.
You can change the paper tray associated with each button on the [Copy] screen. For information on
the settings, refer to "Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5" (P.317).
More
Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.
Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.68).
67
3 Copy
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper in the Paper Tray
The icon displayed beside the tray number indicates the amount of paper remaining in the
paper tray.
You can view the icons to check the remaining
amount of paper in a tray.
: Indicates that the remaining amount of paper is 25 to 100%.
: Indicates that the remaining amount of paper is 25% or less.
: Indicates that no paper is in the paper tray.
[Paper Supply] Screen
This screen allows you to select a paper tray from all trays available on the machine.
1
Select a paper tray.
Tray
Allows you to select a paper tray. When [Tray 5] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed
where you can specify a paper type other than plain paper, and non-standard size paper.
For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.69).
Note
• Trays 2, 3, and 4 are optional.
% Full
Displays the remaining amounts of paper loaded in trays.
Size
Displays paper sizes.
Type
Displays paper types.
Color
Displays paper colors.
For information on how to set [Paper Color], refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.301).
68
Copy
Size Detection
Displays how the machine detects a paper size.
For information on how to set [Size Detection], refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.309).
[Tray 5] Screen
Set the paper loaded in Tray 5.
For information on paper that can be loaded in Tray 5, refer to "Print Media Guidelines" (P.200).
1
Select a paper size and a paper type.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
Paper Size
Select [Standard Size], or [Custom Size].
When you select [Standard Size] or [Custom Size], refer to "When [Standard Size] is Selected"
(P.69) or "When [Custom Size] is Selected" (P.69), respectively.
Paper Type
Select a paper type.
When [Standard Size] is Selected
Select [Standard Size], and from the lists displayed, select a paper size and then a paper type.
1
Select a paper size and a paper type.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
When [Custom Size] is Selected
Enter the width and length of the original document on the fields displayed after selecting
[Custom Size].
Specify the X (width) in the range from 127 to 356 mm, and the Y (length) in the range from
76 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments.
1
Enter a paper size using [+] and [-] or the
numeric keypad.
2
Select a paper type.
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
69
3 Copy
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)
This feature allows you to select copy colors.
Note
1
• If the use of certain colors is not allowed, the available colors will be restricted. For more information,
refer to "Account Limit" (P.399).
Select a color mode.
Auto Detect
The machine automatically determines the colors of the original document and makes
copies in full color if the original document is colored, and in single color (black) if the
document is black-and-white.
Note
• If a color document is in one of the following conditions, the machine may copy the document in black
and white.
- The colored area is too small.
- The colors are too light.
In that case, change a level from the five levels which is used for the machine to recognize color. For
more information, refer to "Output Color Recognition" (P.304).
Color
Copies in full color.
Black & White
Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.
Dual Color
Copies color documents using two colors.
You can change the two colors. For more information, refer to "Dual Color - Target Area Color"
(P.318) and "Dual Color - Non-target Area Color" (P.318).
Single Color
Copies color documents using one color.
You can change the red color to another one on the screen displayed after selecting [More] > [Single
Color] > [Color]. For more information, refer to "Single Color" (P.318).
More
Displays the [Output Color] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Output Color] Screen" (P.71).
70
Copy
[Output Color] Screen
This screen allows you to make settings for full color, dual color, and single color.
1
Select [More].
2
Select the desired output color mode.
Auto Detect
Automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color
if the original document is colored, or in single color (black) if the document is black-and­
white.
Color
Copies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
Black & White
Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.
Dual Color
Separates the colors of your document into the source colors and the other colors, and then
copies the document using two colors. Selecting [Dual Color] allows you to set the following:
• Source Color
Displays the [Source Color] screen on which you can select one or more colors from your
document to define them as source colors.
Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.72).
• Target Area Color
Displays the [Target Area Color] screen on which you can select the target color to be used
in place of the selected source colors.
Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.72).
• Non-target Area Color
Displays the [Non-target Area Color] screen on which you can select the color to be used
in place of the colors other than the selected source colors.
Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.73).
71
3 Copy
Single Color
Copies in one specified color regardless of the color of the document.
Selecting this option displays [Color] on the screen. Select a color on the [Output Color Color] screen which is displayed after selecting [Color].
Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.74).
[Source Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select one or more colors from your document to define them as
source colors.
1
Select [Dual Color].
2
Select [Source Color].
3
Select [Other than Black] or [Color].
Other than Black
The colors other than black will be the source colors.
Color
Allows you to select one or more source colors from six preset options.
[Target Area Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select the target color to be used in place of the source colors
specified in [Source Color]. You can select one color from seven preset and six custom
options.
For information on how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
1
72
Select [Dual Color].
Copy
2
Select [Target Area Color].
3
Select any color.
[Non-target Area Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select the color to be used in place of the colors other than the
selected source colors. You can select one color from seven preset and six custom options.
For information on how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
1
Select [Dual Color].
2
Select [Non-target Area Color].
3
Select any color.
73
3 Copy
[Output Color - Color] Screen
This screen allows you to specify the color to be used for single-color copying regardless of
the colors in the original document.
You can select one color from six preset and six custom options for [Single Color].
For information on how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
1
Select [Single Color].
2
Select [Color].
3
Select any color.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. For more
information, refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)" (P.84).
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)
This feature is the same as [Copy Output] on the [Output Format] screen. For more information,
refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.109).
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)
This feature is the same as [Pages per Side] on the [Output Format] screen. For more information,
refer to "Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)" (P.103).
74
Copy
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)
This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels.
Note
1
• [Lighten / Darken] on the [Copy], [Image Quality] and [Simple Copy] screens is the same.
Use [ ] and [
levels.
] to select from seven density
75
3 Copy
Image Quality
The section describes the features you can select on the [Image Quality] screen. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................76
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density/Sharpness/Saturation of Images) ..........................78
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast) ..78
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality) .............................................................................79
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance).................................................................................80
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ...................................................................................82
1
Select [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen.
Note
• If the color reproduction is unsatisfactory, perform calibration. For information on the calibration, refer
to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)
This feature allows you to select the type of documents, such as text and photos. By selecting
a document type, you can make copies at optimum image quality.
76
1
Select [Original Type].
2
Select any option.
Image Quality
Auto
Automatically sets the document type based on the setting made in the System
Administration mode and the setting made in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.
Photo & Text
Select this option when the document contains both text and photos. The machine
automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas of the document and sets the
appropriate image quality for each area. To process photo areas, select the photo type from
[Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopied Original].
• Printed Original
Select this option when the document contains printed photos, such as a brochure.
• Photograph
Select this option when the document contains pasted photos. This option prevents the
copy from being reproduced bluish.
• Photocopied Original
Select this option when the document is a copy or print made with a color copying
machine such as this machine. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced
faintly.
Text
Select this option to copy text areas of the document sharply. This option is suitable for
graphs and illustrations.
• Normal Text
Select this option for printed documents, or for documents written with ink.
• Light Text
Select this option for text that requires enhancement, such as handwritten pencil text.
• Text on See- Through Paper
Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing-paper documents or to suppress background
shadows of lightweight documents.
[Text on See- Through Paper] may not be displayed depending on the setting in the System
Administration mode. For information on how to display [Text on See- Through Paper], refer to "
"Original Type - See-Through Paper" (P.322).
Photo
Select this option to make copies of photos. Select the photo type from the same options as
[Photo & Text]: [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopied Original].
Map
Select this option to make copies of documents that have text placed on color backgrounds,
such as maps.
77
3 Copy
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density/Sharpness/Saturation of Images)
This feature allows you to adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation levels.
Note
• [Lighten / Darken] under [Image Options] is the same as [Lighten / Darken] on the [Copy] screen.
• If [Lighten / Darken], [Sharpness], or [Saturation] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting
made in [Color Effects] will be cleared.
1
Select [Image Options].
2
Adjust any option.
Lighten / Darken
Allows you to select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the copy density lighter and selecting a lower cell
makes darker.
Sharpness
Allows you to select from five sharpness levels between [Sharpen] and [Soften].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a
lower cell makes softer.
Saturation
Allows you to select from five saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes colors brighter, and selecting a lower cell makes less
bright.
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents, such as newspaper
and colored paper. You can also adjust the contrast.
Note
• [Image Enhancement] is not available when [Original Type] is set to [Photo].
• If [Suppress Background] or [Contrast] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting made in
[Color Effects] will be cleared.
78
Image Quality
1
Select [Image Enhancement].
2
Set [Suppress Background] and [Contrast].
Suppress Background
• Off
Scans document backgrounds with no filtering.
• Auto Suppression
When [Output Color] is set to [Black & White], the background of a document printed
on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.
When [Output Color] is set to [Color], [Dual Color], or [Single Color], the color element
on white-color paper such as the blot, the print on the other side which is seen through
and so on will be suppressed.
Note
• When [Output Color] is set to [Color], you can change the level of background suppression. For more
information, refer to"Background Suppression (Photo & Text)" (P.322) and "Background Suppression
Level (Text)" (P.322).
Contrast
• Auto Contrast
Automatically adjusts the brightness and hue of the original document to sharpen the
image.
Note
• [Auto Contrast] is not available when you use the document feeder.
• Manual Contrast
Allows you to select from the five levels between [More] and [Less].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas
greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower cell
on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)
If you set this feature, the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and
[Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at the specified
quality.
Note
• When the Color Effects feature is used, [Auto Contrast] is not available.
• If other image-quality settings are made after you set [Color Effects], the setting made in [Color
Effects] will be cleared.
79
3 Copy
1
Select [Color Effects].
2
Select any option.
Off
Copies with the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color
Balance] settings at their defaults.
Lively
Reproduces fresher, livelier images with increased color saturation.
Bright
Reproduces brighter images with enhanced contrast. This option is suitable for documents
that are intended to attract people's attention, such as posters.
Warm
Reproduces brighter, warmer, more reddish images. This option is suitable when skin tones
are to be reproduced more pinkish or when subdued images are to be reproduced more
warmly.
Cool
Reproduces clearer blue colors. This option is suitable for water and sky images, and is also
suitable when smoky blue colors are to be reproduced more clearly.
Shadow Suppression
Suppresses the colors on the reverse side of the original document from being reproduced in
the copy.
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)
This feature allows you to adjust the color balance of the four CMYK toner colors (cyan,
magenta, yellow and black). You can select from seven levels for each density level:
Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows.
The Color Balance feature finely adjusts the density level for each toner color to fine-tune
the color balance, such as a reddish or bluish tint, while the Lighten/Darken feature adjusts
the overall density level of four colors.
Note
80
• If [Color Balance] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting made in [Color Effects] will be
cleared.
Image Quality
1
Select [Color Balance].
2
Select any option.
Normal
Always copies a document with the density balance set to "0" for the four toner colors: yellow,
magenta, cyan, and black.
Basic Color
Allows you to adjust the density level for each
toner color: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
Advanced Color
Allows you to adjust the density level for each
toner color (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) which
is divided to [Highlights], [Midtones], and
[Shadows].
Highlights
Allows you to adjust the color strength of low-density areas.
Example:
If low-density yellow is printed darker, adjust the color strength in the minus (-) direction
under [Yellow Balance] > [Highlights].
Midtones
Allows you to adjust the color strength of medium-density areas.
Example:
If medium-density yellow is printed lighter, adjust the color strength in the plus (+)
direction under [Yellow Balance] > [Midtones].
Shadows
Allows you to adjust the color strength of high-density areas.
Example:
If high-density yellow is printed lighter, adjust the color strength in the plus (+) direction
under [Yellow Balance] > [Shadows].
81
3 Copy
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone)
This feature allows you to adjust the tone of the colors to be reproduced in copies, by a
maximum of two levels in two directions.
On the screen, the [Original Color] slider represents the color tone of the original document,
and the [Copy Color] slider represents the color tone of output copies. Selecting a button on
the screen moves the [Original Color] slider to adjust the tone of the colors.
When the [Original Color] slider is moved to the left, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Original
Color] slider becomes closer to the R (red) cell on the [Copy Color] slider, and thus a yellow
fruit appears more reddish and riper-looking. At the same time, the tone of all the other
colors changes. The red color appears more magentish, and the green color appears more
yellowish.
Conversely, when the [Original Color] slider is moved to the right, the Y (yellow) cell on the
[Original Color] slider becomes closer to the G (green) cell on the [Copy Color] slider, and
thus a yellow fruit appears more greenish. At the same time, the tone of all the other colors
changes. The magenta color appears more reddish, and the red color appears more yellowish.
Note
• Ensure that [Output Color] is set to [Color] on the [Copy] screen. [Color Shift] is not available when
[Output Color] is set to [Black & White].
• If [Color Shift] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting made in [Color Effects] will be
cleared.
82
1
Select [Color Shift].
2
Select a button to adjust the color tone.
L ayout Adjustment
Layout Adjustment
This section describes the features you can select on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies).............................................................................. 84
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)................................................ 85
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).......................................... 86
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)................................................... 88
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...................... 89
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)..................................... 90
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................................ 92
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ................................................................ 95
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ........................... 96
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images).......................................................... 97
1
Select [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment]
screen.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
83
3 Copy
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
This feature allows you to make copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents on one side or both
sides of paper.
1
Select [2 Sided Copying].
2
Select any option.
1j1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of paper.
1j2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of paper.
Select this option when you copy 1-sided documents on both sides of paper.
2j2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of paper.
2j1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of paper.
Originals
This option is displayed when you select [2j2 Sided] or [2j1 Sided].
• Head to Head
Select this option when the front and back sides of the document are in the same
orientation.
• Head to Toe
Select this option when the front and back sides of the document are in opposite
orientations.
84
L ayout Adjustment
Copies
This option is displayed when you select [1j2 Sided] or [2j2 Sided].
• Head to Head
Select this option when you want the orientation of the front and back sides of the copy
to be the same as that of the document.
• Head to Toe
Select this option when you want the orientation of the front and back sides of the copy
to be the opposite of that of the document.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)
This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in
page order.
This is useful when you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document
such as a booklet.
Note
• You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• A non-standard size document or undetectable-size document may not be separated into two
accurately.
1
Select [Book Copying].
2
Select any option.
Off
Does not copy as a bound document.
85
3 Copy
Left Page then Right
Copies the left page and then the right page of
facing pages.
Right Page then Left
Copies the right page and then the left page of
facing pages.
Top Page then Bottom
Copies the top page and then the bottom page
of facing pages.
Both Pages
Copies both pages in page order.
Left Page Only
Copies the left page only. You can select this option when [Left Page then Right] or [Right
Page then Left] is selected.
Right Page Only
Copies the right page only. You can select this option when [Left Page then Right] or [Right
Page then Left] is selected.
Top Page Only
Copies the top page only. You can select this option when [Top Page then Bottom] is
selected.
Bottom Page Only
Copies the bottom page only. You can select this option when [Top Page then Bottom] is
selected.
Binding Edge Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase
width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)
This feature allows you to assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound
document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also
specify the starting and ending pages from the left and right of facing pages.
86
L ayout Adjustment
Note
• A non-standard size document or undetectable-size document will not be separated into two
accurately.
• Use the document glass to load a document.
1
Select [2 Sided Book Copying].
2
Select any option.
Off
Disables this feature.
Left Page then Right
Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
Right Page then Left
Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
Top Page then Bottom
Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
Starting & Ending Page
Displays the [Starting & Ending Page] screen.
Refer to "[Starting & Ending Page] Screen" (P.88).
Binding Edge Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase
width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
87
3 Copy
[Starting & Ending Page] Screen
This screen allows you to set the starting and ending pages to be copied.
1
Set [Starting Page] and [Ending Page].
Starting Page
• [Left Page] / [Right Page]
You can select these options when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
• [Top Page] / [Bottom Page]
You can select these options when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Ending Page
• [Left Page] / [Right Page]
You can select these options when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
• [Top Page] / [Bottom Page]
You can select these options when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)
This feature allows you to specify the scan size for a document.
Use this feature when a document is a non-standard size, or when you want to copy a
document at a size different from the original size. You can also add margins, or delete
unnecessary margins using this feature.
88
1
Select [Original Size].
2
Select the size of the document.
If you select a non-standard size, specify values
for the X and Y directions.
L ayout Adjustment
Auto Detect
Detects the document size automatically. The following table shows the document sizes that
can be detected automatically.
Document Feeder
Auto-detectable
Document Size
Note
B5, A5, A5 , A4, 8.5 x 11", 8.5
x 14"
Document Glass
B5, B6, B6 , A6, A5, A5 ,
A4, 16K
• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to enter the document size appears.
The document sizes that can be automatically detected depend on [Paper Size Settings] in the
System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.309).
Standard Size
Select a document size from preset options.
You can change the sizes displayed on the screen. For information on the settings, refer to "Original
Size Defaults" (P.355).
Variable Size
Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when making
copies at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range
from 15 to 356 mm for the width (X), and a value in the range from 15 to 216 mm for the
length (Y), in 1 mm increments. To help you specify values, use the scales attached on the
upper and left edges of the document glass.
Note
• When the document is loaded in the document feeder, the base point in the Y (length) direction is the
center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan length will be from 50 mm above to 50 mm below
the center of the document.
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)
You can scan documents of various sizes simultaneously and make copies on each size or a
single size of paper. To use this feature, load the documents in the document feeder.
Note
• When loading A5 documents together with A4 documents loaded in landscape orientation, load A5
documents in portrait orientation.
• If the top left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, the documents may not be scanned
correctly.
• The recommended document size combinations are A5 portrait and A4 landscape. If another
combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied
properly.
1
Select [Mixed Size Originals].
89
3 Copy
2
Select [On].
Off
Select this option when copying documents of the same size.
On
When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size
of each document.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• The [Original Orientation] setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document. Load the
second and subsequent pages of the document based on this setting.
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)
When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. The Edge Erase
feature allows you to erase such shadows.
Note
• For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.
• If you set [Reduce / Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the
ratio you specified.
• The binding shift specified in [Booklet Creation] will not affect the edge erase amounts.
• If the original document is placed on the document glass and [1j2 Sided] is selected when using 2
Sided Copying feature, symmetrical edge erase amounts on both sides are not applied to output even
if [Individual Edges] is specified and [Mirror Side 1] is selected as [2 Sided Original-Side 2] option. To
apply symmetrical edge erase amounts on both sides, select [2j2 Sided] for 2 Sided Copying
operation.
• Even when the edge erase amount is set to 0 mm, full page copying cannot be made.
90
L ayout Adjustment
1
Select [Edge Erase].
2
Select any option.
Normal
The edge width to erase is set to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges.
All Edges
Erases the shadows of the four edges of a document, as well as the shadow in the center of
the document if it is a bound document or a booklet. You can specify values for [All Edges]
and [Center] individually.
Individual Edges
Erases the shadows of the top, bottom, left, and right edges of a document, as well as the
shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document or a booklet. You can specify
values for [Top], [Bottom], [Left], [Right], and [Center] individually.
Parallel Edges
Erases the shadows of the top and bottom edges, and left and right edges of a document, as
well as the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document or a booklet. You
can specify values for [Top & Bottom], [Left & Right], and [Center] individually.
Erase Value
Allows you to specify values to erase the edges of a document.
• All Edges
Erases the shadows of the four edges of the document according to the orientation of the
loaded document. You can specify the edge width you want to erase in the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
• Top & Bottom (Top/Bottom)
Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document according to the orientation
of the loaded document. You can specify the edge width you want to erase in the range
from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
• Left & Right (Left/Right)
Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document according to the orientation
of the loaded document. You can specify the edge width you want to erase in the range
from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
• Center
Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document or a booklet. You
can set the binding erase width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
91
3 Copy
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
2 Sided Original-Side 2
You can select this option when [Individual Edges] is selected. Set whether the same value
is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.
• Same as Side 1
The same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.
• Mirror Side 1
The edge erase amounts of Side 1 and Side 2 are set symmetrically.
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)
This feature allows you to shift the position of document images so that the images are
placed on the left, right, top, bottom, or center of paper. You can also adjust the amounts of
the left, right, top, and bottom margins. If you make 2-sided copies, you can adjust the image
positions for Side 1 and Side 2 individually.
Note
• The image shift amount is set in accordance with the paper, and does not affect the setting made in
[Reduce / Enlarge].
1
Select [Image Shift].
2
Select any option.
Off
Does not shift the position of document images.
Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
92
L ayout Adjustment
Margin Shift
Allows you to specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
• Side 1
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.93).
• Side 2
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.95).
• Mirror Side 1
Select this check box when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of
Side 1.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen
This screen allows you to set the image shift for Side 1.
1
Select any option.
Off
Does not shift the position of document image.
Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
Specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
93
3 Copy
Corner Shift
Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select
from 8 shift directions.
Specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Margin Shift
Allows you to specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
94
L ayout Adjustment
[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen
This screen allows you to set the image shift for Side 2.
1
Select any option.
Off
Does not shift the position of document image.
Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
Specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Corner Shift
Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select
from 8 shift directions.
Specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Margin Shift
Allows you to specify the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins in the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)
This feature allows you to reverse the left and right sides of the document image or to create
a negative image of the document when making copies.
Note
• When [Output Color] is set to [Black & White] or [Single Color], the black color on the document is
inverted to white, and the white color to black.
• When [Output Color] is set to [Color], the colors are inverted to their complementary colors.
• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns to white.
1
Select [Invert Image].
95
3 Copy
2
Select any option.
Mirror Image
Reverses the left and right sides of the document image.
Negative Image
Creates a negative image of the document.
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)
This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document so that the machine can
identify the top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
1
Select [Original Orientation].
2
Select [Upright Images] or [Sideways Images]
according to the orientation of the document
loaded.
Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
96
L ayout Adjustment
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)
If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the document
loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image so that the orientation of the
image matches that of the paper. You can also select a reference position for image rotation
if documents are of mixed orientations.
This feature is available only when you make copies on A5 paper.
1
Select [Image Rotation].
2
Select any option.
Off
Copies documents as they are, even if the orientation of the images does not match that of
the paper.
Always On
Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that
of the paper.
On during Auto
Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that
of the paper only when [Auto %] is selected in [Reduce / Enlarge], or when [Auto Select] is
selected in [Paper Supply].
Rotation Direction
Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.
Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.97).
[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen
This screen allows you to set the reference position for rotation.
1
Select any option.
97
3 Copy
Staple Position
This option is displayed when the finisher is installed. If documents are of mixed
orientations, the images will be rotated to match the stapling edge specified in the settings
of the Staple feature.
Portrait Original - Left Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, the images will be rotated so that the top edge of
landscape documents is aligned with the left edge of portrait documents.
Portrait Original - Right Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, the images will be rotated so that the top edge of
landscape documents is aligned with the right edge of portrait documents.
98
Output Format
Output Format
This section describes the features you can select on the [Output Format] screen. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies).............................................................................. 99
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .................................................................................... 99
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)..................................................................................... 102
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)................................................... 103
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)........................................... 104
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ...................................................... 106
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ..................................... 107
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)........................... 107
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ....................................................................... 109
ID Card Copy (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ............................................................. 111
1
Select [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. For more
information, refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)" (P.84).
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)
This feature allows you to layout the copied pages so that they will be in the right order when
folded and bound as a booklet. You can also shift the pages for binding and add covers.
Note
• The machine copies four pages of the document onto one sheet of paper. If the number of pages in the
booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank pages.
99
3 Copy
• If [Auto Select] is selected in [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically
selected. Change the setting if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "Copy Control"
(P.321).
1
Specify the orientation of the document in
[Original Orientation] on the [Layout
Adjustment] screen.
2
Select [Booklet Creation] on the [Output
Format] screen.
3
Select any option.
Off
Disables this feature.
Create Left / Top Bound Booklet
Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding.
Create Right Bound Booklet
Copies are made to enable right binding.
Covers
You can attach covers to a booklet.
• Off
No cover is attached.
• Blank Cover
A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.
• Print on Both
The first and second pages of the document are copied on both sides of the cover.
• 1 Sided Covers Print Outside
The first and the last pages of the document are copied on the front side of the cover.
100
Output Format
• Last Page on Back Cover
Select this check box to copy the image of the last document page onto the last page of
the copy sheets as a back cover. When you use [Divide Output] to divide a booklet into
subsets, the image of the last document page will be copied onto the last page of the last
subset.
Note
• Depending on the number of pages in the original document, a blank page may be inserted before the
last page of a booklet.
Binding Shift
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen" (P.101).
Divide Output
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Divide Output] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] Screen" (P.101).
Paper Supply
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Paper Supply] screen.
Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and the tray for cover pages
from [Cover Tray]. Select the same size of paper for [Main Body Tray] and [Cover Tray], and
also select the trays with paper loaded in landscape orientation ( ).
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen
This screen allows you to specify the binding shift value in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1
mm increments.
1
Use [+] and [-] or the numeric keypad to
specify a binding shift value.
[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] Screen
You can divide the booklet into subsets of the specified number of sheets.
The number of sheets per subset can be in the range from 1 to 50 in 1 sheet increments.
1
Select [On].
2
Specify the number of sheets per subset using [+] and [-] or the numeric keypad.
101
3 Copy
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)
This feature allows you to attach covers to copies.
You can use different types of paper (such as colored paper and heavyweight paper) as the
front and back covers of copies.
Note
• When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum,
the machine will not print the already-scanned data. In that case, follow the instructions of the
message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine
can scan is 999 pages per job.
1
Select [Covers].
2
Select any option.
Front Cover
Attaches a front cover to the copies.
• Off
No front cover is attached.
• Blank Cover
Blank sheets of paper are attached as front covers.
• Print on Side 1
The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the front cover.
• Print on Side 2
The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the front cover.
• Print on Both
The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the
front cover.
Back Cover
Attaches a back cover to the copies.
• Off
No back cover is attached.
• Blank Cover
Blank sheets of paper are attached as back covers.
• Print on Side 1
The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the back cover.
102
Output Format
• Print on Side 2
The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the back cover.
• Print on Both
The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the
back cover.
Paper Supply
Displays the [Covers - Paper Supply] screen.
Select a tray to be used.
• Front Cover Tray
Select the tray used for front covers.
• Back Cover Tray
Select the tray used for back covers.
• Main Body Tray
Select the tray used for the body pages of the document.
When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Covers - Paper Supply] screen. When [Bypass]
is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.69).
Front Cover Quantity
This option is displayed when you select [Blank Cover] in [Front Cover]. Specify the number
of blank sheets to be used as front covers.
Back Cover Quantity
This option is displayed when you select [Blank Cover] in [Back Cover]. Specify the number
of blank sheets to be used as back covers.
Pages per Side (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)
This feature allows you to copy two, four, or eight document pages onto one side of a single
sheet of paper.
When you set [Pages per Side], [Auto %] is automatically selected in [Reduce / Enlarge].
The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they
fit on the selected paper.
Note
• When you deselect [Auto %] in [Reduce / Enlarge] (when you select another copy ratio), image loss
may occur depending on the image size of the document.
• When [Image Shift] is set, the image shift amounts are applied to the whole document. For this reason,
image loss may occur depending on the image size of the document.
• When [Edge Erase] is set, the edge erase amounts are applied to each document page.
• Select a tray other than [Auto Select] in [Paper Supply] on the [Copy] screen. If [Auto Select] is
selected in [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the
setting as necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "Auto Paper Off" (P.321).
1
Select [Pages per Side].
103
3 Copy
2
Select any option.
Off
Disables this feature.
2 Pages
Copies two document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
4 Pages
Copies four document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
8 Pages
Copies eight document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
Reading Order
Allows you to select how to lay out images on a page.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)
An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.
This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over
multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted
together. The paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.
Note
• Ensure that the actual orientation of the original document matches the [Original Orientation] setting
on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
• You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
104
Output Format
1
Select [Poster].
2
Select any option.
Off
No enlarged copies are made.
Output Size
Allows you to select the paper size.
Enlargement %
Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.105).
Paper Supply
Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.
Select the paper tray to be used.
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Paper Supply] screen.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
When [Enlargement %] is Selected
This screen allows you to specify a different ratio for the width and length.
1
Use [+] and [-] to specify the copy ratios for the
width and length.
Width - X% / Length - Y%
Allows you to specify the copy ratios for the width and length in the range from 100 to 400%
in 1% increments.
Lock X - Y%
Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same time.
105
3 Copy
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)
This feature allows you to copy a document image on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a
specified number of times.
When [Reduce / Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to
fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are
arranged.
Note
• When making copies at the same size as the document image, the number of repeats is specified so
that the copies fit on the paper.
• If [Auto Select] is selected in [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically
selected. Change the setting if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "Auto Paper Off"
(P.321).
1
Select [Repeat Image].
2
Select any option.
Off
Disables this feature.
Auto Repeat
Automatically determines the number of the repeated copies according to the document
size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the
paper.
Note
• Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.
Variable Repeat
Allows you to specify how many copies to place along each of the long and short edges of
paper. You can specify a value between 1 and 23 in the Y direction (Rows), and a value
between 1 and 33 in the X direction (Columns).
Image Layout
• Evenly Spaced
The specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.
• Side by Side
The specified number of images are arranged with no space on the paper.
106
Output Format
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)
This feature allows you to repeatedly copy one original onto equally divided areas according
to the specified number of copies.
Select [2 Times], [4 Times], or [8 Times] according to the number of times to repeat.
2 Times
Note
4 Times
8 Times
• When you select an option other than [Auto %] in [Reduce / Enlarge], image loss may occur depending
on the image size of the document.
1
Select [Preset Repeat Image].
2
Select any option.
Off
Disables this feature.
2 Times
Makes two copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
4 Times
Makes four copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
8 Times
Makes eight copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)
This feature allows you to insert blank separators between output transparency sheets. At the
same time, you can make copies for handouts.
Note
• Using transparency sheets for color (with white border) may cause a malfunction or paper jam.
• When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (Bypass), we recommend that you load them in portrait
orientation.
107
3 Copy
• Load transparency sheets in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be used for handouts and
separators.
1
Select [Transparency Options].
2
Select any option.
Off
Does not insert separators.
Blank Transparency Separators
Inserts a separator each time a transparency is copied. Only one set of copies can be made.
Blank Separators & Handouts
Inserts a separator each time a transparency is copied. At the same time, the required
number of copies is made for handouts.
Transparency Set & Handouts
Makes copies on transparencies. At the same time, the required number of copies is made
for handouts.
Transparency Tray
Allows you to select the paper tray to be used for the transparencies.
Select [More] to display the [Paper Supply - Transparency] screen on which you can select a
tray.
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Paper Supply - Transparency] screen.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
Separator Tray
Allows you to select the paper tray to be used for the separators.
Select [More] to display the [Paper Supply - Separator] screen on which you can select a tray.
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Paper Supply - Separator] screen.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
Separator & Handout
Allows you to select the paper tray to be used for the separators and handouts.
Select [More] to display the [Paper Supply - Separator & Handout] screen on which you can
select a tray.
108
Output Format
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Paper Supply - Separator & Handout] screen.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
Handout Tray
Allows you to select the paper tray to be used for the handouts.
Select [More] to display the [Paper Supply - Handout] screen on which you can select a tray.
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Paper Supply - Handout] screen.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)
This feature allows you to select finishing options.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
If the finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled, and then output.
1
Select [Copy Output].
2
Select any option.
Auto
Copies are collated when the originals are loaded in the document feeder.
Copies are collated when originals are loaded on the document glass and any of the following
features is used: 2 Sided Book Copying, Covers, [Blank Separators & Handouts] or
[Transparency Set & Handouts] of Transparency Options, Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build
Job, Sample Set, and Combine Original Sets.
Collated
The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.
Uncollated
The machine outputs the specified number of copies and sorts sheets by page.
Uncollated with Separators
The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by
page.
109
3 Copy
Separator Tray
When you select [Uncollated with Separators], select the paper tray to be used for the
separators.
Note
• When you use the bypass tray, select [Bypass] on the [Separator Tray] screen.
Staple
Specify the position for stapling. The number of sheets that can be stapled is 2 - 50 (when
80 gsm paper is used). Available paper types are: Plain paper, Recycled paper, Reload paper,
Bond paper, Heavyweight paper (106 - 163 gsm), Extra Heavyweight paper (164 - 216 gsm),
and Custom paper 1 to 5. If paper heavier than 90 gsm or lighter than 60 gsm is used, outputs
may not be stapled correctly even if the number of sheets is 50 or less.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Offset Stacking
The [Offset Stacking] screen will be displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Offset Stacking] Screen" (P.110).
[Offset Stacking] Screen
Allows you to select the offset operation.
The offset function is for slightly offsetting and
outputting each paper stack to allow you to
distinguish the separations.
You can select from [System Default], [No
Offset], [Offset per Set], [Offset per Job],
[Offset Every N Pages], and [Offset Every N
Sets].
Note
110
• If you select [System Default], the setting in the System Administration mode will be effective.
Output Format
Paper Size and Stapling Position
• Finisher-AB1
1 Staple
(Left)
1 Staple
(Right)
A4, B5,
7.25 x 10.5",
8.5 x 10",
8.5 x 11",
8.5 x 13",
8.5 x 14",
16K
Note
• The staple orientation displayed on the touch screen differs from the actual staple orientation. Outputs
are stapled in the orientation shown in the above table.
• When different sized documents are loaded in the document feeder, outputs are stapled only when all
the documents match the document guides. For information on how to copy different sized documents
simultaneously, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)"
(P.89).
ID Card Copy (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)
This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small undetectable original, such as an ID
card, onto one side of paper.
Original document
Original orientation
Copied output
Front side
Front side
Back side
Back side
1
Specify the orientation of the document in
[Original Orientation] on the [Layout
Adjustment] screen.
2
Place the document slightly away from the top left corner of the document glass, and close
the document glass.
Note
• Always use the document glass when copying. You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• Specify the orientation of the original document correctly.
• If the edges of the image are missing, slightly move the card inward on the document glass so that the
whole image can be scanned.
111
3 Copy
• When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card, the machine may copy the ID card in a different
orientation from the original orientation depending on the magnification ratio specified. For
information on the copy magnification ratio for ID Card Copy, refer to "ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge"
(P.322).
For information on how to specify the orientation of a document, refer to "Original Orientation
(Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.96).
3
Select [ID Card Copy] on the [Output Format]
screen.
4
Select [On].
Off
Disables ID card copying.
On
Enables ID card copying.
112
Job Assembly
Job Assembly
This section describes the features you can select on the [Job Assembly] screen. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ............... 113
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)................................................... 117
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) ........................................................................... 118
Delete Outside / Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area) ............ 121
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) ........................................... 122
1
Select [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen.
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)
This feature allows you to apply different copy settings to each document page or each
document stack, and then output the copies as one job.
1
Select [Build Job].
2
Select [On].
3
Select any option.
Off
Build Job is not applied.
113
3 Copy
On
Build Job is applied. The feature buttons appear. Specify any option if necessary.
Note
• The features selected here cannot be canceled or changed while the machine executes a copy job.
For information on features available in Build Job, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job"
(P.114).
Features that can be set in Build Job
Copy Output
For more information, refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.109).
Booklet Creation
For more information, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.99).
Covers
Note
• The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature.
For more information, refer to "Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)" (P.102).
Segment Separators
For more information, refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.116).
[Copy] Screen When Build Job is in Progress
The following describes the screen that appears while the Build Job is being executed.
Chapter Start
Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Start] screen.
Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen" (P.116).
Insert Separators
Displays the [Segment Separators] screen.
Refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.116).
Change Quantity
Displays the [Change Quantity] screen on which you can change the number of copy sets
using the numeric keypad.
Change Settings
Displays the [Copy] screen on which you can change the settings for the next document.
After changing the settings, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning
of the document. To return to the previous screen, press the < # > button.
When using a stored program for Build Job
While the machine makes copies using the Build Job feature, you can use a stored program.
1) Select [Change Settings].
2) Select the [Job Assembly] tab.
114
Job Assembly
3) Select [Stored Programming].
4) Select the number of the stored program that contains the features you want to use.
For information on how to register a stored program, refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build
Job" (P.156).
Delete
Clears the document data stored by the Build Job feature, and cancels the job.
Note
• You can also press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the control panel to perform the same
operation.
• While the machine is scanning the loaded document, [Delete] is displayed. Select [Delete] to pause
scanning. Select [Start] on the touch screen, or press the <Start> button on the control panel to
resume scanning.
Last Original
Select this button to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.
Next Original
Select this button when you have another document. This button is always selected when
you use the Build Job feature.
Start
After loading the next document, select this button to scan the next document.
Note
• You can also press the <Start> button on the control panel to perform the same operation.
Sample Job
When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output
and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the
confirmation.
115
3 Copy
[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen
This screen allows you to set the chapter start.
1
Select any option.
Off
The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.
On
The next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.
Pages per Side - New Page
When [Pages per Side] is set, even if all documents are divided for every chapter before all
of them are assembled in the Pages per Side feature, the next stack of document is copied
from Side 2 of the paper.
[Segment Separators] Screen
This screen allows you to insert a sheet of paper as a separator in between each stack of
documents. You can specify the number of separators to insert in the range from 1 to 99 as
necessary.
Note
• You can specify different settings for each stack of documents. If you do not specify particular settings
for each stack of documents, the previously specified settings are applied.
1
Select any option.
2
Select any option.
No Separators
Does not insert any separators.
Blank Separators
Inserts blank separators.
If you select this option, load documents, and press the <Start> button, the blank
separators are inserted before the copies of the documents.
1 Sided Side 1 Only
A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the front side of a separator, and the rest
of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.
116
Job Assembly
When [Pages per Side] is set, the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, or 8 pages) that you
selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded
documents, are copied onto the front page of a separator.
When you load a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.
1 Sided Side 2 Only
A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the back side of a separator, and the rest
of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.
When [Pages per Side] is set, the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you
selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded
documents, are copied onto the back side of a separator.
When you load a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.
2 Sided Separators
First two pages of the loaded documents are copied onto each side of a separator, and the
rest of pages starting from the third page are copied onto the paper other than a separator.
When [Pages per Side] is set, the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you
selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded
documents, are copied onto each side of a separator.
When you load two-sheet documents, both sheets are copied onto each side of a separator.
Note
• To copy a one-page document on Side 1 of a separator and the first page of the next document on Side
2 of the same separator, select [No Separators] under [Insert Separators] when you load the next
document. If not, the one-page document will be copied and printed one-sided, and the first and the
second pages of the next document two-sided, on the next separator.
Segment Separator Tray
Allows you to select the tray, which is loaded with paper to be used as a separator.
When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.69).
Separator Quantity
This option is available when you select [Blank Separators]. You can specify the number of
separators in the range from 1 to 99.
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)
When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output
and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select whether to continue or cancel the job
after the confirmation. This feature also allows you to change the number of copy sets. The
sample copy is included in the total number of copy sets.
Note
1
• After a sample set is output, the machine automatically outputs the data remained if the machine is left
uninstructed for the period specified in [Auto Job Release]. For more information on [Auto Job
Release], refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.296).
Select [Sample Job].
117
3 Copy
2
Select [On].
Off
No sample set is made.
On
A sample set is made.
[Copy] Screen When Sample Job is in Progress
After the sample set is copied, the machine pauses the job and displays the [Copy] screen.
Change Quantity
Displays the [Change Quantity] screen on which you can change the number of copies
entered before. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. The new value must include
the number of the sample set that has already been printed. When reducing the quantity,
specify a value between 1 (sample set) and the number of copies entered before.
Note
• If you specify "1" as a new quantity and then press the <Start> button, the machine will not process the
job.
Change Settings
Displays the [Change Settings] screen. To cancel the settings you have made, deselect the
check box for the feature you want to cancel.
Delete
The remaining copies are canceled.
Start
The remaining copies are made.
Note
• You can also press the <Start> button on the control panel to perform the same operation.
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)
Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded into the
document feeder at one time, or when you scan each document page using the document
glass and have the machine process the pages as one job.
When you use this feature, [Next Original] is always selected on the screen during scanning
documents with the document feeder or the document glass.
If [Copy Output] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.
118
Job Assembly
When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Note
• After the first original set is copied, the machine automatically outputs the data remained if the
machine is left unused for the period specified in [Auto Clear]. For more information on [Auto Clear],
refer to "Auto Clear" (P.296).
1
Select [Combine Original Sets].
2
Select [On].
Off
Disables this feature.
On
Enables this feature.
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
119
3 Copy
[Copy] Screen When Combine Original Sets is in Progress
The [Copy] screen is displayed when copying starts.
Delete
Clears the document data stored with the Combine Original Sets feature, and cancels
copying.
Note
• You can also press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the control panel to perform the same
operation.
Last Original
Select this button to end scanning documents.
Next Original
Select this button when you have more documents to copy. This button is always selected
when the Combine Original Sets feature is used.
Start
After loading the next document, select this button to scan the next document.
Note
120
• You can also press the <Start> button on the control panel to perform the same operation.
Job Assembly
Delete Outside / Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)
This feature allows you specify the areas to be deleted from a document image. Up to three
areas can be specified.
1
Select [Delete Outside / Delete Inside].
2
Select any option.
Off
No area is deleted.
Delete Outside
Deletes the outside of the selected area.
Delete Inside
Deletes the inside of the selected area.
Area Settings
Displays the [Delete Outside / Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] screen. You can
specify up to three areas.
Refer to "[Delete Outside / Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen" (P.122).
Originals
When the original document is a 2-sided document, specify from which side the specified
area is to be deleted.
• Both Sides
Applies the settings to both sides of the document.
• Side 1 Only
Applies the settings to Side 1 of the document.
• Side 2 Only
Applies the settings to Side 2 of the document.
121
3 Copy
Original Orientation
Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the
top of the document.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] setting differs from the actual document orientation, the machine may not
detect the top of the document correctly.
• Upright Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
• Sideways Images
Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
[Delete Outside / Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen
This screen allows you to specify the area to be deleted. The area is defined by the rectangle
formed between the points X1, Y1 and X2, Y2. The origin point is the top right corner of a
document.
You can specify a value in the range from 0 to 356 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y)
in 1 mm increments.
Note
• Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.
• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.
• When [Reduce / Enlarge] is set, the specified area will be reduced or enlarged accordingly.
1
Select [Area 1], [Area 2], or [Area 3].
2
3
4
5
Select the text box for [X1], and enter the value for X1 using the numeric keypad.
Select the text box for [Y1], and enter the value for Y1 using the numeric keypad.
Select the text box for [X2], and enter the value for X2 using the numeric keypad.
Select the text box for [Y2], and enter the value for Y2 using the numeric keypad.
Note
• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is specified, the
Delete Outside/Delete Inside feature cannot be used.
• Pressing the <C (Clear)> button clears the value you have entered.
Clear Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)
Clears all the values set for Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3).
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)
This feature allows you to call a stored program for Build Job.
This feature is the same as "8 Stored Programming" > "Calling a Stored Program" > "Calling a Stored
Program for Build Job". For more information, refer to "Calling a Stored Program for Build Job"
(P.160).
122
4 Fax
This chapter describes the basic operations and features for the Fax services.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact customer
support.
• Fax Procedure ......................................................................................................................124
• Operations during Faxing...................................................................................................130
4 Fax
Fax Procedure
This section describes the basic fax procedures. The following shows the reference section
for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .....................................................................................................124
Step 2 Selecting Features ........................................................................................................126
Step 3 Specifying Destinations................................................................................................127
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job .....................................................................................................128
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status .........................................................................129
Step 1 Loading Documents
The following two methods are available to load documents:
Document Feeder
• Single sheet
• Multiple sheets
Document Glass
• Single sheet
• Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 125 x
85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 600 mm (long) (Standard size: A4, 8.5x 14").
The document feeder automatically detects documents of standard-size widths.
Note
• The minimum supported paper size for 2-sided copying: 125 x 110 mm (Standard size: A5, A5
).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on [Paper Size Settings], refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309).
The size on the left is detected as the size shown on the right as follows.
Original Document Size
Document Size Detected by the Document
Feeder
8-inch width document
B5 width document
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Number of Sheets
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 gsm)
110 sheets
Plain paper (50 - 80 gsm)
110 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 gsm)
75 sheets
Note
• To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or wrinkled documents, cut-and-pasted
documents, curled paper, or back carbon paper.
• The lightweight paper of 38 - 49 gsm cannot be scanned 2 sided.
1
124
Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document.
Fax Procedure
2
Load the document face up (when the
document is 2-sided, place the front side up) in
the center of the document feeder.
Note
Confirmation indicator
• The confirmation indicator lights up when the
document is loaded correctly. If the indicator
does not light, the machine may be detecting
the document on the document glass. Load
the document again.
3
Adjust the document guides to match the size
of the document loaded.
4
Open the document stopper.
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents with a size
from 15 x 15 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 356 mm (Standard size: A4).
Note
• Always close the document cover after using the document glass.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents.
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on [Paper Size Settings], refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309).
1
Open the document cover.
Note
• Ensure that the touch screen is active, and
then load a document. Otherwise, the machine
may not properly detect the document size.
125
4 Fax
2
Load the document face down, and align it
against the top left corner of the document
glass.
Note
3
• When you load a A5, B5 or A4 document on
the document glass in portrait orientation, the
scanned image is transmitted with 180
degrees rotated.
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size document is loaded on the document glass, the size of the document is
displayed in the message field.
Step 2 Selecting Features
The following two services are available to send faxes.
Simple Fax
Allows you to only select basic features to send faxes.
Fax
Allows you to make detailed settings to send faxes.
The following procedure uses [Fax] to describe how to select features.
Note
• The features to be displayed on the screen depend on the configuration of your machine.
• When the Authentication or Accounting feature is enabled, a user ID and passcode may be required.
Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
126
Select [Fax].
Fax Procedure
3
If the previous settings still remain, press the
<Clear All> button.
<Clear All> button
4
Select each tab, and select a feature as
necessary.
Step 3 Specifying Destinations
Three methods are available to specify recipients: by phone number, by address number, and
by group dial number. The following shows input methods supported by each method.
Phone Number
Numeric Keypad
Address Book
O
X
4 digits (0001 to 2000)
Address Number
(Speed Dialing)
3 digits + *
(nnn0 to nnn9)
2 digits + *
(nn00 to nn99)
From the list tab
and index
Group Dial Number
# + 2 digits
O
O :Available
X :Not available
You can specify multiple recipients (Broadcast Send) using the above methods. You can also
use a combination of the methods.
If the same recipient was specified for several pending documents, you can send the
documents with a single phone call. This feature is called Batch Send. Note that you cannot
use Batch Send with Broadcast Send, Relay Broadcast, Remote Folder, and Delay Start when
prior to the specified time. When using a redial, resend, or delayed start send transmission
job, or authentication feature, to send to the same address from different users, then Batch
Send is not possible.
Note
• Confirm recipients before sending a fax.
The following describes how to enter a phone number with the numeric keypad as an
example.
127
4 Fax
1
Enter a fax number using the numeric keypad.
Numeric keypad
2
To specify multiple recipients, select [+ Add]
on the touch screen.
Note
• If you have entered an incorrect value, press
the <C (Clear)> button and enter the correct
value.
• Depending on the settings, a screen to re­
enter the recipient may be displayed after you
specify the recipient and then select [+ Add].
In such case, re-enter the recipient.
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job
The following describes how to start a fax job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• If the document has been loaded in the
document feeder, do not hold down the
document while it is being conveyed.
• Depending on the settings, the screen to re­
enter the recipient may be displayed after
pressing the <Start> button. In this case, re­
enter the recipient.
• If a problem occurs, an error message
appears on the touch screen. Solve the
problem according to the message.
<Start> button
If you have more documents
If you have more documents to fax, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to send the documents as one set of
data.
2
While documents are being scanned, select
[Next Original].
Note
• When using the document feeder, load the
next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When [Next Original] is displayed on the
screen shown on the right and no operation is
performed during a certain period of time, the
machine automatically assumes that there are
no more documents.
• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting [Resolution], [Original Size] and
[Lighten / Darken] that are displayed after selecting [Next Original].
128
Fax Procedure
3
Load the next document.
4
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
When all documents have been scanned, select
[Last Original].
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status
The following describes how to confirm the status of a fax job.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Confirm the job status.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu, you can select
[Scan & Fax Jobs] and display the desired job.
If undelivered faxes exist
You can confirm undelivered faxes on the [Job Status] screen or in an Activity Report.
For information on how to resend or delete undelivered faxes, refer to "Job Status" (P.177).
129
4 Fax
Operations during Faxing
This section describes the available operations during faxing. The following shows the
reference section for each operation.
Stopping the Fax Job ...............................................................................................................130
Changing the Scan Settings ....................................................................................................131
Stopping the Fax Job
To cancel scanning a fax document, use the following procedure.
1
Press either the <Stop> button on the control
panel or [Delete] on the touch screen.
<Stop> button
2
Select [Delete].
If [Delete] does not appear on the screen:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
130
Operations during Faxing
2
Select the job to cancel.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
3
Select [Delete].
4
Select [Delete].
Changing the Scan Settings
You can change the scan settings while scanning a document.
1
Select [Next Original].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Set [Resolution], [Original Size], and the
density.
131
4 Fax
132
4
Select [Save].
5
Press the <Start> button.
5 Scan
This chapter describes the basic operations and features for the Scan services.
To use the Scan services, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer
to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.451).
• Scanning Procedure ...........................................................................................................134
• Operations during Scanning..............................................................................................141
5 Scan
Scanning Procedure
This section describes the basic scanning procedure. The following shows the reference
section for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .....................................................................................................134
Step 2 Selecting the Features..................................................................................................136
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job....................................................................................................138
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status .......................................................................140
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data .............................................................................................140
Step 1 Loading Documents
The following two methods are available to load documents:
Document Feeder
• Single sheet
• Multiple sheets
Document Glass
• Single sheet
• Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 125 x
85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 356 mm (Standard size: A4, 8.5 x 11").
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size
documents, enter the size on the [Original Size] screen.
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309)".
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Number of Sheets
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 gsm)
110 sheets
Plain paper (50 - 80 gsm)
110 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 gsm)
75 sheets
Note
• To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or wrinkled documents, cut-and-pasted
documents, curled paper, or back carbon paper.
• The lightweight paper of 38 - 49 gsm cannot be scanned 2 sided.
1
134
Remove any paper clips and staples before loading a document.
Scanning Procedure
2
Load the document face up (when the
document is 2-sided, place the front side up) in
the center of the document feeder.
Note
Confirmation indicator
• In normal occasions, load the document in the
[Sideways Images] orientation. The document
is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation
when viewed on a computer.
• The confirmation indicator lights up when the
document is loaded correctly. If the indicator
does not light, the machine may be detecting a
document on the document glass. Load the
document again.
3
Adjust the document guides to match the size
of the document loaded.
4
Open the document stopper.
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents with a size
from 15 x 15 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ) to 216 x 356 mm (Standard size: A4).
Note
• Always close the document cover after using the document glass.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size
documents, enter the size on the [Original Size] screen.
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size
Settings" (P.309).
1
Open the document cover.
Note
• Ensure that the touch screen is active, and
then load a document. Otherwise, the machine
may not properly detect the document size.
135
5 Scan
2
Load the document face down, and align it
against the top left corner of the document
glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Step 2 Selecting the Features
On the [Home] screen, you can select the following Scan services: [E-mail], [Store to
Folder], [Scan to PC], [Store to USB], and [Store & Send Link]. You can select features for
each service.
Note
• The features to be displayed on the screen depend on the configuration of your machine.
• When the Accounting feature is enabled, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system
administrator for the user ID and passcode.
• To use the Scan services, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer
to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.451).
E-mail
Scans a document and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after converting the
data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, or XML Paper Specification (XPS).
Store to Folder
Scans a document and saves the scanned data in a folder on the machine.
You need to create a folder in advance. For information on how to create a folder, refer to "Create
Folder" (P.381).
Scan to PC
Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or SMB
protocol.
Store to USB
Scans a document and saves the scanned data to a USB memory device.
Store & Send Link
Scans a document and temporarily saves the scanned data on the machine. The user is
notified by e-mail of the URL to the location where the scanned data is stored. Then, the
user can access the URL to retrieve the scanned data.
136
Scanning Procedure
The following table shows file formats available for each Scan service.
File Format
Scan Service
File Format can be Selected When
PDF
XPS*1
TIFF
JPEG
O*2
O
O
O
Scan to PC
O*2
O
O
O
Store to USB
O*2
O
O
O
Store & Send Link
O*2
O
O
O
O*2
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
Using Adobe® Acrobat®*3
O*2
X
X
X
Creating a job flow
O*2
O
O
O
E-mail
Using the control panel when scanning
Store to Folder
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Stored File Manager 3®
Job Flow Sheets
O :Available
X :Not available
*1 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
*2 : Supported on Acrobat 4.0 or later
*3 : TWAIN compatible application
Note
• If you do not specify a file name for the document to be saved, a file name is automatically assigned to
each file or folder based on a particular rule. For example, the file name "img-123123456" indicates that
the document was scanned at 12:34:56 on January 23.
X, Y, and Z represent October, November, and December, respectively.
The following describes how to store scanned data into a folder as an example.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Store to Folder].
137
5 Scan
3
If the previous settings still remain, press the
<Clear All> button.
<Clear All> button
4
Specify a folder to save the data in.
5
Select each tab, and configure features as
necessary.
When you use another Scan service, [Store to Folder] is replaced with [E-mail], [Scan to
PC], [Store to USB], or [Store & Send Link].
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job
The following describes how to start a scan job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• If the document has been loaded in the
document feeder, do not hold down the
document while it is being conveyed.
• If a problem occurs, an error message
appears on the touch screen. Solve the
problem according to the message.
• You can set the next job during scanning.
If you have more documents
<Start> button
If you have more documents to scan, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of
data.
Up to 999 pages can be stored.
Note
• If the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum, the machine stops scanning.
Follow the message displayed on the screen, and either abort the operation or save the alreadyscanned data as a single set of data.
For information on how to set the maximum number of pages stored for a scan document, refer to
"Maximum Stored Pages" (P.321).
138
Scanning Procedure
2
While documents are being scanned, select
[Next Original].
Note
• When using the document feeder, load the
next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When [Next Original] is displayed on the
screen shown on the right and no operation is
performed for a certain period of time, the
machine automatically assumes that there are
no more documents.
• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting [Change Settings] that is
displayed after selecting [Next Original].
3
Load the next document.
4
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, repeat steps 3 and
4.
<Start> button
5
When all documents have been scanned, select
[Last Original].
139
5 Scan
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status
The following describes how to confirm the status of a scan job.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Confirm the job status.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu, you can select
[Scan & Fax Jobs] and display the desired job.
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data
When you used the Store to Folder service, you can use the following methods to import the
file stored in a folder of the machine to your computer:
Import using an application
Use Network Scanner Driver.
Import using Stored File Manager 3
Use Stored File Manager 3.
Import using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
140
Operations during Scanning
Operations during Scanning
The following describes the operations available during scanning. The following shows the
reference section for each operation.
Stopping the Scan Job............................................................................................................. 141
Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job ............................................................... 142
Changing Scan Settings .......................................................................................................... 143
Stopping the Scan Job
To cancel scanning a document, use the following procedure.
1
Press either the <Stop> button on the control
panel or [Delete] on the touch screen.
<Stop> button
2
Select [Delete].
If [Delete] does not appear on the screen:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
141
5 Scan
2
Select the job to cancel.
3
Select [Delete].
4
Select [Delete].
Note
• If you cancel the job, the scanned data stored
in the folder will also be deleted.
Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job
You can preview the scanned images while scanning the document.
142
1
Select [Next Original].
2
Select [Preview] to display a preview screen.
The first page of the last scanned document is
displayed.
Operations during Scanning
3
From the drop-down menu, specify the view
size by selecting [Whole Page] or [Enlarged
View], and set [Current Page].
4
After the confirmation, select [Close] to close the preview screen.
Changing Scan Settings
You can change scan settings while scanning the document.
1
Select [Next Original].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Set [Color Scanning], [Original Type], [Resolution], [Lighten / Darken], [Original
Orientation], [2 Sided Scanning], and [Original Size].
4
Press the <Start> button.
143
5 Scan
144
6 Job Flow Sheets
This chapter describes the scanning operation using a job flow sheet registered on the
machine.
Job Flow Sheets is a service that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as
a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.
• Job Flow Procedure............................................................................................................146
• Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................148
6 Job Flow Sheets
Job Flow Procedure
Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job flow
sheets targets scanned documents, and the other type targets files stored in folders. This
section describes the first type of job flow sheets, targeting scanned documents.
The following describes the procedure to operate a job flow. Refer to the following section
for each procedure.
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen .......................................................................146
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet...........................................................................................146
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet..................................................................147
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .........................................................................................147
To create and register a job flow sheet, use a computer.
Note
• To create a job flow sheet, use Job Flow Editor in the Driver CD kit provided with the machine.
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen
The following describes how to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Job Flow Sheets].
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet
1
Select a job flow sheet.
For more information on the [Job Flow Sheets]
screen, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow
Sheet" (P.148).
146
Job Flow Procedure
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet
1
To confirm the details, select [Details]. To
change the settings, select [Change Settings].
For information on how to check or change job flow
settings, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow
Sheet" (P.148).
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet
1
Load a document.
Note
2
• A job flow with an application linked does not require you to load a document.
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• After executing the job flow, be sure to print a Job History Report to check the result. For information
on the Job History Report, refer to "Job History Report" (P.306).
147
6 Job Flow Sheets
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet
This section describes how to select or edit a job flow sheet created on a network computer
with Job Flow Editor.
Note
• If characters not supported by the machine are used in the name or description of a job flow sheet, the
characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen.
• To communicate with network computers, enable the SOAP port on the machine.
• A job flow sheet created on a network computer can be deleted, but cannot be changed or duplicated.
However, you can temporarily change some items that are permitted to be changed.
For information on how to enable the port, refer to "Port Settings" (P.324).
1
Select a job flow sheet.
Note
• Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending
on the settings of the Authentication feature.
For more information, refer to "Job Flow Sheet
Types and Overview" (P.489).
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• You can sort the list in ascending or
descending order by selecting either [Name]
or [Updated].
Refresh
Displays refreshed information.
Details
Displays the [Details] screen. You can confirm the details of a job flow such as the name, last
updated date, target, owner, and save location. When you select the [ ] button, the whole
text of the description which was registered when creating the job flow sheet is displayed.
Change Settings
Displays the [Change Settings] screen. You can change the job flow settings.
Refer to "[Change Settings] Screen" (P.149).
Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow
names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128
characters long.
Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.
You can select from preset keywords if they have been registered in the System
Administration mode.
Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the System
Administration mode to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are
searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow
creation.
Sheet Filtering
Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen on which you can filter the job flow sheets displayed.
Refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.150).
148
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet
[Change Settings] Screen
1
Select [Change Settings].
2
Select a group to be changed from [Group of
Items].
Note
3
Select the item to be changed.
Note
4
• The screen on the right does not appear if only
one group is registered.
• A triangle icon appears at the left of each
mandatory item.
Select any option.
Items
Displays the items set for the job flow sheet.
Current Settings
Displays the values set for the job flow sheet.
Previous Group
Displays the items of the previous group.
Next Group
Displays the items of the next group.
Add E-mail Recipient
Adds recipients for the e-mail.
149
6 Job Flow Sheets
[Sheet Filtering] Screen
This screen allows you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.
Job flow sheets displayed vary depending on the settings of the Authentication feature. For more
information, refer to "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" (P.489).
1
Select [Sheet Filtering].
2
Select the filtering conditions, and select
[Save].
Owner
Select the owner of job flow sheets to filter.
Target
Select the target of job flow sheets to filter.
Note
150
• Job flow sheets whose [Target] is [Folder] can be used only from [Send from Folder].
7 Stored Programming
This chapter describes the Stored Programming service that enables you to store customized
job settings.
• Stored Programming Overview.........................................................................................152
• Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs........................................................153
• Calling a Stored Program...................................................................................................159
7 Stored Programming
Stored Programming Overview
The Stored Programming service allows you to store settings that you expect to use
frequently and call them with a single button operation. You can also assign a screen to a
stored program button, to use the button as a short-cut to the screen.
A stored program can store not only settings of a feature, but a flow of settings configured on
multiple screens.
For example, this service is available when you want to record a procedure starting from
pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the screen under [Print Reports] to
print a Job History Report.
In addition, while Build Job is running, this service can be used for the remaining document
stacks.
For information on Build Job, refer to "Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different
Settings as One Job)" (P.113).
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs..................................................................153
Calling a Stored Program.........................................................................................................159
152
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
You can register and delete stored programs on the [Stored Programming] screen.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Setup].
3
Select [Stored Programming].
4
Select a feature.
Store
Register a stored program.
Refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.154).
Store Build Job
Register a stored program for Build Job.
Refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.156).
Delete
Deletes a stored program. Select the stored program number to be deleted.
Refer to "Deleting Stored Programs" (P.157).
153
7 Stored Programming
Enter/Change Name
Enter or change the name of a stored program.
Refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.157).
Assign/Change Icon
Specify an icon for a registered stored program.
Refer to "Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs" (P.158).
Registering Stored Programs
Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can
be registered in the machine.
The following describes how to register actions with stored programs.
Note
• If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the System Settings
are changed after a stored program is registered, the program's content also changes.
• Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, or Address Book cannot be registered.
• The registering procedure for a stored program is canceled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed,
the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.
1
Select [Store].
2
Select a number to register a stored program.
Note
• Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten.
• Select [
3
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Set the feature you want to register.
Note
• The machine sounds an audible tone while a stored program is being registered.
• Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.
You can change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program is being registered. For
information on the setting, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.299).
4
Press the <Start> or <Clear All> button.
Note
• If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes "(No Name)".
For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored
Program Name" (P.157).
154
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
Notes and Restrictions on Registering Stored Programs
The following notes and restrictions apply when you register stored programs.
• When registering a stored program to select paper size or type loaded on the bypass tray,
register both the paper size and the paper type. If only the paper size or type is registered,
the stored program may not be called properly.
• If any of the following operations is performed while a stored program is being registered,
the stored program may not be registered or may not work correctly.
- Removing or inserting a paper tray
- Loading or reloading paper in the bypass tray
• If any of the following operations is performed after a stored program is registered, the
registered stored program may not be called properly.
- If the stored program has an operation for a folder and the folder passcode is changed.
- If the settings of the control panel are changed.
- If the services assigned to the custom buttons are changed.
- If any setting is changed under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings]
> [Preset Buttons].
- If the selection is made from a list of the Address Book or Job Flow Sheet.
- If any optional components installed on the machine, such as a finisher, are changed,
and thereby the associated buttons become no longer available.
- If the measurement unit, millimeters or inches, is changed.
- If a job is selected from the list of the stored jobs in [Secure Print Jobs & More] under
Job Status.
- Selecting items using the scroll bar
• The following features and operations cannot be registered in Stored Programming.
- Registration and call of a stored program
- System Settings
- The [Media Print - Text] and [Media Print - Photos] buttons on the [Home] screen
- The [Store to USB] button on the [Home] screen
- The [Job Flow Sheets] and [Web Applications] buttons on the [Home] screen.
- The custom button to which the Job Flow Sheets service is assigned.
- The Address Book for the Fax, E-mail, and Scan to PC services
- Unselectable buttons
- The [Language] button on the [Home] screen
- The [Screen Brightness] button on the [Home] screen
- Scrolling operation while previewing
- The [Browse] button for the Scan to PC service
- Operations to edit e-mail addresses for the E-mail service (the pop-up menu
[Keyboard], [Remove], and [Edit] displayed by selecting [Recipient(s)] or [From]).
- The <Power Saver> button
• A stored program registration is canceled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the
Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a pop-up window (such as a paper jam window)
appears.
155
7 Stored Programming
Registering Stored Programs for Build Job
Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program for Build Job. Up to 40 stored
programs can be registered in the machine.
The following describes how to register actions with stored programs.
1
Select [Store Build Job].
Note
• Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be
overwritten.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
2
Select a number to register a stored program.
Note
• Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten.
• Select [
3
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Set the feature you want to register.
Note
• The machine sounds an audible tone while a stored program is being registered.
• Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.
You can change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program is being registered. For
information on the settings, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.299).
4
Press the <Start> or <Clear All> button.
Note
• An icon is displayed to the left of each registered stored program for Build Job.
• If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes “No Name”.
For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored
Program Name" (P.157).
156
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
Deleting Stored Programs
The following describes how to delete stored programs.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select the number to delete.
Note
3
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the stored program.
Note
• Deleted stored programs cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the stored program.
Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name
The following describes how to enter or change the name of a stored program.
Up to 18 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.46).
1
Select [Enter/Change Name].
2
Select the number to register or change a name.
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
157
7 Stored Programming
3
Enter a name, and select [Save].
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs
The following describes how to assign or change an icon of a stored program.
You can select from 12 icons.
1
Select [Assign/Change Icon].
2
Select the number to assign or change an icon.
Note
3
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Select an icon, and select [Save].
No Icon
No icon is assigned to a registered stored program.
Icon
Select an icon according to the content of the registered stored program.
158
Calling a Stored Program
Calling a Stored Program
The following describes how to call a stored program.
When you call a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the
stored program appears.
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Stored Programming].
3
Select a number of a stored program containing
the features you want to use.
Note
• You can only select registered numbers.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• After the stored program has been called, the
machine sounds an audible tone. If a failure
occurs, the machine sounds a fault tone.
For information on how to change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program has
been called, refer to "Stored Programming Complete Tone" (P.299).
4
5
After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.
Press the <Start> button.
<Start> button
159
7 Stored Programming
Calling a Stored Program for Build Job
You can call a stored program for Build Job on the [Copy] screen displayed while Build Job
is running.
1
Select [Change Settings].
2
3
4
Select the [Job Assembly] tab.
Select [Stored Programming].
Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.
Note
• You can only select registered numbers.
• After the stored program has been called, the machine sounds an audible tone. If a failure occurs, the
machine sounds a fault tone.
For information on how to change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program has
been called, refer to "Stored Programming Complete Tone" (P.299).
160
8 Web Applications
This chapter describes how to operate web applications.
• Web Applications Overview .............................................................................................162
• Accessing Web Applications............................................................................................163
• Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the [Home] Screen......................................164
8 Web Applications
Web Applications Overview
Web Applications is a service that allows you to access to web applications via a network
using the browser on the machine in order to display and store data.
The machine provides the following features:
• Accessing web applications from the machine, and displaying the web application screen
on the machine
• Storing scanned documents directly in a web application folder
• Printing a file directly that is stored on a remote server
Note
• The web applications that can be displayed on the machine are those which are compatible with the
machine. You cannot access website on the Internet.
To access the web application on the machine, prior settings are required. For information on the
settings, refer to "Web Applications Service Setup" (P.376).
162
Accessing Web Applications
Accessing Web Applications
The following describes how to access web applications.
You need to register an access destination in advance.
For information on how to register an access destination, refer to "Server Setup" (P.377).
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Web Applications].
Note
• If Auto Link has been set, the machine can
access the remote service.
3
Select an access destination.
4
Select [Open] from the pop-up menu
displayed.
Open
Accesses the specified remote service.
Details
Displays the information of the specified remote service.
Close Menu
Hides the pop-up menu.
163
8 Web Applications
Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the [Home] Screen
You can register frequently used web applications on the [Home] screen as buttons. The
following describes how to access the applications by simply selecting the buttons.
For information on how to register a web application to a button on the [Home] screen, refer to
"Home" (P.300).
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Head Office] registered on the [Home]
screen.
Note
164
• "Head Office" is registered as an example
here. You can specify the name and the
position of the button.
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
This chapter describes the basic procedures and features of Media Print - Text and Media
Print - Photos.
• Overview of Media Print ....................................................................................................166
• Media Print - Text................................................................................................................169
• Media Print - Photos ...........................................................................................................171
• Selecting the Printing Options..........................................................................................173
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
Overview of Media Print
If a USB memory device is connected to the machine, the data stored in the USB memory
device can also be printed. You can also print scanned data stored with the Store to USB
service.
The installation of commercially available Memory Card Reader allows the machine to
retrieve and print image data (DCF1.0-compliant JPEG and TIFF) taken with a digital
camera as well as document files (PDF, TIFF, XPS, and JPEG (JFIF)).
Note
• Data stored in USB memory device may be lost or damaged in the following cases. Make sure to back
up data in media before use.
- When disconnecting/connecting the USB memory device by methods other than those described in
this guide
- When receiving the effect of electrical noise or an electrical discharge
- When a fault or failure occurs during operation
- If the USB memory device receives mechanical damage
• We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data
loss.
• For Media Print - Photos, images can be displayed in thumbnail view, but cannot be previewed. For
Media Print - Text, files cannot be displayed in thumbnail view and cannot be previewed either.
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
• For using commercially available Memory Card Reader, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
• Commercially available Memory Card Reader with single slot *1 can be used for Media Print feature
(text/photo), but its safe performance is not guaranteed. When a Memory Card Reader with multi-slot
*2 is used, only one particular slot is available. The available slot depends on the model, and the slot of
media/Memory Card that you want to use is not always available. Safe performance of a Memory Card
Reader with multi-slot is not guaranteed, either.
*1 : Media/Memory Card that has one slot. Some allow only one type of media/Memory Card, while others
allow more than one type (ex. SD card, xD-Picture Card).
*2 : Media/Memory Card that has two or more slots.
• "Exif" is a file format that embeds information required to print the image data taken with a digital
camera. The machine supports Exif 2.0 to 2.2.
The Media Print feature comprises two modes: Media Print - Photos and Media Print - Text.
The Media Print - Photo mode prints data stored in the standard digital camera format, while
the Media Print - Text mode prints data stored in text format. The feature also includes
Index Printing that prints a list of files retrieved in the both modes.
166
Overview of Media Print
Supported Media and File Formats
The machine supports USB memory devices.
Supported media and file formats are as follows.
Supported File Format
Supported Media
• USB 2.0 memory
Note
Media Print - Photos
Media Print - Text
• JPEG files
• TIFF files
Supports DCF1.0-compliant
JPEG/TIFF files (Exif2.0,
Exif2.1, Exif2.2)
• PDF files
Extension: pdf, PDF 1.3 or
later
• TIFF files
Extension: tif, Grayscale 4 bit/
8bit uncompressed, 8bit/24
bit JPEG compressed, MH/
MMR compressed
• XPS files
Extension: xps
• JPEG (JFIF)
Extension: jpg
• When you specify the save location, only folder names are displayed in the list. File names and
shortcuts (symbolic link or alias) are not displayed.
• Folders that comply with the Design rule for Camera File system (DCF) standard used for digital
cameras are not displayed.
• If a full path (a string of folder and file names in all directories) of the file created exceeds 257
characters long, an error occurs.
• If the medium contains more than 900 folders, the machine may not be able to recognize the medium
correctly.
• If a file name contains characters that are not supported by the machine, the file name will not be
displayed on the screen.
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
• In the Media Print - Photos mode, only 8 characters can be recognized as a file name. In the Media
Print - Text mode, up to 255 characters can be recognized.
• Up to 900 files can be processed with Media Print.
• Use media formatted with digital cameras or computers (FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 only).
• Use USB 2.0 compliant memory devices with the size up to 128 GB only. (USB 1.1 compliant memory
devices are not supported.).
• If a file name contains machine-dependent codes, the file may not be recognized or displayed on the
screen correctly.
Notes and Restrictions on Media Print
The following notes and restrictions apply on the use of the Media Print service.
• Use the Media Print - Photos service with a medium inserted. Otherwise, a status code
(016-794/116-212) will be displayed on the screen.
• Image files other than files in Exif format (JPEG/TIFF files created on computers) cannot
be printed.
• Once an image file in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the file format is no
longer the Exif format.
• If the medium fails, the process is terminated within a few minutes, and an error message
is displayed.
• Eject the medium before switching off the power.
167
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
• Be sure to wait until printing is completed and then eject the medium by following the
procedure described in this chapter.
• Always back up data in medium before use.
• Printing data may take from a few minutes to several tens of minutes, depending on the
size and number of files in the medium.
• Before storing document files, format the USB memory with a computer (FAT12, FAT16,
FAT32 only).
• When you print a PDF file using Media Print, [PDF Bridge] is selected regardless of the
[Print Processing Mode] setting in [PDF Direct Print].
• You can use a USB host adapter to print from your USB memory device or via your USB
cable (as necessary), but the operation is not guaranteed.
• Multiple USB memory devices cannot be used simultaneously.
• Use USB 2.0 compliant memory devices only. USB 1.1 compliant memory devices are not
supported.
The following USB memory devices are not supported:
- A USB memory device with multiple media partitions that require other utilities to
access to the contents therein.
- A USB memory device connected via an external hub.
• Do not use a medium if it stores data that cannot be backed up, such as music data with
the copyright protection function. We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect
damages arising from or caused by such data loss.
• The machine does not display a menu to prevent you from removing a USB memory
device while it is being accessed.
168
Media Print - Text
Media Print - Text
Selecting Files
You can select files using any of the following three methods:
• Selecting all files
• Selecting the desired files on the [Select From List] screen
• Selecting one file or a range of files with index numbers
Note
1
• You can select up to 32 files simultaneously.
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Media Print - Text].
The machine starts retrieving files from the medium.
During the retrieval, a screen appears on the control panel indicating that the files are being
transferred.
Note
• Index numbers from 001 to 900 are automatically assigned to the files retrieved.
3
After the files are retrieved, select either [Select
All] or [Select From List] to specify files.
4
After selecting the files to be printed, select the printing options.
For more information on the printing options, refer to "Selecting the Printing Options" (P.173).
Note
• On the pop-up menu displayed when selecting files, you can cancel the selection or display the
details.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Select All
Selects all document files to be printed.
Note
• Depending on the type of files stored in the medium or the directory configuration, some files may not
be printed.
169
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
Select From List
Displays the [Select From List] screen.
Refer to "[Select From List] Screen" (P.170).
Select Range
Use [+] and [-] to specify the range of files to be printed in [First File] and [Last File] under
[Media Print - Text].
Note
• Select [Select From List] to display a list of files, and reference the list when selecting the range.
Index Print
Prints a list of the selected files with the index numbers automatically assigned.
For more information on Index Print, refer to "Index Print" (P.175).
[Select From List] Screen
This screen displays a list of files with their folder and file names and stored dates and times.
You can select the desired files from a list of files.
1
Select the desired files from a list of files.
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting [#
], [Name], or [Last Updated].
• A check mark is placed in the check box for each file selected. To deselect the file, select the file
again while the file is selected (highlighted).
• If a folder or file name has more than 170 characters long, the folder or file name is not displayed.
• Folder names which include characters that the machine does not support may not be correctly
displayed. If you specify the folders as file storage locations, an error occurs. For more information on
characters that the machine supports, refer to "Entering Text" (P.46).
• The machine does not distinguish between upper and lower cases of folder and file names that are
created in Windows environment and that consist of eight characters or less. The names for these
folders and files are displayed in capital letters.
Select all files in this level
Selects all files in the current folder.
Details
Displays detailed information on the selected (highlighted) file. To print the file, select the
[Print] check box on the [Details] screen.
Previous
Allows you to move to the upper directory.
Note
• This button is grayed out if there is no upper directory.
Next
Allows you to move to the lower directory.
Note
170
• This button is available when a folder is selected.
Media Print - Photos
Media Print - Photos
Selecting Files
You can select files using any of the following three methods:
• Selecting all files
• Selecting the desired files on the [Select From List] screen. You can select up to 100 files
simultaneously
• Selecting one file or a range of files with index numbers
1
Press the <Home> button.
<Home> button
2
Select [Media Print - Photos].
The machine starts retrieving files from the medium.
During the retrieval, a screen appears on the control panel indicating that the files are being
transferred.
Note
• Index numbers from 001 to 900 are automatically assigned to the files retrieved.
3
After the files are retrieved, select either [Select
All] or [Select From List] to specify files.
4
After selecting the files to be printed, select the printing options.
For more information on the printing options, refer to "Selecting the Printing Options" (P.173).
Note
• On the pop-up menu displayed when selecting files, you can cancel the selection or display the
details.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Select All
Selects all image data to be printed.
Note
• Depending on the type of files stored in the medium or the directory configuration, some files may not
be printed.
171
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
Select From List
Displays the [Select From List] screen.
Refer to "[Select From List] Screen" (P.172).
Select Range
Use [+] and [-] to specify the range of files to be printed in [First picture] and [Last picture]
under [Media Print - Photos].
Note
• Select [Select From List] to display a list of files, and reference the list when selecting the range.
Index Print
Prints a list of the selected files with the index numbers automatically assigned.
For more information on Index Print, refer to "Index Print" (P.175).
[Select From List] Screen
You can select the desired files from a list of files.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• A check mark is placed in the check box for
each file selected. To deselect the file, select
the file again while the file is selected
(highlighted).
List
Display a list of files with their names and stored dates and times.
Note
• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting [#
The number of files selected appears on the top on the screen.
], [Name], or [Date & Time].
Thumbnail
Displays a list of the images and names of the files.
Note
• The thumbnail view may not be available for some files. If a file is not displayed in thumbnail view,
display it in list view or in Index Print.
• Characters and images may not be correctly displayed in thumbnail view because they are reduced in
size.
• An image is displayed in thumbnail view in the orientation with which the file was stored.
Details
Displays detailed information on the selected (highlighted) file. To print the file, select the
[Print] check box on the [Details] screen.
Deselect All
Deselects all selected files.
Select All
Selects all files.
172
Selecting the Printing Options
Selecting the Printing Options
You can set the printing options on the [Media Print -Text] or [Media Print - Photos], and
[Advanced Settings] tabs.
By default, pressing the <Shortcut 2> button on the control panel allows you to view a list
of the setting values.
Media Print - Photos
Tab
Media Print Photos
Item
Setting Value
Quantity
Specify the number of print sets in the range of
1 - 999, using the numeric keypad.
Output Color
Color, Black & White
Paper Supply
Trays 1 - 5
Note
• When the desired tray is not displayed, select
[More], and select the tray on the displayed
screen.
When you select [More] and then [Bypass], you can
set [Paper Size] and [Paper Type].
• Paper Size
Select the paper size to be used from the list:
A4, 8.5 x 11", B5, 100 x 148 mm
• Paper Type
Select the paper type to be used from the list.
2 Sided Printing
Off, Long Edge Flip, Short Edge Flip
Output Photo Size
• Full Page Print
• 5 x 7"
When you select [Output Size] on the screen
displayed after selecting [More], the following sizes
are selectable:
A4, 8.5 x 11", 100 x 148 mm, 3.5 x 5", 5 x 7"
Note
• According to the size selected here and the
paper size, only the photos fitting on one sheet
of paper are aligned and printed. If you select [1
Picture per Page], one sheet of paper is used for
one file and printed.
• 3 Pictures per Page (Center)
When you select [Pictures per Page] on the screen
displayed after selecting [More], the following
options are available:
2 Pictures, 3 Pictures (Center), 3 Pictures (Left), 4
Pictures, 6 Pictures, 8 Pictures
Advanced Settings
Note
Bitmap Smoothing
Off, On
• When you select a paper size smaller than the image size, the image is automatically reduced. When
you select a paper size larger than the image size, the image is printed at its original size.
• The features displayed on the [Media Print - Photos] and [Advanced Settings] screens may vary
depending on the combination of the optional components installed on the machine.
173
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
Media Print - Text
Tab
Media Print Text
Item
Setting Value
Quantity
Specify the number of print sets in the range of
1 - 999, using the numeric keypad.
Output Color
Color, Black & White
Paper Supply
Auto Select, Trays 1 - 5
Note
• Select [Auto Select] or the tray in which any of
the following sizes of paper is loaded:
A4, A5, B5, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 14"
• When you select [Auto Select], the machine
automatically selects a tray that contains the
same size of paper as the document, and prints
the document at its original size.
• When the desired tray is not displayed, select
[More], and on the screen displayed, select the
tray.
When you select [More] and then [Bypass], you can
set [Paper Size] and [Paper Type].
• Paper Size
Select the paper size to be used from the list:
A4, A5 , A5, B5, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 14"
• Paper Type
Select the paper type to be used from the list.
2 Sided Printing
Off, Long Edge Flip, Short Edge Flip
Staple
Specify the stapling positions.
When the desired stapling positions are not displayed,
select [More].
Note
Advanced Settings
Note
• If you select and print multiple documents, all of
the documents are stapled together. To staple
only one document, print only that document.
Pages per Side
Off, 2 Pages, 4 Pages
Bitmap Smoothing
Off, On
• When you select a paper size smaller than the document size, the document image is automatically
reduced. When you select a paper size larger than the document size, the document is printed at its
original size.
• The features displayed on the [Media Print - Text] and [Advanced Settings] screens may vary
depending on the combination of the optional components installed on the machine.
174
Selecting the Printing Options
Index Print
• In the Media Print - Photos mode, a list of 30 x 40 mm reduced images, plus index
numbers, file names, and dates when images were stored in the medium are printed.
• In the Media Print - Text mode, names, dates when files were stored in the medium, and
the total number of files are printed.
You can specify only the number of print sets for Index Print, in the range from 1 - 999 sets
in 1 set increments. For other printing options, the settings you have specified for Media
Print - Text or Media Print - Photos before selecting the [Index Print] check box will be
effective. To change these settings, deselect the [Index Print] check box, change the print
settings, and then perform Index Print. The setting values return to the defaults if the
machine is rebooted.
The following setting items are restricted when you select Index Print.
Setting Item
Value
Output Color
In the Media Print - Photos mode
• Color, Black & White
In the Media Print - Text mode
• Black & White only
Paper Supply
Trays 1 - 5
Note
• Select the tray in which any of the following sizes of paper
is loaded: A4, 8.5 x 11"
2 Sided Printing
Off, Long Edge Flip, Short Edge Flip
Staple
Not available
Pages per Side
Not available
175
9 Media Print (Text and Photos)
176
10 Job Status
This chapter describes how to check the status of jobs and operate the jobs.
• Job Status Overview...........................................................................................................178
• Checking Current/Pending Jobs.......................................................................................179
• Checking Completed Jobs .................................................................................................181
• Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs ...................................................................................182
• Printing Pending Jobs ........................................................................................................195
• Handling Error Terminations .............................................................................................196
10 Job Status
Job Status Overview
The Job Status feature allows you to check current, pending, and completed jobs. You can
also cancel printing and print jobs that are waiting to be output or resumed.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
You can operate the following on the [Job Status] screen.
Checking current/pending jobs
Lists current and pending jobs, and displays their details. Also allows you to cancel current
or pending jobs.
For more information, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.179).
Checking completed jobs
Displays the status of completed jobs, and their details.
For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.181).
Checking stored jobs
Prints or deletes jobs stored using the Charge Print, Secure Print, Private Charge Print,
Sample Set, and Delayed Print features.
For more information, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" (P.182).
Printing pending jobs
Prints jobs that are waiting to be output or resumed.
For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.195).
178
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. On the status screen, you can
cancel or preferentially execute jobs.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Select the job to be canceled or preferentially
executed.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu, you can select and
display the desired type of jobs.
3
Select [Delete] or [Promote Job].
Print Waiting Jobs
Prints the jobs that are waiting to be output or resumed.
For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.195).
Delete
Cancels the current or pending job.
Promote Job
Preferentially executes the selected job.
If you select this button, [ ] appears under the [Status] of the selected job.
Delete
Stops processing the job.
Last Original
Select this button to end scanning of documents. The job is then executed.
Next Original
Select this button when you have another document to scan.
179
10 Job Status
Start
Resumes the suspended job.
Change Quantity
Displays the [Change Quantity] screen, on which you can change the number of print sets.
Enter the number using the numeric keypad.
180
Checking Completed Jobs
Checking Completed Jobs
This section describes how to check completed jobs.
You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Selecting a job allows you to
see its details.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu, you can select and
display the desired type of jobs.
3
4
Select a job to see the details.
Select [Close] after the confirmation.
Group Parent Jobs
Allows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).
Show Child Jobs
Displays a job list.
Print this Job History Report
Prints the Job History Report.
Print this Job Report
Prints the Job Report.
181
10 Job Status
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
This section describes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Secure Print or Sample Set
feature, or stored with the [Receive Control] setting of the Charge Print feature. The [Secure
Print Jobs & More] screen allows you to print or delete stored jobs.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Secure Print ..............................................................................................................................182
Sample Set................................................................................................................................184
Delayed Print............................................................................................................................186
Charge Print .............................................................................................................................187
Private Charge Print.................................................................................................................190
Public Folder ............................................................................................................................192
Undelivered Faxes....................................................................................................................193
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.
[Secure Print] and [Private Charge Print] are not displayed simultaneously on the screen. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
Secure Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine to print it with the
print command from the machine. The feature also enables you to set a passcode, which is
helpful to print confidential documents.
The following describes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Secure Print feature.
Note
• This feature does not appear when [Receive Control] in [Charge / Private Print Settings] is set to either
of the following:
- Select [According to Print Auditron], and then select [Save as Private Charge Print Job] in [Job
Login Success].
- Select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] or [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected in [Receive Control]
under [Charge / Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Secure Print] under [Secure Print
Jobs & More] even if you select [Secure Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to
"Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
For information on how to operate a Secure Print job, refer to the print driver's help.
182
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
1
2
Select [Secure Print].
Select the user to be checked, and select [Job
List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• You can enter a user ID in [Go to] using the
numeric keypad to display the user ID at the
top of the list.
3
Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].
Note
4
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
Note
5
6
• If the passcode is not set, the passcode entry
screen does not appear.
• You can select up to 100 files simultaneously to
print or delete the files. If you select multiple
files, they are printed in the selected order.
Select any option.
When printing, specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Select All
Selects all jobs. To deselect all the jobs, select this button again.
Delete
Deletes the Secure Print job.
Note
• If jobs with the same Billing ID are all deleted, the Billing ID will be deleted.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.184).
Print Quantity
Specify the number of print sets.
Print
Prints the Secure Print job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.184).
183
10 Job Status
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Specify how to process the job after printing.
Note
• The screen as shown on the right does not
appear if [Print Job Confirmation Screen] is set
to [Disabled] in the System Administration
mode. If [Disabled] is selected, the machine
automatically deletes the job after printing
without displaying the confirmation screen.
For more information, refer to "Print Job
Confirmation Screen" (P.375).
Print and Delete
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Print and Save
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job remains undeleted.
Cancel
Cancels printing the job.
Sample Set
The following describes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Sample Set feature.
Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one set for trial, and then
print the remaining sets from the machine.
For information on how to operate a Sample Set job, refer to the print driver's help.
Note
• When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] or [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected in [Receive Control]
under [Charge / Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Sample Set] under [Secure Print Jobs
& More] even if you select [Sample Set] on the print driver.
For more information, refer to "Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
1
184
Select [Sample Set].
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
2
Select the user to be checked, and select [Job
List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• You can enter a user ID in [Go to] using the
numeric keypad to display the user ID at the
top of the list.
3
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
Note
4
5
• You can select up to 100 files simultaneously to
print or delete the files. If you select multiple
files, they are printed in the selected order.
Select any option.
When printing, specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Select All
Selects all jobs. To deselect all the jobs, select this button again.
Delete
Deletes the Sample Set job.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.185).
Print Quantity
Specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Print
Prints the Sample Set job. After printing the remaining sets of the job, the job is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.186).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
185
10 Job Status
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select [Yes].
Note
• The screen as shown on the right does not
appear if [Print Job Confirmation Screen] is set
to [Disabled] in the System Administration
mode. If [Disabled] is selected, the machine
automatically deletes the job after printing
without displaying the confirmation screen.
For more information, refer to "Print Job
Confirmation Screen" (P.375).
Yes
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Note
• After a sample set is output, the remaining sets will automatically be output if the machine is not
instructed for the period specified in [Auto Job Release]. To prevent the remaining sets from being
output automatically, set [Auto Job Release] to [Off]. For information on how to set [Auto Job Release],
refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.296).
No
Cancels printing the job.
Delayed Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data on the machine to print it at specified
time.
Up to 100 jobs can be stored (queued) simultaneously for the Delayed Print feature. If the
power is switched off when jobs are in queue (before the specified print time), the jobs whose
print time has elapsed will automatically be printed immediately after the power is switched
on again.
The following describes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Delayed Print feature.
For information on how to operate a Delayed Print job, refer to the print driver's help.
Note
1
2
• When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] or [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected in [Receive Control]
under [Charge / Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Delayed Print] under [Secure Print
Jobs & More] even if you select [Delayed Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to
"Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
Select [Delayed Print].
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• [Print Time] shows the time to start printing.
3
Select any option.
Delete
Deletes the Delayed Print job.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.187).
186
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
Print
Prints the Delayed Print job. After printing, the job is deleted. If printed manually, the job
will not be printed at the specified time.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.187).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select [Yes].
Note
• The screen as shown on the right does not
appear if [Print Job Confirmation Screen] is set
to [Disabled] in the System Administration
mode. If [Disabled] is selected, the machine
automatically deletes the job after printing
without displaying the confirmation screen.
For more information, refer to "Print Job
Confirmation Screen" (P.375).
Yes
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job is deleted.
No
Cancels printing the job.
Charge Print
This feature authenticates users on the machine to prevent unauthorized users from
operating print jobs. When this feature is enabled, the machine prints only the jobs of
authenticated users. You can also configure the machine to store print jobs temporarily, and
then print them from the machine’s control panel.
If received print jobs are set to be saved as Charge Print under [Tools] > [Authentication /
Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Charge / Private Print Settings] > [Receive
Control], the jobs are saved for each Billing ID. Any jobs that were not given a Billing ID on
the print driver are saved in [No User ID].
For more information on how to register user IDs on the machine, refer to "Create/View User
Accounts" (P.398).
187
10 Job Status
Note
• Unlike the Private Charge Print feature, the Charge Print feature can store jobs without a user ID, such
as e-mail printing and print jobs sent from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and can print the jobs
after authenticating users.
• [Charge Print] appears when [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected by using one of the following
procedures in the System Administration mode:
- Select [Save as Charge Print Job] in [Receive Control].
- Select [According to Print Auditron] in [Receive Control], and then select [Save as Private Charge
Print Job] in [Job Login Failure].
- Select [According to Print Auditron] or [Save as Private Charge Print Job] in [Receive Control], and
then select [Save as Charge Print Job] in [Job without User ID].
For information on how to set Charge Print, refer to "Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
The following describes how to print and delete a job stored with the Charge Print feature.
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel, or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2
Enter the user ID, and select [Enter].
Note
• When the passcode is set, enter the user ID
and select [Next]. Then, enter the passcode
and select [Enter].
• While a user is authenticated, the <Log In/
Out> button lights up on the control panel.
• To log out of the machine, press the <Log In/
Out> button on the control panel.
3
4
Select [Charge Print].
Select the user to be checked, and select [Job
List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
• You can enter a user ID in [Go to] using the
numeric keypad to display the user ID at the
top of the list.
5
Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].
Note
188
• If the passcode is not set, the passcode entry
screen does not appear.
6
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
7
8
Select any option.
When printing, specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
Delete
Deletes the Charge Print job.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.189).
Print Quantity
Specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Print
Prints the Charge Print job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.189).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Specify how to process the job after printing.
Note
• The screen as shown on the right does not
appear if [Print Job Confirmation Screen] is set
to [Disabled] in the System Administration
mode. If [Disabled] is selected, the machine
automatically deletes the job after printing
without displaying the confirmation screen.
For more information, refer to "Print Job
Confirmation Screen" (P.375).
Print and Delete
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Print and Save
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job remains undeleted.
Cancel
Cancels printing the job.
189
10 Job Status
Private Charge Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each
authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As the
feature enables you to select and print only necessary jobs, you can avoid printing
unnecessary jobs. Furthermore, the machine displays only the jobs of authenticated users
and their associated sub users to securely protect the privacy of the users. The Private Print
feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system
administrator.
If received print jobs are set to be saved with Private Charge Print, the jobs are saved for each
authentication user ID.
Note
• [Private Charge Print] is displayed when [Receive Control] in [Charge / Private Print Settings] is set to
either of the following:
- Select [According to Print Auditron] in [Receive Control], and then select [Save as Private Charge
Print Job] in [Job Login Success].
- Select [Save as Private Charge Print Job] in [Receive Control].
• When the Private Charge Print feature is selected, you cannot specify normal print, Secure Print,
Sample Set, Delayed Print on the print driver.
The Private Charge Print feature restricts the use of the machine through either user ID
authentication or card authentication, or the combination of both. For information of the types
of authentication, refer to "Types of Authentication" (P.481).
To delete a print job instructed with an invalid user ID, display the list of print jobs after logging
in as a system administrator, and then select the job to be deleted. For more information, refer to
"Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.255). For information on how to
set a User ID, refer to "Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412).
The following describes how to print or delete a job stored with the Private Charge Print
feature.
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel, or select the login information field
on the touch screen.
2
Enter the user ID, and select [Enter].
Note
• When the passcode is set, enter the user ID
and select [Next]. Then, enter the passcode
and select [Enter].
• While the user is authenticated, the <Log In/
Out> button lights up on the control panel.
• To log out of the machine, press the <Log In/
Out> button on the control panel.
3
Select [Private Charge Print].
Note
4
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
Note
5
6
190
• If you are authenticated as a system administrator, selecting [Private Charge Print] will display a list of
authentication user IDs. Select a user ID from the list, and then select [Job List] to display a list of jobs
stored for the selected user.
• You can select up to 100 files simultaneously to
print or delete the files. If you select multiple
files, they are printed in the selected order.
Select any option.
When printing, specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
Select All
Selects all jobs. To deselect all the jobs, select this button again.
Delete
Deletes the Private Charge Print job.
Note
• If jobs with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.191).
Print Quantity
Specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad.
Print
Prints the Private Charge Print job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.191).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Specify how to process the job after printing.
Note
• The screen as shown on the right does not
appear if [Print Job Confirmation Screen] is set
to [Disabled] in the System Administration
mode. If [Disabled] is selected, the machine
automatically deletes the job after printing
without displaying the confirmation screen.
For more information, refer to "Print Job
Confirmation Screen" (P.375).
Print and Delete
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job is deleted.
Print and Save
Starts printing the job. After printing, the job remains undeleted.
Cancel
Cancels printing the job.
191
10 Job Status
Public Folder
This feature allows you to store data in the machine and send the data by operating on a
remote machine.
The following describes how to print or delete a job stored in a public folder.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
1
Select [Public Folder].
2
Select the job to be printed or deleted.
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
3
Select any option.
Select All
Selects all jobs. To deselect all the jobs, select this button again.
Delete
Deletes the selected job stored in the public folder.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.192).
Print
Prints the selected job stored in the public folder.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.193).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the job.
Note
192
• Once the job is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs
Cancel
Cancels deleting the job.
When [Print] is Selected
Starts printing the job.
Undelivered Faxes
The following describes how to re-send or delete an undelivered fax job.
Note
• This feature may not appear depending on the settings in the System Administration mode.
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
1
2
Select [Undelivered Faxes].
Select the job to be re-sent or deleted.
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the updated
information.
• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
3
Select any option.
To re-send to the previously specified fax
number, press the <Start> button.
Delete This Fax
Deletes the undelivered fax job.
Refer to "When [Delete This Fax] is Selected" (P.193).
Change Recipients
Allows you to change the fax recipient and re-send the undelivered fax job.
Refer to "When [Change Recipients] is Selected" (P.194).
When [Delete This Fax] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Delete
Deletes the undelivered fax job.
193
10 Job Status
Cancel
Cancels deleting the undelivered fax job.
When [Change Recipients] is Selected
Specify a fax recipient for the undelivered fax job.
Besides the fax recipient, the following features can be changed on the control panel:
• Fax type
• Starting Rate
Note
• If the fax recipient has been changed, header information will not be added even if [Transmission
Header Text] is set to [Display Header].
For information on how to specify fax recipients, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.127).
194
Printing Pending Jobs
Printing Pending Jobs
After the last user operation on the control panel of the machine, a job is waiting to be
printed until the period of time specified in [Auto Print] elapses, instead of being printed
immediately. You can forcibly print this pending job without waiting for this time period to
elapse.
If a job is paused by the <Stop> button and is waiting to be resumed, you can also resume
the job. If there are multiple jobs, subsequent jobs are printed after the paused job has been
printed.
Note
• If there are no pending jobs, the [Print Waiting Jobs] button is disabled.
For information on how to set [Auto Print], refer to "Auto Print" (P.296).
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status> button
2
Select [Print Waiting Jobs].
195
10 Job Status
Handling Error Terminations
This section describes how to handle error terminations.
For a Print Job
Select a job shown as an error termination on the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the status
code. Follow the instructions of the status code to solve the problem.
If an error occurs during a print job, the machine can be configured either to pause the print
job until the error is confirmed by the user, or to automatically cancel the error job so that
subsequent jobs can be printed.
For more information on the setting, refer to "Print Service Settings" (P.345).
For information on status codes, refer to "Status Code" (P.553).
For a Fax Job
A Transmission Report - Job Undelivered is printed.
For more information on the Transmission Report - Job Undelivered, refer to "Transmission Report Job Undelivered" (P.268). For more information on how to print the Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered automatically, refer to "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" (P.306).
For a Scan Job
A Transmission Report - Job Undelivered is printed.
For more information on the Transmission Report - Job Undelivered, refer to "Transmission Report Job Undelivered" (P.268). For more information on how to print the Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered automatically, refer to "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" (P.306).
For Other Jobs
Print a Job History Report, and check the execution results.
For information on the Job History Report, refer to "Job History Report" (P.306).
When an status code is listed in the Transmission Report - Job Undelivered or the Job History Report,
refer to "Status Code" (P.553).
196
11 Computer Operations
This chapter describes how to print documents, import scanned files, use Direct Fax, and
operate Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on your computer.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
• The computer screen images shown in this chapter are as of August 2013.
• The procedures in this chapter may vary depending on the driver and utility software being used due
to the upgrades.
• Features Overview ..............................................................................................................198
11 Computer Operations
Features Overview
This section describes an overview of features you can perform from a computer.
Printing
Submits a print job to the machine from a computer.
E-mail Printing
Submits a print job to the machine from a computer by sending e-mail attached with a
document. The received e-mail is automatically printed from the machine according to the
settings on the machine.
Sending Fax
Sends a fax directly from a computer.
Importing Scanned Data
Imports files stored in a folder of the machine to a computer.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Displays the machine status and job status. The feature also allows you to change settings as
well as to import files stored in a folder.
198
12 Paper and Other Media
This chapter describes the paper that can be used with the machine, precautions when
handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
• Print Media Guidelines ......................................................................................................200
• Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................207
• Changing the Paper Settings.............................................................................................214
12 Paper and Other Media
Print Media Guidelines
Print media is paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your machine
provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print
media for your machine helps avoid printing troubles.
This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media, and loading the print
media in the paper trays.
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 gsm xerographic, grain long paper. For the best
print quality in black and white, use 90 gsm xerograhic, grain long paper. It is recommended
that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load
the paper accordingly. See "Loading Paper" (P.207) for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended
that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 gsm grain long. Paper lighter than
60 gsm may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 gsm
grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper
feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the machine, where it
is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped, even in the paper tray, can
contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems regardless of
humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the
Tray 5.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the
toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield
points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the machine
to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use
it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its
performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long,
running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135
gsm paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 gsm, grain short
is preferred.
200
Print Media Guidelines
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper
containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper
handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 gsm xerographic paper. Business
paper designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper
able to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous
emissions.
The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer
or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When
choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the machine:
• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the machine
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit
• Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater
than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print
on these forms.
• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
• Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19
309
• Multiple-part forms or documents
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when
printing on talc or acid paper.
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This
information is usually indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a
paper jam.
• Do not remove the tray while a job is printing.
• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level
surface.
201
12 Paper and Other Media
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the machine.
• Use grain long paper for best results.
• Use only media and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing
process.
• Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink
must withstand temperatures of 225°C without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks
that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you
have selected is acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table for help
when loading letterhead in the print media sources.
Print Media Source
Print Side
Page Orientation
Tray 1
550-sheet feeder
1100-sheet feeder
Face up
Letterhead enters the
machine first
Tray 5
Face down
Letterhead enters the
machine first
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in
manufacturing techniques. However, it may not be possible to print on the paper depending
on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre­
punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already
packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the
machine. This may result in a paper jam.
• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your machine may
require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.
• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.
Transparencies
You can load up to 75 sheets of transparencies in the Tray 1 or 5 for a single print job. It is
recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When printing on transparencies:
• Set the paper type to [Transparency] from the printer driver to avoid damaging your
machine.
202
Print Media Guidelines
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Do not use regular
transparencies. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C without
melting, discoloring, offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies. This may result in poor print quality.
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Non-white transparencies are not supported with the machine.
Selecting Transparencies
The machine can print directly on transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Print
quality and durability depend on the transparency used. It is recommended that you try a
sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
The paper type setting for the Tray 5 should be set to [Transparency] to help prevent jams.
(See "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.214) for detailed information about this setting.)
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether your transparencies are
compatible with laser printers that reach temperatures as high as 205°C. Only use
transparencies that are able to withstand these temperatures without melting, discoloring,
offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note
• For the Tray 1, setting paper size is not required. The Tray 1 detects the paper size automatically. For
more information on supported paper size for the standard and optional trays, see "Supported Paper
Sizes" (P.205).
Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of light
wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any
print media. See "Loading Paper" (P.207) for instructions on loading an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Set the print media source to the paper tray. Set the paper type to [Envelope], and select
the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 gsm paper. You can use up to 105 gsm
weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with
100% cotton content must not exceed 90 gsm weight.
• Use only freshly unpacked, undamaged envelopes.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C without sealing, excessive
curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the
envelopes you are considering, check with the envelope supplier.
• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• To load envelope in the Tray 5, insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and the shortedge of the envelopes facing into the machine. The print side must be facing down.
• See "Loading an Envelope in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.212) for instructions on loading an
envelope.
• Use one envelope size during a print job.
• Ensure the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing
temperatures may seal the envelopes.
• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
- Have excessive curl or twist
- Are stuck together or damaged in any way
203
12 Paper and Other Media
-
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
Have an interlocking design
Have postage stamps attached
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Have nicked edges or bent corners
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Note
• You can load envelopes also on the Tray 1. For more information, see "Loading an Envelope in Trays 1
to 4" (P.209).
Labels
Your machine can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers.
Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand
temperatures of 205°C and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi). It is recommended
that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When printing on labels:
• Set the paper type to [Label] from the printer driver.
• Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray. This may result in a jam.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
• Do not print within 1 mm of the die cut.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting
in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate your machine and your cartridge with adhesive,
and could void your machine and cartridge warranties.
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C without sealing, excessive curling,
wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not print within 1 mm of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts
of the label.
• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended
that zone coating of the adhesive is at least 1 mm away from edges. Adhesive material
contaminates your machine and could void your warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 3 mm strip should be removed on the
leading and driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.
• Remove a 3 mm strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling inside the
machine.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems
and uneven print quality.
• For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C and the relative humidity is 40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
204
Print Media Guidelines
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they
rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional print media.
Supported Paper Sizes
Finisher­
AB1
(Sheet*1)
Finisher­
AB1 (Set*2)
Tray 1
Tray 2 to 4
Tray 5
Duplex
Module
A4
(210 x 297 mm)
0
0
0
0
X
0
A5
(148 x 210 mm)
0
0
0
0
0
X
B5
(182 x 257 mm)
0
0
0
0
X
0
Letter
(8.5 x 11 in.)
0
0
0
0
X
0
Folio
(8.5 x 13 in.)
0
0
0
0
X
0
Legal
(8.5 x 14 in.)
0
0
0
0
X
0
Executive
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
0
0
0
0
X
0
Envelope #10
(4.125 x 9.5 in.)
0*3
X
0
X
0
X
Monarch
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
0*3
X
0
X
0
X
DL
(4.25 x 8.75 in.)
0*3
X
0
X
0
X
C5
(9 x 6.5 in.)
0*3
X
0
X
0
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
Custom
0 : Available
X : Not available
*1 : In this mode, each page is output separately to the left tray.
*2 : In this mode, the document is sorted into sets or jobs and output to the left tray.
*3 : To print envelopes using the Tray 1, you must select the kind of the envelope in the [Tray1] settings. For details, see "Paper
Tray Attributes" (P.397).
205
12 Paper and Other Media
Supported Paper Types
Tray 1
Tray 2 to 4
Duplex
Module
Tray 5
Finisher­
AB1
(Sheet*1)
Finisher­
AB1 (Set*2)
One- Two- One- Two- One- Two- One- Two- One- Two- One- Twosided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided
Plain
Normal
0
X
0
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
0
X
Thick
0
X
0
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
0
X
Normal
0
X
0
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
0
X
Thick
0
X
0
X
0
0
X
X
X
X
0
X
Normal
0
X
X
X
0
0
0
X
0
X
X
X
Thick
0
X
X
X
0
0
X
X
0
X
X
X
Normal
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
Envelope
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
Recycled
0
X
0
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
0
X
Transparency
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
Covers
Coated
Label
0 : Available
X : Not available
*1 : In this mode, each page is output separately to the left tray.
*2 : In this mode, the document is sorted into sets or jobs and output to the left tray.
Paper Type Specifications
Paper Type
206
Weight (gsm)
Remarks
Plain Paper
60-80
-
Plain Thick Paper
81-105
-
Covers
106-162
-
Covers Thick
163-216
-
Coated Normal
106-162
Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Coated Thick
163-216
Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Transparency
-
Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Label Normal
-
Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Label Thick
-
Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Envelopes
-
-
Recycled
-
-
L oading Paper
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper.
Types of paper loaded in trays
The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in a tray, but not
a paper type. Normally, each tray is set to plain paper. When loading paper other than plain
paper, you must change the paper type setting. You can name paper types and can set up to
five paper types as user-defined paper.
For information on changing the paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.214).
Automatic Tray Selection
If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print driver's
screen when printing, the machine automatically selects the paper tray according to the size
and orientation of the document to be printed. This is called the Automatic Tray Selection.
When copying, selecting [Auto Select] for [Paper Supply] enables automatic tray selection.
If the machine detects two or more corresponding trays for the automatic tray selection, the
machine selects the tray with the highest priority specified in [Paper Type Priority] among
the trays set under [Paper Type]. Trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting is set to [Auto
Paper Off] are ignored in automatic tray selection. Also, if the [Paper Type Priority] settings
are identical, the tray priority is determined by [Paper Tray Priority].
Note
• Some trays may not be selected in automatic tray selection depending on the setting of that tray for
[Auto Paper Select]. For more information, refer to "Change Settings" (P.301).
• Tray 5 cannot be selected in automatic tray selection.
• When the paper runs out during copying or printing, select a tray containing the same sized paper and
orientation, and the machine continues copying or printing (Auto Tray Switching feature). The
machine cannot switch to a tray containing a paper type for which [Paper Type Priority] is set to [Auto
Paper Off].
For information about [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], and [Paper Tray Priority] settings, and the
paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.301). You can also set these settings from
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on the
touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Note
• Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting in
paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4
The following describes the procedures to load paper in Trays 1 to 4.
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on the
touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Note
• Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting in
paper jams.
• Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
207
12 Paper and Other Media
1
Pull out the tray until it stops.
Note
• While the machine is processing a job, do not
pull out the tray that is being used for the job.
• To prevent paper jams or erroneous detection
of loaded paper in a tray by the machine, do
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in
the tray. Remove any remaining paper in the
tray, and then load that paper on top of the
newly loaded paper.
2
While pinching the two paper guides, move
them to the edges of the tray.
3
Before loading the paper, flex the sheets back
and forth, and then fan them.
4
Load and align the edge of the paper against
the paper guides, with the side to be copied or
printed on facing up.
5
While pinching the two paper guides, lightly
align the edges to the edge of the paper.
Note
6
Push the tray in gently until it stops.
Note
208
• When loading standard size paper in the tray,
move the paper guides to the marks
corresponding to the paper size.
• When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing the tray in may cause machine malfunction.
L oading Paper
Loading an Envelope in Trays 1 to 4
The following describes the procedures to load an envelope in Trays 1 to 4.
1
Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand
cover to open the cover.
2
Press down the lever to set the envelope mode.
Note
• If you insert media other than envelopes, lift
up the lever.
• To load envelopes using the optional Finisher­
AB1, raise the lever as shown in the
illustration.
• To load print media other than envelopes
using the optional Finisher-AB1, check if the
lever is pulled down as shown in the
illustration.
209
12 Paper and Other Media
3
Close the right hand cover
Note
4
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the machine.
Load the envelope into the tray.
When Loading Envelope#10, Monarch, or
DL
When Loading C5
Note
• Never use envelopes with window, coated
linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the
printer.
• Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap
completely closed.
• If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add
some bending to the lead edge of the
envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
• The amount of the bending should be 5 mm or
less.
210
L oading Paper
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)
When printing or copying on a size or type of paper that cannot be set in Trays 1 to 4, use
Tray 5 (bypass tray). The following describes the procedures to load paper in Tray 5. To use
Tray 5 when printing, select Tray 5 and specify the paper type on the [Paper/Output] tab of
the print driver.
Note
• To prevent paper jams and erroneous detection of paper loaded in the tray by the machine, do not take
out paper of a package until the tray runs out of paper.
• Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting in
paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
1
Open Tray 5.
2
Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray.
The width guides should be fully extended.
3
Load paper with the side to be copied or
printed on facing down, inserting the paper
until its edge lightly touches against the paper
feed entrance.
Note
• Do not force paper into Tray 5.
• Do not load mixed paper types into the tray.
• Do not load paper above the maximum fill line.
It may cause paper jams or machine
malfunction.
• Depending on the type of the heavyweight
paper, paper may not be fed to the machine or
image quality may deteriorate.
4
Adjust the paper guides to align the edges of
the paper loaded.
5
Instruct a copy or print job.
211
12 Paper and Other Media
Loading an Envelope in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)
The following describes the procedures for loading an envelope in Tray 5.
1
Open the right hand cover.
2
Press down the lever to set the envelope mode.
Note
3
Close the right hand cover.
Note
4
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the machine.
Insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and
the short-edge of the envelopes facing into the
printer. Orient the print side facing down and
slide the envelope into the entry slot.
Note
212
• To load the print media other than envelopes,
lift up the lever.
• You can load envelopes up to the maximum fill
line in the tray at one time.
L oading Paper
When Loading Envelope#10, Monarch, or
DL
When Loading C5
Note
• Never use envelopes with window, coated
linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the
printer.
• Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap
completely closed.
• If you do not load envelopes in the Tray 5 right
after they have been removed from the
packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams,
flatten them as shown below when loading
them in the Tray 5.
• If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add
some bending to the lead edge of the
envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
• The amount of the bending should be 5 mm or
less.
Using the Tray 5
• Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
• Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the Tray 5 or when
the machine is printing from the Tray 5. This may result in a paper jam.
• Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of the
print media going into the machine first.
• Do not place objects on the Tray 5. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive force
on it.
213
12 Paper and Other Media
Changing the Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the paper type for Trays and how to set image quality
processing by the individual paper type.
After loading paper in a tray, specify the type of paper loaded and select image quality for the
paper type. Setting image quality for each paper type enables you to print with the most
suitable image quality for the paper type.
For information on image quality processing for each paper type, refer to "Image Quality" (P.303).
Note
• Users can name Custom 1 to Custom 5 displayed in the paper type settings. For information on how to
set names to Custom 1 to Custom 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name/Color" (P.301).
• You can change the paper type setting without entering to the System Administration mode on the
[Setup] screen, which is displayed by selecting [Setup] in the [Home] screen if you configure the
settings in advance. For more information, refer to "Customize Paper Supply Screen" (P.301).
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out> button
2
Enter the system administrator's user ID with
the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator's passcode, and
select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Note
4
214
• When the [Home] screen is not displayed on
the touch screen, press the <Home> button.
Select [System Settings] > [Common Service
Settings] > [Paper Tray Settings].
Changing the Paper Settings
5
Select [Paper Tray Attributes].
6
Select a paper tray for changing the paper type
setting under [Items].
7
Select [Change Settings].
8
Select the [Paper Type], [Paper Size], [Paper
Color], and [Auto Paper Select] respectively.
9
Select [Save], [Confirm], or [Close] repeatedly until the [Paper Tray Settings] screen is
displayed.
10
Select [Image Quality].
Note
11
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
Select the paper type for changing the image
quality settings under [Items], and then select
[Change Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
215
12 Paper and Other Media
216
12
Select the image quality, and then select [Save].
13
Make sure that the paper type you selected is displayed under [Current Settings] of [Items],
and then select [Close].
14
15
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
13 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine, calibrate colors, print
a report/list, and delete a print job with an invalid User ID.
• Replacing Consumables.....................................................................................................218
• Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................240
• Executing Calibration .........................................................................................................248
• Adjusting Color Registration .............................................................................................251
• Printing a Report/List ..........................................................................................................254
• Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID .....................................255
• Setting Restore Tool............................................................................................................256
13 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables
Use the supplies recommended by Dell. Visit the Dell Printer Supplies website at
dell.com/supplies, or order Dell Printer Supplies by phone.
Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts
• Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright.
• Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing
consumables/periodic replacement parts in the following locations:
- In high temperature and humid locations
- Near heat-generating devices
- Areas exposed to direct sunlight
- Dusty areas
• When using consumables/periodic replacement parts, carefully read precautions for use.
Precautions for use are instructed on their bodies or packages, or a precaution sheet is
included in their packages.
• We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
• When calling customer support to order consumables/periodical replacement parts, have
your Dell printer Service Tag available.
• The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Dell could
impair machine quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic replacement
parts recommended by Dell.
Checking the status of consumables
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen.
For information on consumables, refer to "Supplies" (P.274).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Replacing Toner Cartridges.....................................................................................................219
Replacing Waste Toner Container .........................................................................................221
Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M, Y, or K..............................................................................223
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-AB1) ......................................................................227
Replacing Fusing Unit .............................................................................................................228
Replacing Transfer Belt Unit...................................................................................................230
Replacing Transfer Roller ........................................................................................................234
Replacing Separator Rollers.....................................................................................................236
218
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Toner Cartridges
The following messages are displayed on the touch screen depending on the amount of toner
remaining. Replace the toner cartridge according to the message.
Message*1
Remaining Page Yield*2
Please order a Yellow Toner
[Y] Cartridge.
Black: Approx. 3,200 pages
Other than Black: Approx. 2,400
pages
You do not need to replace the
Toner Cartridge immediately.
Order the Toner Cartridge
displayed on the screen.
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge
needs to be replaced soon.
Approx. 20 pages
Replace the toner cartridge with
a new one.
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge
needs to be replaced.
-
Solution
The machine will stop. Replace
the toner cartridge with a new
one.
*1 : The messages in the above table apply to Yellow Toner. "Yellow Toner [Y]" shown in the messages varies depending on the
color and number of the applicable toner.
*2 : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF (
) is used. The value is an estimate and
varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/
print density, output image type, and the machine operating environment.
Note
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• When replacing a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on
the floor beforehand.
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Dell may degrade image quality and performance.
Use only toner cartridges recommended by Dell.
• When the remaining amount of toner is low, the machine may stop printing and display a message. If
this occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying or printing.
• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
• Copy or print density may decrease slightly after the message "Please order a XXX Toner Cartridge"
appears on the touch screen.
• If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge, the number of pages that you can
copy or print after the message "Please order a XXX Toner Cartridge" is displayed may differ
significantly from the values described in the above table.
1
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
2
Press the power switch to the [
to switch the power off.
] position
219
13 Maintenance
3
Open the front cover.
4
Pull out the toner cartridge you want to replace.
Note
• Always pull out the cartridge slowly so that
you do not spill any toner.
• Do not touch the parts shown in the
illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your
hands.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the
toner cartridge.
5
6
Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color.
Shake the toner cartridge 5 to 6 times to
distribute the toner evenly.
Note
• Do not touch the area shown in the illustration
when you shake the cartridge.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the
toner cartridge.
7
Hold the cartridge with the arrow facing up,
and push the cartridge in slowly until it stops.
8
Close the front cover.
Note
220
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Waste Toner Container
The waste toner container holds used toner. The following messages are displayed on the
touch screen according to the status of the waste toner container. Follow the messages as
necessary.
Message
Please order a Waste Toner
Container.
Remaining Page Yield*
Approx. 2,500 pages
The Waste Toner Container
needs to be replaced.
-
Solution
Order the waste toner container.
The machine will stop. Replace
the waste toner container with a
new one.
* : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF (
) is used. The value is an estimate and
varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/
print density, output image type, and machine operating environment.
When replacing the waste toner container, clean the laser scanners located behind the waste
toner container by using the cleaning rod supplied with a new waste toner container to
prevent inconsistencies in density or color in copies and prints.
Note
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Do not touch the five gray-colored sponge parts on the back side of the waste toner container.
Otherwise, your hands may get dirty with toner.
• When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
• The proper disposal of used waste toner containers is required.
• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Dell may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Dell.
1
Make sure that the machine is not operating,
and open the front cover.
2
Hook your finger under the waste toner
container handle.
221
13 Maintenance
3
Pull out the waste toner container slowly while
holding its left side with one hand.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the waste toner
container while you are removing it.
• Do not touch the shutter part as shown in the
illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your
hands.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the
waste toner container.
4
While holding the left side of the waste toner
container, push the container in until it clicks.
5
Close the front cover.
Note
222
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M, Y, or K
The machine displays the following messages when a drum cartridge C, M, Y or K needs to
be replaced. When the message is displayed, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Follow the instructions described below and replace the drum cartridge.
If you continue to copy or print without replacing the drum cartridge after the message is
displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying or printing the number of
pages shown in the following table.
Message
Please order a Drum
Cartridge XX.
Remaining Page Yield
Approx. 10,000 pages
Drum Cartridge needs
to be replaced.
Note
Solution
You do not need to
replace the Drum
Cartridge immediately.
Order the Drum
Cartridge displayed on
the screen.
-
Replace the drum
cartridge with a new
one.
• To protect the drum cartridges against bright light, close the inner cover within five minutes. If the
front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may deteriorate.
• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Dell may degrade image quality and performance.
Use only drum cartridges recommended by Dell.
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not
touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.
) is used. The value is an estimate and
• The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper LEF (
varies depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper orientation, the number of pages
continuously print, and the machine operating environment.
• Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum Cartridge XXX"
appears on the touch screen.
1
2
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
3
Open the front cover.
Press the power switch to the [
switch the power off.
] position to
223
13 Maintenance
4
Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open
it.
5
Grasp the handle of the drum cartridge C, M,
Y, or K indicated in the message and gently
slide out the cartridge.
Note
• When removing the drum cartridge, be careful
not to drop it on the floor.
• The illustrations in this section explains how
to replace the drum cartridge Y, as an
example.
6
Hold the bottom of the drum cartridge as
shown in the illustration, and pull it out from
the machine.
Note
• Do not touch the parts as shown in the
illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your
hands.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the
drum cartridge.
7
Take the new drum cartridge out of the box, and insert the used drum cartridge into the
supplied plastic bag and place it into the box.
Note
• To protect the drum from overexposure to bright light, do not remove the orange protective covering
until you insert the cartridge in the machine.
• Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the drum cartridge.
224
8
Pull out the two ribbons.
9
Slide the cartridge into the correct slot.
Replacing Consumables
10
Remove the orange protective covering of the
installed drum cartridge and discard it.
11
Close the inner cover.
12
Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover
while pressing the cover with the other hand.
13
Remove the cleaning rod from the backside of
the front cover.
225
13 Maintenance
14
Remove the cleaning pad by pressing the amber
gold tabs between your thumb and index finger.
15
16
Unpack a new cleaning pad.
17
Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four
holes until it clicks into the interior of the
machine as shown in the illustration, and then
pull it out.
18
19
Repeat step 17 also on the other three holes. One time insertion is enough for each hole.
20
Close the front cover.
Attach the new cleaning pad to the cleaning
rod.
Return the cleaning rod to its original location.
Note
226
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-AB1)
When the optional Finisher-AB1 is installed and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a
message appears on the touch screen. When the message appears, load a new staple case into
the staple cartridge.
1
Make sure that the machine is not operating,
and open the finisher front cover.
2
Take the staple cartridge out of the finisher.
3
After you take out the staple cartridge, check
inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.
4
Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with
your fingers (1), and remove the staple case
from the cartridge (2).
5
Insert the front side of the new staple case into
the staple cartridge (1), and then push the rear
side into the cartridge (2).
227
13 Maintenance
6
Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until
it clicks into place.
7
Close the finisher front cover.
Note
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a message appears and the machine will remain paused.
Replacing Fusing Unit
When the fusing unit is near or reaches the end of its life, the following messages are
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the messages.
Message
Consumables need to
be ordered. Press
Machine Status button
and select the Supplies
tab for details.
Consumables need to
be replaced. Press
Machine Status button
and select the Supplies
tab for details.
Note
Remaining Page Yield
Approx. 20,000 pages
Solution
Order the fusing unit.
-
Replace the fusing unit
with a new one.
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• To avoid burns, do not replace the fusing unit immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes
extremely hot during use.
1
2
228
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
Press the power switch to the [
] position to
switch the power off and wait for 30 minutes
before removing the fusing unit.
Replacing Consumables
3
Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open
the cover.
4
Hold the fusing unit by the grips on both sides,
and remove the fusing unit from the machine.
5
6
Take out a new fusing unit from the box.
Hold the new fusing unit by the grips on both
sides, and then place the fusing unit onto the
machine.
Note
7
• Hold the fusing unit with both hands so that
you do not drop it.
Close the right hand cover.
Note
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the machine.
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
8
Switch on the main power, and then switch on the power.
For information on how to switch on the power and the main power, refer to "Power Source"
(P.34).
229
13 Maintenance
Replacing Transfer Belt Unit
When the transfer belt unit is near or reaches the end of its life, the following messages are
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the messages.
Message
Consumables need to
be ordered. Press
Machine Status button
and select the Supplies
tab for details.
Consumables need to
be replaced. Press
Machine Status button
and select the Supplies
tab for details.
Note
Remaining Page Yield
Approx. 30,000 pages
Solution
Order the Transfer Belt
Kit.
-
Replace the Transfer
Belt Kit with a new one.
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt unit.
Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print quality.
• To protect the drum cartridges from overexposure to bright light, close the inner cover within five
minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may degrade.
230
1
2
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
3
Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open
the cover.
Press the power switch to the [
] position to
switch the power off and wait for 30 minutes
before removing the transfer belt unit.
Replacing Consumables
4
Open the front cover.
5
Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open
it.
6
Grasp the handle on the front of the transfer
belt unit.
7
Pull out the transfer belt unit until the line on
the unit becomes completely visible.
8
Grasp the handles on the top of the transfer
belt unit. Pull out the unit to remove it from
the machine.
231
13 Maintenance
Note
9
Slide the blue tab back-and-forth five times to
clean the conductivity temperature depth
sensor.
Note
232
• Do not hold the parts shown in the illustration.
• Be careful not to touch the fusing unit. It can
burn your fingers.
10
Unpack a new transfer belt unit and place the
unit on a level surface.
11
Remove the protective parts shown in the
illustration.
Replacing Consumables
12
Grasp the handles on top of the transfer belt
unit.
Note
• Do not hold the sides of the transfer belt unit.
It may degrade print quality.
13
Align the arrows on the transfer belt unit with
the arrows on the machine.
14
Slide the unit into the machine and stop when
the visible line reaches the machine.
15
Lower the handles.
16
Push the front of the transfer belt unit to
reinstall it in the machine until it stops.
233
13 Maintenance
17
Close the inner cover.
18
Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover
while pressing the cover with the other hand.
19
Close the front cover.
20
Close the right hand cover.
Note
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the machine.
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Replacing Transfer Roller
Note
1
2
234
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
Press the power switch to the [
switch the power off.
] position to
Replacing Consumables
3
Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open
the cover.
4
Unlock the two levers on the transfer roller and
lift up the roller to remove it.
5
Grasp the levers on both sides of the new
transfer roller and align the arrows on the
transfer roller with the arrows inside the
machine.
6
Lower the front of the transfer roller to until
the roller clicks into place.
7
Close the right hand cover.
Note
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the machine.
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
235
13 Maintenance
Replacing Separator Rollers
There are three separator rollers in the machine which need to be replaced periodically. One
is in the tray and the others are inside the machine. All the separator rollers are replaced in
the same way as described in this section.
Replacing the Separator Roller in a tray
1
Remove the tray from the machine.
Note
236
• Remove all paper or media from the tray
before pulling the tray out of the machine.
2
Turn the separator roller cover to the left to
open it, and then hold the cover.
3
Turn the separator roller cartridge to the right.
4
Pull out the rear axle, then the front axle from
the holes of the tray and remove the separator
roller cartridge.
5
Prepare a new separator roller.
Replacing Consumables
6
Turn the separator roller cover to the left to
open it, and then hold the cover.
7
Slide the front axle, then the rear axle of the
separator roller cartridge in the holes of the
tray.
8
Turn the separator roller cartridge to the left to
fix it in place.
9
Turn the separator roller cover to the right to
close it.
10
Load paper in the tray and replace the tray in
the machine.
237
13 Maintenance
Replacing the Separator Rollers Inside the Machine
1
Remove the tray from the machine.
2
Push the left part of the chute upper feed and
pull down the unit to remove it.
3
Turn the separator roller until the roller hook is
visible.
Note
238
• The roller is located approximately 165 mm
(6.5 inches) inside the machine when
measured from the face of the proper tray
opening.
4
Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove
on the axle, and then slide the separator roller
to the front.
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove the other separator rollers.
Prepare two new separator rollers.
Replacing Consumables
7
Align the hole of the new separator roller with
the axle.
8
Slide the separator roller along the axle so the
protrusions fit completely into the slots and the
roller hook reseats into the groove on the axle.
9
10
11
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to install the other separator roller.
Put the chute upper feed back in place.
Replace the tray into the machine.
239
13 Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
This section describes how to clean the machine such as the machine exterior, document
cover, document feeder, and document glass.
Cleaning the Exterior
The following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.
Note
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the machine as
they might discolor, deform, or crack covers.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or
damage documents during copying.
1
Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth
moistened with water.
Note
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• If you cannot remove the dirt easily, gently
wipe the machine with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
2
Wipe off any excess water with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Interior (Laser Scanners)
The following describes how to clean the interior (laser scanners or Raster Output Scanner
(ROS)) of the machine.
Normally, clean the laser scanners when you replace the drum cartridges or waste toner
container. However, if you have image quality problems such as white or colored stripes
appear on copied or printed outputs, clean the laser scanners.
Note
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Clean the laser scanners periodically when you replace the drum cartridges or waste toner container.
1
240
Make sure that the machine is not operating,
and open the front cover.
Cleaning the Machine
2
Remove the cleaning rod from the backside of
the front cover.
3
Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four
holes until it clicks into the interior of the
machine as shown in the illustration, and then
pull it out.
4
Return the cleaning rod to its original location.
5
Close the front cover.
Note
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) Sensor
Note
• To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from the
grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt unit.
Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print quality.
• To protect the drum cartridges from overexposure to bright light, close the inner cover within five
minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may degrade.
1
Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in process.
241
13 Maintenance
242
2
Press the power switch to the [
switch the power off.
3
Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open
the cover.
4
Open the front cover.
5
Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open
it.
6
Grasp the handle on the front of the transfer
belt unit.
] position to
Cleaning the Machine
7
Pull out the transfer belt unit until the line on
the unit becomes completely visible.
8
Grasp the handles on the top of the transfer
belt unit. Pull out the unit to remove it from
the machine.
Note
9
Slide the blue tab back-and-forth five times.
Note
10
• Do not hold the parts shown in the illustration.
• Be careful not to touch the fusing unit. It can
burn your fingers.
Grasp the handles on top of the transfer belt
unit.
Note
• Do not hold the sides of the transfer belt unit.
It may degrade print quality.
243
13 Maintenance
244
11
Align the arrows on the transfer belt unit with
the arrows on the machine.
12
Slide the unit into the machine and stop when
the visible line reaches the machine.
13
Lower the handles.
14
Push the front of the transfer belt unit to
reinstall it in the machine until it stops.
15
Close the inner cover.
Cleaning the Machine
16
Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover
while pressing the cover with the other hand.
17
Close the front cover.
18
Close the right hand cover.
Note
• When closing the right hand cover, apply your
hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in
the illustration, and then press the cover firmly
toward the printer.
• If the front cover is not closed completely, a
message appears and the machine will remain
paused.
Cleaning the Touch Screen
This section describes how to clean the touch screen of the machine.
1
Wipe the LCD only with a soft cloth moistened
with neutral detergent or alcohol.
Note
• Do not apply too much neutral detergent or
alcohol. Squeeze out excess moisture before
you wipe the LCD if the fluid drips.
• Do not use volatile solvent such as benzene
and paint thinner or insect killer. Doing so
might cause discolored, deformed, or cracked
parts.
• Wipe the panel softly, otherwise, the parts
might be damaged.
245
13 Maintenance
Cleaning Document Cover and Document Glass
If the document cover and document glass become soiled, smudges may appear on copies,
faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.
To ensure clear copies at all times, clean the document cover and the document glass about
once a month.
Note
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating
on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or
damage documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.
1
Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth
moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Note
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the document cover with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent.
2
Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth
moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Note
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the document glass with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent.
Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass
If the white chute or constant velocity transport glass become soiled, smudges may appear
on copies, faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document
sizes.
To ensure clear copies at all times, clean the white chute and the constant velocity transport
glass about once a month.
Note
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating
on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or
damage documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.
1
Wipe the white chute with a soft cloth
moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Note
• Do not press the film with an excessive force
as it can be easily damaged.
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the film with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
246
Cleaning the Machine
2
Wipe the constant velocity transport glass with
a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any
dirt, and then wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
Note
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the glass with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers
If the document feeder rollers become soiled, smudges may appear on copies, faxes, or
scanned documents and paper jams may occur.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document feeder roller about once a month.
Note
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating
on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or
damage documents during copying, faxing, scanning, or printing.
1
Pull up the knob on the left cover of the
document feeder, and open the cover
completely.
Note
2
• When you fully open the cover, it enters a
fixed position. Open the cover gently.
While turning the rollers, wipe them with a soft
cloth moistened with water.
Note
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
• Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water
drops from falling into the machine. If water
gets into the machine, it may cause the
machine to malfunction.
• If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the rollers with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
3
Close the document feeder left cover until it clicks into place, and confirm that there is no
space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.
247
13 Maintenance
Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors when the reproducibility of density or color
in copies and prints deteriorates. The machine can adjust the gradation for each screen type.
The following three screen types of screen are available.
• Copy Job
Calibrates the screen for [Text], [Photo & Text], or [Map] of [Original Type].
• Print Job 1
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen used for the functions [Image Quality], [Image Adjustment
Mode], and [Image Types]set in the [Color Options] tab.
- Calibrates the screen when [Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] is selected for
[Screen] on the [Advanced] tab.
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] or [High Resolution] of [Image Quality] and
[Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is
selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Fineness] or
[Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
• Print Job 2
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [Gradation] is selected for [Screen] in the [Advanced] tab
(except when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
- Calibrates the screen when [Print Page Mode] is selected in the [Advanced] tab (except
when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] or [High Resolution] of [Image Quality] and
[Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Auto Screening] or
[Gradation] of [Screen] on the [Color Options] tab is selected.
Note
• It is recommended to execute calibration for each of the four screen types. After calibration for the
first screening type, select the next screen type and repeat the procedure.
• When the printed colors do not seem to have been corrected properly despite regular calibration,
contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
• Make sure that the following settings are specified under [Tools] > [Copy Service Settings] > [Copy
Defaults] in the System Administration mode before calibration.
-Lighten/Darken: Normal
-Contrast: Normal
-Sharpness: Normal
-Saturation: Normal
-Color Balance: 0, 0, 0
-Color Shift: Normal
• You can change the above [Copy Defaults] settings after calibration.
• For information on [Copy Defaults], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.317).
• During calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.
248
Executing Calibration
The following describes how to calibrate the machine.
1
Select [Calibration] on the [Home] screen.
Note
• When the [Home] screen is not displayed on
the touch screen, press the <Home> button.
• You can also access [Calibration] under [Tools]
> [System Settings] > [Common Service
Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment] >
[Calibration].
2
Select [Screen Type], [Paper Supply] and
[Target].
Note
• [Copy Job] is selected here as an example.
• For Paper Supply, select the paper tray on
which A4 or 8.5 x 11" white paper is
loaded.
• For Target, select from [Copy & Print Jobs],
[Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and
[None].
3
Select [Start].
Note
4
• A message saying "Outputting the Calibration
Chart... - Copy Job " appears, and the machine
prints the Calibration Chart.
Place the Calibration Chart face down on the
document glass with the magenta marks on
corners on your left hand side.
Note
• Place the Calibration Chart on the document
glass.
5
Place at least five sheets of white paper on the
Calibration Chart to cover the Chart and close
the document cover.
6
Select [Start].
Magenta
The machine starts calibration. It takes about 10 seconds to complete the calibration.
The calibration result will be shown on the screen.
7
8
Select [Confirm].
To execute calibration for another screen type, repeat steps 2 to 7.
249
13 Maintenance
9
10
11
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Copy to confirm the image quality.
Note
• During calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs or faxes.
• After executing the calibration, you can manually perform horizontal color calibration. For more
information, refer to "Adjusting Color Registration" (P.90).
12
250
Select [Close].
Adjusting Color Registration
Adjusting Color Registration
Allows you to calibrate the color registration automatically or manually.
Note
• The color registration is automatically adjusted and usually without any user action. However, if the
misregistration becomes large during the next automatic adjustment from the last adjustment, you can
adjust the color registration using this feature.
Auto Color Registration
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out> button
2
Enter the System Administrator’s user ID with
the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the System Administrator’s passcode, and
select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Note
4
• When the [Home] screen is not displayed on
the touch screen, press the <Home> button.
Select [System Settings] > [Common Service
Settings] > [Maintenance].
251
13 Maintenance
252
5
Select [
6
Select [Adjust Color Registration].
7
Select [Auto Color Registration].
8
Select [Start].
] to display the next screen.
Adjusting Color Registration
Side Color Registration
After executing the automatic color calibration, you can manually adjust the horizontal
colors for yellow, magenta, and cyan by entering values.
Note
• Use Tray 5 and plain A4 size paper for this feature.
1
2
Repeat step 1 to 6 from the previous section.
3
Insert a A4 paper into Tray 5, and press [Sample Printout].
Select [Side Color Registration].
Note
4
• An error occurs if any paper other than A4 paper is set to Tray 5.
Find the values of the straightest lines from the
LY (left) and RY (right) patterns for yellow.
(Left)
Yellow
Cyan
5
Select [Yellow] and enter the values that you
found in the color registration chart to make
adjustments.
6
7
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for [Magenta] and [Cyan].
(Lead Edge)
Magenta
(Right)
Yellow
Cyan
Press [Adjust].
253
13 Maintenance
Printing a Report/List
You can print a report/list to check the settings and communication status.
This section describes how to print a report/ list.
Note
• When the <Data> indicator is not lit, you cannot print the Stored File List.
For information on the types of report/list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
1
Press the <Machine Status> button.
<Machine Status> button
2
Select [Print Reports].
Note
• If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set
to [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button
appears only when the [Tools] button is
displayed on the [Home] screen. For more
information on [Reports], refer to "Reports"
(P.305).
• If you want to print [Billing Data List] or
[Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)], insert a card to
the machine before instructing print.
254
3
Select the service that you want a report or list
for.
4
Select a report or list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID
When the Private Charge Print feature is used, all the print jobs with a User ID, regardless
of its validity, are stored with the Private Charge Print feature. The system administrator can
set the expiration date and can set up the machine to delete the expired jobs automatically,
or manually delete them.
This section describes how to delete documents with an invalid User ID stored with the
Private Charge Print feature.
For more information on how to set the period of time save jobs, refer to "Stored File Settings"
(P.374).
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with
the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator's passcode, and
select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
Press the <Job Status> button.
5
6
7
Select [Private Charge Print].
Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.
Select the User ID of the job to delete, and then select [Job List].
Select the job to delete, and then select [Delete].
255
13 Maintenance
Setting Restore Tool
Setting Restore Tool backs up the settings data of the machine to a network-connected
computer to prevent the loss of data resulting from the malfunction of the machine's hard
disk.
The feature is designed to restore data to the machine after the hard disk is replaced.
For more information on Setting Restore Tool, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
The following data can be backed up on the computer:
• Address Book
• Folder (except for document files)
• User account list
• Job Flow
• Stored Programming
• Job log
• Error log
• Auditron log
• Other information such as user setting data
Users cannot replace the hard disk by themselves. When replacing the hard disk, contact
Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
256
14 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
• Overview of Machine Status.............................................................................................258
• Machine Information ..........................................................................................................259
• Faults......................................................................................................................................273
• Supplies.................................................................................................................................274
• Billing Information ..............................................................................................................275
14 Machine Status
Overview of Machine Status
You can check machine status and the number of printed pages on the screen. You can also
print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered information.
1
Press the <Machine Status> button.
<Machine Status> button
You can check the following information on the [Machine Status] screen:
Machine Information
You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting status.
You can also change or set print modes, and check the number of pages printed per meter or
per user. You can also print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and
registered information.
For more information, refer to "Machine Information" (P.259).
Faults
You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.273).
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables.
For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.274).
Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by meter.
For more information, refer to "Billing Information" (P.275).
258
Machine Information
Machine Information
On the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the machine configuration and paper
tray status, print various reports/lists, and change and set print mode settings.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
General Information................................................................................................................ 259
Paper Tray Status .................................................................................................................... 260
Print Reports............................................................................................................................ 260
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists ...................................................................................... 268
Overwrite Hard Disk ............................................................................................................... 269
Print Mode............................................................................................................................... 269
Fax Receiving Mode ................................................................................................................ 272
1
2
Press the <Machine Status> button.
On the [Machine Information] screen
displayed, you can check the machine status.
General Information
In the [General Information] area, you can check the serial number of the machine, machine
configuration, and software version.
1
Check the general information.
Website:
Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation.
Machine Serial Number:
Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Service Tag / Express Code:
Displays the Service Tag and the Express Code of the machine.
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the machine.
Machine Configuration
Displays the [Machine Configuration] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.260).
Software Version
Displays the [Software Version] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Software Version] Screen" (P.260).
259
14 Machine Status
[Machine Configuration] Screen
You can check the machine configuration.
1
2
Select [Machine Configuration].
Check the machine configuration on the screen
displayed.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
[Software Version] Screen
You can check the software version.
1
2
Select [Software Version].
Check the software versions.
Paper Tray Status
You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the following
items:
• Status
• % Full (Amount of paper remaining)
• Paper Size
• Paper Type
1
2
Select [Paper Tray Status].
Check the status of the paper trays.
Print Reports
The following describes how to print a report and a list.
Note
1
260
• The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.
Select [Print Reports].
Machine Information
2
Select the type of a report or a list to print.
Note
• The screen on the right appears when the
[Tools] button is displayed on the [Home]
screen.
Job Status / Activity Report
1
Select [Job Status / Activity Report].
Note
• To display the [Job Status / Activity Report] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then
select [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Status / Activity Report].
2
Select a report or a list to print.
3
Press the <Start> button.
Job History Report
You can check the status or result of each job. Up to 200 latest jobs can be printed. Select a
report to print from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan & Fax Jobs], [File
Transfer Jobs], or [Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].
Selecting [Include Child Jobs] check box prints each related job on each line. Deselecting
this check box prints the multiple related jobs (such as job flow jobs) on one line.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.
For information on the auto print of a job history report, refer to "Reports" (P.305). When you set the
machine to print a job history report automatically, the machine prints the results of all jobs.
Error History Report
You can print information on errors occurred in the machine. The latest 50 errors are printed.
Activity Report
You can check whether transmissions completed successfully or not. The remote terminal
name and the result and status are recorded by sorting into incoming or outgoing fax.
The following information is not included in the Activity Report.
• Redialed transmissions and pollings.
• When the power is shut off, or when a system error occurs during an activity.
• Deleted documents that were waiting to be transmitted.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print the [Activity Report] every 100
activities.
For information on the settings, refer to "Reports" (P.305).
Stored File List
You can print a list of uncompleted jobs (uncompleted transmissions/receptions or those
stored for polling) stored in folders.
261
14 Machine Status
Copy Reports
1
Select [Copy Reports].
Note
2
3
• To display the [Copy Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Copy Reports].
Select [Configuration Report].
Press the <Start> button.
Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy settings
of the machine.
Note
• The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
Printer Reports
1
Select [Printer Reports].
Note
2
Select a list to print.
Note
3
• To display the [Printer Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Printer Reports].
• The items displayed vary depending on the
options installed.
Press the <Start> button.
Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy settings
of the machine with the report.
Note
• The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
PCL Settings List
Prints the settings for the PCL printer.
PCL Macro List
Prints the list of forms registered for PCL.
PDF Settings List
Prints the settings configured in the PDF printer mode.
TIFF / JPEG Settings List
Prints the settings configured in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.
262
Machine Information
TIFF / JPEG Logical Printers List
Prints the list of logical printers created in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.
Note
• You can configure the setting for TIFF and JPEG logical printers using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
PostScript Logical Printers List
Prints the list of logical printers created in PostScript.
Note
• You can configure the setting for PostScript logical printers using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
ESC/P Settings List
Prints the settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.
ESC/P Logical Printers List
Prints the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.
HP-GL/2 Settings List
Prints the settings for the HP-GL®, HP-GL/2® and HP-RTL emulation modes.
HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List
Prints the stored programming settings for the HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and HP-RTL emulation
modes.
HP-GL/2 Palette List
Prints the sample list in 256 colors that can be set with the pen attribute on HP-GL and HP­
GL/2 emulation modes.
Font List
Prints the list of fonts available on the machine.
Note
• Information printed varies depending on the options installed.
PCL Font List
Prints the fonts available in PCL.
PostScript Font List
Prints the fonts available in PostScript.
Scan Reports
1
Select [Scan Reports].
Note
2
3
• To display the [Scan Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Scan Reports].
Select a list to print.
Press the <Start> button.
Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, and Domain Filter
List. Select a list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
263
14 Machine Status
• Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note
• The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
• Scan / Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Scan feature and the Fax feature.
• Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions.
Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers. When you specify a range of address
numbers, the list of settings for the specified address numbers is printed. Each page contains
the settings information on 50 address numbers.
1
2
3
Select [Address Book].
Specify a range of address numbers to print.
Press the <Start> button.
Fax Reports
1
Select [Fax Reports].
Note
2
3
• To display the [Fax Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Fax Reports].
Select a list to print.
Press the <Start> button.
Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, Folder Selector
List, Inbound Fax Spam List, and Domain Filter List. Select a list to print, and then press
the <Start> button.
• Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note
• The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
• Scan / Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Fax feature and the Scan feature.
264
Machine Information
Note
• The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
• Folder Selector List
You can check the settings for the Folder Sorting feature.
• Inbound Fax Spam List
You can check the settings for the G3-ID (telephone numbers) for which fax reception is
restricted.
• Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions.
Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers (speed dial), fax group recipients, and
relay stations.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the lists of settings for the specified address
numbers and relay stations are printed. Each page contains the settings information on 50
address numbers.
For information on how to register speed dial and fax group recipients, refer to "Add Address Book
Entry" (P.390) and "Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.396).
Selecting [Address Book] displays the screen for specifying a range of address numbers.
Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.
• Fax Group Recipients
You can print the list of settings for Fax Group Recipients.
• Select All
You can print the lists of settings for all address numbers, fax group recipients, and relay
stations.
Fax Comments List
You can check the registered comments to use on fax cover sheets.
Billing Data List
You can check the registration status of the billing data.
Note
• [Billing Data List] is displayed when [Fax Service] is set to [Enable Accounting] under [Accounting] >
[Accounting Type] > [Local Accounting] > [Auditron Mode].
Selecting [Billing Data List] displays the screen for specifying a range of address numbers.
Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.
265
14 Machine Status
• Select All
You can print the list of all billing data.
Folder List
Prints the list of folder settings and the procedure for saving files to folders.
Note
• [Folder List] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Home] screen.
For information on how to create a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
1
Select [Folder List].
Note
2
3
• To display the [Folder List] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Folder List].
Select a range of folder numbers to print.
Press the <Start> button.
Job Counter Report
Prints the counter report for each job. You can check the breakdown of the number of actual
use of the machine by feature (such as the number of pages printed and the number of times
used) and cumulative time when the machine is used (such as runtime, standby time, Low
Power mode, Sleep mode, and power-off time) by minutes on the Job Counter Report.
Note
1
Select [Job Counter Report].
Note
2
3
• [Job Counter Report] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Home] screen.
• To display the [Job Counter Report] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Counter Report].
Select [Job Counter Report].
Press the <Start> button.
Auditron Reports
You can print an auditron report by each user. Note that the content on the screen differs
depending on whether the Auditron mode for services is enabled or not.
Note
• [Auditron Reports] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Home] screen.
• You cannot output the report to a file.
When [Accounting Type] is set to other than [Local Accounting]
When [Accounting Type] of each service is set to other than [Local Accounting], the
following screen appears, allowing you to print a Meter Report (Print Jobs).
1
Select [Auditron Reports].
Note
266
• To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
Machine Information
2
3
Select [Meter Report (Print Jobs)].
Press the <Start> button.
Meter Report (Print Jobs)
You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each client (job
owner). [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting]
When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting], the [Auditron Reports] screen
appears. You can print the auditron report per user for the services of which the Auditron
mode is set to [Enable Accounting].
For information on enabling the Auditron feature for each service, refer to "Accounting" (P.398).
1
Select [Auditron Reports].
Note
• To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, press the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
2
Select an auditron report to print.
3
Select a range of user numbers to print.
Note
4
• Selecting [Select All] selects all users.
Press the <Start> button.
Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)
You can check the total number of pages copied and printed on the machine. If the limit is
set for the number of pages or colors that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value.
[Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is initialized.
Note
• [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered
under [Accounting] or [Authentication / Security Settings].
Auditron Report (Print Jobs)
You can check the total number of pages printed and sheets of paper used for each client (job
owner). [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
Note
• When [Print Service] is set to [Disable Accounting] in [Auditron Mode] under [Accounting Type],
[Meter Report (Print Jobs)] is displayed instead of [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)]. For more information
on [Meter Report (Print Jobs)], refer to "Meter Report (Print Jobs)" (P.267).
• [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered
under [Accounting] or [Authentication / Security Settings].
267
14 Machine Status
Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)
You can check the total number of pages scanned with the machine. If the limit is set for the
number of pages that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value. [Auditron Report
(Scan Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is initialized.
Note
• [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered
under [Accounting] or [Authentication / Security Settings].
Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)
You can check the total number of fax transmissions/receptions and the total number of
pages transmitted for each user.
Note
• [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered
under [Accounting] or [Authentication / Security Settings].
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists
Some reports/lists related to the Fax and Scan services can be printed only automatically.
The following describes reports/lists that can be printed automatically.
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered
The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on a
network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail fails. When a fax transmission fails, this
report is also printed. You can check a thumbnail of the scanned data and its transmission
result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File
Transfer Report" (P.306).
For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission
Report - Job Undelivered" (P.306).
Transmission Report
The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on a
network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail succeeds. When a fax transmission
succeeds, this report is also printed. You can check a thumbnail of the scanned data and its
transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File
Transfer Report" (P.306).
For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission
Report - Job Undelivered" (P.306).
Folder Report
You can confirm that a document is stored in a folder.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Folder Report" (P.306).
Broadcast Report
You can check the result of a broadcast transmission. The recipients and transmission result/
status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a broadcast transmission
is completed.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll
Report" (P.306).
268
Machine Information
Multi-Poll Report
You can check the result of a multi-poll communication (polling from multiple recipients).
The remote terminal name and transmission result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a multi-poll transmission
is completed.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll
Report" (P.306).
Job Flow Error Report
This report notifies job flow errors. The date and time of the error occurred and the status
codes are printed.
You can set not to print out the Job Flow Error Report automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Job Flow Error Report"
(P.306).
Overwrite Hard Disk
You can check the overwriting status of the hard disk. "Overwriting" indicates that the
overwriting is in progress. "Standby" indicates that the overwriting is completed.
Note
1
2
• [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is enabled under [Authentication / Security
Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.415).
Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].
Check the overwriting status of the hard disk.
Print Mode
You can print the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode and
retrieve the programming.
Note
1
2
• The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
Select [Print Mode].
Select [Off-line] or [On-line].
Off-line
The machine does not accept data from a computer. Any data being sent is cancelled and
not printed.
269
14 Machine Status
On-line
The machine accepts data from a computer.
3
Select a printer language to set a print mode.
4
Set each item.
Note
• The items displayed vary depending on the
printer language.
Retrieve Programming
You can retrieve and use settings registered in memory.
1
2
Select [Retrieve Programming].
Select the memory number to use.
Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in the memory.
Programming
You can check or change the value set for the print mode item number.
270
1
2
Select [Programming].
3
4
Select [Confirm].
5
6
Enter [New Value] with the numeric keypad.
Enter the item number of the feature to set in
[Item Number] with the numeric keypad.
Select [Change Value].
Select [Save].
Machine Information
Store / Delete Programming
For ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations, you can register settings in memory.
You can register up to 20 print modes for ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations.
1
2
Select [Store / Delete Programming].
Select [Store Current Selections] or [Delete].
Store Current Selections
Stores the current selections. If you select a
number already used, its settings will be
overwritten with the new settings. The
overwritten settings cannot be restored.
Delete
Select this to delete a programming.
Note
3
• Deleted settings cannot be restored.
Select the memory number to store or to delete.
Default Programming
You can start the machine using the settings stored in memory as default settings.
1
2
Select [Default Programming].
Select [Factory Defaults] or [Custom Settings].
Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
Custom Settings
3
Displays the numbers stored in memory.
When you select [Custom Settings], select a
memory number to use.
4
Select [Save].
Password
For PDF Direct Print, if a password is set for files, set the password here in advance. PDF
files can be printed only when the passwords assigned and entered are the same.
You can use up to 32 characters for the password.
1
2
Select [Password].
Enter a password of up to 32 single-byte characters with the keyboard displayed, and select
[Save].
271
14 Machine Status
Fax Receiving Mode
You can set a mode for receiving faxes.
1
2
Select [Fax Receiving Mode].
Select a fax receiving mode.
Manual Receive
The machine manually receives faxes from a
remote machine. This mode is convenient to
confirm the sender or use an external telephone
before receiving faxes.
Auto Receive
The machine automatically receives faxes.
3
272
Select [Save].
Faults
Faults
This section describes how to check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
The error history report shows the list of the latest 50 errors. The items printed include the
date and time, status code, and error category.
The following describes how to print the error history report.
1
2
3
Press the <Machine Status> button.
4
Press the <Start> button.
Select the [Faults] tab.
Select [Error History Report].
Note
• You can also access [Error History Report] under [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Status
/ Activity Report].
• If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set to [Disabled], the [Error History Report] button does not
appear on the screen. For more information on [Reports], refer to "Reports" (P.305).
273
14 Machine Status
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "OK", "Replace Soon (Order Now)", or "Replace Now".
The following describes the procedure to check the status of consumables.
For information on replacing consumables, refer to "Maintenance" (P.217).
1
2
Press the <Machine Status> button.
Select the [Supplies] tab and confirm the status
of the toners.
Note
3
• Pressing a supply name displays a screen
about the status of the supply.
Select [Toner] from the drop-down list box, and
then select [Other Consumables] and confirm
the status of the consumables.
On the [Supplies] screen, you can check the following items:
• Black Toner [K]
• Drum Cartridge [K]
• Cyan Toner [C]
• Waste Toner Container
• Magenta Toner [M]
• Staple Cartridge
• Yellow Toner [Y]
• Drum Cartridge [Y]
• Drum Cartridge [M]
• Drum Cartridge [C]
Note
• If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge
removed from another Dell C5765dn Color Laser Multifunction Printer), the status displayed may differ
from the actual remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new
ones.
• The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
• Select [
274
] to display the previous screen or [
] to display the next screen.
Billing Information
Billing Information
On the [Billing Information] screen, you can check the number of pages printed per meter
or user.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
Billing Information .................................................................................................................. 275
User Account Billing Information .......................................................................................... 276
1
2
Press the <Machine Status> button.
Select the [Billing Information] tab.
Billing Information
You can check the total number of copies and pages printed by individual meters.
1
2
Select [Billing Information].
On the screen, check each meter.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Color Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in full color.
Black Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in black and white, and pages faxed*1.
Color Large Impressions
Displays the total number of pages printed in large-size full color.
Note
• The value is fixed to 0.
275
14 Machine Status
Total Impressions
Displays the total number of Color Impressions and Black Impressions.
Note
• When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the application is
printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white on the monitor are
printed in color. In this case, Color Impressions is used for counting the number of prints.
• *1 is applied on machines equipped with the Fax features. Only B/W and not color is supported for
Faxes.
User Account Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by user.
When the Auditron mode is enabled, you can check the billing meters for the currently
authenticated user ID.
Note
• [User Account Billing Information] is displayed when the [Accounting Type] is set to [Local
Accounting].
For more information on the Auditron mode, refer to "Accounting" (P.398).
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
To check the billing meter of a currently authenticated user ID
1) Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad
or the keyboard displayed on the screen, and
select [Enter].
When a password is required, select [Next]
and enter the user's passcode, and select
[Enter].
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.
To check the system administrator meter
1) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.
2
3
276
Select the [Billing Information] tab.
Select [User Account Billing Information].
Billing Information
4
Select a meter to check.
Note
• The meters are displayed only for the features
set to [Enable Accounting] in the Auditron
mode.
Meter (Copy Jobs)
Displays the number of pages copied.
Meter (Scan Jobs)
Displays the number of pages scanned.
Meter (Print Jobs)
Displays the number of pages printed.
Note
• [Meter (Print Jobs)] is not displayed for the system administrator.
277
14 Machine Status
278
15 Tools
Each feature of the machine is set to the factory default (initial) settings, but you can
customize these settings in accordance with your environment. To change or customize
these settings, enter the System Administration mode and make changes in the [Tools]
screen.
This chapter describes the features that can be changed and the procedures to change the
settings.
• System Settings Procedure ...............................................................................................280
• Tools Menu List....................................................................................................................284
• Common Service Settings..................................................................................................295
• Copy Service Settings.........................................................................................................316
• Connectivity & Network Setup .........................................................................................324
• Print Service Settings.........................................................................................................345
• Scan Service Settings ........................................................................................................352
• Fax Service Settings ...........................................................................................................359
• E-mail Service Settings......................................................................................................368
• Folder Service Settings ......................................................................................................371
• Job Flow Service Settings.................................................................................................372
• Media Print Service Settings ............................................................................................373
• Stored File Settings.............................................................................................................374
• Web Applications Service Setup .....................................................................................376
• Web Browser Setup............................................................................................................379
• Setup ......................................................................................................................................381
• Accounting............................................................................................................................398
• Authentication/Security Settings .....................................................................................407
15 Tools
System Settings Procedure
To change or customize the system settings, enter the System Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows the
reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode ......................................................................280
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode .......................................280
Step 3 Selecting [Tools] ..........................................................................................................281
Step 4 Selecting a Tab on the [Tools] Screen ........................................................................281
Step 5 Setting a Feature ..........................................................................................................283
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode.........................................................................283
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login
information field on the touch screen.
<Log In/Out> button
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode
To enter the System Administration mode, enter the System Administrator’s User ID. If
[Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [On] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy], you need to enter the passcode.
We recommend that you change the System Administrator’s User ID and passcode
immediately after installing the machine.
For more information on how to change the passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings"
(P.407).
1
Enter the system administrator's user ID with
the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator's passcode, then
select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
• The screen may differ depending on the settings of the machine.
• The <Log In/Out> button is lit when the machine enters the System Administration mode.
280
System Settings Procedure
Step 3 Selecting [Tools]
1
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Note
• When the [Home] screen is not displayed on
the touch screen, press the <Home> button.
Step 4 Selecting a Tab on the [Tools] Screen
On the [Tools] screen, select a tab to set.
For the settings that can be selected on the [Tools] screen, refer to "Tools Menu List" (P.284).
1
Select a tab.
System Settings
You can set or change the default values of each service.
Common Service Settings
Allows you to configure the general settings of the machine.
For more information, refer to "Common Service Settings" (P.295).
Copy Service Settings
Allows you to configure the copy service settings such as copy feature defaults, copy
operation control, and button indications.
For more information, refer to "Copy Service Settings" (P.316).
Connectivity & Network Setup
Allows you to configure the network related settings such as ports and protocols.
For more information, refer to "Connectivity & Network Setup" (P.324).
Print Service Settings
Allows you to configure the print service settings such as memory settings and print
operation control.
For more information, refer to "Print Service Settings" (P.345).
Scan Service Settings
Allows you to configure the scan service settings such as scanner defaults and button
indications.
For more information, refer to "Scan Service Settings" (P.352).
281
15 Tools
Fax Service Settings
Allows you to configure the fax service settings such as setting defaults, fax control and
button settings.
For more information, refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.359).
E-mail Service Settings
Allows you to configure the e-mail transmission specifications settings.
For more information, refer to "E-mail Service Settings" (P.368).
Folder Service Settings
Allows you to configure the settings relating to folders.
For more information, refer to "Folder Service Settings" (P.371).
Job Flow Service Settings
Allows you to configure the settings relating to Job Flow.
Job Flow is a function to execute a series of registered operations.
For more information, refer to "Job Flow Service Settings" (P.372).
Media Print Service Settings
Allows you to configure the settings relating to Media Print (Text and Photo).
For more information, refer to "Media Print Service Settings" (P.373).
Stored File Settings
Allows you to set how to delete files in a folder and print files stored in the machine.
For more information, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.374).
Web Applications Service Setup
Allows you to configure a remote access destination server.
For more information, refer to "Web Applications Service Setup" (P.376).
Web Browser Setup
Allows you to configure the settings relating to the web browser when accessing a remote
destination server.
For more information, refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.379).
Setup
You can create and change folders, job flow sheets, and the Address Book (speed dial
numbers).
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.381).
Accounting
You can register users and configure the settings for account administration.
For more information, refer to "Accounting" (P.398).
Authentication/Security Settings
You can configure the authentication and security settings.
For more information, refer to "Authentication/Security Settings" (P.407).
282
System Settings Procedure
Step 5 Setting a Feature
1
Select any feature.
Note
• Select a submenu from the [Group] list, and then select a feature from the [Features] list.
• Select [
2
3
4
] or [
] as required.
Select an item to set.
After setting the feature, select [Save].
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Home] screen is displayed.
Note
• If rebooting the machine is required to enable the new settings, when you select [Close] in the [Tools]
screen, a message may be displayed. Follow the message and reboot the machine. After the machine
reboots, it exits from the System Administration mode, and the <Log In/Out> button is unlit.
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Note
• You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then selecting
[Logout].
• The <Log In/Out> button is unlit when the machine exits from the System Administration mode.
283
15 Tools
Tools Menu List
The following tables list the items that can be set on the [Tools] screen. Note that the some
items may not appear depending on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings
Common Service Settings
284
"Machine Clock/Timers" (P.295)
• "Date" (P.295)
• "Time" (P.295)
• "NTP Time Synchronization" (P.296)
• "Connection Interval" (P.296)
• "Time Server Address" (P.296)
• "Auto Clear" (P.296)
• "Auto Job Release" (P.296)
• "Auto Print" (P.296)
• "Printer Lockout" (P.296)
• "Printer Lockout" (P.296)
• "Time Zone" (P.297)
• "Daylight Savings" (P.297)
• "Print-On-Demand Duration" (P.298)
"Audio Tones" (P.298)
• "Control Panel Select Tone" (P.298)
• "Control Panel Alert Tone" (P.298)
• "Base Tone" (P.298)
• "Machine Ready Tone" (P.298)
• "Job Complete Tone 1, 2" (P.298)
• "Fault Tone" (P.298)
• "Auto Clear Alert Tone" (P.298)
• "Alert Tone" (P.299)
• "Out of Paper Warning Tone" (P.299)
• "Low Toner Alert Tone" (P.299)
• "Stored Programming Tone" (P.299)
• "Stored Programming Complete Tone" (P.299)
• "Line Monitor Volume" (P.299)
• "Ringing Volume" (P.299)
"Screen/Button Settings" (P.299)
• "Screen Default" (P.299)
• "Screen After Auto Clear" (P.299)
• "Auto Display of Login Screen" (P.299)
• "Custom Buttons 1 to 3" (P.300)
• "Home" (P.300)
• "Home - Additional Features" (P.300)
• "Job Type on Job Status screen" (P.300)
• "Default Language" (P.300)
• "Screen Brightness" (P.300)
• "Reconfirm E-mail Recipient" (P.300)
• "Reconfirm Fax Recipient" (P.301)
"Paper Tray Settings" (P.301)
• "Custom Paper Name/Color" (P.301)
• "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.301)
• "Customize Paper Supply Screen" (P.301)
• "Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen" (P.302)
• "Paper Tray Attributes During Loading" (P.302)
• "Paper Tray Priority" (P.302)
• "Paper Type Priority" (P.302)
• "Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults" (P.302)
• "Auto Tray Switching Control" (P.303)
• "Image Quality" (P.303)
Tools Menu L ist
"Image Quality Adjustment" (P.304)
• "Image Quality" (P.304)
• "Calibration" (P.305)
"Reports" (P.305)
• "Print Reports Button" (P.305)
• "Job History Report" (P.306)
• "Activity Report" (P.306)
• "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" (P.306)
• "Transmission Report - Job Deleted" (P.306)
• "Folder Report" (P.306)
• "Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report" (P.306)
• "Scan File Transfer Report" (P.306)
• "2 Sided Report" (P.306)
• "Activity Report - Recipient" (P.306)
• "Job Flow Error Report" (P.306)
"Maintenance" (P.307)
• "Initialize Hard Disk" (P.307)
• "Delete All Data" (P.307)
• "Software Options" (P.307)
• "Power on Self Test" (P.307)
• "Adjust Paper Registration" (P.307)
• "Adjust Paper Registration" (P.307)
• "Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings" (P.308)
"Notify Job Completion by E-mail"
(P.308)
• "Targeted Jobs" (P.308)
• "E-mail Addresses 1 to 5" (P.308)
• "E-mail Message" (P.308)
"Plug-in Settings" (P.308)
• "Embedded Plug-ins" (P.308)
• "List of Embedded Plug-ins" (P.308)
"Other Settings" (P.308)
• "Offset Stacking (Left Tray)" (P.308)
• "Auto Job Promotion" (P.309)
• "Default Print Paper Size" (P.309)
• "Odd Page 2 Sided" (P.309)
• "Paper Size Settings" (P.309)
• "Millimeters/Inches" (P.311)
• "Keyboard Input Restriction" (P.311)
• "Operation of Up/Down Buttons" (P.311)
• "Display Consumables Screen" (P.311)
• "Data Encryption" (P.311)
• "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.313)
• "Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.313)
• "Software Download" (P.314)
• "Drum Cartridge Conservation Mode" (P.314)
• "Country/Region" (P.314)
• "Restrict Recipient Selection Method" (P.314)
• "Restrict User to Edit Address Book" (P.314)
• "Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry" (P.314)
• "Data Indicator" (P.314)
Copy Service Settings
"Copy Tab - Features Allocation" (P.316)
"Preset Buttons" (P.317)
­
• "Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5" (P.317)
• "Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4" (P.317)
• "Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3" (P.317)
• "Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3" (P.317)
• "Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3" (P.317)
• "Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3" (P.317)
285
15 Tools
286
"Copy Defaults" (P.317)
• "Paper Supply" (P.317)
• "Reduce/Enlarge" (P.317)
• "Output Color" (P.318)
• "Single Color" (P.318)
• "Dual Color - Source Color" (P.318)
• "Dual Color - Target Area Color" (P.318)
• "Dual Color - Non-target Area Color" (P.318)
• "Original Type" (P.318)
• "Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White)"
(P.318)
• "Original Type - Auto (Black & White)" (P.318)
• "Lighten/Darken" (P.318)
• "Contrast" (P.318)
• "Sharpness" (P.318)
• "Saturation" (P.319)
• "Background Suppression" (P.319)
• "Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta /
Color Balance - Cyan / Color Balance - Black"
(P.319)
• "Color Shift" (P.319)
• "2 Sided Copying" (P.319)
• "Mixed Size Originals" (P.319)
• "Edge Erase - Top Edge" (P.319)
• "Edge Erase - Bottom Edge" (P.319)
• "Edge Erase - Left Edge" (P.319)
• "Edge Erase - Right Edge" (P.320)
• "Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase" (P.320)
• "Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2" (P.320)
• "Image Shift - Side 1" (P.320)
• "Image Shift - Side 2" (P.320)
• "Image Rotation" (P.320)
• "Image Rotation - Rotation Direction" (P.320)
• "Original Orientation" (P.320)
• "Pages per Side" (P.320)
• "Copy Output" (P.320)
• "Uncollated - Default Separator Tray" (P.320)
• "Sample Job" (P.320)
• "Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray" (P.320)
• "Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back
Cover Tray" (P.321)
• "Separators - Default Separator Tray" (P.321)
"Copy Control" (P.321)
• "Memory Full Procedure" (P.321)
• "Maximum Stored Pages" (P.321)
• "Auto Paper Off" (P.321)
• "Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy" (P.321)
• "Fine-tune 100%" (P.321)
• "ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge" (P.322)
• "Background Suppression (Photo & Text)" (P.322)
• "Background Suppression Level (Text)" (P.322)
• "Photo & Text /Printed Original" (P.322)
• "Original Type - See-Through Paper" (P.322)
• "Quantity Display" (P.322)
• "Maximum Number of Sets" (P.322)
"Original Size Defaults" (P.322)
­
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.323)
­
"Custom Colors" (P.323)
­
Tools Menu L ist
Connectivity & Network Setup
"Port Settings" (P.324)
• "USB" (P.324)
• "LPD" (P.325)
• "NetWare" (P.325)
• "SMB" (P.325)
• "IPP" (P.326)
• "EtherTalk" (P.326)
• "Bonjour" (P.326)
• "Port 9100" (P.326)
• "SNMP" (P.326)
• "FTP Client" (P.326)
• "Receive E-mail" (P.327)
• "Send E-mail" (P.327)
• "E-mail Notification Service" (P.327)
• "WSD" (P.327)*1
• "Internet Services (HTTP)" (P.327)
• "SOAP" (P.328)
• "WebDAV" (P.328)
• "ThinPrint" (P.328)
"Protocol Settings" (P.328)
• "Ethernet Rated Speed" (P.328)
• "TCP/IP - IP Mode" (P.329)
• "IPv4 - IP Address Resolution" (P.329)
• "IPv4 - IP Address" (P.330)
• "IPv4 - Subnet Mask" (P.330)
• "IPv4 - Gateway Address" (P.330)
• "IPv4 - DNS Server Setup" (P.330)
• "IPv4 - IP Filter" (P.330)
• "IPv6 Address Manual Configuration" (P.330)
• "Manually Configured IPv6 Address" (P.330)
• "Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix" (P.331)
• "Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway" (P.331)
• "IPv6 - DNS Server Setup" (P.331)
• "Automatically Configured IPv6 Address" (P.331)
• "IPv6 - IP Filter" (P.331)
"Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name"
(P.331)
• "E-mail Address" (P.331)
• "Machine Name" (P.332)
• "Host Name" (P.332)
• "Domain Name" (P.332)
"Proxy Server Settings" (P.332)
• "Use Proxy Server" (P.332)
• "Proxy Server Setup" (P.332)
• "Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server" (P.332)
• "HTTP Proxy Server Name" (P.332)
• "HTTP Proxy Server Port Number" (P.332)
• "HTTP Proxy Server Authentication" (P.333)
• "HTTP Proxy Server Login Name" (P.333)
• "HTTP Proxy Server Password" (P.333)
• "HTTPS Proxy Server Name" (P.333)
• "HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number" (P.333)
• "HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication" (P.333)
• "HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name" (P.333)
• "HTTPS Proxy Server Password" (P.333)
"Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings"
(P.333)
• "POP3 Server Settings" (P.333)
• "SMTP Server Settings" (P.334)
287
15 Tools
"Remote Authentication/Directory
Service" (P.334)
• "Authentication System Setup" (P.335)
• "Kerberos Server Settings" (P.335)
• "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings" (P.336)
• "SMB Server Settings" (P.339)
"Security Settings" (P.340)
• "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.340)
• "S/MIME Settings" (P.341)
• "PDF/XPS Signature Settings" (P.341)*2
• "IPSec Settings" (P.342)
• "IEEE 802.1x Settings" (P.343)
• "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" (P.343)
"Other Settings" (P.344)
• "Protocol to Receive E-mail" (P.344)
• "Add Domain Name to User Name" (P.344)
• "Domain Filtering" (P.344)
*1 : WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
*2 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Print Service Settings
"Allocate Memory" (P.345)
"Delete Form" (P.347)
"Other Settings" (P.347)
• "PostScript Memory" (P.345)
• "ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory" (P.345)
• "HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory" (P.345)
• "Job Ticket Memory" (P.345)
• "Receiving Buffer - USB" (P.346)
• "Receiving Buffer - LPD" (P.346)
• "Receiving Buffer - NetWare" (P.346)
• "Receiving Buffer - SMB" (P.346)
• "Receiving Buffer - IPP" (P.346)
• "Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk" (P.347)
• "Receiving Buffer - Port 9100" (P.347)
­
• "Print Area" (P.347)
• "Substitute Tray" (P.347)
• "Paper Type Mismatch" (P.348)
• "Unregistered Forms" (P.348)
• "Resume Job After Print Error" (P.348)
• "When Paper Jam Occurs" (P.349)
• "Print User ID" (P.349)
• "Banner Sheet" (P.349)
• "Banner Sheet Offset" (P.350)
• "Banner Sheet Tray" (P.350)
• "PostScript Default Color" (P.350)
• "PostScript Paper Supply" (P.350)
• "PostScript Font Absence" (P.350)
• "PostScript Font Substitution" (P.350)
• "XPS Print Ticket Processing" (P.350)*
• "LPD Print Queue" (P.350)
• "OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C)" (P.351)
* : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Scan Service Settings
"First Tab" (P.352)
288
• "Feature in 2nd Column" (P.352)
"Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5" (P.352)
Tools Menu L ist
"Scan Defaults" (P.353)
• "Color Scanning" (P.353)
• "Original Type" (P.353)
• "File Format" (P.353)
• "Optimize PDF For Quick Web View" (P.353)
• "Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail" (P.353)
• "Thumbnail - Scan to PC" (P.353)
• "Lighten / Darken" (P.353)
• "Contrast" (P.353)
• "Sharpness" (P.353)
• "Background Suppression" (P.353)
• "Shadow Suppression" (P.353)
• "Color Space" (P.353)
• "Original Orientation" (P.354)
• "Resolution" (P.354)
• "Mixed Size Originals" (P.354)
• "Edge Erase" (P.354)
• "Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges" (P.354)
• "Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges" (P.354)
• "Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase" (P.354)
• "Quality/File Size" (P.354)
• "E-mail Subject" (P.354)
• "Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject" (P.354)
• "E-mail Encryption" (P.354)
• "Searchable Text" (P.354)
• "Language of the Original" (P.355)
• "Searchable - Text Compression" (P.355)
"Scan to PC Defaults" (P.355)
• "Transfer Protocol" (P.355)
• "Login Credential to Access Destination" (P.355)
• "User Name for FTP Scan" (P.355)
"Original Size Defaults" (P.355)
-
"Output Size Defaults" (P.356)
-
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.356)
-
"Other Settings" (P.356)
• "Memory Full Procedure" (P.356)
• "Maximum Stored Pages" (P.357)
• "Saturation" (P.357)
• "Background Suppression Level" (P.357)
• "Shadow Suppression Level" (P.357)
• "Color Space" (P.357)
• "TIFF Format" (P.357)
• "Image Transfer Screen" (P.357)
• "Searchable - Page Orientation" (P.357)
• "URL File Expiration" (P.358)
• "Generation of URL Link" (P.358)
• "Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size" (P.358)
• "Print Login Name on PDF Files" (P.358)
Fax Service Settings
"Screen Defaults" (P.359)
• "Fax Screen Default" (P.359)
• "Fax Tab -2nd Column" (P.359)
• "Address Book Type" (P.359)
• "Address Book Speed Dial Default" (P.359)
• "Transmission Screen" (P.359)
289
15 Tools
"Fax Defaults" (P.360)
• "Resolution" (P.360)
• "Original Type" (P.360)
• "Lighten/Darken" (P.360)
• "Mixed Size Originals" (P.360)
• "Starting Rate" (P.360)
• "Delay Start - Specific Time" (P.360)
• "Transmission Header Text" (P.360)
• "Confirmation Options" (P.360)
"Fax Control" (P.360)
• "Re-enter Recipients" (P.360)
• "Re-enter Broadcast Recipients" (P.360)
• "Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients" (P.361)
• "Re-enter Group Recipients" (P.361)
• "Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab" (P.361)
• "Manual Redial List - Saved Entries" (P.361)
• "Manual Redial List - Dial Mode" (P.361)
• "Transmission Header Text - Polling" (P.361)
• "Polled Files - Auto Delete" (P.361)
• "Rotate 90 degrees" (P.361)
• "Sender ID" (P.362)
• "Save Undelivered Faxes" (P.362)
• "Save Deleted Faxes" (P.362)
• "Saved Faxes - Auto Delete" (P.362)
• "Transmission Interval" (P.362)
• "Batch Send" (P.362)
• "Manual Send/Receive Default" (P.362)
• "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.362)
• "Border Limit" (P.362)
• "Auto Reduce On Receipt" (P.363)
• "Receiving Paper Size" (P.363)
• "2 Pages Up On Receipt" (P.363)
• "2 Sided Printing" (P.363)
• "Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges" (P.363)
• "Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges" (P.363)
Original to A4 " (P.363)
• "Reduce 8.5 x 11"
• "Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode" (P.364)
• "Folder Selector Setup" (P.364)
• "Memory Full Procedure" (P.364)
• "Maximum Stored Pages" (P.364)
• "Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode" (P.364)
• "Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3" (P.364)
• "Direct Fax" (P.364)
• "Block Inbound Faxes" (P.365)
• "Block Unknown Fax Numbers" (P.365)
"Fax Received Options" (P.365)
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.365)
­
"Original Size Defaults" (P.366)
­
"Local Terminal Information" (P.366)
290
• "Folder Selector Setup" (P.365)
• "Local Name" (P.366)
• "Company Logo" (P.366)
• "Machine Password" (P.366)
• "Line 1 - Company Logo" (P.366)
• "G3 Line 1 - Fax ID" (P.366)
• "G3 Line 1 - Dial Type" (P.367)
• "G3 Line 1 - Line Type" (P.367)
Tools Menu L ist
E-mail Service Settings
"E-mail Control" (P.368)
• "Maximum Address Entries" (P.368)
• "Incoming E-mail Print Options" (P.368)
• "Print Error Notification E-mail" (P.368)
• "Response to Read Receipts" (P.368)
• "Read Receipts" (P.369)
• "Print Delivery Confirmation Mail" (P.369)
• "Split Send Method" (P.369)
• "Maximum Data Size per E-mail" (P.369)
• "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.369)
• "Maximum Split Count" (P.369)
• "Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field" (P.369)
• "Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field" (P.370)
• "Allow to edit From if Search Found" (P.370)
• "Allow to edit From if Search Failed" (P.370)
• "E-mail Sending When Search Failed" (P.370)
• "Add Me to "To" Field" (P.370)
• "Add Me to "Cc" Field" (P.370)
• "Edit E-mail Recipients" (P.370)
Folder Service Settings
"Folder Service Settings" (P.371)
• "Files Retrieved By Client" (P.371)
• "Print & Delete Confirmation Screen" (P.371)
• "Convert Custom Size to Standard Size" (P.371)
• "Standard Size Threshold Value" (P.371)
• "Quality/File Size for Retrieval" (P.371)
Job Flow Service Settings
"Job Flow Service Settings" (P.372)
• "Pool Server" (P.372)
• "Pool Server Login Method" (P.372)
• "Job Flow Sheet List Default" (P.372)
• "Fax Transfer Resolution" (P.372)
Media Print Service Settings
"Media Print Service Settings" (P.373)
• "Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5" (P.373)
Stored File Settings
"Stored File Settings" (P.374)
• "Expiration Date for Files in Folder" (P.374)
• "Stored Job Expiration Date" (P.374)
• "Print Job Confirmation Screen" (P.375)
• "Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs"
(P.375)
• "Print Order for All Selected Files" (P.375)
291
15 Tools
Web Applications Service Setup
"Server Setup" (P.377)
• "Server Name" (P.377)
• "URL" (P.377)
• "Description" (P.377)
• "Use User ID" (P.378)
• "User ID" (P.378)
• "Password" (P.378)
• "Machine/Authentication Notification" (P.378)
• "Notify User Authorization Information" (P.378)
• "Delete All Settings" (P.378)
"Other Settings" (P.378)
• "When Sending User Details" (P.378)
Web Browser Setup
"Web Browser Setup" (P.379)
• "Web Applications Version" (P.379)
• "Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing" (P.379)
• "Clear Cache Upon Closing" (P.379)
• "Use Cache" (P.379)
• "Accept Cookies" (P.379)
• "Use TLS1.0" (P.379)
• "Use SSL3.0" (P.379)
• "When SSL Certificate Verification Fails" (P.379)
• "Enable File Printing" (P.380)
"Create Folder" (P.381)
• "Folder Name" (P.382)
• "Check Folder Passcode" (P.382)
• "Delete Files After Retrieval" (P.382)
• "Delete Expired Files" (P.382)
• "Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder" (P.383)
• "When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected"
(P.383)
"Stored Programming" (P.383)
-
"Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.383)
• "Restrictions on Using Job Flow" (P.384)
• "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.385)
• "Name" (P.385)
• "Description" (P.386)
• "Keyword" (P.386)
• "Send as Fax" (P.386)
• "Send as E-mail" (P.386)
• "Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)"
(P.387)
• "Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)"
(P.388)
• "Print" (P.389)
• "E-mail Notification" (P.389)
• "Edit/Delete" (P.390)
Setup
"Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.390)
292
-
Tools Menu L ist
"Add Address Book Entry" (P.390)
• "Address Type" (P.392)
• "E-mail Address" (P.392)
• "Name" (P.392)
• "Surname" (P.392)
• "Given Name" (P.392)
• "Telephone Number" (P.392)
• "Office" (P.392)
• "Department" (P.392)
• "S/MIME Certificate" (P.392)
• "Transfer Protocol" (P.393)
• "Server Name/IP address" (P.393)
• "Shared Name (SMB Only)" (P.393)
• "Save in" (P.393)
• "User Name" (P.393)
• "Password" (P.394)
• "Port Number" (P.394)
• "Fax Number" (P.394)
• "Index" (P.394)
• "Starting Rate" (P.394)
• "Resolution" (P.394)
• "Cover Page" (P.394)
• "Maximum Image Size" (P.394)
• "Delay Start" (P.395)
• "Remote Folder" (P.395)
• "F Code" (P.395)
• "Relay Broadcast" (P.395)
• "Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing Midnight" (P.396)
• "When the [Delete Entry] Button is Selected"
(P.396)
"Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.396)
-
"Add Fax Comment" (P.397)
-
"Paper Tray Attributes" (P.397)
-
Accounting
"Create/View User Accounts" (P.398)
• "User ID" (P.399)
• "User Name" (P.399)
• "Passcode" (P.399)
• "E-mail Address" (P.399)
• "Account Limit" (P.399)
• "User Role" (P.400)
• "Reset Account" (P.400)
• "Reset Total Impressions" (P.401)
"View Accounts" (P.401)
-
"Reset User Accounts" (P.401)
-
"System Administrator's Meter (Copy
Jobs)" (P.402)
-
"Accounting Type" (P.402)
• "Accounting Disabled" (P.402)
• "Local Accounting" (P.402)
• "Network Accounting" (P.402)
• "ColorTrack" (P.403)
• "Auditron Mode" (P.403)
• "Verify User Details" (P.403)
• "Customize User Prompts" (P.403)
293
15 Tools
"Accounting Login Screen Settings"
(P.403)
"Fax Billing Data" (P.404)
"Accounting/Billing Device Settings"
(P.405)
• "Alternative Name for User ID" (P.403)
• "Mask User ID (***)" (P.403)
• "Alternative Name for Account ID" (P.404)
• "Mask Account ID (***)" (P.404)
• "Store User Details" (P.404)
• "Connect with Account / Billing Device" (P.405)
• "Accounting/Billing Device" (P.405)
• "Track Print Jobs" (P.405)
• "Track Scan/Fax Jobs" (P.405)
• "Interrupt Mode" (P.405)
• "Job with Insufficient Credit" (P.406)
• "Charge Print Jobs" (P.406)
• "Track with Cumulative Device" (P.406)
• "Scan Ahead for Copy Job" (P.406)
Authentication/Security Settings
294
"System Administrator Settings" (P.407)
• "System Administrator's Login ID" (P.407)
• "System Administrator's Passcode" (P.407)
"Authentication" (P.408)
• "Login Type" (P.408)
• "Access Control" (P.408)
• "Create/View User Accounts" (P.410)
• "Reset User Accounts" (P.410)
• "Create Authorization Groups" (P.410)
• "User Details Setup" (P.411)
• "Maximum Login Attempts by System
Administrator" (P.412)
• "Passcode Policy" (P.412)
• "Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.412)
• "Receive Control" (P.413)
"Job Status Default" (P.415)
• "Active Jobs View" (P.415)
• "Completed Jobs View" (P.415)
"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.415)
• "Number of Overwrites" (P.415)
Common Service Settings
Common Service Settings
In [Common Service Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine's common
features. The following shows the reference section for each item.
Machine Clock/Timers............................................................................................................ 295
Audio Tones............................................................................................................................. 298
Screen/Button Settings ........................................................................................................... 299
Paper Tray Settings ................................................................................................................. 301
Image Quality Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 304
Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 305
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 307
Notify Job Completion by E-mail........................................................................................... 308
Other Settings ......................................................................................................................... 308
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings].
For information on how to display the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to enter the Power Saver
mode or to reset settings.
Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here will be printed on all lists
and reports.
1
2
3
4
Select [Date], and then select [Change Settings].
Select a date format.
Specify [Year], [Month], and [Day].
Select [Save].
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here will be printed on all lists and reports.
1
2
3
Select [Time], and then select [Change Settings].
4
Specify [Hours] and [Minutes].
Select the time format.
When you select [12 Hour Clock], set [AM] or
[PM].
295
15 Tools
5
Select [Save].
NTP Time Synchronization
You can synchronize the machine clock with a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol),
by receiving time information from the server.
To connect to a time server, select [On] for [NTP Time Synchronization], and set the IP
address of the time server in [Time Server Address].
Connection Interval
Specify how often the machine connects to the time server.
You can select from 1 to 500 hours in 1 hour increments.
Time Server Address
Set the server name or IP address of the time server.
Note
• For IPv4, enter the IP address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format, where "xxx" is a value between 0 and 255.
• For IPv6, enter the IP address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format, where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal number.
Auto Clear
Specify the time lapsed without any operation until the machine resets the settings
automatically.
When you select [On], specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
To disable this feature, select [Off].
Note
• When [Off] is selected, the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a document
after one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command.
Auto Job Release
Specify the time lapsed until the machine cancels the active job and starts the next job if an
error such as document or paper jams and running out of paper occurs during copying or
scanning. In that case, only those jobs not affected by the error can be processed.
When you select [On], specify a value in 1 minute increments. To disable this feature, select
[Off].
Auto Print
Set the time period to start the next print job after the operation of the control panel (except
for the <Start> and <Clear All> buttons).
When you select [On], specify a value between 1 and 240 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], printing starts immediately after the machine is ready.
Printer Lockout
You can set the machine to disable printing during the specified time period or to
temporarily disable printing.
Selecting [On] allows you to set [Set Lockout Duration] and/or [Allow User to Lock Out].
When [Allow User to Lock Out] is selected, the [Lock Out Printer] button needs to be
displayed on the right side of the [Home] screen.
Set Lockout Duration
Set the time period to disable printing. Specify the start and end time to disable printing in
1 minute increments.
296
Common Service Settings
Allow User to Lock Out
Selecting [Lock Out Printer] on the [Home] screen temporarily disables printing. [Release
Printer] is displayed during the printer lockout duration. Selecting [Release Printer] enables
printing.
Note
• A job started before the start time will be printed continuously even after elapsing the start time. The
job will be printed continuously even if you select [Lock Out Printer] while printing. After the job is
completed, the machine enters the printer lockout status.
• When both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock Out] are set and the start time comes while
the [Release Printer] button is displayed, the machine automatically enters the printer lockout status.
• When you select [Release Printer] during the printer lockout duration, printing is enabled, and when
you then select [Lock Out Printer], the machine resumes the printer lockout status.
• The printer lockout status is not released automatically even after the end time elapsed. To release the
printer lockout status, the control panel operation is required.
• The printer lockout duration will not be released even when you switch the power off and then on
again, or even when you press the <Power Saver> button while the machine is in the Power Saver
mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode).
• The machine starts printing in accordance with the setting in [Auto Print] when [Release Printer] is
selected. Thus the printing may not start just after [Release Printer] is selected.
• You can also print during the printer lockout duration by selecting a job in [Active Jobs] on the [Job
Status] screen and then selecting [Promote Job].
• When the [Allow User to Lock Out] check box is deselected, [Disable Auto Printing] in [Home Additional Features] is displayed as [(Not Assigned)].
Power Saver Timers
The Power Saver mode has two modes: the Low Power and Sleep modes. When a specified
period of time has elapsed, the machine switches to these modes in the following order to
reduce power consumption.
Last operation on the machine j Low Power mode j Sleep mode
Note
• You cannot configure the machine not to switch to the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode.
From Last Operation to Low Power Mode
Specify a time period between 1 and 120 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Low
Power mode after the last operation.
From Last Operation to Sleep Mode
Specify a time period between 1 to 120 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Sleep
mode after the last operation.
Note
• Configure the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last Operation to
Low Power Mode] time.
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT between -12 and +12 hours.
Note
• GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
Daylight Savings
You can set daylight saving time. During daylight saving time period, the machine moves the
clock forward by one hour.
Select from [Adjust Off], [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], or [Adjust by Month, Week, Day
of Week & Time].
If you select [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], specify the month, day, and time for [Start
Date] and [End Date].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time], specify the month, week, day
of week, and time for [Start Date] and [End Date].
297
15 Tools
Print-On-Demand Duration
Specify the duration for the machine to receive a print job from web applications. Unless the
machine receives full data of the print job within the specified period of time, the machine
does not process the print job.
Specify the time duration between 0 and 255 minutes in 1 minute increments. If you specify
[0], it means that there is no time limit set on the machine for receiving data.
Note
• When you send a print job that contains a large amount of data or a print job whose contents take a
while to be processed, transmission may be timed out before the machine receives the last page of
the print job. If transmission is timed out, the print job will be canceled. Therefore, you should consider
the machine usage when you set the time duration.
Audio Tones
Select whether to sound an alarm when a job ends or a fault occurs.
Control Panel Select Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a button on the control panel is correctly selected.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Control Panel Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error
occurs.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Base Tone
Set the volume for the base tone of the toggle button, which changes setting each time it is
pressed. The machine plays this sound when it exits the Interrupt mode.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Machine Ready Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when the machine is ready to copy or print, or powered on.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Job Complete Tone 1, 2
Set the volume to be sounded when a job is completed normally.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Fault Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded at five seconds before automatically returning to the initial
screen when [Auto Clear] is set to [On].
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
For more information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.296).
298
Common Service Settings
Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the job remains
in failure state.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Out of Paper Warning Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job is suspended because there is no paper in a tray.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Low Toner Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when the toner cartridge needs replacing.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Stored Programming Tone
Set the volume to be sounded while a stored program is being registered.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].
This tone cannot be disabled.
Stored Programming Complete Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when the call of a stored programming registered is completed.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Line Monitor Volume
When sending a fax, you can relay the sound on the telephone line until the connection is
made through the speakers on the machine. This is convenient for Fax Information Services
without using the telephone receiver.
You can select a volume level from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select
[Off].
Ringing Volume
Set the volume to be sounded when the machine receives a fax.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.
Screen Default
Set the screen displayed after powering on the machine or canceling the Power Saver mode.
Screen After Auto Clear
Set the screen displayed after Auto Clear.
Auto Display of Login Screen
When the Authentication feature is enabled on the machine, set whether or not to
automatically display the login screen after turning on the machine or canceling the Power
Saver mode.
299
15 Tools
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign services such as Copy and Send from Folder to the custom buttons on the
control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [(Not Set)].
Note
• Copy service is assigned to [Custom Button 1] and Review is assigned to [Custom Button 3] by factory
default.
Home
Set the layout of service buttons that appear on the [Home] screen.
Home - Additional Features
Set the layout of additional feature buttons that appear on the [Home] screen.
Note
• If you do not want to display [Setup] as an additional feature button, select the [Show this in Admin
mode] check box. You can set or change settings with the machine only when it is in the System
Administration mode.
Job Type on Job Status screen
Select the default job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen under the [Job
Status] screen that is displayed when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is
pressed.
Select from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan& Fax Jobs], or [Job Flow &
File Transfer Jobs].
Default Language
You can select the language displayed on the machine.
There are two ways of selecting the language: set in the System Administration mode and set
by local users.
• Setting in the System Administration mode
The language set here is the standard language that is retained even when the machine is
powered off and on.
• Setting in the Local User mode
The language setting in [Language] in the [Home] screen is lost when the machine is
powered off.
Note
• When [English] is selected, only ASCII characters can be used.
• When you set [Language] to [English] on the [Home] screen and an address book entry or contents of
[Details] of Job Flow Sheets is entered in other than ASCII characters, the characters may not be
displayed properly.
When you use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to import a CSV file* that includes the characters
other than those used for the language selected in [Language], the characters in the file may be garbled
or the import may fail.
* : CSV (Comma Separated Values) is a file format that is often used for saving data by spreadsheets and
database programs.
Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between -16 and +16.
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient
Select whether or not to display the screen to confirm e-mail recipients when sending e­
mails.
Select from [Confirmation Not Required], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], or [Reconfirm if
Multiple Recipients].
300
Common Service Settings
Reconfirm Fax Recipient
Set whether or not to display a screen to confirm fax recipients when sending faxes.
Select from [Confirmation Not Required], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm
if Multiple Recipients].
Paper Tray Settings
Set the items related to the paper and trays, including the type of paper and tray priority.
Custom Paper Name/Color
You can name Custom Paper Types 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Type] and Custom
Paper Colors 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Color] of [Paper Tray Attributes].
You can use letters, numerals, and symbols of up to 24 characters for each name and color.
For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as "Color" for colored paper, and
"Covers" for bond paper.
Paper Tray Attributes
You can set the size and type of paper loaded in trays.
For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.214).
Change Settings
Select this button, if you change the paper size for the tray or the setting of auto paper
selection.
When you load non-standard size paper in a tray, select [Custom Size], and specify the width
and length. When you load standard size paper in a tray, select [Auto Detect].
Note
• Align the paper guides against the paper to prevent paper jams or errors. If the machine cannot detect
a tray, use Tray 5.
• Paper Type
Select the type of paper to load in the trays.
For information about paper types available on the machine, refer to "Print Media Guidelines"
(P.200).
• Paper Size
When using Trays 1 to 4, you can load both standard size paper and non-standard size
paper. When you load non-standard size paper, select [Custom Size], and then set the size
in the X (width) between 190 - 356 mm and the Y (length) between 98 - 216 mm in 1 mm
increments. When you load standard size paper, select [Auto Detect].
• Paper Color
Set the color of paper. The paper color selected here is displayed as the paper color on the
[Paper Supply] screen.
• Auto Paper Select
Set the condition for Auto Paper selection. When the color mode selected is used, Auto
Paper selection is enabled. Select from [All Colors], [Color], and [Black & White].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.
Customize Paper Supply Screen
Select whether the setting items specified in [Paper Size] or [Auto Paper Select] under
[Paper Tray Attributes] are to be displayed on the [Paper Supply] screen.
301
15 Tools
Disabled
Does not display the items specified in [Paper Size].
Size Detection
Displays the setting in [Paper Size].
Usage (Auto Paper Select)
Displays the setting in [Auto Paper Select].
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen
Select whether or not to display [Paper Tray Attributes] in the [Setup] screen or not.
This setting allows you to select the size and type of paper without entering the System
Administration mode.
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading
Select whether or not to display the [Paper Tray Attributes] screen after the tray is pulled out
or inserted in.
This setting applies to Trays 1 and 2 to 4 (optional). You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
Paper Tray Priority
Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays or print data does not include the paper tray information for
automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
This setting applies to Trays 1 and 2 to 4 (optional).You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
Note
• When a logical printer is used and if you specify the paper tray with the print driver, this setting will be
ignored.
Paper Type Priority
Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
You can set Plain paper, Bond paper, Recycled paper, Plain Reload, and Custom paper 1 to 5.
The paper type setting is prioritized over the paper tray priority settings.
If, however, different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper is
determined by paper tray priority sequence. The tray containing paper type set to [Auto
Paper Off] is not selected by automatic tray selection.
For more information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.302).
Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults
Select the paper sizes displayed in the [Tray 5] screen in [Paper Supply] when copying with
Tray 5.
You can assign the paper size selected here to the buttons for [Standard Size] in the [Tray
5] screen.
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for copying, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time. For your convenience, set the
commonly used paper sizes in the upper level.
302
Common Service Settings
A/B Series Size
You can select a paper size from A and B series sizes.
Inch Size
You can select a paper size from inch series sizes.
Others
You can select a paper size from other sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the X width between 127 and 356 mm, and the Y length between
76 and 216 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note
• For open flap envelopes, enter the size with the flap size included.
Auto Tray Switching Control
Set the alternative tray or paper when running out of paper loaded in the tray selected.
Auto Tray Switching
You can select from [Always Enable], [Enable during Auto Select], and [Enable for Same
Paper Type/Color].
When [Enable during Auto Select] is selected, the machine switches the tray when [Auto
Select] is selected in the [Copy] screen or [Paper Select] of the print driver.
Note
• The machine does not switch the tray automatically in the following cases:
- Tray 5 is selected.
- The tray containing paper that is set as [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type Priority] is selected.
Targeted Paper Type (Copy Jobs)
You can select paper types.
When [According to Priority Assigned] is selected, the paper type is determined according
to the settings in [Paper Type Priority]. When selecting [Selected Paper Type Only], you can
specify the paper type.
Targeted Paper Color (Copy Jobs)
You can target all paper colors or only one paper color.
Image Quality
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of plain paper, bond paper,
recycled paper, plain reload paper, and custom paper 1 to 5.
When copying or printing a document, the machine controls the image quality according to
the type of paper set in [Paper Tray Attributes] and the image quality processing method
specified for that type of paper.
The following table shows available settings.
For information about paper characteristics and notes, refer to "Print Media Guidelines" (P.200).
Setting values
Meaning
Plain A (81-105 gsm)
Paper having ream weight of 81 - 105 gsm.
Plain B (60-80 gsm)
Paper having ream weight of 60 - 80 gsm.
Plain C (60-90 gsm)
Paper having ream weight of 60 - 90 gsm. Suitable for recycled
paper.
303
15 Tools
Setting values
Plain D (60-90 gsm)
Meaning
Paper having ream weight of 60 - 90 gsm. Suitable for regular
paper except Plain B paper.
Image Quality Adjustment
You can set the image quality and calibration settings.
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine scans a document.
Photo & Text Recognition
Allows you to change a level with which the machine determines a document as text or
photos. This setting is used when you select [Photo & Text] for [Original Type] on the
[Image Quality] screen.
Selecting [More Text] enables the machine to easily recognize very fine print as text.
Selecting [More Photo] enables the machine to easily recognize halftone images from
newspapers and advertisements as photos.
Output Color Recognition
Allows you to change a level from the five levels with which the machine determines a
document as monochrome or color. This setting is used when you select [Auto Detect] for
[Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [More Black & White] enables the machine to easily recognize monochrome
documents.
Selecting [More Color] enables the machine to easily recognize color documents.
Photo Reproduction Level
When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Photo & Text],
you can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine as
photos.
Selecting [More Text] yields a bold copy effect, emphasizing the dense parts of an image.
Selecting [More Photo] soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image,
enhancing the reproducibility of subtle colors.
Background Suppression (Color Copy)
Set the method of background suppression to be used when making color copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Note
• When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or
less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be
output.
Background Suppression (Black Copy)
Set the method of background suppression to be used when making monochrome copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
304
Common Service Settings
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Note
• When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or
less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be
output.
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)
Set the method of background suppression to be used for scan operations.
Set how the machine detects density and deletes the background color.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Image Enhancement
Allows you to select whether to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], the
machine gives the image a smoother appearance when printed.
Calibration
Calibrate the machine regularly to correct and ensure consistency of printing colors over
time, environment and devices.
For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
When the printed colors do not seem to have been corrected properly despite regular
calibration, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Screen Type
Select from [Copy Job], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
For more information about screen type, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
Paper Supply
Select a paper tray.
Target
Select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].
Reports
You can configure settings related to printing reports.
Print Reports Button
Set the display method of [Print Reports] under the [Machine Information] screen and
[Error History Report] under the [Faults] screen displayed by pressing the <Machine
Status> button.
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Status] > [Machine
Information] and the [Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the
System Administration mode.
For information on Print Reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
For information on Error History Reports, refer to "Faults" (P.273).
305
15 Tools
Job History Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Job History Report when a total of 50 jobs have
been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.
For information on how to print a Job History Report manually, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Activity Report
Select whether or not to automatically print an Activity Report when a total of 100
communication results have been accumulated.
For information on how to print an Activity Report manually, refer to "Job Status / Activity Report"
(P.261).
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered
Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.
Transmission Report - Job Deleted
Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Deleted for a
cancelled document.
Folder Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Folder Report.
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report.
Scan File Transfer Report
Select whether or not to print the report for data transmission results when the scanned data
is transferred to the computer on the network or is sent via e-mail.
Off
Does not print a report regardless of the data transmission result.
On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report when data is sent successfully and a
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when data transmission failed.
Print when delivery fails
Prints a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when the data transmission failed.
2 Sided Report
Select whether or not to print a report on one side of the paper or both sides when printing
a report/list.
Activity Report - Recipient
Select how the information on recipients is shown when printing an Activity Report: the first
40 characters or the last 40 characters.
Job Flow Error Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Job Flow Error Report.
306
Common Service Settings
Maintenance
You can initialize or delete data from the hard disk of the machine.
Initialize Hard Disk
Initializes the hard disk.
Data deleted by initialization includes supplementary fonts and ESC/P forms.
Note
• The secure print documents and logs are not erased.
Delete All Data
This feature is designed to prevent the leakage of confidential information of a customer
when the machine is returned to Dell. By executing [Start], all data registered on the
machine is deleted.
Do not use this feature normally.
Software Options
This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Power on Self Test
Set whether or not to perform self test when the machine is turned on and started up.
If any abnormal condition such as intentional program modification is found during the
program diagnosis, the machine stops starting up and records the information in the audit
log.
Note
• The information may not be recorded in the audit log depending on the status of program malfunction.
• If the machine does not start, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Adjust Color Registration
Allows you to calibrate the colors automatically or manually.
Auto Color Registration
Pressing [Start] executes the color calibration.
For more information, refer to "Auto Color Registration" (P.90).
Side Color Registration
After executing the automatic color calibration, you can manually adjust the horizontal
colors for yellow, magenta, and cyan by entering values.
You can enter from -5 to +5, and press [Adjust] after entering the values.
Pressing [Sample Printout] prints the sample that the values changed are reflected.
Note
• Use Tray 5 and plain A4
size paper for this feature.
For more information, refer to "Side Color Registration" (P.91).
Adjust Paper Registration
Allows you to adjust the print image position vertically and horizontally. You can enter from
- 2.0 to + 2.0, and press [Adjust] after entering the values.
When you enter the amount in [Number of Sheets] and press [Sample Printout], the
machine prints the sample that the values changed are reflected.
307
15 Tools
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings
Deletes all certificates stored in the machine and initializes the security settings associated
with certificates. This feature is designed to use when you cannot use a certificate data in the
machine because of an abnormality of certificate file even when the certificate is set to
enabled for [SSL/TLS Settings] under [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security
Settings].
Notify Job Completion by E-mail
You can receive the results of jobs performed by an e-mail notification.
Targeted Jobs
Select the service whose job result you want to receive by an e-mail notification. When the
target job is already selected, [Selected] is displayed.
You can select more than one target job from [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], [Print], or [Report].
Select the notification timing from [Notify at the End of Job] or [Notify when Error Only].
E-mail Addresses 1 to 5
Specify the e-mail addresses to notify the result of the jobs.
Note
• When you select [Save] to exit this screen without specifying an e-mail address, the setting of
[Targeted Jobs] or [E-mail Message] is deleted.
E-mail Message
Enter a comment attached to the e-mail.
Plug-in Settings
When you use custom services, you can set whether to enable embedded plug-ins and display
the list of the plug-ins.
Embedded Plug-ins
Set whether to enable embedded plug-ins.
List of Embedded Plug-ins
Displays [Name] and [Status] of embedded plug-ins.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the machine.
Offset Stacking (Left Tray)
Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the left tray and shifted slightly
toseparate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray,
the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Left Tray. Select
from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or [Offset
per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job (print
job) respectively.
Note
308
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Common Service Settings
Auto Job Promotion
You can select whether or not to allow another job to automatically bypass the current job
when the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example, running out
of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).
Note
• Stored documents such as Secure Print and Sample Set documents cannot be used with the Auto Job
Promotion feature.
• When [Enabled] is selected and there is a job bypassed because of paper out, a message stating the
reason of the job promotion appears. The job bypassed can be processed after you take proper
measures by following the instruction of the message. Or, you can cancel the job by pressing the
<Clear All> button. When multiple jobs are bypassed, a screen that lists the bypassed jobs appears.
This screen allows you to display the details screen and to delete the jobs.
Default Print Paper Size
You can set the most commonly-used paper size, A4 or 8.5 x 11", to print reports and/or lists.
Odd Page 2 Sided
You can specify whether or not to add a blank page when a document containing an odd
number of pages is printed in 2-sided.
Paper Size Settings
You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes
of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
You can select from the following tables: [A/B Series (8 x 13")], [A/B Series], [A/B Series (8K/
16K)], [A/B Series (8 x 13"/8 x 14")], and [Inch Series].
309
15 Tools
Refer to the following tables for a combination of sizes that can be detected automatically.
Paper size group
A/B series (8
× 13")
A/B series
A/B series (8
K / 16 K)
A/B series (8
× 13" / 8 ×
14")
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
A6
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
A6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A5
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
A5
O
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
A4
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B6
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
B6
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
B5
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
5.5 × 8.5"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.5 × 8.5"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
7.25 × 10.5"
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
8 × 10"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8.5 × 11"
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
8.5 × 13"
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
8.5 × 14"
X
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
Postcard (5 × 7")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (5 × 7")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (3.5 × 5")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (3.5 × 5")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (6 × 9")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (4 × 6")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (4 × 6")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Postcard (3.5 ×
5.5")
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
100 × 148"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
100 × 148"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
310
Common Service Settings
Paper size group
A/B series (8
× 13")
A/B series
A/B series (8
K / 16 K)
A/B series (8
× 13" / 8 ×
14")
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
Document glass
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 4
215 × 315"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16K
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
O :Available
X :Not available
Millimeters/Inches
Allows you to select unit of measurement displayed on the screen from [Millimeters] or
[Inches].
Keyboard Input Restriction
Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard of the
machine. To prevent characters from being garbled when switching character sets, you can
limit input to ASCII characters. If you select [On (ASCII Only)], the keyboard displayed
shows ASCII characters only.
Operation of Up/Down Buttons
Allows you to whether or not to enable continuous scrolling when pressing the scroll buttons.
Display Consumables Screen
Allows you to select whether or not to display the consumables status when a replacement is
required.
Off
Does not display the consumables status screen.
When power is switched on
Displays the consumables status screen at startup.
When Auto Clear is activated
Displays the consumables status screen when Auto Clear is executed.
Data Encryption
Allows you to select whether or not to encrypt data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.
When you enable data encryption, the machine encrypts automatically copy, scan, or print
data written to the hard disk. You cannot select whether or not to encrypt by feature. This
311
15 Tools
prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. To activate this feature, set an encryption
key.
1
2
Select [Data Encryption], and then [Change Settings].
3
Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key of 1 to 12 single-byte characters,
and then select [Save].
4
5
6
Select [Re-enter Encryption Key].
Select [On].
Enter the same encryption key, and then select [Save].
Select [Save].
Data Restoration
The encrypted data cannot be restored in the following cases:
• When a problem occurs with the hard disk.
• When you have forgotten the encryption key.
• When you have forgotten the system administrator's user ID and a passcode when [On]
is selected in [Service Rep. Restricted Operation].
Starting the Data Encryption and Changing Settings
When you select/deselect data encryption or change the encryption key, you must restart the
machine. When the machine reboots, the machine initializes part of the disk area. The
previous data is not secured.
The disk area stores the following data.
- Spooled print data
- Print data including Secure Print and Sample Set
- Forms for the Form Overlay feature
- Folder and job flow sheet settings (folder name, passcode, etc.)
- Files in folders
- Address book data
Note
• Be sure to save all necessary settings and files before using data encryption or changing any settings.
• Make sure that the hard disk and encryption settings match. Otherwise, an error will occur. For
information on error messages and their remedies, refer to "Other Errors" (P.616).
• The following procedure is recommended for changing the encryption settings while a large amount
of data (100 jobs or more) is stored in a folder, and [Number of Overwrites] is set to [1 Overwrite] or [3
Overwrites] under [Overwrite Hard Disk].
1. Select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Create Folder] to display the [Create Folder] screen.
2. Select the folder, then select [Delete Folder].
3. Select [Close].
4. Press the <Machine Status> button, and confirm that [Standby] in [Overwrite Hard Disk] is
displayed.
5. Enter the System Administration mode, and change the data encryption settings.
For information on how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.280).
312
Common Service Settings
• Our service representative cannot restore the encryption key.
• When our service representative replaces the electrical circuit board, the encryption key is initialized.
Do not lose the encrypted information.
Encryption Key for Confidential Data
Allows you to set an encryption key to encrypt confidential information such as the passcode
of the system administrator and a folder. Encrypting confidential information prevents a
network hacking and an unauthorized access to the information.
Enter an encryption key of 4 to 12 single-byte characters using alphanumeric characters.
Note
• If you change the existing encryption key, you may not restore confidential information from a backup.
• The factory default encryption key is "1111".
1
2
Select [Encryption Key for Confidential Data], and then [Change Settings].
3
4
5
Select [Re-enter Encryption Key].
Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key of 4 to 12 digits, and then select
[Save].
Enter the same encryption key, and then select [Save].
Select [Save] to display a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to save the
setting.
Service Rep. Restricted Operation
Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the operation by our service representative to
protect the security settings from being altered by someone impersonating our service
representative.
Off
The operation by our service representative is not restricted.
On
Our service representative cannot change the following settings:
• "Delete All Data" (P.307)
• "Data Encryption" (P.311)
• "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.313)
• "Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.313)
• "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.340)
• "S/MIME Settings" (P.341)
• "IPSec Settings" (P.342)
• "System Administrator Settings" (P.407)
• "Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.412)
• "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.415)
• Creating/Changing Users with System Administrator Rights
• Changing SNMP v3 Setting
When [On] is set, you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the [Maintenance
Passcode] screen.
Entering the passcode is required when our service representative performs maintenance.
Note
• When [On] is set, note the followings:
313
15 Tools
- If you lose the System Administrator's user ID and passcode, the items restricted to the service
representative cannot be changed.
- If you lose the passcode, our service representative cannot perform maintenance in the case when
an error occurs in the machine.
• To change the restricted items or perform maintenance, the electric circuit board of the machine must
be replaced.
You will be charged for the electrical circuit board and handling cost.
Be sure not to lose the System Administrator's user ID and passcode.
For information on the system administrator permissions, refer to "User Roles" (P.481).
Software Download
You can select whether or not to permit software downloading. This feature is for service
representative use. For more information, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Drum Cartridge Conservation Mode
Specifies the operation when [Auto Detect] is selected for [Output Color]. Select either
[On] or [Off].
If the machine is set to automatically switch the type of a document (color/monochrome),
select [On], If not, select [Off]. Selecting [Off] outputs in color.
Country/Region
Allows you to select a country or region to install the device.
Restrict Recipient Selection Method
Allows you to select whether or not to restrict a fax or an e-mail transmissions to addresses
not registered on the Address Book.
Selecting [Only From Address Book] disables address entry using the keyboard or numeric
keypad, and permits only transmission to addresses registered on the Address Book.
Note
• You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict Recipient Selection Method]. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.480).
Restrict User to Edit Address Book
Specify whether or not to permit local users to add and edit recipients in the Address Book.
When you select [Yes], Local Users cannot add or edit the Address Book.
Note
• You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict User to Edit Address Book]. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.480).
Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry
Allows you to select whether the machine automatically validate the number when you use
speed dial. When you select [Validate entry after a fixed time], you can select the time to
auto-validation from [Shorter], [Default], or [Longer].
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature.
Data Indicator
Allows you to set the lighting pattern of the <Data> indicator.
Pattern 1
Lights up when a document is stored in the hard disk of the machine.
314
Common Service Settings
Pattern 2
Lights up when a fax document is in a print queue or a fax received with the Store Fax - Local
Folder feature is stored in the folder.
Pattern 3
Lights up for 30 seconds after a job in the print queue is printed.
315
15 Tools
Copy Service Settings
In [Copy Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Copy Tab - Features Allocation ..............................................................................................316
Preset Buttons ..........................................................................................................................317
Copy Defaults ..........................................................................................................................317
Copy Control............................................................................................................................321
Original Size Defaults..............................................................................................................322
Reduce/Enlarge Presets............................................................................................................323
Custom Colors .........................................................................................................................323
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Copy Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Copy Tab - Features Allocation
You can customize the features displayed on the [Copy] screen. Setting the most frequently
used features enables you to avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.
1
Select the number of features displayed on the
[Copy] screen.
5 Features
The following features are shown on the screen: [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Paper
Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Copy Output]. Features and positions displayed cannot be
changed.
7 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen.
Note
• [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
10 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the
[Copy] screen.
Note
2
From [Frequently Used Features] on the right of the screen, select a button and the
position of the button where you want to allocate a feature.
Note
3
• The position of each button on the right side corresponds to the position on the [Copy] screen.
Select a feature to display, and select [Save].
Note
316
• [Reduce/Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen or [
] to display the next screen.
Copy Service Settings
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, and then select [Save].
Preset Buttons
Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5
Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth buttons in [Paper Supply] on the
[Copy] screen.
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4
Select the magnification ratio displayed in the third and fourth buttons in [Reduce/Enlarge]
on the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from the R/E Preset buttons registered.
Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3
Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Front Cover is selected for [Front Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].
Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3
Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Back Cover is selected for [Back Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].
Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3
Set the default value of the transparency tray displayed in [Transparency Options] on the
[Output Format] screen.
Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3
Set the default value of the separator & handout tray displayed in [Transparency Options]
on the [Output Format] screen.
Copy Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Copy feature. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values as
the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "Copy" (P.49).
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Select] cannot be
selected for [Paper Supply].
Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from [100%], [Auto %], and the buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons.
When the default value of [Paper Supply] is set to [Auto Select], [Auto %] cannot be
selected for [Reduce/Enlarge].
For information on the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.323).
317
15 Tools
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [Copy] screen before making
copies.
Single Color
Set the default value for [Single Color] in [More] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
You can select a color from six preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
Dual Color - Source Color
Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [Color] enables you to select a color from six colors.
Dual Color - Target Area Color
Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color
Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected
for [More] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.323).
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White)
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when a color other than [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the
[Copy] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Black & White)
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality]
screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
318
Copy Service Settings
Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Suppress Background] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or
[Map].
Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan /
Color Balance - Black
Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.
You can set density levels of each color for each of the [Highlights], [Midtones], and
[Shadows].
Note
• Depending on the density level settings, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set as follows:
- When the density levels of all colors are set to [0, 0, 0], [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen
is set to [Normal].
- When the same value is set to all levels for each color (for example: [0, 0, 0,] or [1, 1, 1]), [Color
Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set to [Basic Color].
- When the settings other than the ones described above are applied, [Color Balance] in the [Image
Quality] screen is set to [Advanced Color].
Color Shift
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Copy] screen, [Layout Adjustment], and
[Output Format] screens.
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase - Top Edge
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top directions in
[Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note
• You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Top Edge].
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the bottom
directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm
in 1 mm increments.
Note
• You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Bottom Edge].
Edge Erase - Left Edge
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left directions in
[Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note
• You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Left Edge].
319
15 Tools
Edge Erase - Right Edge
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the right directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note
• You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Right Edge].
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set
the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note
• You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase].
Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2
Set the default value for [2 Sided Original - Side 2] of [Edge Erase] in the [Layout
Adjustment] screen.
Image Shift - Side 1
Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Shift - Side 2
Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction
Set the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] of [Image Rotation] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Pages per Side
Set the default value for [Pages per Side] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Copy Output
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Uncollated - Default Separator Tray
Set the default value for [Separator Tray] under [Copy Output] > [Uncollated with
Separators] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Sample Job
Set the default value for [Sample Job] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray
Set the default value for [Covers] which is displayed when you select a Cover page option in
the [Booklet Creation] screen.
320
Copy Service Settings
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back Cover Tray
Set the default value for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover] which are displayed when you
select Front Cover and Back Cover options in the [Covers] screen.
Separators - Default Separator Tray
Set the default value for [Segment Separator Tray] under [Segment Separators] which is
displayed when you set [Build Job] to [Build Job On] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Copy Control
You can configure settings related to copy operation control.
Memory Full Procedure
If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to
"Auto Job Release" (P.296).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start copying the document partially stored.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of pages stored for a copy document. You can set from 1 to 999
pages.
Auto Paper Off
Select the tray used when [Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen is cancelled.
[Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] is cancelled when [Auto %], [Auto X-Y %] for [Independent
X-Y %], or [Slight Reduction (Improves Fit)] is selected.
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy
Specify paper to copy side 2 of a document: in 2 sided copying, if the size of side 1 and side
2 of a document is different, and the machine detects different paper size for sides 1 and 2.
Note
• When the side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and if the side 2 is copied on the sheet on which the side
1 has been printed, a part of the image may be missing.
Copy to new sheet
Side 2 is copied as side 1 on a new sheet of paper.
Copy to Side 2
Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size.
Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is applied
to [100%] in the [Copy] screen is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction between 98 and 102% in 0.1% increments.
321
15 Tools
Note
• This feature is applied only when a copy is made using the document glass. This setting is not
reflected in the magnification (100%) under [Independent X-Y%] or [Calculator %].
• A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is selected.
ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge
Set the copy magnification ratio when to copy ID cards. Selecting [Allow to Change] allows
you to specify the ratio between 25 to 400 % in 1 % increments.
Note
• The machine may copy an ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on
the magnification ratio you specified.
Background Suppression (Photo & Text)
Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo &
Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Background Suppression Level (Text)
Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Photo & Text /Printed Original
Set the type of document when [Printed Original] of [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original
Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Normal
Copies with standard image quality.
Inkjet Originals
Select [Inkjet Originals] when copying a document printed with an inkjet printer. This
improves the recognition of inkjet colors.
Highlighted Originals
Select [Highlighted Originals] when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This
improves the recognition of the colors of highlight pen.
Original Type - See-Through Paper
When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether or
not to display [Text on See-Through Paper].
Quantity Display
You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service.
Select from [Quantity], [Quantity and Memory], and [Quantity and Original Count].
Maximum Number of Sets
Set the maximum number of allowed sets to copy between 1 and 999. Users will not be able
to specify a larger number of sets to copy than the value set here.
Original Size Defaults
Set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
322
Copy Service Settings
If you frequently make copies of non-standard size document, setting non-standard size as
the default can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes.
Inch Size
You can select a size from inch series sizes.
Others
You can select a size from other sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %] is
selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%] and [Auto %].
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in the [Output Color] screen.
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan (0 to
100%) to each custom color buttons 1 to 6.
Note
• Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.
323
15 Tools
Connectivity & Network Setup
In [Connectivity & Network Setup], you can configure settings related to the Connectivity
& Network feature.
For information on Connectivity and Network Settings, refer to "Printer Environment Settings"
(P.425) or "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.443).
If you use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, more detailed settings are possible. For more
information, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings" (P.417).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Port Settings .............................................................................................................................324
Protocol Settings ......................................................................................................................328
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name....................................................................................331
Proxy Server Settings ...............................................................................................................332
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings .......................................................................................333
Remote Authentication/Directory Service..............................................................................334
Security Settings ......................................................................................................................340
Other Settings ..........................................................................................................................344
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Port Settings
Set the interface of the machine connected to a client. In [Port Settings], you can configure
the following settings.
Note
• For LPD, Port9100, and HTTP-SSL/TLS, do not use a number that is the same as a port number of
another port.
For a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)), do not use a number that is the same as a port number of LPD, Port9100,
and HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Furthermore, if any of the above are set to one of the port numbers indicated below, operation may no
longer be performed properly depending on the setting conditions of the port:
25, 139, 427, 445, 631, 15000
For information on HTTP-SSL/TLS port, refer to "HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number" (P.340).
USB
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use a USB interface.
Print Mode
Select the printer language use on the machine. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from the
host device.
PJL
PJL (Printer Job Language) is a job control language and a PJL command is data prepended
to the top of the print jobs. Usually select [Enabled].
324
Connectivity & Network Setup
Auto Eject Time
Configure the time that the data so far received by the machine will automatically be printed
since data is no longer sent to the printer.
You can enter a time between 5 and 1275 seconds in 5 seconds increments.
Adobe Communication Protocol
• Standard
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII format.
• Binary
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the BCP format.
• TBCP
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the TBCP format.
• RAW
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII or binary format.
The data is printed without being controlled by the Adobe communication protocol.
PostScript Wait Timeout
The machine automatically terminates a connection when the machine does not receive data
for a certain period of time. When data is being printed with [RAW] is selected for [Adobe
Communication Protocol], select [Disabled] if you want to use the time period set in [Auto
Eject Time] or select [Enabled] if you want to use the timeout period of PostScript.
LPD
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use LPD.
Port Number
Enter a port number for LPD from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 515.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Maximum Number of Sessions
Enter the maximum number of client sessions using LPD. You can enter a number from 1
to 10 in 1 session increments.
The default value is 5.
NetWare
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use NetWare®.
SMB
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SMB when you use the Scan to PC (SMB) service or share the
machine on the network.
325
15 Tools
IPP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use IPP.
Set this when you want to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print via the Internet.
Added Port Number
Select [Disabled] when you want to set the machine does not accept IPP from other than the
standard port number, or select [Enabled] when accepts all port numbers.
Enter a port number for IPP other than the standard port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Note
• If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the port number
that is not in use.
• [Added Port Number] cannot be configured if [Port Status] is set to [Disabled].
To configure [Added Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure
[Added Port Number].
EtherTalk
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use EtherTalk.
Bonjour
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Bonjour.
Note
• To print from a printer detected by [Bonjour], the LPD port must be activated in advance.
Port 9100
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Port9100.
Select this option when the communication protocol is in RAW format for Windows®
Standard TCP/IP port monitor.
Port Number
Enter a port number for Port9100 from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 9100.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
SNMP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SNMP, when you use any web applications to control the machine
on the network.
FTP Client
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the Scan to PC service with FTP transmission.
326
Connectivity & Network Setup
Note
• Select a communication mode to send data scanned via FTP from [Passive Mode] and [Active Mode].
[Passive Mode] is selected by default. You can change the setting from Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Receive E-mail
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you receive e-mails.
Send E-mail
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you send e-mails.
E-mail Notification Service
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the E-mail Notification Service. The E-mail Notification
Service notifies you of the machine status or the completion of a print job, and a direct fax
job by e-mail.
Note
• [Consumables Status], [Parts Status], [Paper Tray Status], [Output Tray Status], [Jam Status],
[Interlock Status], and [Fault Notice] are notified as the machine status.
• You can configure the E-mail Notification Service in Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
WSD
Note
• WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
WSD Print - Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use WSD Print.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, and
Windows® 8.
Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Note
• If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the port number
that is not in use.
Internet Services (HTTP)
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information about Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Settings" (P.417).
Port Number
Enter a port number for the Internet Services from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Note
• If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the port number
that is not in use.
• You cannot select [Port Number], if HTTP port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure [Port
Number].
327
15 Tools
SOAP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program.
Port Number
Enter a port number for SOAP from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Note
• If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the port number
that is not in use.
WebDAV
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as Network Scanner Utility3 to
access folders in the machine.
Note
• You cannot select [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], if WebDAV port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], enable port status and reboot the machine, and
then configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out].
Port Number
Enter a port number for WebDAV from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Note
• If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the port number
that is not in use.
Operation Time-Out
You can enter an operation time-out period between 1 and 65535 seconds in 1 second
increments.
ThinPrint
Port Status
You can use the machine for print in the ThinPrint .print environment. The machine
decompresses and prints the compressed print data sent from the print server.
Select [Enabled] when you use ThinPrint®.
Port Number
Enter a port number for ThinPrint from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 4000.
Note
• Do not use any numbers assigned to the other ports.
• ThinPrint is available when the communication protocol uses IPv4.
• The maximum of three connections are possible at a time.
Protocol Settings
Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the
following items.
Ethernet Rated Speed
Set the communication speed for the Ethernet interface.
328
Connectivity & Network Setup
Auto
Select this to detect the Ethernet transmission rate automatically.
100 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Full Duplex) as the default value.
100 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Half Duplex) as the default value.
10 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Full Duplex) as the default value.
10 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Half Duplex) as the default value.
1000 Mbps
Select this to set 1000BASE-T as the default value.
TCP/IP - IP Mode
Allows you to select the TCP/IP operation mode.
IPv4 Mode
Select this option for IPv4.
IPv6 Mode
Select this option for IPv6.
Dual Stack
Select this option for an environment using both IPv4 and IPv6.
IPv4 - IP Address Resolution
Allows you to select a method for obtaining the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
address.
DHCP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP.
BOOTP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via BOOTP.
RARP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via RARP.
DHCP/Autonet
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP/Autonet.
If the machine fails to communicate with the DHCP server, the AutoIP function is
automatically enabled and the machine is assigned an IP address (169.254.xxx.xxx). When
communication between the machine and the DHCP server recovers, the machine is re­
assigned an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address by the DHCP server.
STATIC
Allows you to manually specify an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
329
15 Tools
Note
• To configure a subnet mask and a gateway address, an IP Address must be set first.
IPv4 - IP Address
Enter the IP address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note
• Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
• Specify an IP address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the screen,
select [Backspace] to delete the character.
IPv4 - Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note
• Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
• Specify a subnet mask using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the
screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
IPv4 - Gateway Address
Enter the gateway address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when
selecting [STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note
• Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
• Specify a gateway address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the
screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
IPv4 - DNS Server Setup
Set the DNS server.
Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
DNS Server IP Address
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server
address.
IPv4 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit IPv4 addresses that can access the machine.
Note
• [IPv4 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as Print, Store to Folder, Web Applications
services, and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
• To set the IPv4 IP addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Settings" (P.417).
IPv6 Address Manual Configuration
Allows you to select whether or not to configure the IPv6-address settings manually.
Manually Configured IPv6 Address
This setting is configurable when [IPv6 Address Manual Configuration] is set to [Enable].
Specify an IPv6 address.
Note
• Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
• Specify an address using alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, and A to F) and colons (:). If you mistyped a
character on the screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
330
Connectivity & Network Setup
Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix
This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a prefix
length from 0 to 128.
Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway
This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a
gateway address.
Note
• Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
IPv6 - DNS Server Setup
Set the DNS server for IPv6.
Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
DNS Server IP Address
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server
address.
Automatically Configured IPv6 Address
Displays the following addresses automatically assigned.
• Link-local Address
• Auto Stateless Address 1
• Auto Stateless Address 2
• Auto Stateless Address 3
• Auto Gateway Address
IPv6 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit IPv6 addresses that can access the machine.
Note
• [IPv6 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as the Print, Store to Folder, Web
Applications services, and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
• To set the IPv6 addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. For more information, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings"
(P.417).
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name
Set the e-mail address, host name, and domain name of the machine.
E-mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the machine with up to 128 single-byte characters.
When receiving E-mail via SMTP
You can set any name for the account (on the left side of @). Set the address section (on the
right side of @), with the combination of the host name and domain name. An alias cannot
be set.
For Example: mymail@myhost.example.com
331
15 Tools
• Account name: mymail
• Host name: myhost
• Domain Name: example.com
When receiving E-mails via POP3
Enter the POP user name (on the left side of @) and incoming POP3 mail server name in
the address section (on the right side of @). You can set an alias, such as
mymail@example.com.
For Example: mymail@myhost.example.com
• Account name: mymail
Machine Name
Enter the machine name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Host Name
Enter the host name with up to 16 single-byte characters.
Note
• For SMB, only the first 15 single-byte characters will be used as the Host Name.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name with up to 64 single-byte characters.
Proxy Server Settings
Configure the settings for a proxy server.
Configure a proxy server when inbound/outbound access is used.
Note
• Do not set this item unless you use services requiring proxy server settings.
Use Proxy Server
Select whether or not to use a proxy server.
Proxy Server Setup
Select the proxy server specification from [Same Proxy for All Protocols] or [Different Proxy
for Each Protocol].
Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server
Enter addresses not using the proxy server. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address,
IPv6 address, and FQDN. You can use wildcards "*" for specifying the addresses.
HTTP Proxy Server Name
Enter the server name or IP address of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 255 characters are
allowed. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Note
332
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Connectivity & Network Setup
HTTP Proxy Server Authentication
Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.
HTTP Proxy Server Login Name
Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTP Proxy Server Password
Enter a password of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTPS Proxy Server Name
Enter the HTTPS proxy server name or the IP address. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You
can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number
Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication
Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server.
HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name
Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTPS Proxy Server Password
Enter a password of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings
Set e-mail transmission and reception settings.
POP3 Server Settings
Set the POP3 server. In [POP3 Server Settings], you can set the following items:
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
• When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.
Server Name/IP Address
Enter a server name or IP address with up to 128 characters, and then select [Save].
Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 110.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Polling Interval
Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server from 1 to 120 minutes in 1
minute increments.
333
15 Tools
Login Name
Enter the name to login to the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Password
Enter a password for the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Enter the same password in [New Password] and [Retype Password] using the numeric
keypad displayed by selecting [Keyboard]. If you do not set the password, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
POP Password Encryption
Select [On (APOP)] to encrypt the password.
SMTP Server Settings
Set the SMTP server. In [SMTP Server Settings], you can set the following items:
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
• When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.
SMTP Server Name/IP Address
Enter a server name or IP address, and then select [Save]. Up to 128 characters are allowed.
SMTP Server Port Number
Enter a port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 25.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
E-mail Send Authentication
Select one from [Off], [POP before SMTP], or [SMTP AUTH].
Note
• If [POP before SMTP] is selected, the POP3 settings must be set.
• AUTH PLAIN, AUTH-LOGIN, or AUTH CRAM-MD5 can be used as an authentication method.
Login Credentials for E-mail Send
Select the login user name when sending e-mails from [Remotely Authenticated User] or
[System]. When [Remotely Authenticated User] is selected and if the machine tries
authenticating the remote server before a job startup, the machine performs verification at
the time of transmission with the remotely authenticated user name and password. You can
also select the post-failure behavior of the machine from [Cancel E-mail Send] and [Relogin
using System Data]. If you do not set remote authentication, the machine uses the user ID
and passcode of the machine for authentication.
SMTP AUTH Login Name
Enter the user name for verification purposes at the SMTP server with up to 64 characters.
SMTP AUTH Password
Enter the password for verification purposes at the SMTP server. Up to 64 single-byte
characters are allowed.
Note
• If you do not set the password, leave the text boxes blank and select [Save].
Remote Authentication/Directory Service
You can make the settings for the remote authentication server and directory service.
334
Connectivity & Network Setup
Authentication System Setup
Authentication System
Allows you to select the authentication system from [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos
(Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB], and [Authentication Agent].
After you change the authentication system, personal folders and personal sheets used with
the previous authentication system are not deleted automatically. If these folders or job flow
sheets are no longer needed, delete them from the machine. If the same user IDs are also
used on the new authentication system, personal folders and personal job flow sheets can be
used by the same users.
Server Response Time-Out
Set the server time-out response between 1 and 75 seconds in 1 second increments.
Search Time-Out
Set the user information search time-out between 1 and 120 seconds in 1 second increments.
Kerberos Server Settings
Configure the Kerberos Servers 1 to 5.
The settings in [Kerberos Server 1 (Default)] will be the default settings for authentication.
Primary Server Name/Address
Enter the primary server name or IP address.
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
Primary Server - Port Number
Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 88.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Secondary Server Name/Address
Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
Secondary Server - Port Number
Set the secondary server port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 88.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Domain Name
When you use Active Directory of Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2008, or
Windows Server® 2012 as server, specify the domain name of Active Directory in [Domain
Name]. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
Note
• Enter a realm name in uppercase characters. Otherwise, an authentication error occurs.
335
15 Tools
LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings
Configure the directory server, authentication method, and search attributes and ranges for
LDAP authentication and the Address Book search by LDAP.
Primary Server Name/Address
Enter the primary server name or IP address.
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
Primary Server - Port Number
Set the Primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 389.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Secondary Server Name/Address
Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
Note
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
Secondary Server - Port Number
Set the secondary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 389.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Authentication Method
Select a method to perform LDAP authentication from [Direct Authentication] and
[Authentication of User Attributes].
• Direct Authentication
User ID and password entered by a user are used for LDAP authentication.
• Authentication of User Attributes
The user ID entered is used as an attribute specified in [Attribute of Typed User Name]
to perform a search on the LDAP server. [Attribute of Login User Name] of a user found
through the search is used as the user ID of a job and the owner of a job flow sheet and a
folder.
Attribute of Typed User Name
When [Authentication of User Attributes] is used for LDAP authentication, set the
attribute of the user ID entered. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Set the attribute of the User Attribute information registered on the LDAP server that
corresponds to the value to be entered as the user name from the control panel. For example,
when you want a user to enter the mail address, set "mail."
Attribute of Login User Name
Enter an attribute to be used for LDAP authentication using User Attribute information
registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Use Added Text String
Select whether or not to automatically add text strings in [Text String Added to User Name]
when you enter the authentication information from the control panel.
336
Connectivity & Network Setup
Text String Added to User Name
Enter text strings for [Text String Added to User Name] when you use additional text
strings. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
When [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled], enter the corresponding fixed text string.
For Example:
When "mail" is set for [Attribute of Typed User Name] and the information registered for
the target user is "mail@myhost.example.com," you will need to enter
"mail@myhost.example.com".
However, if [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled] and "@myhost.example.com" is
specified for [Text String Added to User Name], you will only need to enter "mail" from the
control panel because the machine adds "@myhost.example.com" to the end of the string.
Attribute of Smart Card
When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the card ID to
perform a search on the LDAP server to authenticate the user who has the card. Up to 32
characters are allowed.
Note
• This item is displayed when [Smart Card Link Mode] under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings]
> [Authentication] > [User Details Setup] is set to [No Passcode Required].
Network User ID Attribute
When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the user name to
be used for a smart card ID search. The user name is given to the remote service as the
authentication information. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Note
• This item is displayed when [Smart Card Link Mode] under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings]
> [Authentication] > [User Details Setup] is set to [No Passcode Required].
Login Credentials to Search Entries
Select which users are allowed to search the Address Book.
You can select from [Remotely Authenticated User] or [System].
Login Name
Set a user name for the Address Book search and access to the directory server using
[Authentication of User Attributes] method for LDAP authentication. Set this item only
when authentication is required for the search for the directory service. Up to 255 characters
are allowed.
Password
Set a login password for the user specified in [Login Name]. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Search Directory Root
Enter a search root character string with up to 255 characters.
Scope of Search from Root Entry
Select the search range from the root entry.
• Root entry only
- Searches the root level only.
• One level below root entry only
- Searches from the root level to one level below the root level.
• All levels below root entry
- Searches from the root level to all lower levels below the root level.
337
15 Tools
Object Class of Search Target
Enter the object class to search with up to 32 characters.
LDAP Referrals
Specify whether or not to re-establish connection to another LDAP server if a currently
connected LDAP server requests to do so.
LDAP Referral Hop Limit
When using the Referral feature, specify how many times that a user is allowed to hop servers
within 1 to 5 times.
LDAP Server
Select the software used by the directory server from [Microsoft Active Directory],
[Microsoft Exchange], [Novell NetWare], [IBM Lotus Domino 6.*], and [Other
Applications].
Search Entries by Common Name
Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Name] as a search entry when a name is used
as a search key.
Search Entries by Surname
Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Surname] when a name is used as a search key.
Search Entries by Given Name
Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Given Name] when a name is used as a search
key.
Attribute Type of Name
Set the recipient name attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as a recipient
name from user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
For Windows, enter "cn" for an attribute name used as a recipient name.
Attribute Type of Surname
Set the sender's family name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Attribute Type of Given Name
Set the sender's first name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Attribute Type of E-mail Address
Set the e-mail address attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as e-mail
information from the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters
are allowed. For Windows, enter "mail" for an attribute name used as e-mail information.
Attribute Type of Fax Number
Set the fax number attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Attribute Type of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3
Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3. In addition to [Attribute Type of Name]
and [Attribute Type of E-mail Address], you can assign user attributes registered on the
LDAP server for a search. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3
Set the attribute names assigned to custom items 1 to 3. Up to 16 single-byte characters are
allowed.
338
Connectivity & Network Setup
Note
• To encrypt communications using this feature, a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate
certificate authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use must be registered.
Attribute Type of Certificate
Set the certificate attribute type. Select and enter the field name to use as a certificate from
among the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 single-byte characters
are allowed.
For Windows, enter "userCertificate;binary" for an attribute name used as certificate
information. The information is used as an S/MIME certificate when you specify an address
using the directory service to encrypt e-mail transmission by S/MIME.
Note
• To encrypt communications using this feature, a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate
certificate authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use must be registered.
Maximum Number of Search Results
Set a maximum number of address to display from search results from 5 to 100. If the search
results exceed the maximum, the search stops at the maximum number set. The default
value is 50.
Search Time-Out
Select whether or not to set a search time-out. Set the value from 5 to 120 seconds in 1
second increments.
Directory Service for Address Book
Select whether or not to use an address book stored on the directory server.
Even when [Enabled] is selected, the address book for the directory server will not be started
unless the following conditions are satisfied.
• The IP address of the machine must be set.
• The IP address or Internet address of the directory server (primary) must be set.
• The port numbers used for LDAP communication must be set on the directory server and
the machine.
SMB Server Settings
SMB Server Setup
Select the server specification method from [By Domain Name] and [By Domain & Server
Names/IP Address].
According to the option you selected here, set [Domain Name] and [Server Name/IP
Address] for SMB servers 1 to 5 respectively. The setting for SMB server 1 is used as the
default setting for authentication.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name of the server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
This setting is mandatory regardless of the SMB server specification method selected for
[SMB Server Setup].
Note
• Use the NetBIOS or Active Directory domain name for the domain name.
Server Name/IP Address
Enter the server name or IP address.
This setting is valid when [SMB Server Setup] is set to [By Domain & Server Names/IP
Address].
Note
• Use the NetBIOS computer name or full computer name with DNS suffix for the server name.
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
339
15 Tools
Security Settings
Set the security settings.
SSL/TLS Settings
Configure the SSL/TLS settings.
Device Certificate - Server
Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication
Select whether or not to enable HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number
Set the port number used for HTTP SSL/TLS communication from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 443.
Note
• Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication
Set whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications for authentication and searches.
If you enable the LDAP SSL/TLS communications, you must set [Primary Server Port
Number] and [Secondary Server Port Number] under [LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings].
The port number for SSL/TLS communications of the LDAP directory server is normally set
to 636.
SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication
Configure the SSL/TLS communications.
• Disabled
The machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.
• STARTTLS (If Available)
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification
fails, the machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.
• STARTTLS
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification
fails, the machine cannot perform communication.
• SSL/TLS
The machine communicates in SSL/TLS.
ThinPrint-SSL/TLS Communication
Select whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications.
Device Certificate - Client
Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
Verify Remote Server Certificate
When the machine is operated as an SSL client, select whether or not to verify the certificate
of the remote server.
340
Connectivity & Network Setup
S/MIME Settings
Configure S/MIME settings.
Device Certificate - S/MIME
Select a certificate for S/MIME communications.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.463).
S/MIME Communication
Select whether or not to enable S/MIME communications.
Receive Untrusted E-mail
If you select [No], the machine cannot receive the following e-mail:
• E-mails other than e-mail sent by S/MIME when [S/MIME Communication] is set to
[Enabled].
• E-mails that fail to attach a signature or verification.
• E-mails that are attached with an expired certificate.
Message Digest Algorithm
Select a message digest algorithm. Select from [SHA1] and [MD5].
Message Encryption Method
Set the encryption method for mail contents. Select from [3DES], [RC2-40], [RC2-64] and
[RC2-128].
Split Encrypted E-mail
Select whether or not to split an outgoing encrypted e-mail for each recipient.
Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail
Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to outgoing e-mails. You can also
select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature to the e-mail whenever
you send.
Signing Certificate for E-mail Attachment
Select the certificate to use for attaching a signature to e-mails.
Certificate Auto Store
Select whether or not to automatically store an S/MIME certificate attached with the e-mail
when receiving e-mail from an address registered on the Address Book.
PDF/XPS Signature Settings
Configure signature settings of PDF/XPS documents.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Device Certificate
Select a certificate to use for the signature.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.463).
PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].
341
15 Tools
XPS Signature
Select the setting for XPS Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add invisible
signature], or [Select during send].
Signing Certificate
Select the certificate to use for attaching a signature to e-mails.
IPSec Settings
Configure the IPSec settings.
Note
• For [IKE Authentication Method], [Preshared Key], [DH Group], and [PFS Settings], consult your
network administrator.
IKE Authentication Method
Set the IKE authentication method. Select from [Authenticate by Preshared Key] and
[Authenticate by Digital Signature].
Preshared Key
Enter a preshared key. This setting is valid when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to
[Authenticate by Preshared Key].
Device Certificate
Select a certificate for IPSec communications.
Set a certificate when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital
Signature]. A self-signed certificate created by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool cannot
be used.
For more information on a certificate, refer to "Types of Certificate" (P.464).
IPSec Communication
Select whether or not to enable IPSec communications.
IKE SA Life Time
Specify IKE SA lifetime from 5 to 28800 minutes in 1 minute increments.
Note
• The value must be greater than the value set in [IPSec SA Life Time].
IPSec SA Life Time
Specify IPSec SA lifetime from 300 to 172800 seconds in 1 second increments.
Note
• The value must be smaller than the value set in [IKE SA Life Time].
DH Group
Set DH group. Select from [G1] or [G2].
PFS Settings
Select whether or not to enable PFS.
Destination IPv4 Address
Set the IPv4 address of the destination.
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx"
is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
Destination IPv6 Address
Set the IPv6 address of the destination.
342
Connectivity & Network Setup
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format
"xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.
Communicate with Non-IPSec Devices
Select whether or not to communicate with non-IPSec devices.
IEEE 802.1x Settings
Configure the IEEE 802.1x settings.
IEEE 802.1x
Set whether or not to use IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Authentication Method
Select from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MS-CHAPv2], [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2], or [EAP-TLS].
Login User Name
Enter the login user name with up to 128 characters.
Login Password
Enter the login password with up to 128 characters.
Server Certificate Verification
Select whether or not to verify a server certificate when [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings
Configure the settings for certificate revocation retrieval.
Level of Certificate Verification
Select a level of certificate verification from [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Selecting [Low] does not verify the validity of certificates.
Selecting [Medium] verifies the validity of certificates. If a certificate cannot be verified
because of a network error or any other problems, the certificate is determined as valid.
Selecting [High] verifies the validity of certificates, and determines only certificates that
have not been revoked as valid.
Retrieval of Certificate Status
Select the method to verify the validity of certificates. Select [By Retrieving CRL] if the
machine retrieves a CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from the validation authority to verify
the revocation status of the certificate. Select [By OCSP] if the machine uses OCSP (Online
Certificate Status Protocol), which can verify the validity revocation status of the certificate,
to have the certificate authority or validation authority check the revocation status.
Auto Retrieval of CRL
Select whether or not to automatically retrieve a CRL.
CRL Retrieval Time-Out
Specify a time-out value to retrieve a CRL from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second increments.
Send Query to OCSP Responder With
Select how to access an OCSP responder from [URL as Specified in Certificate] or [URL as
Specified by Administrator].
343
15 Tools
URL of OCSP Responder
Enter the URL of an OCSP responder when [URL as Specified by Administrator] has been
selected for [Send Query to OCSP Responder With]. Up to 255 characters are allowed.
OCSP Communication Time-Out
Specify a time-out value for communication between the OCSP responder and the machine
from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second increments.
Other Settings
You can set the following network related items:
Protocol to Receive E-mail
Select from [SMTP] or [POP3] depending on your environment.
Add Domain Name to User Name
Select whether or not to add domain names to user names.
Domain Filtering
Set the domain filtering settings for the E-mail feature.
Domain Filtering
When [Allow Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to permit transmissions. When
[Block Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to prohibit transmissions.
Domains 1 to 50
When [Domain Filtering] is set to [Allow Domains] or [Block Domains], you can specify up
to 50 domains to allow or block transmissions.
Selecting [Change Settings] allows you to enter the domain name using a keyboard displayed
with up to 64 characters.
344
Print Service Settings
Print Service Settings
In [Print Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Print feature.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, you can make more detailed settings.
For more information, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings" (P.417).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Allocate Memory ..................................................................................................................... 345
Delete Form............................................................................................................................. 347
Other Settings ......................................................................................................................... 347
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Print Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Allocate Memory
For each interface, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer (temporary storage for
data sent from the client).
You can change the receiving buffer capacity according to its use and purpose. Increasing the
receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from an interface.
Note
• If you change the capacity memory, the memory is reset, thus all data stored in memory area is
erased.
• You cannot allocate more memory beyond its memory capacity. When you turn the machine on, and
the size set exceeds the total memory size, the system automatically adjusts the memory size.
• When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items to the port do not appear.
• Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may not
change the time taken to release the client.
PostScript Memory
Specify a value for the PostScript memory capacity from 70.00 to 128.00 MB in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note
• The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space
available in memory.
ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory
Displays where to save forms for use with ESC/P-K.
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory
The working memory area for the HP-GL/2 auto layout feature is fixed to the hard disk.
Job Ticket Memory
Specify the amount of memory to use for job tickets from 0.25 to 8.00 MB in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note
• The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space
available in memory.
345
15 Tools
Receiving Buffer - USB
Set the receiving buffer for USB.
You can specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - LPD
Note
• You may not be able to change the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting because of the setting of [LPD Print
Queue].
For more information on [LPD Print Queue], refer to "LPD Print Queue" (P.350).
No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While LPD printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Specify a value for the dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity from 1024 to 2048
KB in 32 KB increments.
Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases, select
[Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].
Spool to Hard Disk
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - NetWare
Set the NetWare receiving buffer.
Specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - SMB
No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While SMB printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Specify a value for the dedicated SMB receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB
in 32 KB increments.
Note
• If you select [No Spooling], job names are displayed as "unknown document name".
Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases, select
[Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].
Spool to Hard Disk
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - IPP
No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While IPP printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
346
Print Service Settings
Specify a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB
in 32 KB increments.
Spool to Hard Disk
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk
Set the EtherTalk receiving buffer.
Specify a value from 1024 to 2048 KB in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100
Set the Port 9100 receiving buffer.
Specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Delete Form
You can delete registered ESC/P-K forms.
1
2
Select [Delete Form].
Select the print mode to delete forms.
ESC/P
Deletes ESC/P-K emulation forms.
Form Number
When you select an item to delete, you can enter
the form number.
Form Name
After you enter the form number and select [Confirm], the form name matching the form
number entered appears.
3
4
Enter the form number with the numeric keypad, and select [Confirm].
Check the form name, and then select [Delete Data].
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the paper used in the printer.
Print Area
Set whether or not to expand the print area.
Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the Auto Paper selection, select
whether or not to print with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the event of using a
substitute tray, select the paper size from [Use Larger Size], [Use Closest Size], or [Select
Tray 5].
Note
• When documents are printed using emulation such as ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2, the substitute tray
setting is not valid and a message prompting you to load paper displayed on the screen.
347
15 Tools
Display Message
Does not use a substitute tray, but displays a paper loading message.
Use Larger Size
Switches to the next larger size of paper than previously selected and prints at the same
magnification.
Use Closest Size
Switches to the closest size of paper to previously selected and prints. If necessary, the image
is automatically reduced in size on the paper.
Note
• If there is a client specification, the client specification is prioritized.
Select Tray 5
Prints using the paper loaded in Tray 5.
Paper Type Mismatch
Set an action to take when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the paper
type specified when a print job is submitted.
Print
Prints using the paper loaded in the tray.
Display Confirmation Screen
A confirmation screen appears to ask whether or not to print the job.
If a paper type mismatch occurs during printing, the machine ignores the paper type
specified and prints the job in accordance with the [Paper Tray Priority], [Paper Size], or
[Substitute Tray] setting.
For more information, refer to "Automatic Tray Selection" (P.207).
Display Paper Supply Screen
Load another type of paper in the selected tray by following the message displayed on the
touch screen, and then press the [Start] button. The machine changes the paper type setting
for the tray and prints the job.
Note
• The machine keeps the changed paper type setting after the printing.
• Even if you press the [Start] button without loading another type of paper in the selected tray, the
machine considers the paper type has been changed and prints the job. Consequently, the print
quality cannot be guaranteed because the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the
paper type specified.
Unregistered Forms
Set whether or not to print a job if a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay
printing) is not registered on the machine. If you specify [Print], only the data is printed
because the specified form is not present.
Resume Job After Print Error
Set whether or not to automatically cancel a print job when the print job was suspended
because of an error.
Note
• The machine will enter the off-line state to restrict subsequent print jobs.
Job Resumes Automatically
Automatically cancels the print job to print subsequent jobs.
348
Print Service Settings
Resume by User
Displays a confirmation screen before cancelling the print job. After the confirmation, the
machine cancels the print job to print the subsequent jobs.
Note
• When [Resume by User] is selected, the machine will not temporarily stop printing even when the
<Interrupt> button is pressed.
When Paper Jam Occurs
Specify how the machine handles print jobs after a paper jam is cleared.
Resume Job after Jam Clearance
When a paper jam is cleared, the machine automatically resumes printing from the next
page of the page which was output correctly.
Delete Job
The machine cancels printing and removes the print job.
Note
• For print files stored in a folder such as Charge Print, Private Charge Print, Secure Print, and Sample
Print, the machine resumes printing after the paper jam is cleared.
Print User ID
When printing using a print driver, specify whether or not to print user ID set in the print
driver on paper. The first 64 letters of the user ID are printed.
Select a position to print from [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right].
Note
• To use the Print User ID feature, the user ID must be set in the print driver beforehand. For more
information, refer to the help of the print driver.
• When user ID set in the print driver is not available, "Unknown User" is printed.
Banner Sheet
You can output a banner sheet to separate different jobs by users not to be mixed the
outputs. The machine outputs the banner sheet before or after the job.
A date, time, user name, and file name are printed on the banner sheet.
Note
• Even if stapling is selected, banner sheets are not stapled.
• When a document is printed from a Macintosh, the document name is not printed on the banner sheet.
• When printed, banner sheets are counted by meter.
Off
Does not print banner sheets.
Start Sheet
Prints a banner sheet before a print job.
End Sheet
Prints a banner sheet after a print job.
Start Sheet & End Sheet
Prints a banner sheet before and after a print job.
Allow Print Driver to Override
Select the check box to print a banner sheet according to the banner sheet print settings of
the print driver.
349
15 Tools
Banner Sheet Offset
Set whether or not to offset when banner sheets are output.
Banner Sheet Tray
Select a paper tray used for banner sheets.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 2 and 4 (optional). You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
PostScript Default Color
Set the default value for Post Script output color.
PostScript Paper Supply
Select whether the PostScript Deferred Media Selection feature is enabled or disabled when
the paper tray is selected. Select [Auto Select] to enable the Deferred Media Selection
feature, or [Select Paper Tray] to disable the feature.
When PostScript data generated by other than the print driver is printed, the tray is not
selected as intended depending on the description method of the PostScript data. In this
case, select [Select Paper Tray].
Note
• Even when you select [Auto Select], the setting is automatically changed to [Select Paper Tray] when
[Use Larger Size] or [Use Closest Size] is selected for [Substitute Tray] and print PostScript data.
PostScript Font Absence
Set an action to take when a PostScript font specified in a job is not present.
Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.
Substitute Font and Print
Prints using a substitute font. Courier is used as the substitute font.
PostScript Font Substitution
Set whether or not to use ATCx as a substitute if a PostScript font specified in a job is not
present.
XPS Print Ticket Processing
Set how the machine processes the print tickets written in XPS documents.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Off
Does not process print tickets.
Standard Mode
Uses the standard mode to process print tickets.
Compatible Mode
Uses the Microsoft®-compliant mode to process print tickets.
LPD Print Queue
Set the LPD print sequence.
Note
350
• If you change the [LPD Print Queue] setting, the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting may automatically be
changed. For more information on Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool, refer to "Receiving Buffer - LPD"
(P.346).
Print Service Settings
Data Processing Order
Prints jobs in the order of becoming print-ready status after receiving the jobs.
If you instruct the machine to print jobs of multiple documents continuously, the machine
may print a smaller-size job first even when a larger-size job is sent first.
Job Submission Order
Prints jobs in the order of lpr print submission.
Note
• This setting is valid only when [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]. When any other
setting, printing is performed in [Data Processing Order].
OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C)
Allows you to select [Backslash] or [Japanese Yen Sign] to print 0x5C character when the
OCR fonts are used.
351
15 Tools
Scan Service Settings
In [Scan Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Scan services.
Note
• When [Scan to Fax Server] is selected in the System Settings, [Scan Service Settings] is replaced with
[Scan/Fax Service Settings].
For information on scanner environment settings, refer to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.451).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
First Tab ...................................................................................................................................352
Scan Defaults ...........................................................................................................................353
Scan to PC Defaults.................................................................................................................355
Original Size Defaults..............................................................................................................355
Output Size Defaults ...............................................................................................................356
Reduce/Enlarge Presets............................................................................................................356
Other Settings ..........................................................................................................................356
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Scan Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
First Tab
You can set the items that appear in the First Tab screen. The First Tab means the screen
displayed when you select the following tabs in the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC],
[Store & Send Link], and [Store to USB] screens.
• The [E-mail] tab of the E-mail service
• The [Store to Folder] tab of the Store to Folder service
• The [Scan to PC] tab of the Scan to PC service
• The [Store & Send Link] tab of the Store & Send Link service
• The [Store to USB] tab of the Store to USB service
Feature in 2nd Column
You can set the features that appear in the second column of the lower part in the First Tab
screen.
You can select from [2 Sided Scanning], [Resolution], [Lighten / Darken], and [Reduce /
Enlarge].
Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Select the magnification ratio displayed in [Reduce/Enlarge] from the Reduce/Enlarge
Presets registered.
For information about the R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.356).
352
Scan Service Settings
Scan Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Scan services. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values as
the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
The values set here become valid after the machine turned off and then on.
Color Scanning
Set the default value for [Color Scanning] in the First Tab.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the First Tab.
File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Optimize PDF For Quick Web View
Set the default value for [Optimize For Quick Web View] of [File Format] in the First Tab.
Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail
For the E-mail feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [XPS] is selected for
[File Format] in the First Tab.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Thumbnail - Scan to PC
For the Scan to PC feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [XPS] is
selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Lighten / Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] of [Image Enhancement] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen.
Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Color Space
Set the default value for [Color Space] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
353
15 Tools
Note
• When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and [Color Space] is set to [Disabled], [Auto Detect]
of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab does not appear.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can select from [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], and [600 dpi].
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select
from [All Edges] or [Parallel Edges].
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges
Set the default value for [Top & Bottom] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment]
screen. Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges
Set the default value for [Left & Right] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Quality/File Size
Set the default value for [Quality/File Size] in the [Filing Options] screen.
Select from [Quality: Normal/File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher +1/File Size: Larger +1],
[Quality: Higher +2/File Size: Larger +2], [Quality: Higher +3/File Size: Larger +3], and
[Quality: Maximum/File Size: Largest].
E-mail Subject
Set the default value for the e-mail subject. Up to 128 characters can be entered for the
subject.
Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject
Set the default value for the subject used for the Store & Send Link feature. Up to 128
characters can be entered for the subject.
E-mail Encryption
Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [E-mail Options] in the [E-mail] screen.
Note
• This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote authentication
(except for Authentication Agent) is set.
Searchable Text
Set the default value for [Searchable Text] in the [File Format] screen under the First Tab.
354
Scan Service Settings
Language of the Original
Set the default language to identify the text on a document.
Searchable - Text Compression
Set whether or not to compress searchable text when using the OCR feature.
Scan to PC Defaults
Transfer Protocol
Set the default value for the transfer protocol used for transfer from [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB
(UNC Format)].
Login Credential to Access Destination
Set whether or not to use a user authenticated by the remote server when the user logs in to
the destination computer for the Scan to PC service. This setting is effective for remote
authentication.
None
Does not use the remotely authenticated user.
Remotely Authenticated User
Uses the user name and the password of the remotely authenticated user for login.
User Name for FTP Scan
When the remotely authenticated user name is used as a login user name for FTP transfers
for the Scan to PC service, specify whether or not to include the domain part of the
credentials.
User Name Only
Uses only the user name part (before "@") of the login credential for the login name. The
domain part is not used.
Add Domain Name
Uses the full login credential name, including the domain name (after "@"), for the user
name.
Original Size Defaults
Set the document size displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You
can assign a document size to each of the 17 buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from sizes of A and B series such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series such as 8.5 x 11".
355
15 Tools
Others
You can select a size from sizes of other than the above series such as photo and postcard
sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Output Size Defaults
Set the sizes to display in [Output Size] when selecting [Enter Output Size] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any output size to output size buttons. Assigning the output sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series such as 8.5 x 11".
Others
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %] is
selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%].
Preset %
Select a ratio from standard magnification ratios.
Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the Scan services specifications.
Memory Full Procedure
If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to
"Auto Job Release" (P.296).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
356
Scan Service Settings
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and starts scanning the document partially stored.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of pages stored for a scan document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.
Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color document. When a document is scanned,
saturation is automatically adjusted according to the value set here.
Background Suppression Level
Set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to
[Auto Suppression].
The larger the value is, the stronger the effect of removing background noise becomes.
Shadow Suppression Level
Set the shadow suppression level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [Auto
Suppression].
Color Space
Set whether or not to display the Color Space feature.
When you select [Enabled], the [Color Space] button is displayed on the [Advanced
Settings] screen for the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], and [Scan to PC].
Note
• When [Disabled] is selected as default and [Color Space] is set to [Device Color Space], [Auto Detect]
of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab ([E-mail]/[Store to Folder]/[Scan to PC]) does not appear. For more
information on Color Space, refer to "Color Space" (P.353).
TIFF Format
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select either [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
Image Transfer Screen
Select whether or not to display a message when the scan of a document completes.
Disabled
Does not display a scan completion message.
Display Message at End of Scanning
Displays a scan completion message.
Display Scan & Transfer Screens
Displays the transfer screen after scan completion. The scan completion message is not
displayed.
Display Message at End of Transfer
Displays a transfer completion message.
Searchable - Page Orientation
Set whether or not to handle the character orientation to be upright when the machine scans
a document with OCR (Optical Character Recognition).
357
15 Tools
Auto Upright Orientation
Handles the character orientation upright regardless of the document orientation.
According to Original Orientation
Handles the character orientation depending on the document orientation.
URL File Expiration
Set the retention period for files stored with the Store & Send Link feature. You can specify
a value from 1 to 168 hours in 1 hour increments. The default value is 3 hours.
Generation of URL Link
Set the format of URLs generated with the Store & Send Link feature. Select either [Use IP
Address] or [Use FQDN].
The following are examples of URLs:
If [Use IP Address] is selected:
http://192.0.2.1/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
If [Use FQDN] is selected:
http://pc1.mycompany.co.jp/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size
Set the maximum data size of files that can be stored for the Store & Send Link feature. You
can specify the value from 1 to 200 MB in 1 MB increments. The default value is 200 MB.
Print Login Name on PDF Files
If scanning a document in PDF format when local machine authentication or remote
authentication is enabled, you can set whether or not to add an authentication user name as
the Author in the document properties of the PDF document.
358
Fax Service Settings
Fax Service Settings
In [Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Fax service.
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
• You can register new address book entries in [Add Address Book Entry] under [Setup]. For more
information, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.390).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Screen Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 359
Fax Defaults............................................................................................................................. 360
Fax Control.............................................................................................................................. 360
Fax Received Options ............................................................................................................. 365
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ........................................................................................................... 365
Original Size Defaults ............................................................................................................. 366
Local Terminal Information ................................................................................................... 366
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Fax Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Screen Defaults
You can set items displayed on the [Fax] screen.
Fax Screen Default
Set the default screen that appears when the [Fax] screen is selected in the [Home] screen.
Select from [Fax Tab] or [Address Book].
Fax Tab -2nd Column
You can set the features that appear in the second column of the lower part in the [Fax]
screen. You can select from [2 Sided Scanning], [Confirmation Options], [Starting Rate],
and [Transmission Header Text].
Address Book Type
Select the type of the Address Book from [Type 1] or [Type 2].
When LDAP Address Book is available for the Fax service and S/MINE communications are
enabled, the setting is fixed to Type 2.
Address Book Speed Dial Default
Specify the default speed dial to display at the top of the [Fax Address Book] screen. Set the
number from 1 to 2000.
Transmission Screen
Set whether or not to display transmission status during transmission.
359
15 Tools
Fax Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Fax services. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits from the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values specified under this menu. By setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults, you can simplify operations.
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Fax] screen.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Fax] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] in the [Fax] screen.
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Starting Rate
Set the default value for [Starting Rate] in the [Fax Options] screen.
Delay Start - Specific Time
Set the default value for [Specific Time] of [Priority Send/Delay Start] in the [Fax Options]
screen when [Specific Time] is selected for [Delay Start].
Transmission Header Text
Set the default value for [Transmission Header Text] in the [Fax Options] screen.
Confirmation Options
Set the default value for [Confirmation Options] in the [Fax Options] screen.
Fax Control
You can configure the settings related to fax control.
Re-enter Recipients
Set whether to re-enter the recipient after once specifying the recipient, to reduce the risk of
sending a fax to the wrong address. When Re-enter Recipients is set to [Enter Twice], if you
specify the recipient by entering the phone number, or by selecting from the Address Book,
the screen prompting you to re-enter the recipient appears. If the same recipient has been
entered, the transmission process will start.
Re-enter Broadcast Recipients
This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Set
whether or not to allow the Broadcast Send.
• Enter Once Only
Allows the Broadcast Send. No need to re-enter the recipient.
• Enter Twice
Allows the Broadcast Send. Re-entering the recipient is required.
360
Fax Service Settings
• Broadcast Disabled
No Broadcast Send is allowed.
Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients
This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Select
how to re-enter a recipient after the first entry.
• Enter Once Only
No need to re-enter the recipient.
• Enter Twice
Use the Speed Dial feature to re-enter the recipient.
• Re-enter Fax Number
You cannot enter the speed dial when you re-enter the number. Use the fax number to
enter the recipient.
Re-enter Group Recipients
Specifies whether you need to re-enter group addresses after entering a group address.
• Group Send Disabled
No group recipient is allowed.
• Enter Once Only
No need to re-enter the group recipient.
• Enter Twice
Re-entering the group recipient is required.
Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab
Specify whether or not to show the [Enable Broadcast] checkbox in the [Fax] screen to
explicitly express broadcast directions.
Manual Redial List - Saved Entries
Specify the number of redial destinations saved.
Manual Redial List - Dial Mode
Specify the destination type saved as a redial destination number.
When you deselect all the check boxes, the Redial feature becomes disabled.
Transmission Header Text - Polling
Set whether or not to attach a transmission header to a polling file.
A polling file is the function that a document is stored in the machine's public folder for
polling, and can then be sent by an operation from the other party.
Polled Files - Auto Delete
Set whether or not to automatically delete a polling file after transmission.
Rotate 90 degrees
Set whether or not to automatically rotate a document if its image must be reduced in size
unless it is rotated.
Note
• If an arbitrary magnification is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], the Rotate 90 Degrees feature does not
function.
361
15 Tools
Sender ID
For G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3-ID to recipients.
Save Undelivered Faxes
Set whether or not to save a fax document if a fax transmission fails. When [Yes] is selected,
the [Undelivered Faxes] button appears on the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab of the [Job
Status] screen. Select this button to send the fax document again.
For details on Undelivered Faxes, refer to "Undelivered Faxes" (P.193).
Save Deleted Faxes
When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to save cancelled
faxes.
Saved Faxes - Auto Delete
When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to automatically
delete saved faxes in 24 hours.
Transmission Interval
Specify a value for the interval between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the
next, from 3 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments.
A longer transmission interval increases the total time to send a broadcast transmission, but
allows calls to be received during the standby time.
Batch Send
When the machine stores multiple faxes addressed to a destination, enabling the Batch Send
feature allows you to send them all at the same time in a single fax transmission. By using
this feature, you can reduce your communication costs.
Select whether or not to enable the Batch Send feature.
Note that a batch send is not available for manual transmissions, broadcasts, relay
broadcasts, remote folder, and delayed start transmission with a specified time before the
specified time. When a redial, resend, delayed start transmission job, or the Authentication
feature is used and different users send to the same address, a batch send is not possible.
Manual Send/Receive Default
When on-hook or off-hook is used when sending a fax, select either [Manual Receive] or
[Manual Send].
Fax Receiving Mode
Set the default value for [Fax Receiving Mode] in the [Machine Information] screen
displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button. Select whether or not to receive a fax
automatically or manually.
Border Limit
Set the length to make a page break that will be applied when the length of a received fax
document is longer than the paper length. You can specify a value from 0 to 127 mm in 1
mm increments.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt
feature.
362
Fax Service Settings
Auto Reduce On Receipt
When the length of a received fax document exceeds the paper length but is within the page
break threshold value, select whether or not to automatically reduce the image to fit the
page.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the Border Limit feature. If you select
[No], the part of the image beyond the paper length is ignored.
Receiving Paper Size
Set the method of notifying the paper size on which the received fax document will be
printed, from the receiver to the sender.
Tray Mode
Specify the paper tray for printing the received fax document. Only the specified paper tray
will be used for printing the received document. Multiple paper trays can be specified except
for Tray 5. If the fax document cannot be printed on the paper loaded in the specified paper
trays, the machine displays a message stating that it will be printed on the paper loaded in
Tray 5. Load paper in Tray 5 and press the <Start> button to print the document. To cancel
printing, press the <Clear All> button.
User Mode
Specify the paper sizes to use for printing received fax documents. Regardless of whether the
paper is loaded in the trays, only the specified size paper is used for printing. When you select
[User Mode], select paper sizes from [A4 ], [A5 ], [8.5 x 11" ], and [Select All]. You can
select one or more paper sizes.
2 Pages Up On Receipt
Set whether or not to print two pages of a fax document on one side of a sheet. This is
convenient for saving paper.
For example, when two A5 pages are received, they are printed on a single A4 sheet. However,
if paper of the same paper size as the received document is specified in [Receiving Paper
Size], it is printed on the specified size of paper. Depending on the sizes of the received
document, two pages of the document may not be printed on one sheet of paper.
2 Sided Printing
Set whether or not to print received fax documents as 2 sided. This is convenient for saving
paper.
Note
• Even if you select [On], depending on the data, 2 sided printing may not always be possible.
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges
Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the top and bottom directions.
Specify a value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges
Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the left and right directions.
Specify a value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.
Reduce 8.5 x 11"
Original to A4
When [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen is set to [Auto %], you can set
whether or not to reduce 8.5 x 11" size document to A4 , while scanning the document.
363
15 Tools
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode
You can select a gradation expression mode. Selecting this mode enables the machine to
change the processing method for gray part (halftone) to achieve near-photo quality. Select
either [Error Diffusion] or [Dither].
Changing this setting also changes the photo gradation mode for Color Scanning (Black &
White).
Folder Selector Setup
Select whether or not to use the Folder Selector Setup feature.
The Folder Selector Setup feature allows you to classify received faxes by line type and store
them in folders specified.
Memory Full Procedure
If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to
"Auto Job Release" (P.296).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of pages stored for a fax document. You can specify from 1 to 999
pages.
Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode
Set the scan mode when the machine scans documents of various sizes simultaneously with
the document feeder. If only documents of standard sizes are to be scanned, we recommend
that you select [Standard Size Mode].
Note
• When [Standard Size Mode] is selected, image loss may occur if the following types of documents are
scanned:
- Non-standard size documents
- B4 size documents with the inch series setting in [Paper Size Settings].
Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3
Set the priority to display the fax information received using folders. For instance, when
using Network Scanner Utility 3, the fax information is displayed in the [Recipient] section
of the file list screen.
There are priority levels from 1 to 3. All priority can be set, however, if you want to display
only one priority level, make the settings of all priority levels the same.
Direct Fax
Set whether or not to receive a fax, which is instructed using a fax driver from a computer.
When you select [Disabled], the Direct Fax feature becomes unavailable.
364
Fax Service Settings
Block Inbound Faxes
Set a G3-ID (fax number) from which you want to reject a fax reception. You can specify up
to 50 G3-IDs.
You can find the G3-ID of the sender that you want to reject in "Remote Station" column of
an Activity Report or "Input Source" column of a Job History Report.
Block Unknown Fax Numbers
Set whether or not to receive faxes from unknown G3-ID fax numbers. When [Yes] is
selected, the machine does not receive faxes from unknown fax numbers.
Fax Received Options
Fax Received Options allows you to specify a method for classifying received fax documents
into specified folders.
Folder Selector Setup
If you set the classification by line type, the machine classifies the received documents by
line type and store them in the folders specified.
1
2
Select [Folder Selector Setup].
Select the line to register, and then select
[Change Settings].
Note
• The displayed items may vary depending on
the options installed.
3
Select [On].
4
Enter the folder number (three digits) where you want to store the faxes with the numeric
keypad.
5
Select [Save].
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
You can set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed under [Reduce/
Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can assign any magnification to the R/E
Preset buttons other than [100%] and [Auto %].
Preset %
You can select a ratio from preset ratios.
Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 50 to 400% in 1% increments.
365
15 Tools
Original Size Defaults
You can set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, setting non-standard size as the
default will save your time to specify the size each time.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11".
Others
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Local Terminal Information
You can set the local terminal information, including a local name and company logo.
Note
• The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.
• You can set a company logo, G3 ID (fax number), G3 dial type, and G3 line type.
Local Name
Register the name of the local terminal as the local name.
The local name is shown in the recipient's touch screen or Activity Report. Depending on the
recipient's device, however, it may not be displayed.
Specify a local name with up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or the
numeric keypad.
Company Logo
Register the sender name (company logo). The company logo is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Specify a company log with up to 60 single-byte characters using
the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note
• If [Line 1 - Company Logo] is not registered, the company logo is used.
Machine Password
Set the machine password when you want to limit the other parties that can send faxes.
When the machine password is set, only a party that sends the correct machine password by
F code is allowed to send or poll. Note that this means that faxes cannot be accepted from a
fax without the F Code feature.
Line 1 - Company Logo
Register the sender name for line 1. The sender name is printed in the Transmission Header
Text or Cover Page. Enter up to 60 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or the
numeric keypad.
G3 Line 1 - Fax ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID. The G3 ID is normally set to the local
terminal fax number.
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note
366
• A G3 ID (fax number) can consist of not more than 20 digits, including 0 to 9, +, and space.
Fax Service Settings
G3 Line 1 - Dial Type
Set the dial type.
Tone
Tone dialing line.
10pps
Pulse dialing line.
G3 Line 1 - Line Type
Set the line type.
PSTN
Subscriber telephone line.
PBX
Private branch exchange.
367
15 Tools
E-mail Service Settings
In [E-mail Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-mail service.
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [E-mail Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
E-mail Control
You can configure the settings for e-mail transmissions.
Maximum Address Entries
Set the maximum number of addresses that can be specified when sending an e-mail.
The number of addresses is the total number of To:/Cc:/Bcc:.
You can set the maximum number of addresses from 1 to 100. If the maximum number of
addresses exceeds, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Incoming E-mail Print Options
When an e-mail sent to the e-mail address of the machine is received, you can select the
print operation.
Print Attachment Only
Only prints the attached documents.
Attachment, Full Headers & Message
Prints the e-mail headers and body of e-mails.
When you select [Attachment, Full Headers & Message (with S/MIME Info)], S/MIME
Information is also printed.
Attachment, Basic Headers & Message
Prints the part of headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of e-mails.
When you select [Do not print if no message], the machine prints only e-mail that has
contents.
Print Error Notification E-mail
Select whether the error e-mail because of an incorrect address or transmission error should
be automatically printed.
Note
• The job for printing error e-mail is displayed as an error on the [Job Status] screen and a Job History
Report even when the job has been complete successfully.
Response to Read Receipts
Set whether or not to respond when a read receipt (MDN) is requested.
Off
Does not respond.
On
Automatically notifies the sender that the e-mail has been processed.
368
E-mail Service Settings
Read Receipts
When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether or not to use the Read Receipts
feature.
Off
The Read Receipts feature is disabled.
On
Uses the Read Receipts feature.
Print Delivery Confirmation Mail
Select whether or not to automatically print transmission result e-mails (DSN response/
MDN response).
Off
Does not print transmission result e-mails.
On
Transmission result e-mails are automatically printed regardless of success or failure of the
transmission.
Print when delivery fails
Prints only when the transmission failed.
Split Send Method
Set the default value for the mail split method.
Split into Pages
Splits into pages.
Split by Data Size
Splits by the data size set in [Maximum Data Size per E-mail].
Maximum Data Size per E-mail
Set the upper limit of the data size for splitting mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 20480 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 10240 KB.
Maximum Total Data Size
Set the upper limit of the data size of mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 200000 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 200000 KB.
Maximum Split Count
Set the split upper limit for when splitting mail.
Specify not to split mail or a value from 2 to 500.
Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field
Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by unregistered users
under [From] on the [E-mail] tab.
369
15 Tools
Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field
Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by guest users under
[From] on the [E-mail] tab.
Allow to edit From if Search Found
Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the [E­
mail] tab when a login user retrieves an e-mail address.
Allow to edit From if Search Failed
Set whether to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the [E-mail]
tab when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail address.
E-mail Sending When Search Failed
Set whether or not to disable the [E-mail] service when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail
address.
Add Me to "To" Field
Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the To field.
Add Me to "Cc" Field
Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the CC field.
Edit E-mail Recipients
Set whether or not to permit to edit e-mail recipients (To, CC, BCC). Selecting [No]
prevents e-mails from being sent to unintended destinations.
Note
370
• If you set [Edit E-mail Recipients] to [No], set [Add Me to "To" Field] to [Yes].
Folder Service Settings
Folder Service Settings
In [Folder Service Settings], you can configure settings to handle files stored in folders.
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Folder Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Files Retrieved By Client
Set whether or not to delete a file stored in a folder when a client retrieves it.
Delete according to Folder settings
Operates following the settings for individual folder.
For more information about setting folders, refer to "Delete Files After Retrieval" (P.382).
Force Delete
Ignores the settings for individual folder, and when a file is retrieved by a client, the retrieved
file is forcibly deleted.
Print & Delete Confirmation Screen
Set whether or not to display a confirmation screen for automatically deleting files after
printing the files stored in a folder.
Convert Custom Size to Standard Size
Set whether or not to convert custom size to standard size when transferring a fax received
or a file for Secure Polling in the folder.
Standard Size Threshold Value
Specify a threshold value for converting custom size to standard size when [Convert Custom
Size to Standard Size] is set to [Yes (Fax files only)].
Specify the value from 0 to 10 mm in 1 mm increments.
Quality/File Size for Retrieval
Select a quality and size for files highly compressed and retrieved from folders. Select from
[Quality: Normal, File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher, File Size: Larger], or [Quality:
Maximum, File Size: Largest].
371
15 Tools
Job Flow Service Settings
In [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure the settings related to the Job Flow. The
Job Flow is a function to perform a series of jobs registered.
Also, in [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure a pool server. As for [Pool Server],
[Pool Server Login Method], and [Job Flow Sheet List Default], however, leave the default
settings unchanged because a pool server is not available for the machine.
You can select a resolution in [Fax Transfer Resolution] when you transfer a scanned
document as a fax.
Pool Server
Leave the default setting unchanged.
Pool Server Login Method
Leave the default setting unchanged.
Job Flow Sheet List Default
Leave the default setting unchanged.
Fax Transfer Resolution
Select the resolution setting when you send a color document as a fax using the Job Flow
feature.
Same Resolution (High Quality)
Converts color images to black and white images on a document with the same resolution
when the document is transferred as a fax. Conversion of high resolution color images will
take longer.
200 dpi (High Speed)
Converts color images to black and white images of 200 dpi on a document when the
document is transferred as a fax.
Reduces the time when converting color images of 300 dpi or higher to black and white
images. 200 dpi is equivalent to [Fine] in fax transmission.
372
Media Print Service Settings
Media Print Service Settings
In [Media Print Service Settings], you can select the paper trays displayed for [Paper Supply]
in the [Media Print - Text] and [Media Print - Photos] screens.
You can import and print image data (DCF1.0 (Exif 2.0 - 2.2 compliant JPEG/TIFF files))
from a digital camera and document files (PDF, TIFF, XML Paper Specification (XPS), or
JPEG (JFIF)). This feature is called the Media Print feature.
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Media Print Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5
Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth columns for [Paper Supply] on the
[Media Print - Text] screen.
373
15 Tools
Stored File Settings
In [Stored File Settings], you can select whether to automatically delete files stored on the
folders or the machine. Set the expiration date and the time of deletion.
You can also set whether or not to delete the stored file by file type.
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Stored File Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Expiration Date for Files in Folder
You can set expiration date for the file in a folder. To delete stored files automatically, specify
an expiration date and deletion time. The settings apply to all folders.
Off
Does not automatically delete the print files stored in the machine.
On
Allows you to set the file retention period and the expiration date. The stored files will be
deleted after the time specified in [Files deleted at] passed.
Files kept for
Set the file retention period from 1 to 14 days.
Files deleted at
Set the deletion time for the expired files from 1 to 12 hours for AM or PM and 0 to 59
minutes.
To automatically delete files at the time specified here, you need to set [Delete Expired Files] to
[Yes]. For more information, refer to "Delete Expired Files" (P.382).
Stored Job Expiration Date
You can set whether or not to automatically delete print files (Charge Print, Private Charge
Print, Secure Print, or Sample Print) stored in the machine.
Options
Set the retention period for stored jobs.
Select from [Off], [On], and [Same Date as Files in Folder]. When [On] is selected, set the
value for [Files kept for] from 1 to 23 hours in 1 hour increments. If the time elapses, print
files stored in the machine are deleted. When [Same Date as Files in Folder] is selected,
print files stored in the machine will be deleted in accordance with the setting in [Expiration
Date for Files in Folder].
Power Off Deletes Jobs
Allows you to set whether or not to delete print files stored when the machine is turned off
and then on. When you select [Yes], all stored print files are deleted. When you select [No],
the machine deletes only the expired stored print files.
Note
374
• If you select [Yes], all print files stored will be deleted regardless of the settings in [Options].
Stored File Settings
Print Job Confirmation Screen
Set whether or not to display a print confirmation screen for deletion of the print files stored
in the machine after printing. When [Enabled] is selected, the confirmation message
appears. You can change the number of print sets if the print settings are permitted to be
modified. When [Disabled] is selected, print files stored in the machine are automatically
deleted after printing.
Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs
Set the minimum number of allowed passcode digits between 0 and 12 digits. A passcode is
required when Secure Print or Private Charge Print files are to be stored or printed.
A passcode must be a string consisting of the number of digits that is equal to or larger than
the value specified here.
Note
• Specify "0" if you do not set passcodes or the minimum number of digits.
Print Order for All Selected Files
Specify the printing order when you select to print all print files stored.
Date & Time: Oldest First
Prints files in chronological order.
Date & Time: Newest First
Prints files in reverse chronological order.
File Name: Ascending
Prints files in ascending order by file name.
File Name: Descending
Prints files in descending order by file name.
375
15 Tools
Web Applications Service Setup
In [Web Applications Service Setup], you can specify the remote access destination.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with the
machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned on the
machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that is stored
in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without going
through another computer.
Note
1
• To use this feature, any web application (purchased separately) is required.
On the [Tools] screen, select [Web Applications Service Setup].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
376
Select an item to set or change.
Web Applications Service Setup
Server Setup
This section describes how to register a server on access web applications.
Note
1
2
3
• If there are one or more servers to register, it is helpful to assign the servers to the buttons displayed
on the [Home] screen.
Select [Server Setup].
Select an access destination you want to register, and then select [Change Settings].
Enter the URL of the access destination, if you register an access destination in a new entry.
URL
Enter the URL of the access destination with up to 256 single-byte characters, and select
[Save]. URL must begin with the type of the protocol used.
Use the version of a web application that is set [Web Applications Version] in "Web Browser
Setup" (P.379).
For example:
• http://www.example.com
• http://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
• http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
• https://www.example.com
• https://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
• https://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
• When specified with V2 (old version)
- http-v2://www.example.com
- http-v2://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
- http-v2://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
• When specified with V3
- http-v3://www.example.com
- http-v3://192.0.2.1(IPv4)
- http-v3://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
• When specified with V4 (new version)
- http-v4://www.example.com
- http-v4://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
- http-v4://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Note
• When the URL is specified with V3, V4 (new version) is used for connection.
• Begin with "https" for a protocol with an encryption feature.
4
Configure other settings as necessary.
Server Name
Enter the access destination name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Description
Enter the description of the access destination with up to 128 single-byte characters.
377
15 Tools
Use User ID
• No
- When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts]:
The machine accesses the remote service using the user information authenticated on
the machine.
- When [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required] or [Login to Local Accounts]:
The machine prompts the user to input User ID and password to access Web
applications.
• Yes
Allows you to enter a user ID and password into [User ID] and [Password] respectively,
which are used when the machine accesses the remote service.
User ID
Enter the User ID to access the remote service with up to 128 characters.
Note
• Depending on the settings on the remote service, the entry for [User ID] may be invalid. Check the
settings on the remote service.
• Along with [User ID], set also [Password]. [User ID] will be invalid unless [Password] is set.
• All the specified settings are ignored if the remote service to be connected requires other than a user
ID and its password for authentication.
Password
Enter the password for the User ID with up to 128 characters.
Machine/Authentication Notification
Set whether or not to notify the remote server of machine information and user
authentication information every time the machine connects to the remote service.
Note
• The remote service determines whether to use the information. No need to configure settings on the
control panel.
Notify User Authorization Information
Set whether or not to notify the remote service of user authorization information every time
the machine connects to the remote service.
Delete All Settings
Deletes all settings registered.
Other Settings
When Sending User Details
Set whether or not to display a confirmation screen when the machine send user
authorization information (authorized User ID, password, e-mail address, and the services
restricted) to the remote server.
Note
378
• Even when you select [No Confirmation Required], if there is a flaw in the authentication information, a
confirmation screen is displayed.
Web Browser Setup
Web Browser Setup
In [Web Browser Setup], you can configure the settings for the web browser to be used when
the machine accesses a web application using the Web Applications feature.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with the
machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned on the
machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that is stored
in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without going
through another computer.
Note
1
• To use this feature, any web application (purchased separately) is required.
On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Web Browser Setup].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Web Applications Version
Select a version of the Web applications service from [V2 (Old Version)] and [V4 (New
Version)].
Note
• If [V2 (Old Version)] is selected, the following settings become invalid: [Delete Persistent Cookie Upon
Closing], [Clear Cache Upon Closing], [Use Cache], [Accept Cookies], [Use TLS1.0], [Use SSL3.0],
[When SSL Certificate Verification Fails], and [Enable File Printing].
• When you use V3 of the web application version, select [V4 (New Version)].
Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing
Specify whether to delete persistent cookie when connection to a Web application ends.
Clear Cache Upon Closing
Specify whether to delete cache when connection to a Web application ends.
Use Cache
Specify whether to use cache.
Accept Cookies
Specify whether to accept cookies.
Select from [No], [Yes], and [Warn user when cookie is offered].
When you select [Warn user when cookie is offered], the machine behaves as when you
select [Yes].
Use TLS1.0
Specify whether to use TLS 1.0.
Use SSL3.0
Specify whether to use SSL 3.0.
When SSL Certificate Verification Fails
Specify whether to stop accessing the site or to display a confirmation screen for access if SSL
certificate verification fails.
379
15 Tools
Enable File Printing
Specify whether to use the File Printing feature.
The File Printing feature allows you to directly print the printable files obtained from the
remote Web server.
380
Setup
Setup
In [Setup], you can create or update folders, job flows, and the Address Book.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Create Folder........................................................................................................................... 381
Stored Programming ............................................................................................................... 383
Create Job Flow Sheet............................................................................................................. 383
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ............................................................................................. 390
Add Address Book Entry ......................................................................................................... 390
Create Fax Group Recipients ................................................................................................. 396
Add Fax Comment.................................................................................................................. 397
Paper Tray Attributes .............................................................................................................. 397
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Setup].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Create Folder
Using the Folder function enables you to store scanned documents using the machine, fax
received documents, or print documents sent from a computer in the machine.
You can also send a file stored in a folder via e-mail or retrieve a file stored in a computer on
a network.
You can create a private folder and a public folder in the machine and use them separately
depending on your purpose.
You can create up to 200 folders.
You can check the current folders in a Folder List. For more information, refer to "Folder List"
(P.266).
1
2
Select [Create Folder].
Select the folder to create.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
• Entering a 3-digit folder number with the
numeric keypad displays the specified folder
at the top of the column.
3
When you create a folder, the [New Folder Passcode] screen appears. Select items, and
then select [Save].
Note
• When you select a folder already created, the
[Folder XXX - Create/Delete] screen appears.
For more information on assigning a passcode, refer
to "Check Folder Passcode" (P.382).
4
5
Select items and set the required settings.
When you finish required settings, select [Save].
381
15 Tools
Folder Name
Set the folder name. Enter up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.
Check Folder Passcode
Set an access restriction to permit operations for specified users only.
Check Folder Passcode
• Off
Does not set an access restriction.
• On
Set a passcode for access restriction.
Folder Passcode
To use the Check Folder Passcode feature, enter a passcode. You can enter a passcode of up
to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9).
Target Operation
Set the operations to be restricted.
• Always (All Operations)
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected or a file in a folder is printed or
deleted.
• Save (Write)
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected.
• Print/Delete (Read)
A passcode entry is required when printing or deleting the file in the folder.
Delete Files After Retrieval
When a file stored in a folder is printed or is retrieved from a remote server, set whether the
file should be deleted.
No
The file is left stored.
Yes
After the file is printed, or is retrieved by an external source, it is automatically deleted.
Note
• If you select [Yes], a file is not deleted when retrieved from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Delete Expired Files
Specify whether or not to enable the operation to delete files stored in a folder at a specified
time after a retention period has elapsed.
No
Even when the retention period has elapsed, files are not deleted.
Yes
Deletes expired files at the specified time. If, however, the expiration date has not been
specified, files are not deleted even when [Yes] is selected.
382
Setup
Note
• When the machine is off at the deletion time of an expired file, the file is deleted next time the deletion
time comes after the machine is turned on.
For information on setting the file retention period, refer to "Expiration Date for Files in Folder"
(P.374).
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder
You can link a job flow sheet to a folder. Linking a job flow in which a series of actions is
recorded to a folder enables you to set the processing method for files stored in a folder.
For information on how to register a job flow, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.383).
Cut Link
Cancels the link between a folder and a linked job flow sheet.
Create/Change Link
A screen to link a job flow sheet appears. You can select the existing job flow sheets or create
a new job flow sheet.
For more information about the operation, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.383).
Auto Start
If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a file is stored in a folder, the procedures
registered on the job flow linked automatically starts.
When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected
Selecting this button deletes the selected folder. Any files stored in the folder are also
deleted.
If [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required], all the job flow sheets, including a local user
created on the [Create Folder] screen or job flow sheets created on the [Send from Folder]
screen, are deleted as well.
Note
• Once files or job flow sheets are deleted, they cannot be restored.
Stored Programming
The Stored Programming feature enables you to register frequently used settings and record
a series of operations.
For more information on operation, refer to "Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs"
(P.153).
Create Job Flow Sheet
Job flow is a feature to execute a series of registered actions. Up to 1000 job flow sheets can
be created.
The target of a job flow is files stored in a folder. A job flow can be executed by using one of
the following four methods:
• by automatically starting a job flow when a file is stored in a folder
• by selecting a file stored in a folder to manually execute the associated job flow
• by selecting a file stored in a folder to select a job flow and execute manually
• by selecting a job flow sheet from [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen to manually execute
To start a job flow automatically, you must link the job flow to a folder. When a file is stored
in the folder, it is automatically processed in accordance with the job flow sheet linked.
383
15 Tools
Note
• To link a folder with a job flow sheet created with [Create Job Flow Sheet], start from [Send from
Folder] or [Create Folder]. For more information, refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
Features that can be registered are listed below.
• Forward to (FTP, SMB, e-mail, and fax)
• Print
Depending on the method of storing in the folder, there are restrictions on the combination
of features.
Output
Print
Fax
Mail
FTP
SMB
Fax Documents for
Secure Polling
O
O
O
O
O
Scanning
O
O
O
O
O
Fax to Folder
O*
O
O
O
O
Print Stored
X
X
X
X
X
Input
O :Available
X :Not available
u :Available depending on the System Administration mode settings
* : If the fax USB cable is disconnected while a received fax file in a folder is being printed, the file is not deleted after printing,
even if the delete after printing setting is enabled in the folder settings.
Note
• For Fax Documents for Secure Polling and Fax to Folder in the above tables, when sending or
transferring a monochrome document via e-mail, FTP, or SMB, the transferred document cannot be
opened on the destination machine if [JPEG] is set for [File Format] for the job flow.
Restrictions on Using Job Flow
A job flow can be used by single or multiple users, or can be used by linking to a specific
folder. The Authentication feature restricts the use of the job flows.
For information on the available Job Flow features and restrictions on use, refer to "Authentication
for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.489).
1
2
Select [Create Job Flow Sheet].
Carry out the job flow operation in accordance
with your purpose.
Sheet Filtering
You can filter the job flow sheets to display.
Select the filtering conditions, and then select
[Save].
Note
384
• The screen displayed varies depending on the
Login Type selected.
Setup
• Owner
Filters job flow sheets by owner type.
• Target
Filters job flow sheets by target, such as scan jobs and folders.
Create
Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.
Refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.385).
Edit/Delete
Displays the [Details] screen.
Refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.390).
Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow
names that were registered upon each job flow creation. You can enter up to 128 single-byte
characters.
Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the System Settings to
search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches
through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.
For information on the keyword registry, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.390).
Create New Job Flow Sheet
Create a new job flow.
1
Select an item to set, and then select [Edit].
Delete
Deletes all setting values of the selected item.
Edit
Confirm or change the settings of the selected item.
Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.
Name
Set the name for the job flow sheet with up to 128 single-byte characters.
385
15 Tools
Description
Set the description of the job flow sheet with up to 256 single-byte characters.
Keyword
Enter a keyword with up to 12 single-byte characters for job flow search. You can also use the
keywords that are registered for [Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword].
For information on the job flow keyword search, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.390).
Send as Fax
Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
Note
• You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.
Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and select
[Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send Fax] screen.
New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send
Fax] screen.
Name/Fax Number
Displays the recipient name or fax number specified.
Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
Cancel
Deselect the selected item.
Send as E-mail
Specify the recipients for e-mail transmission.
You can specify a total of 100 addresses, either by selecting from the Address Book or by
direct input.
If [Encryption] is set to [On], you cannot specify a recipient by selecting [New Recipient].
Address Book
You can specify the recipients from the Address Book. The address specified appears in
[Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail] screen.
New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail]
screen.
Name/E-mail Address
Displays the recipient name or e-mail address specified.
386
Setup
Subject
Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed.
Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient information.
Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
File Format
Select an output file format.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
• Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
• Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Encryption
Set whether or not to encrypt the e-mail transmission.
Note
• To encrypt e-mail transmission, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To encrypt e-mail transmission, a certificate is required.
• To enable encryption, select [On] before specifying an address. [On] will be disabled after an address
is specified.
Digital Signature
Select whether or not to add digital signature.
Note
• To add digital signature, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To add digital signature, a certificate is required.
Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)
Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via FTP (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via FTP (1)] is configured.
Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address from
the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via FTP (1)] or [Transfer
via FTP (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.390).
File Format
Specify an output file format.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
387
15 Tools
• Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
• Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Name, Server, Save in, User Name, and Password
Select [Name], [Server], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
• Name: Up to 36 single-byte characters
• Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
• Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters
• User Name: Up to 97 single-byte characters
• Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)
Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via SMB (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via SMB (1)] is configured.
Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address from
the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via SMB (1)] or [Transfer
via SMB (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.390).
File Format
Specify an output file format.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
• Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
• Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, and Password
Select [Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display
an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
• Name: Up to 36 single-byte characters
• Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
• Shared Name: Up to 64 single-byte characters
• Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters
388
Setup
• User Name:
For domain users: up to 97 characters with the format of "user name@domain name" or
"domain name\user name"
(user name and domain name must be up to 32 and 64 single-byte characters, respectively)
For local users: up to 32 single-byte characters
• Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Print
Configure print settings. When [On] is selected, you can configure the settings for the Print
feature.
Print Quantity
Set the number of copy sets from 1 to 999 in 1 set increments.
Paper Supply
Select a paper tray for printing. When [Auto Select] is selected, the same paper size as the
document size is used.
• Auto Select
A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.
• Trays 1 and 2 to 4 (optional)
Select paper from four trays.
• Bypass
Prints on paper loaded in Tray 5.
2 Sided Printing
Set the 2 sided printing option.
Staple
Configure the stapling.
• Off
Set the output destination.
• 1Staple
Set the stapling position to top left.
• 1Staple
Set the stapling position to bottom right.
E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.
Name/E-mail Address
Set the recipient of the e-mail notification.
Message
Enter a message that is displayed in the e-mail message body.
When to Notify
Select the e-mail notification timing from [When file is stored] and [At the end of Job Flow].
389
15 Tools
Delete
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
Edit
Allows you to check or change the recipient selected.
Close Menu
Deselects the selected item.
Edit/Delete
You can check the content of a job flow sheet, and edit, copy, or delete it.
Note
• Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners, authentication settings, and
user types. For more information, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.489).
Delete
Deletes the selected job flow sheet.
Copy
Creates a duplicate of the selected job flow sheet. You can create a new job flow sheet based
on the duplicate.
The procedure of creation is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer
to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.385).
Edit
You can edit the selected job flow sheet.
The procedure of change is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer
to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.385).
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword
You can register job flow search keywords. The registered keywords will be displayed under
[Select Keyword] and can be used for searching job flow sheets. The keywords are also
available from a list under [Keyword] that is displayed when you create a new job flow sheet.
Up to 12 single-byte characters are allowed for a job flow search keyword.
Add Address Book Entry
You can register frequently used addresses on the Address Book. Select an address type from
Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB).
When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] on the [Fax], and
[E-mail] screens.
You can store a total of 2000 addresses for Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB).
Note
• The following address types can be selected when you add an address to Address Book: Fax, E-mail,
and Server (FTP/SMB)
When you register an address on the Address Book, select an address type in accordance with the
service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type cannot be selected from the
original service.
• To specify an e-mail address or a server address for the Scan services, use the Address Book. The
speed dial with the numeric keypad, and the group address created using the Group Recipients
feature cannot be used to specify such addresses.
• You can register, edit, delete, or view the Address Book from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
390
Setup
1
Select [Add Address Book Entry].
Note
2
• To display the [Add Address Book Entry] screen, press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the system
administrator's user ID, and then select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry]. If [Setup] is
displayed on the [Home] screen, select [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry].
Press a speed dial to register.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
• Entering a speed dial number with the numeric
keypad displays the specified number at the
top of the column.
3
Select [Address Type].
4
Select the address type, and then select [Save].
5
Select an item to set and set.
6
When the settings are completed, select [Save].
When selecting [E-mail] as the address type
The following items appear:
• Address Type
• Given Name
• E-mail Address
• Telephone number
• Name
• Office
• Surname
• Department
• S/MIME Certificate
When selecting [Server] as the address type
The following items appear:
• Address Type
• Save in
391
15 Tools
• Name
• User Name
• Transfer Protocol
• Password
• Server Name/IP Addressl
• Port Number
• Shared Name (SMB Only)
When selecting [Fax] as the address type
The following items appear:
• Address Type
• Delay Start
• Fax Number
• Remote Folder
• Name
• F Code
• Index
• Relay Broadcast
• Starting Rate
• Billing - Day Time
• Resolution
• Billing - Night Time
• Cover Page
• Billing - Midnight
• Maximum Image Size
Address Type
Allows you to change an address type.
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 single-byte characters.
Name
Enter a recipient name with up to 18 single-byte characters.
Surname
Enter a recipient surname with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Given Name
Enter a recipient given name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Telephone Number
Enter a recipient telephone number with up to 32 single byte characters.
Office
Enter a recipient office with up to 32 single byte characters.
Department
Enter a recipient department with up to 32 single byte characters.
S/MIME Certificate
Allows you to link an S/MIME certificate. The S/MIME certificate must be registered in
advance.
To link a certificate, select [Attach/Change Link] and select a certificate in a screen
displayed. To remove a link, select [Remove Certificate].
392
Setup
Note
• If a certificate linked to an S/MIME certificate in the Address Book is deleted by some reasons such as
hard disk initialization and the deletion of the certificate, the certificate linked to the S/MIME
certificate will be invalid. Even if you re-register the S/MIME certificate, you have to manually link it
again.
• If many certificates are registered on the machine, it may take a long time to link a certificate.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.463).
Transfer Protocol
Set the transfer protocol. You can select either [FTP] or [SMB].
Server Name/IP address
Enter a name or an IP address of a forwarding destination server.
Shared Name (SMB Only)
Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder.
Note
• If the "/" mark is used at the top of a shared name, a job flow cannot read the shared name correctly.
Do not use the "/" mark at the top of a shared name.
Save in
Enter the directory for storing files. When SMB is selected, use a UNC format.
• Transferring via FTP
For example: aaa/bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in the root directory.
• Transferring via SMB
For example: aaa\bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in a specified volume.
User Name
Set the user name when a user name is required to be input by the forwarding destination
server.
When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.
When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats:
• For Active Directory:
User name@Domain name (User name: up to 32 characters / Domain name: up to 64
characters)
For example: abc@example.com ("abc" is a user name and "example.com" is a domain
name)
• For Windows NT® domains:
Domain name\User name (Domain name: up to 64 characters / User name: up to 32
characters)
For example: example\abc ("example" is a domain name and "abc" is a user name)
• For workgroups:
Local User (up to 32 characters)
For example: ABC
393
15 Tools
Password
Set a password when the forwarding destination server prompts a password entry. You can
enter up to 32 single-byte characters for a password.
Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Specify a number from 1 to 65535.
Fax Number
Enter a fax number with up to 128 digits.
Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword to search with
the Address Book.
Starting Rate
Set a communications mode. You can select either [G3 Auto] or [Forced 4800 bps].
When the destination is specified by a speed dial number with the communications mode
set, you cannot change the communications mode in the [Fax] screen.
Resolution
Set image quality for transmission.
Select from [Panel] (image quality selected on the control panel), [Standard (200x100 dpi)],
[Fine (200 dpi)], [Superfine (400 dpi)], or [Superfine (600 dpi)].
Cover Page
Select whether or not to send a fax with a cover note attached. If attached, specify comments
on the sender and a recipient to be printed in the cover pages.
Comments must be registered in advance.
For information on comment registration, refer to "Add Fax Comment" (P.397).
1
2
Select [Print Cover Page].
3
Select any comment from the list of comments
displayed under [Recipient's Comment] and
[Sender's Comment].
Select [Comments].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
4
Select [Save]. The image of the Fax Cover Page
is displayed.
5
Select [Save].
Maximum Image Size
Select the maximum image size to match the recipient's paper size or available profile.
394
Setup
Delay Start
Set whether or not to use a delayed start transmission.
If the machine's system clock is set to the 24-hour display, [AM] and [PM] do not appear. For
information on the system clock, refer to "Time" (P.295).
Remote Folder
Select whether or not to send a fax to a recipient's folder. To use folder communications, you
must obtain the recipient's folder number and passcode in advance.
1
2
Select [On].
3
If a passcode is set, enter the passcode with the
numeric keypad.
Enter a recipient's folder number with the
numeric keypad.
Note
• If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
F Code
Select whether or not to use F code communications.
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network
Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using subaddresses that are standardized by the ITU-T.
For F code (sub address) and password, you can use up to 20 digits 0 to 9, *, and #.
1
2
Select [On].
Enter the F code with the numeric keypad.
Note
3
• The F code consists of "0" + folder number. For
example, if the folder number is 123, the F code
will be "0123".
Enter the password as required with the
numeric keypad, and then select [Save].
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
Relay Broadcast
Set the instruction given to a relay station, which is used when the machine is a base station
and the registered speed dial is a relay station for relay broadcast.
When selecting [On], set [Relay Station ID], [Print at Relay Station], and [Broadcast
Recipients].
1
2
Select [On].
Enter a 2-digit relay station ID with the numeric
keypad.
Note
3
• The relay station ID is the address number for
the base station (the machine) already
registered on the relay station.
Select [Speed Dial 001<->099].
395
15 Tools
4
Enter a speed dial number of broadcast destination (001 to 099) or group number (#01 to
#09) registered on the relay station with the numeric keypad, and then select [Add].
Note
5
6
• If there are more than one broadcast destinations, repeat step 4.
To print a document also at the relay station, under select [On] for [Print at Relay Station].
Select [Save].
Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing - Midnight
Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/
midnight).
You can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
This item is displayed when [Accounting] > [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting] and
[Fax] is set to [Enable Accounting] under [Auditron Mode]. For information on how to enable the
feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.403).
The information registered can be confirmed by printing a Billing Data List. For information about
how to print, refer to "Billing Data List" (P.265).
1
2
3
Select one of [Billing - Day Time], [Billing - Night Time], and [Billing - Midnight].
4
Select [Save].
Select [Billing].
Enter the time for one unit charge from 0.1 to
255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments with the
numeric keypad.
When the [Delete Entry] Button is Selected
Selecting this button deletes all the information registered for the address selected. To delete
all information registered, select [Delete].
Note
• Deleted information cannot be restored.
Create Fax Group Recipients
You can register addresses for broadcast transmission as a group. Each group can include up
to 20 address numbers. The maximum number of groups that can be registered is 50.
Note that recipients to be added to a group must be registered in the speed dials on the
Address Book.
Note
• Even when the speed dial number of fax recipients (address book entries) are included in a group, the
machine does not send faxes to the recipients if their address types are set to [Email] or [Server].
• You cannot include a group in another group.
• You can use wildcards for specifying the numbers in the last one or two digits as shown in the
following example:
- 001*:Specifies the 10 addresses with address numbers 0010 to 0019.
- ****:Specifies all address numbers.
396
Setup
1
2
Select [Create Fax Group Recipients].
Select a group number to register.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select [Group Name] and enter a group name
to register, and then select [Save].
4
Enter a speed dial number (four digits) to
register with the numeric keypad, and then
select [Add to this Group].
5
6
Repeat step 4 to register the address numbers.
Select [Save].
Delete this group
Deletes all information registered on a group.
Delete from this group
Deletes a registered address. Select the speed dial or enter the speed dial number to delete
with the numeric keypad, and then select [Delete from this group].
Add Fax Comment
You can register comments to be printed on cover sheets. A maximum of 50 comments can
be registered, each of which can be up to 36 single-byte characters.
Paper Tray Attributes
Set a paper size and a paper type load in each tray.
Refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.301).
397
15 Tools
Accounting
In [Accounting], you can register the users that will use the machine, and set the operation
settings of the Accounting feature.
For more information about this feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.477).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Create/View User Accounts .....................................................................................................398
View Accounts ..........................................................................................................................401
Reset User Accounts ................................................................................................................401
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs) ............................................................................402
Accounting Type ......................................................................................................................402
Accounting Login Screen Settings ..........................................................................................403
Fax Billing Data .......................................................................................................................404
Accounting/Billing Device Settings.........................................................................................405
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Accounting].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
Create/View User Accounts
To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also check
the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can be
registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts] under
[Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Note
• Before registering users, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.402) and set the Accounting Type you use.
• This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in "Accounting Type" (P.402).
1
2
Select [Create/View User Accounts].
Select a User ID to register for which you want
to register a user, and then select [Create/
Delete].
Note
• A 4-digit number displayed on the left of the
User ID is a user control number.
• Selecting [<Available>] displays the screen to
enter the User ID. Enter the User ID, and then
select [Save].
• Select [
] to display the previous screen or [
] to display the next screen.
• Entering a 4-digit User ID number with the numeric keypad displays the specified number at the top of
the column.
398
Accounting
3
4
Specify the settings.
Select [Close].
User ID
Enter a user ID to use the machine. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
User Name
Set a user name. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
Passcode
Set a passcode. Setting a passcode is strongly recommended for security. Set a passcode from
4 to 12 digits.
Note
• When [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [On], a passcode entry is required upon user
authentication.
For information on how to change your passcode later, refer to "Changing Passcode" (P.508).
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 characters. The address set here will be set as [From]
under [E-mail].
Account Limit
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of
the Copy, Fax, Scan, and Print features.
1
2
Select [Account Limit].
3
To set account limits, select [Change Account Limit], and then enter the maximum
number of pages with the numeric keypad.
Select a feature to restrict.
Feature Access
Set access restrictions on features.
• Free Access
The feature is not restricted.
• No Access to Copy/Fax/Scan/Print Service
Allows you to restrict the use of the Copy, Fax, Scan, or Print service.
399
15 Tools
Change Account Limit
Set the maximum number of pages for copying, scanning, or printing.
You can specify a number from 1 to 9,999,999 (7 digits) sheets in 1 sheet increments.
• The following limits can be placed on the Copy service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to
Copy Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
• The following limits can be placed on the Fax service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access] or [No Access to Fax Service]
• The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to
Scan Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
• The following limits can be placed on the Print service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], or [No Access to Print Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
User Role
User Role
Allows you to select a user role for a user.
• User
No special authority is given to this user role.
• System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operation:
- Operate folders
- Operate job flow sheets
- Change the passcode of the system administrator
• Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
- Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
- Create, delete, change, and view accounting
- Change an Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
- Print an Auditron Report for each user
Add This User to Authorization Group
Allows you to select an authorization group for a user.
Reset Account
Deletes all registered information for a selected user.
Reset
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
400
Accounting
Note
• All job flow sheets, folders, and files within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is
owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a folder for
example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
Cancel
Cancels the deletion of the user data.
Reset Total Impressions
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.
Reset
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count
cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.
View Accounts
Selecting [ColorTrack] on the [Accounting Type] screen allows you to check the following
for each registered user or group: (1) the maximum number of times that the account can
be used for each service, and (2) how many times the account has been used for each service.
Note
• You can register users and groups on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1
2
Click [View Accounts].
3
Click [Account Details].
Select [User Account] or [Group Account]. If you select [User Account], select also the
User ID to check.
Reset User Accounts
You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or reset
the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before resetting. The
settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under [Authentication] of
[Authentication/Security Settings].
Note
• This item does not appear when [Network Accounting]or [ColorTrack] is selected in [Accounting
Type].
All User Accounts
Deletes all information registered for each user. It also deletes all data including the
maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, and printer auditron data.
Note
• All job flow sheets, folders, and documents within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the user
is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a folder
for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
All Feature Access Settings
Resets the feature access limit for all users.
All Account Limits
Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).
401
15 Tools
Total Impressions
Resets all accounting data for all users including the system administrator. The number of
pages is also reset to 0.
All Authorization Groups
Delinks users from authorization groups, and links those users to the default authorization
group.
Meter (Print Jobs)
Resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names. The
number of pages printed is also reset to 0.
Note
• [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the
[Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
Print the Auditron Report
Prints a report including contents registered information to reset or a report including
contents administration data to reset.
The report is available for confirmation before resetting.
Print the Meter Report
Prints a meter report, which is helpful when you check counters before you reset or delete
them.
Note
• [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the
[Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)
You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration mode
on the screen.
The total impressions are counted up to 9,999,999 pages.
Note
• This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
Accounting Type
You can select whether or not to use the Accounting feature.
Accounting Disabled
Does not perform accounting.
Local Accounting
Performs accounting.
Network Accounting
Performs accounting based on the user information managed on a remote service. User
information is registered on the remote service.
Note
• When [Network Accounting] is selected, users are prompted to enter their Account ID on the [Login]
screen that is displayed when attempting to use services required for accounting.
For more information on Network Accounting, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.482).
402
Accounting
ColorTrack
Accounting is carried out based on the user information and account information pre­
registered on the machine.
Auditron Mode
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the Auditron feature for the following services:
• Copy
• Fax
• Store to Folder
• E-mail
• Scan to PC
• Store to USB
• Store & Send Link
• Media Print - Text
• Media Print - Photos
• Print
Note
• The services displayed on the screen vary depending on the machine configuration.
• When [Enable Accounting] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable
service on the [Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Home]
screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• Print jobs may be canceled depending on the settings in "Receive Control" (P.413).
Verify User Details
Allows you to set whether or not to verify user information.
Selecting [Yes] also allows you to select [For printer/Direct Fax Jobs].
Customize User Prompts
Allows you to set the type of user information used for authentication.
Note
• Account ID is used for accounting.
• Display User ID & Account ID Prompts
Prompts users to enter both their user ID and Account ID.
• Display User ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their user ID only.
• Display Account ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their Account ID only.
• Display No Prompts
Does not prompt users to enter their user ID or Account ID.
Accounting Login Screen Settings
You can configure Accounting settings.
Alternative Name for User ID
If required, you can change the indication "User ID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the touch
screen is pressed to another name such as "User Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to
1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
• The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask User ID (***)
You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
403
15 Tools
Show
As you enter the user ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
Hide
As you enter the user ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
Alternative Name for Account ID
If required, you can change the indication "Account ID" on the [Login] screen that appears
when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information field on the
touch screen is pressed to another name such as "Account Name" or "Number". The alias can
be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
• This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
• The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask Account ID (***)
You can set how an entered Account ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
Note
• This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
Show
As you enter the Account ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
Hide
As you enter the Account ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
Store User Details
You can set the destination to save authentication information. Select [NVM] or [Hard
Disk].
Note
• This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
• NVM stands for nonvolatile memory and the data on it is stable after the machine is turned off.
Fax Billing Data
You can configure fax billing settings.
Note
• To register the billing data, enable the Auditron feature for fax under Accounting in advance. For
details on how to enable the Auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.403).
• Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/midnight) in
[Billing]. For more information on how to set [Billing], refer to "Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time,
Billing - Midnight" (P.396).
• The registered details can be confirmed by printing the Billing Data List. For information on how to
print, refer to "Billing Data List" (P.265).
1
404
Select [Fax Billing Data].
Accounting
Charge Rate per Unit
2
3
4
5
This is a communication charge per unit. You can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in
0.1 second increments.
Select [Change Rate per Unit].
Select [Change Settings].
Enter an amount with the keyboard displayed
on the screen or the numeric keypad.
Select [Save].
Accounting/Billing Device Settings
You can configure the accounting or billing device settings.
Note
• When an accounting or a billing device is connected to the machine, be sure to set a password and
that users other than the system administrator do not disconnect the device by mistake.
• Optional components or related products are required to use the features. For more information,
contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Connect with Account / Billing Device
Allows you to select whether or not to use the connected accounting or billing device from
[None] or [Connected].
Note
• While a device for maintenance is connected, you cannot change the setting.
Accounting/Billing Device
Select the type of the accounting/billing device connected to the machine.
Note
• If a device connected does not match the device selected in [Accounting/Billing Device], an error
occurs. Jobs related to the accounting/billing device cannot be performed until the error is resolved.
For information on how to resolve the error, refer to "Status Code" (P.553).
Track Print Jobs
The feature is effective for the Print service.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the print jobs. Select from [No
Tracking] and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for all accounting/billing devices.
Track Scan/Fax Jobs
The feature is effective for the Scan and Fax services.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the scan and fax jobs. Select from [No
Tracking] and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
Interrupt Mode
The feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Interrupt mode. Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.
405
15 Tools
Job with Insufficient Credit
The feature is effective for the Copy, Print, and Scan services.
Select the operation of the machine when the amount remaining in the accounting/billing
device becomes insufficient. Select from [Delete Job Immediately] and [Hold Job].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.
Charge Print Jobs
The feature is effective for the Print service.
Select how the print job performed is charged. Select from [Charge by Card Number] and
[Do not Charge by Card Number].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative and Card Activated - Subtractive.
Track with Cumulative Device
The feature is effective for the Copy and Print services.
Select the timing that the amount for copy or print job is charged. Select from [Track with
Accounting Device] and [High Speed Printing].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative.
Scan Ahead for Copy Job
The feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Scan Ahead feature for copy jobs. Select from [Disabled]
and [Enabled].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative, Card Activated - Subtractive, and
Smart Card Reader.
Note
406
• Some of the products listed above may not be available for this feature depending on the types and
settings.
Authentication/Security Settings
Authentication/Security Settings
In [Authentication/Security Settings], you can configure the registration and authentication
of a user and security settings.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.477).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
System Administrator Settings ............................................................................................... 407
Authentication......................................................................................................................... 408
Job Status Default ................................................................................................................... 415
Overwrite Hard Disk ............................................................................................................... 415
1
On the [Tools] screen, select [Authentication/Security Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.280).
2
Select an item to set or change.
System Administrator Settings
In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and passcode.
We recommend setting the system administrator ID and passcode to prevent unauthorized
setting changes and ensure security.
System Administrator's Login ID
Set the system administrator's user ID. Enter the ID from 1 to 32 single-byte characters.
Note
• The default of the system administrator's user ID is "admin".
1
2
3
4
Select [System Administrator's Login ID].
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to re-enter the same
system administrator's ID in [Re-enter System
Administrator's Login ID].
6
7
Select [Save].
Select [On].
Select [Keyboard].
Enter the system administrator's ID with up to
32 characters, and then select [Save].
A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
System Administrator's Passcode
Set the passcode for the System Administrator.
Setting a passcode is strongly recommended to enhance security.
Note
• The default of the system administrator's passcode is "1111".
The system administrator's passcode set here is used when [Passcode Entry from Control
Panel] is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Passcode Policy].
Set the passcode after setting the system administrator's user ID. You can set the passcode
from 4 to 12 characters.
For more information about Passcode Entry from Control Panel, refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.412).
407
15 Tools
1
2
3
Select [System Administrator's Passcode].
Select [New Passcode].
Enter a new passcode (4 to 12 digits) using the
keyboard displayed, and then select [Save].
Note
• If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
4
Select [Retype Passcode], enter the same
passcode, and then select [Save].
5
6
Select [Save].
A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
Authentication
In [Authentication], you can set the following items.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Login Type................................................................................................................................408
Access Control..........................................................................................................................408
Create/View User Accounts .....................................................................................................410
Reset User Accounts ................................................................................................................410
Create Authorization Groups..................................................................................................410
User Details Setup ...................................................................................................................411
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator............................................................412
Passcode Policy.........................................................................................................................412
Charge/Private Print Settings ..................................................................................................412
Receive Control........................................................................................................................413
Login Type
Allows you to select a type of authentication.
No Login Required
Does not use the Authentication feature.
Login to Local Accounts
Authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine.
Note
• When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is
displayed at the lower left of the [Home] screen.
Login to Remote Accounts
Authenticates users based on the user information registered on a remote authentication
server.
Note
• When [login to Remote Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is
displayed at the lower left of the [Home] screen.
Access Control
Allows you to restrict access to the machine or each service. Once the access control is
enabled, user authentication is required to use the machine or the services.
Note
408
• When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server, the authenticated user can access
the services through the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote
server.
Authentication/Security Settings
• When a guest user is permitted to use the machine, access restriction for each service cannot be
specified for the guest user. If you want to restrict a guest user to use the machine, refer to "Guest
User" (P.411).
Device Access
Allows you to restrict buttons operation on the control panel of the machine.
Select [Unlocked] or [Locked].
Service Access
Allows you to restrict access to each of the following services.
Note
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable
service on the [Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Home]
screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service, the applicable service is not displayed on the
[Home] screen. The service is displayed after authentication.
For more information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.408).
• Copy
Restricts access to the Copy service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Copy service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
• Fax
Restricts access to the Fax / Direct Fax service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Fax service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
• Scan
Restricts access to the E-mail, Store to Folder, Scan to PC, Store to USB, and Store &
Send Link services and features on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
• Media Print - Text
Restricts access to the Media Print - Text service on the machine.
• Media Print - Photos
Restricts access to the Media Print - Photos service on the machine.
• Send from Folder
Restricts access to the Send from Folder service on the machine.
• Stored Programming
Restricts access to the Stored Programming service on the machine.
• Job Flow Sheets
Restricts access to the Job Flow Sheets service on the machine.
• Web Applications
Restricts access to the Web Applications service on the machine.
• Custom Services
Restricts access to custom services on the machine.
Note
• This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
409
15 Tools
• Print
Restricts users to print jobs stored on the machine, such as the Secure Print and Sample
Set jobs.
This feature also restricts the submission of print jobs from a computer via a network.
To use the Authentication feature, authentication information such as a user ID and
passcode needs to be entered in a print driver.
If authentication fails, the print data sent to the machine is saved in the machine or
deleted according to the Charge Print settings.
Feature Access
Set [Color Copying], [Print Files from Folder], and [Retrieve Files from Folder].
Create/View User Accounts
To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also check
the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can be
registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts] under
[Accounting].
Refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.398).
Reset User Accounts
You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or reset
the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before resetting. The
settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under [Accounting].
Refer to "Reset User Accounts" (P.401).
Create Authorization Groups
System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are restricted
for login users. The login users can be divided into different authorization groups.
Note
• Up to 20 groups can be registered.
1
2
Select [Create Authorization Groups].
3
Select and set any item.
Select [Group Name], and then select [Create/
Delete].
Group Name
Enter a group name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Restrict Recipient Selection Method
Select whether or not to remove restriction when a transmission to a recipient who is not
registered on the Address Book is restricted for the Fax or Scan feature.
Restrict User to Edit Address Book
Select whether or not to remove restriction when the edit of the Address Book is restricted.
410
Authentication/Security Settings
User Details Setup
Set the information required when carrying out authentication.
Alternative Name for User ID
If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to another name such as "User
Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
• The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask User ID (***)
You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
When you select [Show], the characters you enter are echoed on the screen in the normal
way as you enter the user ID. When you select [Hide], the characters you enter is hidden as
a row of asterisks (*****) as you enter the user ID.
Failed Access Log
Set the failure count to detect unauthorized access. An error is logged if authentication fails
the number of times specified here within a predetermined time (10 minutes).
Logout Confirmation Screen
Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session ends.
User ID for Login
Set whether or not to make the user ID entry field on the user login screen case-sensitive.
When you select [Case Sensitive], authentication is performed using the User ID as
registered (including upper and lower cases). When you select [Non-Case Sensitive],
authentication is performed with case ignored even if the User ID has both upper and lower
cases.
Note
• Do not change the setting while a file is stored for the Private Charge Print. Otherwise, you may
encounter problems, such as being unable to print. Change the setting after the machine prints all the
files stored.
Guest User
Set whether or not to permit a guest user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected. Set
the guest user passcode from 4 to 12 digits.
Use of Smart Card
Set whether or not to use the smart card when a smart card is connected to the machine.
When [Enabled] is selected, you can set whether or not to control jobs with the smart card
for each feature. Select [Enabled (PKI)] to control the security features only. The smart card
is not used for authentication or job controls.
Smart Card Link Mode
Set whether or not to require a passcode for smart card authentication.
Smart Card Certificate Verification
Set whether or not to verify the smart cart certificate when a user uses the smart card. When
[Enabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified not only by PIN code
verification but by certification verification of the smart card and private key match. In this
case, the upper level CA certificate of the smart card certification must be registered on the
machine. When [Disabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified by PIN code
verification.
411
15 Tools
Smart Card Logout Timing
Select the logout method for smart card authentication when a contactless smart card is used
for authentication.
When [Log Out when Card is Removed] is selected, you can logout from the machine by
removing the smart card from the smart card reader. When [Log Out from Control Panel]
is selected, you can logout by operating the touch screen or control panel.
Save remote accounts in this machine
Select whether or not to save the user information used for remote authentication. While
the user information is saved in the machine, the machine can authenticate the user using
the information saved in the machine even when the remote server is off.
Note
• This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.
Delete Remote Accounts
Select whether or not to delete the user information saved in the machine for remote
authentication. Select from [Do Not Delete], [Weekly], and [Monthly].
For [Weekly], you can set the day and time. For [Monthly], set the date and time.
Note
• This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator
This feature protects the settings from being changed by someone impersonating your
system administrator. If authentication for a system administrator's ID fails more than
specified times continuously, access is denied.
You can specify a login attempt count from 1 to 10.
Note
• The failure count is reset when the machine is restarted.
• To cancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by switching off and on the power.
Passcode Policy
Passcode Entry from Control Panel
You can set whether a passcode is required when the system administrator or a user uses the
machine. Selecting [On] enables [System Administrator's Passcode] setting and [Passcode]
setting for [Create/View User Accounts].
Selecting [Off] does not require the passcode, even if a passcode is set in the above settings.
Note
• The setting of [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is used for authentication on the machine. A
passcode must always be entered when accessing from remote devices using Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool or the like, regardless of the use of passcode setting. Depending on
authentication procedures, a passcode may be required for other processes as well.
• The system administrator's passcode is also required when you change settings from Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Minimum Passcode Length
Set this item when you specify the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode.
Set a value from 4 to 12 in 1 digit increments.
Note
• This is only applicable to login users (not applicable to the system administrator and guests).
• Registered users can be authenticated with a passcode less than the minimum number of digits.
Charge/Private Print Settings
You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
You can directly print jobs and temporarily store print jobs to Charge Print or Private Charge
Print for stored files.
412
Authentication/Security Settings
The Charge Print feature prints the print jobs of authenticated users. But, using this feature,
you can also temporarily store print jobs and print them later by operating the machine. If
[Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, print jobs received are saved by a user ID for storage
set in a print driver.
The Private Charge Print feature stores jobs to the machine, using the login User ID or Sub
User ID at print instruction. You can print the jobs later by operating the machine. Only the
files of the login user and sub users linked are displayed on the touch screen, therefore, it can
help ensure privacy protection as well as prevent output from being left in the tray.
Note
• For more information on the sub user, refer to "Sub User" (P.480).
• For more information on the Charge Print and Private Charge Print features, refer to "Printing and
Deleting Stored Jobs" (P.182).
To use Charge Print or Private Charge Print, [Receive Control] must be set. For more information,
refer to "Receive Control" (P.413).
Receive Control
You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
For information about printing or deleting the print job saved, refer to "Private Charge Print" (P.190),
and about deleting a Private Charge Print job with an invalid User ID, refer to "Deleting a Private
Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.255).
1
2
3
Select [Receive Control], and then select [Change Settings].
4
Select [Save] after the setting is completed.
Select any item.
According to the selected item, set the
processing to apply to jobs.
According to Print Auditron
Specifies how print jobs should be handled when the Authentication and Accounting
features are enabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is set to [Locked].
Note
• When the Authentication and Accounting features are disabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is
set to [Unlocked], the settings specified in the print driver are applied.
When [According to Print Auditron] is selected, [Job Login Success], [Job Login Failure],
and [Job Without User ID] are displayed.
• Job Login Success
Set the processing to apply to successfully authenticated jobs.
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].
Note
• When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote
Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
• Job Login Failure
Set the processing to apply to jobs authentication failed (whose information such as the
user ID and passcode has been incorrectly registered on the print driver).
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
413
15 Tools
• Job Without User ID
Set the processing to apply to jobs with no authentication user ID attached (such as print
jobs sent from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or e-mail print).
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note
• [Job Without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select as
follows on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication
Configuration] > [Non-Account Print]. When [Job Without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge Print Job]
or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print] check box on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is
deselected automatically.
Save as Private Charge Print Job
Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all jobs that have a
user ID are saved as Private Charge Print. Jobs without user IDs are handled depending on
the setting in [Job without User ID].
Note
• When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, all the print jobs that have User IDs are saved
regardless of whether or not being successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print
jobs, specify an expiration date, so that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of
time. Or the system administrator can manually delete them. For details on how to specify an
expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.374). For details on how to delete the print jobs
manually, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.255).
• When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote
Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, [Job Without User ID] is displayed.
• Job Without User ID
Set how to process jobs with no user ID attached.
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Charge Print job, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note
• [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select as
follows on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication
Configuration] > [Non-Account Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge Print Job]
or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print] check box on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is
deselected automatically.
Save as Charge Print Job
Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all received jobs are
saved as Charge Print.
Note
• When using [Save as Charge Print Job], all the print jobs are saved regardless of whether or not being
successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify an expiration date, so that
they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or the system administrator can
manually delete them. For details on how to specify an expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings"
(P.374). For details on how to delete the print jobs manually, refer to "Charge Print" (P.187).
• When [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote Folder,
and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
414
Authentication/Security Settings
Job Status Default
You can hide active jobs, completed jobs, and job logs from unauthenticated users or nonjob owners, to protect privacy and prevent leakage of confidential information.
Note
• If you set to hide job details, you cannot stop or delete jobs you instructed. Therefore, you cannot
cancel jobs in the case of operational error of copies or wrong transmission of faxes.
Active Jobs View
Select whether or not to hide active jobs from local users.
Completed Jobs View
Select from [Allow Job Viewing at All Times], [Require Login to View Jobs], or [No Job
Viewing].
Access To
This feature is displayed when [Require Login to View Jobs] is selected.
Select either [All Jobs] or [Jobs Run By Login User Only].
Hide Job Details
This feature is displayed when [Allow Job Viewing at All Times] or [Require Login to View
Jobs] is selected.
Select either [No] or [Yes].
Overwrite Hard Disk
Select whether or not to conduct hard disk overwriting.
When copy, fax, scan, or print processing is completed, the data is deleted from the hard disk
and the area on which the deleted data was stored is automatically overwritten with blank
data. This feature prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the
hard disk. It also applies to copy document and other information stored temporarily by the
system.
The following option can be configured.
Number of Overwrites
You can select the number of overwrites either once or three times.
Note
• If the machine is turned off during the overwriting, unfinished files may remain on the hard disk. The
overwriting will resume if you turn the machine on again with the unfinished files remaining on the
hard disk.
• Overwriting once erases the data, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite that the
data cannot be restored. It does, however, take longer.
• During overwriting, normal operations may be slowed down.
For more information on how to check the status during overwriting, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk"
(P.269).
Prerequisite for Using Data Security Feature
The system administrator must follow the instructions below:
• To protect the data deleted from or stored on the hard disk, the following settings are
required:
- Number of Overwrites: [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites]
- Data Encryption: [On]: an encryption key of 12 digits
- Service Representative Restricted Operation: [Yes]
415
15 Tools
• Change the system administrator's factory default passcode (1111). Register a new
passcode of 7 characters or more (maximum 12 characters). Be careful not to register a
passcode that can be easily assumed and not to store the registered passcode on a location
that is easily accessible to other persons.
Note
• If the system administrator's user ID and passcode are forgotten, the machine configuration will not
be able to recover in case of malfunction.
• Set [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] to [On].
• Set [Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator] to 5 times.
• Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the
above setting instructions.
For more information on how to set data encryption, refer to "Data Encryption" (P.311).
For more information on how to set service representative restricted operation, refer to "Service
Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.313).
For more information on how to set passcode entry from control panel, refer to "Passcode Policy"
(P.412).
For more information on how to set the system administrator's user ID, refer to "System
Administrator's Login ID" (P.407).
The manager (of the organization that this machine is used for) must follow the
instructions below:
• Assign an appropriate person as a system administrator and manage and train the person
properly.
• When turning off the machine, make sure no operation is running. Train the users to turn
off the machine after an active operation completes, if any.
• Note that this feature is used to protect deleted document data from being recovered; it
does not protect files stored in folders in the hard disk.
• Install an anti-bugging device on the internal network that the machine is located on, and
perform the network settings properly to protect the machine from interceptions.
• To block unauthorized access, install a firewall device between the external network and
the internal network that the machine is located on.
• Set the passcode and encryption key according to the following rules:
- Do not use easily assured character string
- Use both characters and numerics
For more information on encryption key, refer to "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.313).
416
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Settings
This chapter describes how to set up Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
• Installation of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .....................................................418
• Starting Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool................................................................420
• Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ............421
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings
Installation of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool provides services such as displaying the status of the
machine and jobs, and altering configurations using a web browser in a TCP/IP environment.
Preparations
Prepare a computer supporting the TCP/IP protocol to use Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool supports the following browsers:
For Windows 8
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 10.0
For Windows 7
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0
For Windows Vista
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0
For Windows XP
• Mozilla® Firefox® 3.0
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 2
For Windows 2000
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 2
For OS X 10.8
• Safari 5
For Mac OS X 10.7
• Safari 5
For Mac OS X 10.6
• Safari 5
• Mozilla Firefox 3.0
For Mac OS X 10.5
• Mozilla Firefox 3.0
For Mac OS X 10.4
• Mozilla Firefox 3.0
• Safari 3
For Mac OS X 10.3.9
• Safari 1.3
For more information, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Problems" (P.545).
418
Installation of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedure for using Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool on the machine.
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and then select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
4) Select [System Settings].
2
Enable the Internet Services (HTTP) port on the machine.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [Internet Services (HTTP)], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set an IP address.
If an IP address is already set, you can skip this step. For an environment with DHCP or
BOOTP, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen appears.
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
After the machine reboots, you can print out a configuration report to confirm that the port
for Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is enabled and TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
7
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to confirm whether the service is available or
not.
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
419
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings
Starting Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, perform the following procedure on your
computer.
When Login Type is selected on the machine, authentication is required to access the
machine via a web browser.
1
2
Start a web browser.
Enter the machine's IP address or the Internet address in the address box on the web
browser, and press the <Enter> key.
• Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
• Example of the Internet address entry (when the machine's Internet address is
myhost.example.com)
http://myhost.example.com/
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered on the
domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address combining the host
name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is
"example.com" then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
• If using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode in the [User Name]
and [Password] fields. If you are not sure about the user ID and passcode, consult your system
administrator.
The features you can operate vary depending on the system administrator's authority that was given
to a user.
• If communications are encrypted; when the [Enabled] check box is selected under [Security] > [SSL/
TLS Settings] > [HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication] on the [Properties] tab, you must specify an address
that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Example of the IP address entry
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Example of the Internet address entry
https://myhost.example.com/
If Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not displayed, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool Problems" (P.545).
420
Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool enables you to change various settings on the machine
from a computer.
Note
• Confirm that the port in use is enabled in [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Port Settings] of Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool when an item that you want to set is not displayed.
• If you change a setting from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool while the control panel is being used,
the change does not take effect until you manually reboot the machine. If [Auto Clear] is set to [On],
the changed items are displayed on the control panel after the machine reboots. For information about
Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.296).
• You may be prompted to enter your user name and passcode when you attempt to change settings on
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. In that case, enter the system administrator's user ID and
passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. The default user ID is "admin" and passcode is
"1111".
You can configure the following settings with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
Item
How to Select
Overview/Reference
Usage Counters
Select from [Status] tab
> [Counters]
Displays the total number of pages printed
for each service.
Total Runtime
Select from [Status] tab
Displays the cumulative time of runtime
(printing or scanning), standby time, Sleep
mode time, warm-up time, and power-off
time of the machine by minutes.
Folder
Select from [Scan] tab
Refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
Job Flow Sheets
Refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.383).
Add New Name
Select from [Address
Book] tab
Refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.390).
Job Management
Select from [Properties]
tab > [General Setup]
Allows you to configure the delete method
of jobs.
Paper Tray Attributes
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.214).
Paper Settings
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.214).
Energy Saver Settings
Allows you to configure the settings for the
Power Saver feature.
Stored Job Settings
Refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.374).
Memory Settings
Refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.345).
Web Browser Setup
Refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.379).
421
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings
Item
How to Select
Overview/Reference
Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool
Settings
Select from [Properties]
tab > [General Setup]
Allows you to configure the display
language of the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool settings.
Pool Server Settings
Leave the default settings unchanged
because a pool server is not available for the
machine.
Refer to "Job Flow Service Settings"
(P.372).
Web Applications
Service Setup
Refer to "Web Applications Service Setup"
(P.376).
Cloning
Allows you to save the settings of the
machine in a file, and copy the file to the
other machine of the same model but not
to the other models.
Notify Job Completion
by E-mail
E-mail Notification for
Machine Status
Port Settings
Physical Connections
Select from [Properties]
tab > [General Setup] >
[Alert Notification]
Refer to "Notify Job Completion by E-mail"
(P.308).
Select from [Properties]
tab > [Connectivity]
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.324).
Protocols
422
Allows you to configure the recipient of the
notification and a status of which to be
notified.
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.324).
Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
Language Emulations
Select from [Properties]
tab > [Services] >
[Printing]
Refer to "Print Mode" (P.269).
E-mail
Select from [Properties]
tab > [Services]
Refer to "E-mail Service Settings" (P.368).
Fax
Refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.359).
Scan to PC
Refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC"
(P.455).
Store & Send Link
Refer to "Configuration of Store & Send
Link" (P.461).
Store to USB
Refer to "Store to USB" (P.452).
Accounting
Select from [Properties]
tab
Refer to "Accounting" (P.398).
Authentication
Configuration
Select from [Properties]
tab > [Security]
Refer to "Authentication" (P.408).
User Details Setup
Refer to "User Details Setup" (P.411).
Create Authorization
Groups
Refer to "Create Authorization Groups"
(P.410).
Remote Authentication
Servers
Refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory
Service" (P.334).
IP Filtering
Allows you to configure the IPs to permit
access, for IPv4 and IPv6 respectively.
Unbounded Port
Allows you to set unbounded port
numbers.
Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Item
Audit Log
How to Select
Overview/Reference
Select from [Properties]
tab > [Security]
Allows you to enable the Audit Log feature
that logs the operation on the machine,
and retrieve the audit log.
Machine Digital
Certificate Management
Allows you to create a self-signed certificate
and import a certificate to the machine.
IPSec
Refer to "Configuration of Encryption
using IPSec" (P.468).
Certificate Management
Displays the certificates registered on the
machine. Also allows you to select, delete,
and export of the certificate.
Certificate Revocation
Retrieval Settings
Refer to "Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Settings" (P.343).
IEEE 802.1x
Refer to "IEEE 802.1x Settings" (P.343).
SSL/TLS Settings
Refer to "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.340).
S/MIME Settings
Refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.341).
PDF/XPS* Signature
Settings
Refer to "PDF/XPS Signature Settings"
(P.341).
Job Status Default
Allows you to configure the display/hide
settings for completed and active jobs.
Plug-in Settings
Allows you to configure the settings for
plug-ins.
Service Representative
Restricted Operation
Allows you to restrict the operation of
service representatives. Prevents the
machine from being altered by someone
impersonating our service representative.
System Administrator
Settings
Refer to "System Administrator Settings"
(P.407).
Smart Card Settings
Allows you to configure the smart card
settings and backup the settings.
* : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
423
16 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings
424
17 Printer Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.
• Print Overview .....................................................................................................................426
• Installation When Using USB Port ...................................................................................429
• Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)...........................................................431
• Installation When Using NetWare ...................................................................................434
• Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB) ....................................................437
• Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) ...........................................439
• Installation When Using EtherTalk ..................................................................................441
17 Printer Environment Settings
Print Overview
This machine can be set up as a local printer by directly connecting the machine to a
computer using a USB interface cable. Similarly, it can be set up as a network printer by
connecting the machine to a network.
Enable the necessary port using the control panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Via Internet
IPP
Local connection
USB
Network connection
LPD/SMB/Port9100/EtherTalk
Network connection
NetWare/Windows shared printer
Note
• The print drivers are contained in the Driver CD Kit. For information on the driver installation
procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
• You can download the latest print driver from our web site.
Using the Machine as a Local Printer
USB
Use a USB interface cable to directly connect the machine to a computer.
For more information on how to set up the machine using USB connection, refer to "Installation
When Using USB Port" (P.429).
Using the Machine as a Network Printer
To set up the machine as a network printer, the following protocols are available to connect
the machine.
LPD
Use LPD when direct communication between the machine and a computer via TCP/IP is
available.
For more information on how to set up the machine using LPD, refer to "Installation When Using
TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.431).
NetWare
The machine supports the PServer mode using Netware directory service and bindery service.
The PServer mode enables the machine to function as a printer server, and to retrieve print
jobs in the print queue to output. The printer created for the machine consumes one user
license of the file server.
426
Print Overview
Note
• The machine does not support Remote Printer (RPrinter) mode.
• You can use the machine as a printer in a NDPS environment by using a Novell® NDPS Gateway. To
use the machine as a printer in a NDPS environment, you need to have the machine operating in a
NetWare print environment beforehand, or enable LPD in advance and set it as a gateway destination
in a Novell NDPS Gateway setup. Attributes, however, that can be set or obtained by NDPS are not
supported.
• Supported interfaces
- 1000BASE-T
- 100BASE-TX
- 10BASE-T
• Supported frame types
- Ethernet II specification
- IEEE802.3 specification
- IEEE802.3 / IEEE802.2 specification
- IEEE802.3 / IEEE802.2 / SNAP specification
Note
• The machine sends out packets of each frame type on the network, and will initialize for the same
frame type as that of the first reply packet received. The frame type can also be fixed. If, however,
there are multiple protocols running on the same network, use Ethernet II specification.
• Some network equipment, such as hubs, may not be compatible with the automatic frame type
detection. If a data link indicator corresponding to the port of the network equipment connected with
the machine is not lit up, change the frame type settings of the machine accordingly with that of the
file server. Use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to change these settings.
For more information on how to set up the machine using NetWare, refer to "Installation When
Using NetWare" (P.434).
SMB
Use SMB to print using Microsoft Network.
For more information on how to set up the machine using SMB, refer to "Installation When Using
Microsoft Network (SMB)" (P.437).
IPP
Use IPP to print via the Internet.
For more information on how to set up the machine using IPP, refer to "Installation When Using
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" (P.439).
Port 9100
Use Port9100 when the machine uses Port 9100.
For more information on how to set up the machine using Port 9100, refer to "Installation When
Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.431).
EtherTalk
Use EtherTalk when you print from a Macintosh computer.
For more information on how to set up the machine using EtherTalk, refer to "Installation When
Using EtherTalk" (P.441).
427
17 Printer Environment Settings
Supported Operating Systems
Connection
method
Local
connection
Port
USB 2.0
Protocol
-
OS
Network connection
LPD
IPP
Port
9100
Ether
Talk
Net TCP/ TCP/
BEUI IP
IP
TCP/
IP
Apple Bon­
Talk jour
NetWare
TCP/ TCP/ IPX/
IP
IP
SPX
Windows
2000
O
O
O
O
Windows
XP
O
O
O
Windows
Server
2003
O
O
Windows
Server
2008
O
Windows
Vista
SMB
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Windows
7
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Windows
8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Windows
Server
2012
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Mac OS
O*
O*
O*
O*
Bon­
jour
O*
O
: Available
Blank : Not available
* : Supports Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7.
For information on network environments, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
428
Installation When Using USB Port
Installation When Using USB Port
This section describes how to install the machine using a USB interface.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 429
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ................................................................................... 429
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 430
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 430
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to connect the machine to a computer via a USB interface.
• USB cable
• The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use a USB interface on the machine.
Note
• To print binary data using a USB interface, set [Adobe Communication Protocol] to [RAW]. For more
information, refer to "USB" (P.324).
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For items that can be
configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Items" (P.430).
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the USB port on the machine.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [USB], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
3
Configure [Print Mode] or [Auto Eject Time] as necessary.
For information on the setting items, refer to "USB" (P.324)
4
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
429
17 Printer Environment Settings
5
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the USB port is enabled.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Printer Reports" (P.262).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
You can print via USB from a Macintosh computer for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8. For information
on the installation procedures of the print driver for Mac OS X, refer to the manual contained in the
CD-ROM provided with the driver.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Receiving buffer size for the USB interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [USB])
• Port Settings
• Bi-directional Communication
• Auto Eject Time
• Adobe Communication Protocol
• PostScript Wait Timeout
430
Installation When Using TCP/IP (L PD/Port 9100)
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)
This section describes how to install the machine using TCP/IP.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 431
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ................................................................................... 431
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 432
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 432
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the machine via TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100).
• TCP/IP network environment
• The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) on the
machine. Enable the LPD port or the Port 9100 port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For the items that can be configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Setting Items" (P.432).
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the LPD port or Port 9100 port as appropriate.
In this example, the LPD port is enabled.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [LPD], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
431
17 Printer Environment Settings
4
If the operating system on the client is Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later, enable the Bonjour port,
and the Discovery feature that automatically detects printers on the IP network can be
enabled.
Note
• To print from a printer detected by Bonjour, the LPD port must be enabled in advance.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [Bonjour], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
5
6
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
7
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
8
Configure other LPD or Port 9100 settings as necessary.
For information on how to set up the LPD port or Port 9100, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool Setting Items" (P.432).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
You can print via TCP/IP (LPD) from a Macintosh computer for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8. For
information on the installation procedures of the print driver for Mac OS X, refer to the manual
contained in the CD-ROM provided with the driver.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [LPD])
Note
• The spool destination can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.
• Receiving buffer size for Port 9100
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [Port 9100])
• Port Settings
• IP Mode
• Host Name
• IPv4
- IP Address Resolution
- Port Settings
432
Installation When Using TCP/IP (L PD/Port 9100)
- IP Address
- Subnet Mask
- Gateway Address
• IPv6
- Enable Manual Address
- IP Address
- Link-Local Address
- Gateway Address
• Domain Name
• DNS Configuration
- IPv4
- IPv6
• DHCP/DDNS
• WINS Server
• Port Number
• TBCP Filter
• Connection Time-Out
• Maximum Number of Sessions
Note
• The Maximum Number of Sessions can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.
• TCP-MSS Mode
• IPv4 Subnet Mask when TCP-MSS Mode is enabled
• IP Filtering
- IPv4 Filtering
- IPv6 Filtering
433
17 Printer Environment Settings
Installation When Using NetWare
This section describes how to install the machine using Netware.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations ..................................................................................................................434
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ....................................................................................434
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................435
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items.............................................................436
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use NetWare.
• NetWare server
• TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network environment
• The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use NetWare on the machine.
Note
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For the items that can be configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Setting Items" (P.436).
Using IPX/SPX
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the NetWare port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [NetWare], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
3
4
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
434
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Installation When Using NetWare
5
Print a configuration report to confirm that the NetWare port is enabled, and confirm the
NetWare device name and the network address.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Using an LPD Port in NDPS
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the LPD port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [LPD], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Configure other LPD settings as necessary. For information on the LPD settings, refer to "Installation
When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.431).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
435
17 Printer Environment Settings
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Receiving buffer size for the NetWare interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [NetWare])
• Port Settings
• Transport Protocol (IPX/SPX) Frame Type
• Queue Poll Interval
• Printer Server Name
• Password
• Active Mode
• Number of Searches
• TBCP Filter
• File Server Name
Note
• The File Server Name can be configured when the operation mode is in Bindery Service.
• NDS® Tree/NDS Context
Note
• The DNS Tree/NDS Context can be configured only when the operation mode is in Bindery Service.
• SLP
- Version
- Active Discovery
- Use SLP for Name Resolution
- Scope
- SLP Server
436
Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB)
Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB)
This section describes how to install the machine using Microsoft Network (SMB).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 437
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ................................................................................... 437
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 438
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 438
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use Microsoft Network (SMB).
• NetWare server
• TCP/IP or NetBEUI network environment
• The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use Microsoft Networks (SMB) on
the machine. Enable the LPD Port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or the Driver CD Kit.
For the items that can be configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Setting Items" (P.438). For information on how to configure the setting
using the Driver CD Kit, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools].
2
Enable the SMB port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SMB], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
437
17 Printer Environment Settings
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Note
7
• If NetBEUI protocol is used as the transport protocol, select [NetBEUI] on the [Port Settings] screen
for SMB in Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Configure the other SMB settings as necessary.
For information on the SMB settings, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items"
(P.438).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [SMB])
• Port Settings
• Transport Protocol
• Maximum Connections
• Workgroup
• Server Name
• TBCP Filter
• Unicode® Support
• Auto Master Mode
• Password Encryption
• Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically
• Primary Server IP Address & Port
• Secondary Server IP Address & Port
438
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
This section describes how to install the machine using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 439
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ................................................................................... 439
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 440
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 440
Note
• If the size of print data sent via IPP is larger than the value set in the proxy server, the machine cannot
receive the data. In this case, set a larger value in the proxy server or change your browser setting not
to use the proxy server.
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP).
• TCP/IP network environment
• The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
on the machine. Enable the IPP port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For the items that can be configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Setting Items" (P.440).
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the IPP port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [IPP], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
439
17 Printer Environment Settings
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the IPP port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
7
Configure other IPP settings as necessary.
Refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items" (P.440).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [IPP])
• Port Settings
• Add Port Number
• TBCP Filter
• Administrator Mode
• DNS
• Connection Time-Out
440
Installation When Using EtherTalk
Installation When Using EtherTalk
This section describes how to install the machine using EtherTalk.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 441
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ................................................................................... 441
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 442
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 442
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use the EtherTalk interface.
• EtherTalk network environment
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use EtherTalk on the machine.
Note
1
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For the items that can be
configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Items" (P.442).
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the EtherTalk port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [EtherTalk], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
3
4
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
5
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the EtherTalk port is enabled.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
6
Configure other EtherTalk settings as necessary.
For information on the EtherTalk settings, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting
Items" (P.442).
441
17 Printer Environment Settings
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.428).
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Receiving buffer size for the AppleTalk interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [EtherTalk])
• Port Settings
• Printer Name
• Zone Name
442
18 E-mail Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the machine.
• E-mail Overview ..................................................................................................................444
• Preparations .........................................................................................................................445
• Installation Procedures......................................................................................................447
18 E-mail Environment Settings
E-mail Overview
The machine can send and receive e-mails.
The following services and features are available using e-mail:
• E-mail
• Store & Send Link
• Print E-mail
• E-mail Notification (Consumable Status)
• Job Completion Notice
E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic form and transmitted via e-mail.
Store & Send Link
The machine can convert a document, scanned by a user authenticated by the machine into
electronic form, store it in the hard disk, and send a URL that indicates the location of the
document.
Print E-mail
You can send and transfer e-mails with files attached from computers. File formats that can
be attached to the e-mails are TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), and XPS.
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [Incoming E-mail Print
Options] of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
E-mail Notification (Consumable Status)
The machine can notify the status information such as consumable status, parts status, and
paper tray status that is set in [E-mail Notification for Machine Status] of Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool to a specified recipient. By receiving the statuses of consumables
periodically, you can properly determine when to replace the toner and drum cartridges.
It is recommended that you register the address of the system administrator or a shared
address as the recipient of the e-mail.
Job Completion Notice
The following methods can be used to notify the completion of the jobs. Register the address
of the network administrator or a shared address as necessary.
• Notify the Completion of Jobs by E-mail
When a computer submitted a print job or a Direct Fax job to the machine, its completion
can be notified by e-mail. For more information, refer to the help of the print driver.
• Notify Job Completion by E-mail
You can receive the result of the jobs performed by e-mail. For more information, refer to
"Notify Job Completion by E-mail" (P.308).
• E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.
For more information, refer to "E-mail Notification" (P.389).
444
Preparations
Preparations
The following items must be set to use the E-mail feature.
Configuration on the Machine
Item
TCP/IP
address
Description
E-mail
Store &
Send
Link
The TCP/IP address for
the machine.
E-mails are sent via TCP/
IP.
O
Subnet mask Required when the
network is divided into
subnets.
Print E-mail
E-mail
Notification
Job
Completion
Notice
via
SMTP
via
POP3
O
O
O
O
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
O
O
O
O
O
Gateway
address
Required when multiple
networks are connected
by gateways.
Machine
e-mail
address
Set the E-mail address of
the machine.
DNS server
address
Required when the
addresses for a POP3
server and an SMTP
server are set with a
domain name format
instead of their IP
addresses.
You can also acquire this
from DHCP.
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
SMTP server The machine uses an
address
SMTP server to send e­
mails. The SMTP server
can also be used for
receiving e-mails.
O
O
O
ᄄ
O
O
SMTP
AUTH login
name and
password
If an SMTP server
requires authentication,
specify an authentication
user name.
Also specify a password
as required.
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
POP3 server
Set the POP3 server
address.
ᄄ
ᄄ
-
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
POP login
name and
password
Set the POP receiving
user name.
Also specify a password
as required.
ᄄ
ᄄ
-
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
S/MIME
settings
Set the S/MIME
information.
ᄄ
X
ᄄ
ᄄ
X
X
445
18 E-mail Environment Settings
O: Required to be set
Note
ᄄ: Set as required
-: Not required to be set
X: Not supported
• To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME or with digital signatures attached, a certificate must be
ready in advance. For more information on a certificate, refer to "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/
Digital Signature" (P.471).
Configuration on the Server
Note
• Information on server settings, contact your System Administrator.
Description
E-mail
Store &
Send
Link
Machine
e-mail
address
When using the E-mail
feature on the machine,
an e-mail account of the
machine must be
registered on a mail
server in advance.
O
Host name
Set the host name and
domain name of the
machine along with the
TCP/IP address for the
machine on the DNS
server.
Item
Domain
name
O: Required to be set
446
Print E-mail
E-mail
Notification
Job
Completion
Notice
via
SMTP
via
POP3
O
O
O
O
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ: Set as required
Installation Procedures
Installation Procedures
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the E-mail service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ........................................................................ 447
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment............................................................................... 448
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items ............................................................ 450
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP
Enable the E-mail port, and set the IP address.
Note
1
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to
use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings" (P.417).
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable ports to use for the E-mail feature.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [Send E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close].
7) Select [Enabled] on the [Receive E-mail - Port Status] screen under [Receive E-mail] as
described above to use the Print E-mail feature.
8) Select [Enabled] on the [E-mail Notification - Port Status] screen under [E-mail
Notification Service] as described above to use the E-mail Notification or the Job
Completion Notification feature.
9) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
447
18 E-mail Environment Settings
5
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment
The following describes the configuration procedures to use the E-mail features.
You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For the items that can be
configured using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool Setting Items" (P.450).
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
1
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Set up the e-mail address of the machine.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name], and then configure items.
For information on how to set an e-mail address, refer to "Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name"
(P.331).
3) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set up the protocol to receive e-mails.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Other Settings].
3) Select [Protocol to Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select either [SMTP] or [POP3] as appropriate for your environment.
5) Select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
4
Configure the server settings for receiving e-mails.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
448
Installation Procedures
When [SMTP] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]
Configure the SMTP server.
For information on how to configure the SMTP server, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.334).
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via SMTP, refer
to "Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.331).
When [POP3] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]
Configure the POP3 server.
For information on how to configure the POP3 server, refer to "POP3 Server Settings" (P.333).
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via POP3, refer
to "Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.331).
5
Configure the server settings for sending e-mails.
Note
• To send e-mails, SMTP server settings are required. When [POP3] is selected in [Protocol to Receive
E-mail], configure the SMTP server in [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
For information on how to configure the e-mail transmission, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.334).
6
7
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Configure the domain filtering for receiving e-mails as necessary.
For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.344).
8
Set up the S/MIME information.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Security Settings].
3) Select [S/MIME Settings], and then set the items.
For more information on how to configure S/MIME, refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.341).
9
10
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
11
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the settings of each item.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
449
18 E-mail Environment Settings
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
• Machine's E-mail Address
• Setup E-mail Notification
• Port Settings
• SMTP Server Settings
• POP3 Server Settings
• Receiving Protocol
• Domain Filtering
• S/MIME Settings
450
19 Scanner Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.
• Scan Service Overview......................................................................................................452
• Configuration of Store to Folder .......................................................................................453
• Configuration of Scan to PC ..............................................................................................455
• Configuration of Store to USB ...........................................................................................458
• Configuration of Job Flow Sheets ....................................................................................459
• Configuration of Store & Send Link .................................................................................461
19 Scanner Environment Settings
Scan Service Overview
The machine is equipped with scanning capabilities.
The following scan services are available on the machine:
• E-mail
• Store to Folder
• Scan to PC
• Store to USB
• Job Flow Scanning
• Store & Send Link
E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic data and sent via e-mail.
For information on e-mail environment settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.443).
Store to Folder
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it in a folder. The
document can be accessed later from any computers on the network.
For information on the Store to Folder service, refer to "Configuration of Store to Folder" (P.453).
Scan to PC
When the machine is connected to a network, you can store the scanned data on network
computers using the FTP or SMB protocol.
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it on a computer
connected to a network.
For information on the Scan to PC service, refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC" (P.455).
Store to USB
You can store the scanned data to a USB memory device when you insert the USB 2.0
memory device into the USB memory slot of the control panel of the machine. You can also
select data stored in the USB memory device and print the data directly.
For information on the Store to USB service settings, refer to "Configuration of Store to USB" (P.458).
Job Flow Scanning
You can scan a document with a job flow process from a computer on a network.
For information on how to configure job flow scanning, refer to "Configuration of Job Flow Sheets"
(P.459).
Store & Send Link
The machine can convert a scanned document into electronic form, store it in the hard disk,
and send a URL that indicates the location of the document.
Note
• To use the Store & Send Link feature, you need to configure the authentication settings.
For information on the Store & Send Link service, refer to "Configuration of Store & Send Link"
(P.461).
452
Configuration of Store to Folder
Configuration of Store to Folder
This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on the
machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ........................................................................ 453
Step 2 Registering a Folder ..................................................................................................... 454
Step 3 Configuring a Computer ............................................................................................. 454
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP
To use Network Scanner Utility 3 (Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3), which supports
WebDAV protocol, enable the WebDAV, SNMP, and SOAP ports and set up an IP address.
Note
1
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to
use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.421).
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the ports.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SNMP], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close].
7) Select [SOAP], and then select [Change Settings].
8) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
9) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
10) Select [Close].
11) Select [WebDAV], and then select [Change Settings].
12) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
13) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
14) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
453
19 Scanner Environment Settings
3
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
6
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the WebDAV port is enabled and that TCP/IP
is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Step 2 Registering a Folder
Register a folder to store scanned data.
For information on registering a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
Step 3 Configuring a Computer
To use Network Scanner Utility 3, install Network Scanner Utility 3 on a computer.
Network Scanner Utility 3 is included in the Driver CD Kit provided with the machine. For
information on how to install the Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to the manual contained in the
Driver CD Kit.
454
Configuration of Scan to PC
Configuration of Scan to PC
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to PC service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations.................................................................................................................. 455
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ........................................................................ 456
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 457
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the Scan to PC feature.
Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server
(login name and password) are required.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft Windows
Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Vista, or Microsoft Windows 7
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0
• Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Microsoft
Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0 or later
• Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.2.X/10.3.8/10.3.9/10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/
10.5/10.6
• Novell NetWare
FTP service of NetWare 5.11 or 5.12
For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the
software.
Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating systems
that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
• Microsoft Windows 2000
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows XP
• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.x/10.4.x/10.5/10.6
455
19 Scanner Environment Settings
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP
To use Scan to PC service, enable the port (SMB or FTP client) and set the IP address. The
following describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Note
1
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to
use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.421).
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the port.
Using SMB
Enable the SMB port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SMB], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Using FTP
Enable the FTP port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [FTP Client], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3
Set the IP address of the machine and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
4
5
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
456
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Configuration of Scan to PC
6
Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB port or FTP client is enabled and that
TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
Create a destination folder on your computer.
• Using FTP
Create a destination folder on the server where you login and set write rights on the folder.
• Using SMB
Create a shared folder on your computer and set the write rights on the shared folder.
Note
• To use SMB on Mac OS X, set [Windows Sharing] to [On] in the [Service] tab of [Sharing] under
[System Preferences].
457
19 Scanner Environment Settings
Configuration of Store to USB
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to USB service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices ..................................................................................458
Step 2 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items .................................................458
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices
The Store to USB service allows you to directly save the scanned data to a USB 2.0 memory
device which is inserted into the USB memory slot on the control panel of the machine.
• USB 2.0 memory devices
• USB memory devices with the capacity of up to 128 GB
• USB memory devices that support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT (long name)
Note
• USB memory devices that are encrypted with software cannot be used with the machine.
Step 2 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can enable/disable the Store to USB service using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
When you disable the service, the Store to USB button is not displayed on the [Home]
screen, and you cannot use the service.
The Store to USB service is set to enabled by the factory default.
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
458
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Job Flow Sheets service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP....................................................................... 459
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port ....................................................................................... 460
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................. 460
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP
To use the Job Flow Sheets service, enable the SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services (HTTP)
ports, and set an IP address and other addresses. The following describes the configuration
procedures on the machine.
Note
1
• You can configure the settings using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to
use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Settings" (P.417).
Display the [Tools] screen.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3) Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
2
Enable the SOAP port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SOAP], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Port Settings] screen is displayed.
3
Enable the SNMP port.
1) Select [SNMP], and then select [Change Settings].
2) Select [Port Status], and select [Change Settings].
3) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
4) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Port Settings] screen is displayed.
5) Enable the Internet Services (HTTP) port as described above.
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
459
19 Scanner Environment Settings
4
Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the addresses. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
5
6
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
7
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Print a configuration report to confirm that the SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services
(HTTP) ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port
Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
2
Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Connectivity].
3) Click [Port Settings].
4) Select the [UDP] check box under [SNMP].
5) Click [Apply].
6) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.
7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
Create job flows using Job Flow Editor to use for scanned documents.
Note
460
• Job Flow Editor is included in the Driver CD Kit.
Configuration of Store & Send L ink
Configuration of Store & Send Link
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store & Send Link service.
Note
• When a user is notified by e-mail of a URL location to retrieve scanned data, the e-mail message is not
encrypted, which enables the user to retrieve the data without password authentication. Thus, in case
the URL information is leaked on the e-mail transmission path due to any attempts, other parties to
whom the information is leaked cannot be tracked. To prevent others from viewing scanned data,
select [PDF] in [File Format] and set a password in [PDF Security] before scanning a document.
• To use the Store & Send Link service, the configuration for authentication is required.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Configuring E-mail ...................................................................................................... 461
Step 2 Enabling Authentication ............................................................................................. 461
Step 3 Other Settings.............................................................................................................. 461
Step 4 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items................................................. 462
Step 1 Configuring E-mail
Configure the e-mail settings on the machine.
For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.443).
Step 2 Enabling Authentication
Configure the authentication settings on the machine.
For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to "Configuration for Authentication"
(P.500).
Step 3 Other Settings
Configure the following items if necessary.
• URL File Expiration
• Generation of URL Link
• Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size
• Print Login Name on PDF Files
For information about URL File Expiration, refer to "URL File Expiration" (P.358).
For information about Generation of URL Link, refer to "Generation of URL Link" (P.358).
For information about Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size, refer to "Store & Send Link Maximum File Size" (P.358).
For information about Print Logon Name on PDF Files, refer to "Print Login Name on PDF Files"
(P.358).
461
19 Scanner Environment Settings
Step 4 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Items
You can configure the following items using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool:
• URL File Expiration
• Generation of URL Link
• Maximum File Size
• Subject
• Message
• Attachment
• Device Information
• Authenticated User
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
462
20 Encryption and Digital Signature
Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Encryption feature and the Digital Signature
feature on the machine.
• Encryption and Digital Signature Overview...................................................................464
• Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption ....................................................466
• Configuration of Encryption using IPSec ........................................................................468
• Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature..................................................471
• Configuration of PDF/XPS Signature ...............................................................................475
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview
Types of Certificate
To use the Encryption feature and the Signature feature on the machine, a certificate is
required.
The following two types of device certificate can be used on the machine:
• A self-signed certificate created by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool (The valid period
can be specified from 1 to 9,999 days.)
• A certificate issued by another CA
When you use a certificate issued by another CA, import the certificate using Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Types of Certificate
/
Types of Encryption
Self-Signed
Certificate
Certificate Issued
by Another CA
Encrypting HTTP communications
from a client to the machine
(SSL/TLS server)
O
O
Encrypting HTTP communications
from the machine to a remote server
(SSL/TLS client)
X
O
Encryption using IPSec
X
ᄄ*1
E-mail encryption/digital signature
X
O
PDF signature/XPS*2 signature
O
O
O :Available
ᄄ :Set as necessary
X :Not available
*1 : Available when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature].
*2 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Encryption Features for Communication
The data sent between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted.
Encrypting HTTP Communications from a Client to the Machine
(SSL/TLS Server)
The SOAP, Internet Services (HTTP), IPP, and WebDAV ports use the HTTP server of the
machine.
The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a client and
the machine.
To encrypt communications, either one of the device certificate is required: a self-signed
certificate or a certificate issued by another CA.
Note
464
• By encrypting HTTP communications, communications data can be encrypted at the time of printing
using IPP (SSL encrypted communications).
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview
Encrypting HTTP Communications from the Machine to a Remote Server
(SSL/TLS Client)
The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a remote
server and the machine.
No certificate is required in general. However, if a remote server is set to require an SSL client
certificate, you can use a certificate issued by another CA.
When verification of server certificates is enabled to verify the SSL/TLS certificate of a
remote server, import a certificate issued by another CA using Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool to the machine.
Encryption using IPSec
IPSec enables IP-level (not application-level) encrypted communications with remote
devices.
If you select [Authenticate by Digital Signature] for [IKE Authentication Method], a
certificate issued by another CA is required.
If you select [Authenticate by Preshared Key], no device certificate is required.
Note
• If the certificate for IPSec contains the V3 extension (keyUsage), "digitalSignature" bit must be
asserted.
For information on IKE authentication methods, refer to "IKE Authentication Method" (P.342).
To verify the certificate of the remote device, you must register a root certificate created by
a CA of the remote device on the machine.
Note
• To use certificates that have already been created, import them with Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
S/MIME is used for E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature. To use S/MIME on the machine,
S/MIME certificates are used.
For an S/MIME certificate, you can use a certificate issued by another CA.
The personal certificates or the device certificates of destinations are required for encrypted
communications.
Note
• If the certificate for S/MIME contains an "email Address" or a V3 extension (keyUsage),
"digitalSignature" and "keyEncipherment" must be asserted. If the certificate contains v3 extension
(extendedKeyUsage), "emailProtection" must be set.
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files
Encrypting PDF Documents
PDF documents can be encrypted and protected by a password.
Encryption/Digital Signature of PDF/XPS Documents
Digital signatures are available for PDF and XPS documents.
To use the digital signature, a device certificate is required.
For a device certificate, you can use any registered certificates.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
465
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption
This section describes the settings to encrypt HTTP communications.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine .....................................................................................466
Step2 Configuration on the Computer ..................................................................................467
Installation Overview
To encrypt HTTP communications, configure the machine and your computer as follows:
Configuration on the Machine
Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory
default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.
• Configuring certificates by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
The following two methods are available depending on types of certificates.
- Create a self-signed certificate on the machine, and then enable HTTPS.
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
Configuration on the Computer
To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" into the address box of the web browser.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine
Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered to the machine by factory
default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.
The following describes the procedures to set up a certificate by Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Setting up a Certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To set up a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, you can have the machine
create a self-signed certificate for SSL server or can import any registered certificate (issued
by another CA) to the machine.
Note
• When performing SSL communications using a self-signed certificate created on the machine, or a
certificate with which the character code is encoded with UTF-8, you will not be able to connect with
SSL if Internet Explorer is used with Mac OS X v10.2 or later.
This is because the operating system cannot recognize the character code (UTF-8) of the certificate.
Use Netscape 7 in the above-mentioned OS environments.
• You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
the registered certificate before importing.
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
2
Create a certificate.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
466
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption
4) Click the [Create New Self Signed Certificate] button.
5) Set [Public Key Size] as necessary.
6) Set [Issuer] as necessary.
7) Set [Days of Validity] as necessary.
8) Click [Apply].
9) Refresh the web browser.
3
Set up the SSL/TLS information.
1) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
2) Click [SSL/TLS Settings].
3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication].
4) Set up [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number].
Note
• Do not use the numbers of any other ports.
5) Click [Apply].
6) When the right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display, click
[Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
Step2 Configuration on the Computer
To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" in the address box of the web browser.
• Example of IP address entry:
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234]/ (IPv6)
• Example of Internet address entry:
https://myhost.example.com/
When encrypting IPP communications (Internet printing) and adding a printer from [Add
Printer], enter an address beginning with "https" instead of "http" as the URL of the printer.
For information on the settings, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
467
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Configuration of Encryption using IPSec
This section describes how to encrypt communications using IPSec.
When the IKE authentication method is set to [Authenticate by Preshared Key], skip step 1
"Import and Configuration of a Certificate" and go to step 2 "Configuration on the Machine
(Configuration of IPSec)".
For IKE authentication methods, refer to "IKE Authentication Method" (P.342).
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate...................................................................468
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPSec)...........................................469
Step3 Configuration on the Computer ..................................................................................470
Installation Overview
To encrypt communications using IPSec, configure the machine and your computer as
follows:
Configuration on the Machine
When [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature], configure
a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory default.
After importing a certificate, configure IPSec.
Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.
• Configuring certificates by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
Note
• If a certificate to be imported as an IPSec certificate contains V3 extension "KeyUsage",
"digitalSignature" bit must be asserted.
Configuration on the Computer
Configure the following settings to encrypt communications between a computer and the
machine.
• Create an IP security policy
• Assign the IP security policy
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate
The following describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
To configure a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, configure the
encryption settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by
another CA to use it for the IPSec certificate.
Note
• You cannot use a self-signed certificate created with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for IPSec.
For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to
"Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption" (P.466).
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
468
Configuration of Encryption using IPSec
2
Import a certificate.
Note
• You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
the registered certificate before importing.
• If the certificate to be imported contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be
asserted.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
5) Enter [Password].
6) Enter [Retype Password].
7) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].
8) Click the [Import] button.
9) Refresh the web browser.
3
Configure the certificate.
1) Click [Security].
2) Click [Certificate Management].
3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [IPSec] for [Certificate Purpose], and then
click the [Display the list] button.
4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.
5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.
6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.
7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPSec)
The following describes configuration procedures to set up IPSec on the machine.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
7
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
Select [Security Settings].
Select [IPSec Settings].
Configure the required settings.
For details on the settings, refer to "IPSec Settings" (P.342).
469
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
8
Select [Close].
Step3 Configuration on the Computer
The following describes the configuration procedures on the computer.
Configure the following settings on the computer.
• Create an IP security policy
• Assign the IP security policy
For details on the settings, refer to the help of the computer.
470
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
This section describes how to encrypt e-mails and how to attach a digital signature to e-mails.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine .................................................................................... 471
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient...................................................................... 473
Installation Overview
To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature, configure the machine and your computer
as follows:
Note
• To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature to e-mails between the machine and a computer, a
personal or device certificate for S/MIME of a recipient and the device certificate of the machine must
be set on the computer. Configure the following settings to the certificates:
- "e-mail address"
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" and "keyEncipherment" must
be asserted.
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "extendedKeyUsage", "emailProtection" must be set.
• Up to 100 addresses can be encrypted with S/MIME.
Configuration on the Machine
Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory
default.
Configure the following settings to set up a certificate on the machine.
• Configuring certificates by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
- Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.
Configuration on Sender and Recipient
To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME and with digital signatures attached, register the
required certificate on equipment of a sender and a recipient.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine
This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Note
• You cannot use a self-signed certificate created with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for S/MIME.
Setting up a Certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To configure a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, configure the
encryption settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by
another CA to enable S/MIME.
For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to
"Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption" (P.466).
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
471
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
2
Import a certificate.
Note
• You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
the registered certificate before importing.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Confirm that [Machine's E-mail Address] of [Description] is entered.
3) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
4) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
5) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
6) Enter [Password].
7) Enter [Retype Password].
8) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].
9) Click the [Import] button.
10) Refresh the web browser.
3
Configure the certificate.
1) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
2) Click [Certificate Management].
3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [S/MIME] for [Certificate Purpose], and then
click the [Display the list] button.
4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.
5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.
6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.
7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
8) Refresh the web browser.
4
Enable [S/MIME Communication].
1) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
2) Click [SSL/TLS Settings].
3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [S/MIME Communication].
4) Click [Apply].
5) When the right frame on the web browser changes to the machine reboot display, click
[Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
5
Configure the settings for S/MIME.
1) Refresh the web browser.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [S/MIME Settings] and configure the following settings.
• Message Digest Algorithm
Select a message digest algorithm from [SHA1] or [MD5].
• Message Encryption Method
Select an encryption method for the e-mail message body from [3DES], [RC2-40], [RC2­
64], or [RC2-128] when you send an e-mail from the machine.
472
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
• Certificate Auto Store
Select whether to automatically store the certificate when receiving an e-mail with an
S/MIME certificate attached from an address registered in the Address Book.
• Receive Untrusted E-mail
Set whether or not to receive untrusted e-mails such as an e-mail with expired certificate
attached or no certificate attached.
• Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail
Set whether to always attach a digital signature to an outgoing e-mail or to select a digital
signature when sending e-mail from the machine.
4) Click [Apply].
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient
To transmit e-mails encrypted or with digital signature attached, a device certificate and a
personal certificate must be registered with each machine.
This section describes certificates required for destination and source, and registration
procedures.
Note
• Required certificates include a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate certificate
authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use.
When source is the machine and destination is a computer
The personal certificate of a computer must be registered on the machine. And the device
certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer.
To register the computer's personal certificate, use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
There are two methods to register the machine's device certificate to a computer:
• Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine and
register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or [Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings]
> [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in
advance.
• Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
For information on how to import and export a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
refer to "Importing/exporting a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.474).
For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of an e-mail application, refer
to the manual of your e-mail software.
When source is the machine and destination is another multifunctional machine
The device certificate of another multifunctional machine must be registered on the
machine. And the device certificate of the machine must be registered on another
multifunctional machine.
To register the device certificate of another multifunctional machine, start Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool of another multifunctional machine from a computer and export
the certificate to the computer. And then, start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool of the
machine and import the certificate.
To register the device certificate of the machine, perform the same procedure as described
above.
For information on how to import and export a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
refer to "Importing/exporting a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.474).
473
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
When source is a computer and destination is the machine
The device certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer. The registration of
the personal certificate of a computer to the machine is not required.
There are two methods to register the machine's device certificate to a computer:
• Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine (or
another multifunctional machine) and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail
application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or [Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings]
> [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in
advance.
• Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
For information on how to import and export a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
refer to "Importing/exporting a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.474).
For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of e-mail software, refer to the
manual of your e-mail application.
The following e-mail applications can transmit e-mails between the machine and a
computer:
• Windows XP: Microsoft® Outlook® Express 6
• Windows Vista, Windows 7: Microsoft® Outlook® 2007
• Mac OS X: Mail 2.1.1
Importing/exporting a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To import a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Machine Digital
Certificate Management] > [Upload Signed Certificate].
To export a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Certificate Management]
and select a certificate to export, and then click the [Export this certificate] button.
474
Configuration of PDF/XPS Signature
Configuration of PDF/XPS Signature
This section describes the settings to send scanned documents in PDF or XPS format with
a digital signature (PDF or XPS) attached.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Installation Overview .............................................................................................................. 475
Step1 Configuration on the Machine .................................................................................... 475
Step2 Configuration on the Computer.................................................................................. 476
Installation Overview
To attach a signature (PDF signature/XPS signature) to a scanned document to send as a
PDF or XPS document, configure the machine and your computer as follows:
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Configuration on the Machine
Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory
default.
Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.
• Configuring certificates by Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.
Configuration on the Computer
• Sending a PDF or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine
This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Setting up a Certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To configure a certificate using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, configure the
encryption settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by
another CA to enable S/MIME.
For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to
"Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption" (P.466).
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
2
Import a certificate.
Note
• You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
the registered certificate before importing.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
475
20 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
5) Enter [Password].
6) Enter [Retype Password].
7) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].
8) Click the [Import] button.
9) Refresh the web browser.
3
Configure the certificate.
1) Click [Security].
2) Click [Certificate Management].
3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [Scan File] for [Certificate Purpose], and then
click the [Display the list] button.
4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.
5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.
6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.
7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
4
Configure the settings for PDF Signature/XPS Signature.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
1) Refresh the web browser.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [PDF/XPS Security Settings] and configure the following settings.
• PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].
• XPS Signature
Select the setting for XPS signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add signature],
or [Select during send].
4) Click [Apply].
Step2 Configuration on the Computer
• Sending a PDF or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.
Note
476
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
21 Authentication and Accounting
Features
The machine provides the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for
each feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the
Login Type selected.
This chapter describes the settings to restrict the availability of services and to manage
account usage on the machine.
• Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature ..................................................478
• Authentication......................................................................................................................480
• Services Controlled by Authentication ...........................................................................484
• Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders ..........................................................489
• Jobs Manageable by Account Administration ..............................................................497
• Configuration for Authentication......................................................................................500
• Configuration for Account Administration .....................................................................505
• User Authentication Operations .......................................................................................507
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
This section overviews the Authentication feature and the Accounting feature.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Overview of Authentication Feature.......................................................................................478
Overview of Accounting Feature.............................................................................................479
Overview of Authentication Feature
Types of Users
The users include the System Administrator, Login User, Unregistered User, and Local User.
For more information about the feature, refer to "User Types Managed by Authentication Feature"
(P.480).
User Role/Authorization Group
Allows you to assign a user role and an authorization group to each user.
When you assign [System Administrator] in [User Role] to a user, for example, the user has
almost the same privileges as the System Administrator.
For more information about the feature, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.480).
Types of Authentication
The machine supports two authentication types: [Login to Local Accounts] that
authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine, and [Login to
Remote Accounts] that authenticates users based on the user information registered on a
remote server.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Types of Authentication" (P.481).
Note
• The available remote servers are LDAP, Kerberos, and SMB servers.
Access Control
Allows you to prohibit the operation of the control panel buttons.
For more information, refer to "Device Access" (P.409).
Allows you to configure whether to restrict the availability per service such as Copy, Fax, and
Scan.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Service Access" (P.409).
Allows you to restrict users from making color copies, or from printing or retrieving files
stored in folders per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Feature Access" (P.410).
Account Limit for Each User
• Allows you to restrict access to each service and to set the maximum number of pages
allowed for the service per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Services Controlled by Authentication" (P.484).
• Allows you restrict creating/editing/using job flow sheets and folders per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders"
(P.489).
478
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
Overview of Accounting Feature
Accounting Type
The machine supports the following types of account administration: Local Accounting,
Network Accounting, and ColorTrack.
For more information, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.482).
Available Combinations of Login and Accounting Types
You can select the Login and Accounting Types individually, but some combinations are not
available.
For more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.483).
479
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Authentication
This section describes the Authentication feature used with the machine.
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature...................................................................480
User Roles and Authorization Groups ....................................................................................480
Types of Authentication ..........................................................................................................481
Types of Account Administration ...........................................................................................482
Authentication and Accounting Relationship ........................................................................483
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature
The following describes the types of users that can be managed with the Authentication
feature.
User information can be registered on the machine.
Types of User
Users are classified into the following four types. The Authentication feature restricts
operations according to the user type.
System Administrator
The System Administrator can register and change system settings to adapt to the
environment to be used.
A system administrator uses a specific user ID called a system administrator's user ID.
To login as the system administrator, enter the system administrator's user ID in the user ID
entry field on the screen.
Login User
A Login User is a user registered on the machine or a remote server.
To use restricted services, enter the user ID and passcode on the screen.
Note
• Users who are assigned as [System Administrator] in [User Role] have almost the same privileges as
the system administrator. For more information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.480).
Unregistered User
Unregistered User is a user not registered on the machine.
An unregistered user cannot use restricted services.
Local User
A user who does not login to the machine is called a Local User.
Sub User
You can associate sub users with a user ID of a login user in accordance with the intended
use. Up to 10 Sub User IDs can be associated with a User ID.
User Roles and Authorization Groups
You can select a user role and an authorization group for each user when registering a user
on the machine.
Note
480
• When the Login Type is [Login to Local Accounts] and the Accounting Type is [Network Accounting],
an authorization group cannot be assigned to a user. Therefore, the features configured for the
authorization group, such as the feature to temporarily disable forcible printing, are not available.
Authentication
User Roles
The following three user roles are available:
User
No special authority is given to this user role.
System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operations:
• Operate folders
• Operate job flows sheets
• Change the passcode of the system administrator
Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
• Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
• Create, delete, change, and view accounting
• Change Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
• Print an Auditron Report for each user
Authorization Groups
The following settings can be configured for each authorization group.
For details on authorization groups, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.410).
Restrict Recipient Selection Method
Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to specify recipients when
[Restrict Recipient Selection Method] is set to [Only From Address Book].
For details on the Restrict Recipient Selection Method setting, refer to "Restrict Recipient Selection
Method" (P.314).
Restrict User to Edit Address Book
Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to edit the Address Book in
the machine when editing the Address Book is prohibited.
For details on the Restrict User to Edit Address Book setting, refer to "Restrict User to Edit Address
Book" (P.314).
Types of Authentication
The following describes the types of authentication (Login Type) available on the machine.
The following authentication methods are available.
User ID Authentication
The machine requires users to enter their user IDs and passcodes with the numeric keypad
or the touch screen of the machine.
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a remote
server.
The following two types of authentication methods are available according to the registration
condition of user information.
481
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Login to Local Accounts
Login to Local Accounts uses the user information registered on the machine to manage
authentication.
A print job directly sent to the machine from a computer can be received on the machine
after being authenticated through cross-checking process whereby the authentication
information configured on the client's driver with the information registered on the
machine.
For information on driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
Login to Remote Accounts
Authentication is performed for a remote server. User information is not registered on the
machine.
Login to Remote Accounts uses the user information registered on a remote authentication
server (LDAP, Kerberos, or SMB) to perform authentication.
Note
• When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server, the authenticated user can access
the services through the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote
server.
• When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Accounts], user information, private folders,
and Personal Sheets registered on the machine will be deleted.
• When you register user information on a remote authentication server, use up to 32 single-byte
characters for a user ID and up to 128 single-byte characters for a password. Note, however, that up
to 32 single-byte characters are allowed for an SMB authentication password.
Smart Card Authentication
Authentication is performed using the smart card.
For more information on how to use and manage your smart card reader, refer to the manual provided
with the device.
Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID Authentication
Authentication is performed using the user ID of the card pre-registered on the machine or
the remote server.
Note
• When remote authentication is used, the registration of the user ID on the machine is not required.
Types of Account Administration
The following describes the types of account administration (Accounting Type) available on
the machine.
Note
• Some Accounting Types may be grayed out and not selectable depending on the Login Type selected.
For more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.483).
The Account Administration feature is classified into the following types:
Local Accounting
Local Accounting performs account administration on the machine.
In Local Accounting, account administration is performed using the login users' information
registered on the machine. Also, accounting information is counted using various counters
automatically created for each user. To print auditron reports for each user, you must be
authenticated as the system administrator, a user with the System Administrator user role,
or a user with the Account Administrator user role.
For information on the types of jobs that can be monitored with account administration, refer to "Jobs
Manageable by Account Administration" (P.497).
For information on how to print reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.260).
482
Authentication
Network Accounting
Network Accounting performs account administration using user information managed by a
remote service.
In Network Accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and
counts up the numbers of pages processed for each user.
User information managed by the remote service is sent to be registered on the machine.
When the user information on the remote service is updated, the updated information must
be sent from the remote service to the machine.
Accounting using Authentication Server
Account administration is performed using a remote authentication server.
In this accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and counts up
the numbers of pages processed for each user.
The authentication server manages the user's authorization information and obtains
accounting information from a remote server.
ColorTrack
Account administration is performed using the user information and account information
registered on the machine. Also, accounting information is counted using various counters
automatically created for each user. Auditron reports are created in CSV format using Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For information on driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
Note
• When setting the user information or account information for another machine, we recommend that
you use the Cloning feature of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Authentication and Accounting Relationship
You can individually select Login and Accounting Types, and can combine them as described
in the following table.
Accounting Types
Login Types
Accounting
Disabled
Local
Accounting
Network
Accounting
Authenti­
cation
Server
ColorTrack
No Login
Required
O*1
X
O
X
O
Login to
Local
Accounts
X
O*1
O
X
O
Login to
Remote
Accounts
O*2
X
X
O*3
X
O :Available
X :Not available
*1 : Default
*2 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts] and [Authentication System] is not set to [Authentication Agent],
[Accounting Type] will automatically be set to [Accounting Disabled].
*3 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts] and [Authentication System] is set to [Authentication Agent],
[Accounting Type] is automatically set to [Authentication Server].
483
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Services Controlled by Authentication
This section describes the features that are controlled by the Authentication feature.
The restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used.
For information on the folder and job flow sheet restrictions when the Authentication feature is
enabled, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.489).
Overview ...................................................................................................................................484
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication ......................................................................484
Services Restricted by the Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID
Authentication .........................................................................................................................486
Overview
The services can be controlled as follows.
Some restrictions can be set for each user, and other restrictions can be set for the machine
as a whole.
For information on the restrictions that can be set for each user, refer to "Change Account Limit"
(P.400), and for information on the restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole, refer to
"Service Access" (P.409).
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication
For User ID Authentication, the services restricted by authentication and account
administration differ depending on the combination of the Authentication and Accounting
modes.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Per-user
Usage Count
User ID
Feature
restrictions *2
Account Limit *3
Copy
O
O
O
O
Print
O
O
O
O
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
O
O
O
O
Scan
O
O
O
O
Fax
O
O
-
O
Direct Fax
O
O
-
O
Report/List
-
-
-
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 : You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Change Account Limit" (P.400).
484
Services Controlled by Authentication
*3 : This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For more
information, refer to "Change Account Limit" (P.400).
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Feature
restrictions *2
Account Limit *3
Copy
O
O
-
-
Print
O
O
-
-
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
O
O
-
-
Scan
O
O
-
-
Fax
O
O
-
-
Direct Fax
O
O
-
-
Report/List
-
-
-
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 : You can select features available for each user. The settings can be configured with the remote service.
*3 : This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. The settings
can be configured with the remote service.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Feature
restrictions
Account Limit
Copy
O
O
-
-
Print
O*2
O
-
-
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
O
O
-
-
Scan
O
O
-
-
Fax
O
O
-
-
Direct Fax
-*3
-
-
-
Report/List
-
-
-
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 : When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts], the Print feature cannot be restricted. To restrict print
operations, use the Charge Print or Private Charge Print feature.
*3 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts], the Direct Fax feature cannot be restricted. To disable the Direct Fax
feature, refer to "Direct Fax" (P.364).
485
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [ColorTrack]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Restrictions per user
Services
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Feature
restrictions *2
Account Limit *3
Copy
O
O
O
O
Print
O
O
O
O
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
O
O
O
O
Scan
O
O
O
O
Fax
O
O
O
O
Direct Fax
O
O
O
Report/List
-
-
-
O
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 : You can select features available for each user.
*3 : This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed.
Services Restricted by the Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID
Authentication
For the combined use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID Authentication, the
services restricted by authentication and account administration differ depending on the
combination of the Authentication (local machine authentication or remote authentication)
and Accounting modes.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Services
486
Restrictions per user
Account
Limit *4
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Card *2
Feature
restrictions *3
Copy
-
O
O
O
O
Print*4
O
-
O
O
O
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
-
O
O
O
O
Scan
-
O
O
O
O
Fax
-
O
O
-
O
Direct Fax
O
-
O
-
O
Report/List
-
O*5
-
-
-
Services Controlled by Authentication
O :Available
- :Not available
*1
*2
*3
*4
: This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
: The user ID of the card is checked against the user ID registered on the machine when a smart card reader is used.
: You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Change Account Limit" (P.400).
: This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For more
information, refer to "Change Account Limit" (P.400).
*5 : Report and List can be printed using a smart card not registered on the machine.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Account
Limit *4
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Card *2
Feature
restrictions *3
Copy
-
O
O
-
-
Print
O
-
O
-
-
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
-
O
O
-
-
Scan
-
O
O
-
-
Fax
-
O
O
-
-
Direct Fax
O
-
O
-
-
Report/List
-
O*5
-
-
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1
*2
*3
*4
: This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
: The user ID of the card is checked against the user ID registered on the machine when a smart card reader is used.
: You can select features available for each user. The settings can be configured with the remote service.
: This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. The settings
can be configured with the remote service.
*5 : Report and List can be printed using a smart card not registered on the machine.
For more information on Network Accounting, refer to "Network Accounting" (P.483).
When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts]
When a smart card reader is used, authentication in combination with remote
authentication is available.
The following services are controlled.
• A smart card reader can be connected as an authentication device for remote authentication.
However, the remote authentication cannot be performed with any devices other than smart card
readers.
Note
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Account
Limit
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Card
Feature
restrictions
Copy
O
O
O
-
-
Print
-*2
O*3
O
-
-
487
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Authentication *1
Services
Restrictions per user
Account
Limit
Per-user Usage
Count
User ID
Card
Feature
restrictions
Charge Print,
Private Charge
Print
O
O*4
O
-
-
Scan
O
O
O
-
-
Fax
-
O
O
-
-
Direct Fax
-*5
-
-
-
-
Report/List
-
O
-
-
-
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 : When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts], the Print feature cannot be restricted. To restrict print
operations, use the Charge Print or Private Charge Print feature.
*3 : When you hold your card over the smart card reader, the machine automatically prints the print job being paused. We
recommend that you use Charge Print or Private Charge Print to avoid unintended printing.
*4 : The user ID of the card is checked against the user ID registered on the machine.
*5 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts], the Direct Fax feature cannot be restricted. To disable the Direct Fax
feature, refer to "Direct Fax" (P.364).
Note
488
• Authentication is not performed when [Verify User Details] is set to [No] under [Tools] > [Accounting] >
[Accounting Type] > [Network Accounting].
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
This section describes the restrictions of job flows, folders, and job flow sheets and folder
links when the Authentication feature is enabled.
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 489
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled ..................................................................... 491
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled ...................................................................... 494
Overview
Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview
Job flow sheets that you can create on the machine targets the documents stored in folders.
You can create job flow sheets that can handle documents in folders and scanned documents
using Job Flow Editor from a computer on the network.
Note
• Job Flow Editor is included in the Driver CD Kit..
You can create job flow sheets for folder operations on the machine. Job flow sheets for
scanner operations can be created using software on a computer connected to a network.
The job flow sheets created on the computer cannot be edited or copied on the machine.
The following four types of job flow sheets are available for the machine:
General Shared Job Flow Sheets
This is a job flow sheet created on the [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen by a Local User when
the Authentication feature is disabled.
When the Authentication feature is disabled, this type of job flow sheet can be shared and
its settings can be changed by any machine user.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this type of job flow sheet can be operated only
by the system administrator.
Folder Job Flow Sheets
This is a job flow sheet created by a Local User or the System Administrator on the [Create
Folder] or [Send from Folder] screen when the Authentication feature is disabled.
The owner of the job flow sheet is the "folder" from which it was created. For example, the
owner of a job flow sheet created in Folder 001 will be "Folder 001", and the job flow sheet
can be used only in Folder 001.
Any users who have access to the folder upon the job flow sheet creation can use the job flow
and change its settings.
This job flow sheet can be used by any machine user when the Authentication feature is
disabled. When the Authentication feature is enabled, this job flow sheet can be operated
only by the system administrator.
Personal Job Flow Sheets
This is a job flow sheet created by a login user when the Authentication feature is enabled.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this type of job flow sheet is available for the
login user who created the job flow sheet and for the system administrator.
Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheets
This is a job flow sheet created by the system administrator.
489
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
When the Authentication feature is disabled, any machine user can use this type of job flow
sheet.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, any login user can use the job flow sheet.
Only the system administrator, however, can change its settings.
To create administrator shared job flow sheets, you must press the <Log In/Out> button
and operate the machine as the system administrator.
The available operations for job flow sheets vary depending on whether the Authentication
feature is enabled or disabled.
When Authentication
is Disabled
When Authentication
is Enabled
Job Flow Sheet Types
Create
Edit/
Delete
Use *
Create
Edit/
Delete
Use *
O
O
O
X
X
ᄄ
Personal Job Flow Sheet
X
X
ᄄ
O
O
O
Administrator Shared Job
Flow Sheet
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
General Shared Job Flow
Sheet
Folder Job Flow Sheet
O :Available
X :Not available
ᄄ :Available to the System Administrator only
* : Viewing, copying, selecting, and executing job flow sheets
Types of Folders and Overview
The following three types of folders can be used with the machine:
General Shared Folder
This is a folder created by a Local User when the Authentication feature is not enabled.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this folder is shared and its settings can be
changed by any user.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this folder can be operated only by the system
administrator.
Personal Folder
This is a folder created by a login user when the Authentication feature is enabled.
The login user who created it and the system administrator can use it.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this folder can be operated only by the
system administrator.
The methods you can use folders differ depending on whether the Authentication feature is
enabled.
Administrator Shared Folder
This is a folder created by the system administrator.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this folder can be shared by all users. When
the Authentication feature is enabled, this folder can be shared by all login users.
Only the system administrator, however, can change the settings.
490
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
To create an administrator shared folder, you must press the <Log In/Out> button and
operate the machine as the system administrator.
The available operations for folders vary depending on whether the Authentication feature
is enabled or disabled.
When Authentication
is Disabled
When Authentication
is Enabled
Types of Folders
Create
Edit/
Delete
Use*
Create
Edit/
Delete
Use*
General Shared Folder
O
O
O
X
ᄄ
ᄄ
Personal Folder
X
X
ᄄ
O
O
O
Administrator Shared
Folder
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
O :Available
X :Not available
ᄄ :Available to the System Administrator only
* : Viewing folders, viewing, deleting, registering, and outputting files, and viewing and starting job flow sheets
Linking Job Flow Sheets to Folders
The methods to link job flow sheets to folders vary depending on whether the Authentication
feature is enabled.
The types of job flow sheets and folders to be linked vary depending on whether the
Authentication feature is enabled or disabled.
Folder
/
Job Flow
When Authentication
is Disabled
When Authentication
is Enabled
General
shared
Personal
Admin
shared
General
shared
Personal
Admin
shared
Folder
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
General shared
O
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
Personal
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
ᄄ
Admin shared
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
ᄄ
O
ᄄ
O :Available
ᄄ :Available to the System Administrator only
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled
Available Job Flow Sheet Operations
If you change the authentication setting from "enabled" to "disabled", delete all existing
personal job flow sheets, and create general shared and folder job flow sheets.
When the Authentication feature is disabled, the relationships between users and job flows
are as follows.
The available job flow sheet operations differ between the job flow sheets created on the
[Create Folder] under [Setup] or [Send from Folder] screens and those created on the
[Create Job Flow Sheet] screen under [Setup].
491
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
[Create Folder] screen / [Send from Folder] screen
The following table describes the operations that can be performed on the [Create Folder]
screen under [Setup] or on the [Send from Folder] screen.
General Users
Job Flow operation
System Administrators
General
shared
Folder
Admin
shared
Personal
General
shared
Folder
Admin
shared
Personal
Create/Register
-
O
-
-
-
-
O
-
Display
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Edit
O
O
-
-
O
O
O
O
Copy *
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Delete
O
O
-
-
O
O
O
O
Select/Run
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Link to folder
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O :Available
- :Not available
* : The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
Note
• A job flow sheet created on the [Create Folder] screen under [Setup] or on the [Send from Folder]
screen can be edited, copied, deleted, or selected/run only from the folder where the job flow sheet
was created. The applicable users are all users who can use the folders.
• If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use as a result of a change in the Login Type, are
linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links,
however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.
[Create Job Flow Sheet] under [Setup]
The following table describes the operations that can be performed on the [Create Job Flow
Sheet] screen under [Setup].
General Users
Job Flow operation
General
shared
System Administrators
Admin
Folder shared Personal
General
shared
Admin
Folder shared Personal
Create/Register
O
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
Display
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
Edit
O
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
Copy *
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
Delete
O
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
Select/Run
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
O :Available
- :Not available
* : The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
Available Folder Operations
If you change the Authentication feature from "enabled" to "disabled", delete all existing
personal folders, and create general shared folders.
492
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
When the Authentication feature is disabled, the relationships between users and folders are
as follows.
General Users
Folder operation
System Administrators
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
Create/Register
O
-
-
-
O
-
Display
O
O
-
O
O
O
Delete
O
-
-
O
O
O
Change Settings
O
-
-
O
O
O
Display File
O
O
-
O
O
O
Delete File
O
O
-
O
O
O
Register File *
O
O
-
O
O
O
Output File *
O
O
-
O
O
O
Job
Flow
Sheet
Display
O
O
-
O
O
O
Link
O
-
-
O
O
O
Auto Start
O
O
-
O
O
O
Manual Run
O
O
-
O
O
O
O :Available
- :Not available
* : The following operations are not authenticated:
- Document retrieval using Network Scanner Utility 3.
• If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use as a result of a change in the Login Type, are
linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links,
however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.
Note
Linking Job Flow Sheets and Folders
If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use as a result of a change in the Login
Type, are linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you
cancel the links, however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be
unavailable.
When the Authentication feature is disabled, the relationships between users and folders are
as follows.
Folder
/
Job Flow
General Users
System Administrators
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
Folder
O
-
-
O
O
O
General shared
O
-
-
O
O
O
Admin shared
O
-
-
O
O
O
Personal
-
-
-
O
O
O
O :Available
- :Not available
493
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
Available Job Flow Sheet Operations
If you change the authentication setting from "disabled" to "enabled", delete all existing
general shared and folder job flow sheets, and create personal job flow sheets.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relationships between users and job flows
are as follows.
The same operations can be used on [Create Folder] under the [Setup] and [Create Job Flow
Sheet] screens.
For information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Overview of Authentication Feature"
(P.478).
When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network
Accounting] and [Customize User Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or
[Display User ID Prompt Only], or when authenticated as a user other than a guest user in [Login to
Remote Accounts]
• If authenticated as a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts], you are treated as an unregistered
user (local user) and cannot operate job flow sheets.
Note
Unregistered Users
(Local Users)
Local Users
System Administrators
General shared
Folder
Admin
shared
Personal
General shared
Folder
Admin
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(Non-owner)
General shared
Folder
Admin
shared
Personal
Create/
Register
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
-
-
O
-
Display
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Edit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
Copy *
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Delete
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
Select/Run
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Link to
Folder
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
Job flow
operation
O :Available
- :Not available
* : The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
494
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
Available Folder Operations
If you change the authentication setting from "disabled" to "enabled", delete all existing
general shared folders, and create personal folders.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relationships between users and job flows
are as follows.
For information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Overview of Authentication Feature"
(P.478).
When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network
Accounting] and [Customize User Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or
[Display User ID Prompt Only], or when authenticated as a user other than a guest user in [Login to
Remote Accounts]
• If authenticated as a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts], you are treated as an unregistered
user (local user) and cannot operate folders.
Note
Unregistered Users
(Local Users)
Login Users
Folder operation
System Administrators
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(Non­
owner)
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
Create/Register
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
-
O
-
Display
-
O*1
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Delete
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
Change Settings
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
Display File
-
O*1
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Delete File
-
O*1
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Register File
-
O*1
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Output File
-
O*1
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Job
Display
Flow
Sheet Link
Auto Start
-
-*2
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
-
-*2
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
-*2
-
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
Manual
Run
O :Available
- :Not available
*1 : Available only when the folder operations are permitted in the Authentication feature settings of the System
Administration mode.
*2 : You can perform display, auto run, and manual run operations for job flow sheets linked to folders.
Note
• If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use as a result of a change in the Login Type, are
linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links,
however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.
495
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Linking Job Flow Sheets and Folders
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relationships between users and folders are
as follows.
For information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Overview of Authentication Feature"
(P.478).
When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network
Accounting] and [Customize User Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or
[Display User ID Prompt Only], or when authenticated as a user other than a guest user in [Login to
Remote Accounts]
• If authenticated as a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts], you are treated as an unregistered
user (local user) and cannot operate job flow sheets or folders.
Note
Unregistered Users
(Local Users)
Folder
/
Job Flow
Login Users
System Administrators
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(Non­
owner)
General
shared
Admin
shared
Personal
General shared
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
Admin shared
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
Personal
(Owner)
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
O
O
O
Personal
(Non-owner)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O :Available
- :Not available
496
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration
This section describes the information that can be managed for the jobs for each service.
Print
You can manage the following print job information using the Accounting feature:
Services (Jobs)
Normal Print
Authentication
Target User
Managed Items
Machine's print driver
Required
Login user
Pages/sheets
Other than machine's
print driver
-*1
Unregistered user
Pages/sheets
Store Files
Required
-
-
Print Files
Not required*2
Login user
Pages/sheets
Store Files, Print first set
Required
Login user
Pages/sheets
Print remaining sets
Not required*2
Login user
Pages/sheets
Print Stored
File
Store Files
Required
-
-
Print Files
Required/
Not required*3
Login user
Pages/sheets
Delayed Print
Store Files
Required
-
-
Print Files
Not required*2
Login user
Pages/sheets
Store Files
Not required
-
-
Print Files
Required
Login user
Pages/sheets
Store Files
Required/
Not required*4
-
-
Print Files
Required
Login user
Pages/sheets
-*1
Unregistered user
Pages/sheets
Secure Print
Sample Set
Charge Print
Private Charge
Print
Print E-mail
*1
*2
*3
*4
: Printing is available only when [Non-account Print] is set to [Enabled] in Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
: Authentication is not required for printing because each print job has been authenticated when received by the machine.
: Depends on the [Send from Folder] setting under "Feature Access" (P.410) in the System Administration mode.
: Depends on the "Receive Control" (P.413) setting in the System Administration mode.
Scan
You can manage the following scan job information using the Accounting feature:
Corresponding Service
Authentication
Target User
Managed Items
E-mail
Required
Login user
Scanned pages, mail transmission pages
Store to Folder
Required
Login user
Scanned pages
Scan to PC
Required
Login user
Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store & Send Link
Required
Login user
Scanned pages
Store to USB
Required
Login user
Scanned pages
497
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Fax
You can manage the following fax job information using the Accounting feature:
Services (Jobs)
Authentic
ation
Target User
Managed Items
Send as
Fax
Automatic Send
Required
Login user
Transmissions/pages, charging units
Manual Send (Call-in, Callout)
Required
Login user
Transmissions/pages, charging units
Receive
Fax/Print
Fax
Automatic Reception/Print
Not
required
Fax reception
Receptions/pages, charging units,
printed pages/number of sheets
Manual Reception/Print
(Call-in, Call-out)
Required
Fax reception
Receptions/pages, charging units,
printed pages/number of sheets
Store Fax ­
Local
Folder
Automatic Reception to
Folder
Not
required
Fax reception
Receptions/pages, charging units
Print Folder-received Fax
Required*
Login user
Printed pages/number of sheets
Fax
Polling
Storing for Polling
(Folders, Polling Folders)
Required*
-
-
Automatic Send (to Folder)
Not
required
Unregistered
user
Transmissions/pages
Automatic Reception/Print
Required
Login user
Polls/pages, charging units, printed
pages/number of sheets
Polling File Sample Printout Required*
(Folders, Polling Folders)
Login user
Pages/number of sheets
Relay Broadcasting, Printing Not
required
Relay
Broadcast
Transmissions/pages, charging units,
printed pages/number of sheets
Login user
Transmissions/pages, charging units
Fax
Relay
Broadcast
Direct Fax transmission
Required
* : When you select [Unlocked] for [Print Files from Folder] under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings] >
[Authentication] > [Access Control] > [Feature Access], authentication is not required to access folders shared by system
administrators, and the machine prints jobs as unregistered user.
Restriction on Using the Accounting feature on Fax Jobs:
Note the following conditions when you use the Accounting feature on fax jobs.
• Sending files from different user accounts to the same destination is not counted as a
batch send.
• The number of charging units is calculated using the machine's built-in timer. Therefore,
the communications charges calculated from the number of charging units may slightly
differ from the charges invoiced by the telecommunications company.
• When fax-received pages are split for printing, the number of pages counted will be those
received, not those printed.
• The number of charging units is not counted for the following communications:
- When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook
feature.
- When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.
- When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.
498
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration
Billing for Fax Jobs
Fax jobs are not billed for the following communications:
• When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook feature.
• When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.
• Manual Receive, Manual Send, or Manual Polling is used.
• When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.
499
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
Configuration for Authentication
This section describes the settings to use the Authentication feature on the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Enabling Authentication .........................................................................................................500
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings............................................................503
Creating an Authorization Group ...........................................................................................503
Installation Overview
To use the Authentication feature, configure the following settings.
Note
• If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use because of a change in the Login Type, are
linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links,
however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.
Login to Local Accounts
Specify the Login Type and access control, and then create a user.
Login to Remote Accounts
Specify the Login Type, access control, and remote authentication server.
Change the default authorization group settings and add an authorization group, as
necessary.
Enabling Authentication
This section describes the procedures for [Login to Local Accounts] and [Login to Remote
Accounts] respectively.
When [Login to Local Accounts] is Selected
Perform the following procedures to use local authentication.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
7
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
Select [Authentication].
Select [Login Type].
Select [Login to Local Accounts], and then select [Save].
For more information, refer to "Login Type" (P.408).
8
500
Select [Access Control].
Configuration for Authentication
9
10
Select [Service Access].
11
12
After you finish settings for each feature, select [Close].
13
Select [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] under [Passcode Policy].
Select [On] to prompt users to enter their passcode, or select [Off] if the passcode entry is
not required, and then select [Save] and then [Close].
14
15
16
17
18
Select [Create/View User Accounts].
19
If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role] and
[Add This User To Authorization Group] respectively, and then select [Save].
20
21
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].
To disable button operations on the control panel, select [Device Access] and select
[Locked], and then select [Save] and then [Close].
Select a user displayed as [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
Enter a User ID and select [Save].
Select [Account Limit].
Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Close].
Select [Close].
Note
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
• The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Home] screen.
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is displayed on the
button of the applicable service on the [Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the
lower left of the [Home] screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is
not displayed on the [Home] screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
When [Login to Remote Accounts] is Selected
Perform the following procedures to use remote authentication.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
7
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
Select [Authentication].
Select [Login Type].
Select [Login to Remote Accounts], and then select [Save].
For more information, refer to "Login Type" (P.408).
501
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
8
9
10
11
Select [Yes].
12
13
14
15
16
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Access Control].
Select [Service Access].
Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].
Select [System Settings].
Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
Select [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].
Select [Authentication System Setup] > [Authentication System], and then select a
remote authentication server.
For more information, refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" (P.334).
Note
17
• The available options are [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos (Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB], and
[Authentication Agent].
Configure the settings for the remote authentication server.
For more information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Kerberos Server Settings" (P.335),
"LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings" (P.336), and "SMB Server Settings" (P.339).
18
19
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Note
• Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
• The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Home] screen.
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is displayed on the
button of the applicable service on the [Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the
lower left of the [Home] screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is
not displayed on the [Home] screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
When an LDAP server is used as a remote authentication server
Set the user authorization on the LDAP server using the following steps.
1
2
3
4
5
502
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Click the [Properties] tab.
Click [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [LDAP] > [LDAP Authorization Access].
Set attributes in [System Administrator Access] and [Accounting Administrator Access].
Setting example:
System Administrator Access: CN=SA,CN=Users,DC=secEQ,DC=local
Accounting Administrator Access: CN=AA,CN=Users,DC=secEQ,DC=local
Click [Apply].
Configuration for Authentication
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings
Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the default authentication group.
The settings changed here will be used as the default value of the authorization group for a
created user.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
Select [Authentication].
Select [Create Authorization Groups].
Select the group displayed as [DefaultGroup (Default)], and then select [Create/Delete].
Set each item.
For more information, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.410).
9
10
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Creating an Authorization Group
Perform the following procedures to add authorization groups, if necessary.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
Select [Authentication].
Select [Create Authorization Groups].
Select a group displayed as [(No Name)], and then select [Create/Delete].
Enter a group name into [Group Name].
Set the other items.
For more information, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.410).
503
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
10
11
504
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Configuration for Account Administration
Configuration for Account Administration
This section describes the settings to use the Accounting feature on the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type .................................................................................... 505
Step 2 Registering User Information...................................................................................... 505
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type
The following describes the configuration procedures to use the Accounting feature.
Note
1
2
• For information on relationships between the Authentication and Accounting modes, refer to
"Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.483).
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
6
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Accounting].
Select [Accounting Type].
Select an accounting type, and then select [Save].
Note
• You can select the accounting type from [Local Accounting], [Network Accounting], and [ColorTrack].
For information on the accounting types, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.402).
7
8
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
Step 2 Registering User Information
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
• The default user ID is "admin".
• The default passcode is "1111".
3
4
5
Select [Tools] on the [Home] screen.
Select [Accounting].
Select [Create/View User Accounts].
505
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
6
7
8
9
Select [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
Enter a User ID and select [Save].
Select [Account Limit].
Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Save].
For more information, refer to "Change Account Limit" (P.400).
10
If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role],
and then select [Save].
Note
• [User Role] is displayed only when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
For more information, refer to "User Role" (P.400).
11
12
506
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Select [Close].
User Authentication Operations
User Authentication Operations
The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the services available.
This section describes the authentication method to use the restricted services.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Authenticating Login Users .................................................................................................... 507
Changing Passcode.................................................................................................................. 508
Authenticating Login Users
There are two methods to authenticate login users: using the control panel of the machine
and touching the smart card to the smart card reader.
To authenticate the login users using the operator panel, the user must enter the user ID. In
addition, the passcode entry is also required when [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set
to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy].
For more information on the passcode policy, refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.412).
For more information on user registration from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View User
Accounts" (P.410).
Note
• An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Log In/Log Out from the Operator Panel
User Authentication
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login information field on the touch screen.
Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen, and
select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
• Finish user authentication before you cancel the Interrupt mode.
• When you select the service restricted, the [Log In] screen may appear. Enter the user ID and/or the
passcode to use the service.
• When the user is authenticated, the <Log In/Out> button is lit.
Logging Out of User Authentication
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Note
• You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then select
[Logout].
• When the user is logged out, the <Log In/Out> button light goes out.
Log In/Log Out by Touching the Smart Card Reader
User Authentication
1
Place your smart card on the smart card reader.
Logging Out of User Authentication
The logging out method vary depending on the Smart Card Logout Timing setting.
For more information, refer to "Smart Card Logout Timing" (P.412).
507
21 Authentication and Accounting Features
• When you select [Log Out when Card is Removed], the user is authenticated while the
smart card is being touched to the smart card reader.
• When you select [Log Out from Control Panel], the user can log out by using the same
log out method as using the control panel.
Changing Passcode
You can change the passcode to use for user authentication. Change the passcode by
following the steps in this section.
Changing Passcode by User
When a user is authenticated, the user can change his/her own passcode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select [Setup] on the [Home] screen.
Select [User Details Setup].
Select [Change Passcode].
Enter the current passcode, and then select [Next].
Select [New Passcode] and enter a new passcode, and then select [Save].
Select [Retype Passcode] and re-enter the new passcode, and then select [Save].
Select [Close].
Setting or Changing Passcode by System Administrator
The system administrator can set or change passcodes using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
For more information on setting or changing passcodes from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View
User Accounts" (P.410).
1
Start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For information on how to start Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, refer to "Starting Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" (P.420).
508
2
3
4
5
Click the [Properties] tab.
6
7
8
Enter a new passcode in [Password].
Click [Security], and then click [Authentication Configuration].
Click [Next].
Enter the account number of the user to set or change in [Account Number], and then click
[Edit].
Re-enter the new passcode in [Retype Password].
Click [Apply].
22 Problem Solving
This chapter describes solutions to various problems you may have with the machine.
• Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................510
• Machine Trouble .................................................................................................................511
• Image Quality Trouble ........................................................................................................516
• Trouble during Copying ......................................................................................................521
• Trouble during Printing ......................................................................................................525
• Trouble during Faxing.........................................................................................................528
• Trouble during Scanning....................................................................................................532
• Network-related Problems................................................................................................537
• Media Print - Text Trouble.................................................................................................551
• Media Print - Photos Trouble ............................................................................................552
• Status Code...........................................................................................................................553
• Paper Jams ...........................................................................................................................617
• Document Jams ...................................................................................................................624
• Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................................626
22 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
Follow the troubleshooting procedure below to solve the problems.
The machine does not work
properly.
Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.511).
Yes
No
A message is displayed.
No
Cause
Yes
Has a paper or document jam occurred?
Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.617).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams"
(P.624).
No
Cause
Is a status code displayed?
Action Refer to "Status Code" (P.553).
The image quality is poor.
No
Action Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.516).
Yes
Trouble during copying
No
Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.521).
Yes
Trouble during printing
No
Action Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.525).
Yes
Trouble during faxing
No
Action Refer to "Trouble during Faxing" (P.528).
Yes
Trouble during scanning
No
Action Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.532).
Yes
Network-related Problems
No
Action Refer to "Network-related Problems" (P.537).
Yes
Media Print - Text-related
Problems
No
Action Refer to "Media Print - Text Trouble" (P.551).
Yes
Media Print - Photos-related
Problems
Action Refer to "Media Print - Photos Trouble" (P.552).
Yes
If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
510
Machine Trouble
Machine Trouble
Before you conclude that the machine is defective, check the machine status again.
Symptom
The machine is
not powered on.
Cause
Is the main power and power
switched on?
Remedy
Switch the main power and power on.
Refer to "Product Overview" (P.29).
Is the power cord plugged into Switch the main power and power off, and
then firmly plug the power cord into the
the power outlet?
connector of the machine and power outlet.
Is the power cord
Then switch the main power and power on.
disconnected from the
Refer to "Product Overview" (P.29).
machine?
Does the AC outlet supply
power properly?
Connect another appliance to the outlet to
verify the power supply.
Refer to "Before Using the Machine" (P.15).
The <Error>
indicator is
blinking.
The system of the machine or Switch the main power and power off and
the components installed may then on. If the error still is not resolved,
contact Customer Support at
have a trouble.
dell.com/contactdell.
The <Error>
indicator is lit.
Is paper or a document
jammed?
Remove the jammed paper or document.
Is the front cover or top cover
open?
Solve the problem by following the message
displayed.
Is a message displayed on the
touch screen prompting you
to replace the consumables?
Replace the consumables indicated in the
message.
Is a message displayed in the
upper part of the touch
screen?
Check the message and solve the problem.
If a status code such as "016-450" is displayed,
check the status code list and solve the
problem.
If paper is jammed, refer to "Paper Jams"
(P.617), and a document is jammed, refer to
"Document Jams" (P.624).
Refer to "Replacing Consumables" (P.218).
Refer to "Status Code" (P.553).
The touch screen
is too dark.
Is the <Power Saver> button
lit?
The machine is in the Power Saver mode.
Press the <Power Saver> button on the
control panel to exit the Power Saver mode.
Refer to "Product Overview" (P.29).
Is the screen brightness too
low?
Adjust the screen brightness on the [Screen
Brightness] screen.
511
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
Cause
Unable to print, or Is a message displayed on the
unable to copy.
touch screen?
Remedy
Follow the instructions displayed to resolve
the problem.
Is the memory capacity
insufficient?
Perform one of the following:
• Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] in the
print driver, or try printing again by setting
[Print Page Mode] to [On].
• Set the status of the unused ports to
[Disabled].
Is the print mode [Off-line]?
Press the <Machine Status> button to check
the [Print Mode] on the [Machine Status]
screen. If [Print Mode] is set to [Off-line],
select [On-line].
Is the power cord
disconnected from the
machine?
Switch the main power and power off, and
then firmly plug the power cord into the
connector of the machine and power outlet.
Then switch the main power and power on.
Refer to "Power Source" (P.34).
The <Data>
indicator does not
light even though
you instructed the
machine to print.
Is the interface cable
connected?
Check the interface cable connection.
Is the computer's
environment correctly set?
Check the computer environment such as
print driver settings.
Is the required port status set
to [Enabled]?
Check the status of the port to use, and then
set the port status to [Enabled].
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.324).
Paper is not fed
from Tray 5.
Is the specified size paper
loaded in the tray?
Follow the instructions displayed to load
paper of correct size, and then try again.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass
Tray)" (P.211).
Unsatisfactory
print quality.
A probable cause is an image
defect.
Resolve the problem by referring to "Image
Quality Trouble".
Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.516).
512
Unable to print
text correctly.
(Text is garbled.)
Non-standard fonts are used
for printing.
Check the application or print driver settings.
If PostScript is being used, download the
required fonts.
Unable to insert
or remove a paper
tray.
Did you open a cover or turn
the machine off during
printing?
Do not forcibly insert or remove the paper
tray. Switch off the power. In a few seconds,
switch on the power. When the machine is
ready to receive data, insert or remove the
paper tray.
Machine Trouble
Symptom
Unable to copy
with the specified
size.
Cause
Is the document glass or the
document cover dirty?
Remedy
Clean the document glass and the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
Is the document a transparent
type such as a transparency
film?
Place the document on the document glass,
and place a white sheet on top of the
document when copying.
Is the document in the correct Load the document correctly.
position?
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Are the document guides on
the document feeder set in
the correct positions?
Adjust the document guide positions.
Is the document folded?
Unfold and correctly load the document.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Is the document a non­
standard size?
Specify the document size.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
513
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
Paper is often
jammed or
wrinkled.
Cause
Remedy
Is the paper loaded correctly
in the tray?
Load the paper correctly.
Is the paper tray inserted
correctly?
Firmly push in the paper tray until it stops to
insert it correctly.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Is the paper curled?
Turn over the paper in the tray, or replace the
paper with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Are the paper and paper tray
settings correct?
Correctly set the paper and paper trays to
correspond to the paper.
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.214).
Are any torn pieces of paper
remaining or is there a foreign
object in the machine?
Open the cover of the machine or slide out
the paper tray to remove the torn pieces or
the foreign object.
Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.617) or "Loading
Paper" (P.207).
Is non-standard paper loaded
in the tray?
Replace with paper that meets machine
specifications.
Refer to "Print Media Guidelines" (P.200) or
"Loading Paper" (P.207).
Is paper exceeding the
Load paper in the paper tray so that it does
maximum fill line in the tray? not exceed the maximum fill line.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Are the paper guides set
correctly?
Load the paper correctly, and align the paper
guides to the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Is the image nearly the same
size as the paper?
Increase the edge erase widths.
Is the paper finely cut out?
Some types of paper may not be cut out
finely. Load the paper after fanning it well.
A document is not Is the document small?
fed into the
document feeder.
For more information, refer to "Copy" (P.49)
when you copying, or to the help of the print
driver when printing.
The minimum size of the document that can
be loaded on the document feeder is 125 x 85
mm (Standard size: A5).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
An error message Check the positions of the
appears after
paper guides of Tray 5.
paper is loaded in
Tray 5 and the
<Start> button is
pressed.
514
Adjust the paper guides to the correct
positions.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass
Tray)" (P.211).
Machine Trouble
Symptom
Documents are
often jammed.
Cause
Remedy
Are suitable types of
documents being used?
Correctly load documents suitable for the
document feeder.
Are you trying to use irregular
shaped documents, business
cards, transparencies, or thin
documents?
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Are you trying to use
documents with sticky tags,
paper clips or adhesive tape?
Remove sticky tags, paper clips or adhesive
tape from the document before copying.
Are the document guides set
in the correct positions?
Adjust the document guide positions.
Is a piece of torn paper
remaining in the document
feeder?
Open the document feeder cover and check
inside.
Is the [Mixed Size Originals]
setting set to [Off] when you
copy originals of different
sizes?
Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Is an A5 document loaded in
landscape orientation ( ) on
the document feeder when
[Mixed Size Originals] is set
to [On]?
Load the A5 document in portrait orientation
( ).
An edge of the
document is
folded.
Is the document curled?
Flatten the curl and load the document again.
Cannot copy in
color.
Is [Output Color] set to
[Black & White]?
Set [Output Color] to [Color].
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.624).
Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)"
(P.89).
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color
for Copying)" (P.70).
Is a message displayed on the Replace the toner cartridge of the color
indicated in the message.
touch screen prompting you
to replace the toner cartridge? Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
(P.219).
Is a message displayed on the Replace the drum cartridge indicated in the
touch screen prompting you
message.
to replace the drum cartridge? Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Cannot staple
properly
Is staple jam occurred in the
staple cartridge?
Remove the staple jammed in the cartridge.
Is the print driver set
correctly?
Check the [Staple] setting in [Print Setup] in
the print driver when you send a print job
from the computer.
Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.626).
515
22 Problem Solving
Image Quality Trouble
If the image quality of printed documents is poor, identify the symptom in the following
table to perform the remedy.
If image quality does not improve even after performing the remedy, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Symptom
The copy is dirty.
Cause
Is the document glass or the
document cover dirty?
Remedy
Clean the document glass and the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
Is the document a transparent
type such as a transparency
film?
If the document is transparent, dirt on the
document cover will be copied. Place a white
sheet of paper on top of the document when
copying.
Is the document colored,
rough, or a blueprint?
Adjust the copy density or image quality.
Is the document glossy
printing paper?
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
copying.
The copy has
black lines.
Is the constant velocity
transport glass on the
document feeder dirty?
Clean the constant velocity transport glass.
The copy is too
dark.
Is the copy density set to
[Darken]?
Adjust the copy density.
The copy is too
light.
Is the document faint?
The copy is
slightly
misaligned.
Are the paper edges aligned
and the leading edge adjusted
to the tray corners?
Align the paper edges, adjust them to the
tray's top corners, and reload the paper.
The copy is
misaligned or
skewed.
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Load the document correctly.
Is the paper loaded correctly
in the tray?
Load the paper correctly.
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.76).
Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and
Constant Velocity Transport Glass" (P.246).
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.76).
Is the copy density set to
[Lighten]?
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Are the paper guides of Tray 5 Load the paper correctly and align the
correctly aligned to the paper? document guides to the document edges.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass
Tray)" (P.211).
Are the document guides on
the document feeder set in
the correct positions?
Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides to the document edges.
Is the paper tray inserted
correctly?
Firmly push in the tray until it stops to insert
it properly.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
516
Image Quality Trouble
Symptom
Part of the image
is missing on the
copy.
Cause
Is the paper damp?
Remedy
If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
partially missing or unclear. Replace the paper
with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Is folded or wrinkled paper
included in the tray?
Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
the paper with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The copy has a
stripe pattern.
Is the document pasted or
folded?
The pasted or folded section may not be
laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
Is the enlargement ratio too
large?
Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/
Reduced Copies)" (P.60).
Color shift of
color copies is
poor, resulting in
unsatisfactory
image quality.
Is the color calibration
incorrect?
Execute auto calibration.
Is the machine set where it is
exposed to direct sunlight?
If the document glass is exposed to strong
light when you turn the machine on or cancel
the Power Saver mode, color shift may occur.
Close the document cover and turn the
machine on, and when the machine becomes
ready to copy or print, turn the machine off
and then on one more time.
Printing is faint.
(smudged,
unclear)
The paper is damp.
Replace the paper with new one.
Black dots are
printed.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
There is no toner left in the
toner cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
(P.219).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
517
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
Black or colored
lines are printed.
Dirt appears at
equal intervals.
Cause
Remedy
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
The machine interior (laser
scanners) is dirty.
Clean the machine interior.
The constant velocity
transport glass on the
document feeder is dirty.
Clean the constant velocity transport glass.
The paper path is dirty.
Print a few pages to remove the dirt.
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
The paper is unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Refer to "Cleaning the Interior (Laser
Scanners)" (P.240).
Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and
Constant Velocity Transport Glass" (P.246).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Paper feed
direction
White dots
appear in black
filled areas.
Printed toner
smudges when
rubbed with your
finger.
Toner is not
fused.
The paper is
soiled with toner.
518
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
The paper is damp.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Replace the paper with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The paper is unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Image Quality Trouble
Symptom
The entire paper
area is printed
black.
Nothing is
printed.
White areas or
white or colored
stripes appear.
Cause
Remedy
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
High-voltage power supply
may have malfunctioned.
Contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Two or more sheets of paper
are being fed simultaneously
(double-feed).
Fan the paper well and load it again.
No toner remains in the toner
cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Power supply or high-voltage
power supply may have
malfunctioned.
Contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
The paper is damp.
Replace the paper with new one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
(P.219).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The paper is unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The entire output
is faint.
Paper becomes
wrinkled.
When Tray 5 is used, the size
and type of the loaded paper
are different from the settings
on the print driver.
Load paper of the correct type and size into
Tray 5.
Two or more sheets may be
fed simultaneously.
Fan the paper well and load it again.
The paper is unsuitable.
Replace the paper with new one.
Paper has been added to the
paper loaded.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass
Tray)" (P.211).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The paper is damp.
519
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
Text is blurred.
Cause
Remedy
The paper is unsuitable.
Replace the paper with new one.
Paper has been added to the
paper loaded.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The paper is damp.
White or color
patches appear
vertically.
The drum cartridge has
deteriorated or is damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
No toner remains in the toner
cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
The machine interior (laser
scanners) may be soiled.
Clean the interior.
The paper guides in the paper
tray are not set in the correct
positions.
Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper
guides to the correct positions.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
(P.219).
Refer to "Cleaning the Interior (Laser
Scanners)" (P.240).
Paper feed
direction
Text or images are
printed at an
angle.
520
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Trouble during Copying
Trouble during Copying
This section describes how to resolve copy problems.
Unable to Copy
If you cannot copy a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.
Symptom
The document is
not correctly fed
from the
document feeder.
Cause
The document is too small.
Remedy
The minimum size of document that can be
loaded on the document feeder is 139.7 x 210
mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5 ).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
The document type is
unsuitable.
The document feeder does not feed irregular
sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper clips,
or adhesive tape.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
The document guides are set
in incorrect positions.
Adjust the document guides to the
document.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
A piece of torn paper remains
in the document feeder.
Open the document feeder cover, and remove
the piece.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.624).
Documents of mixed sizes are
loaded.
When loading documents of mixed sizes, be
sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.
Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)"
(P.89).
521
22 Problem Solving
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected
If the copy result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.
Symptom
The copy is dirty.
Cause
The document glass or the
document cover is soiled.
Remedy
Clean the document glass or the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
The copy is too
dark or light.
The color of the
document and of
the copy differ.
The document is a
transparent type such as a
transparency film.
If the document is transparent, dirt on the
document cover may be copied. Place a white
sheet of paper on top of the document when
copying.
The document is colored,
rough, or a blueprint.
The paper's background color is copied.
Adjust the copy density or image quality, or
specify [Suppress Background].
The document is glossy
printing paper.
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
copying.
The copy density is set to
[Darken] or [Lighten].
Adjust the copy density.
The document density is too
light.
Adjust the copy density.
The setting for [Original
Type] is inappropriate for the
document.
Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
select [Text] for [Original Type].
Is the color calibration
incorrect?
Execute auto calibration.
The document type selected
is not suitable.
Set the suitable value for [Original Type].
The image quality selected is
unsuitable for the document.
Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
select [Text] for [Original Type].
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.76).
Refer to "Copy" (P.49).
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.76).
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the
Document Type)" (P.76).
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.76).
The copy is
slightly
misaligned.
522
Paper is misaligned in the
tray.
Align the paper edges, and adjust them to the
tray's top corners to reload the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Trouble during Copying
Symptom
Part of the image
is missing on the
copy.
Cause
The paper is damp.
Remedy
If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
partially missing or unclear. Replace the paper
with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Folded or wrinkled paper is
included in the tray.
Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
the paper with new one.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
The copy has a
stripe pattern.
The document is pasted or
folded.
The pasted or folded section may not be
laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
The document enlargement
ratio is too large.
Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "Reduce / Enlarge (Making Enlarged/
Reduced Copies)" (P.60).
The copy is
misaligned or
skewed.
The document is not loaded
correctly.
Load the document correctly.
The document guides on the
document feeder are not set
in the correct positions.
Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides to the document.
The paper tray is not inserted
correctly.
Firmly push in the tray until it stops to set it
properly.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
Unable to copy
with the specified
size.
The paper guides in Tray 5 are
not set in the correct
positions.
Load the paper correctly, and align the paper
guides to the paper edges.
The document glass or the
document cover is dirty.
Clean the document glass or the document
cover.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass
Tray)" (P.211).
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
The document is a
transparent type such as a
transparency film.
Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
document when copying.
The document is misaligned.
Load the document correctly.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
The document guides on the
document feeder are not set
in the correct positions.
Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides to the document.
The document is a non­
standard size.
Specify the document size, and then copy.
The document is folded.
Flatten the curl and load the document again.
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
Refer to "Copying Procedure" (P.50).
523
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
Unable to copy in
color.
Cause
[Output Color] is set to
[Black & White].
Remedy
Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or
[Color].
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color
for Copying)" (P.70).
The document
edges are missing
on the copy.
The document is larger than
the printable area.
Adjust [Reduce / Enlarge] to copy the
document smaller.
Outputs are not
stapled.
The Finisher is not attached.
The Finisher is required to staple. Install the
Finisher, or change the print option settings
to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be
You cannot staple more than 50 pages.
stapled exceeds the maximum Reduce the number of pages to 50 or fewer.
number for stapling.
524
Trouble during Printing
Trouble during Printing
This section describes how to resolve print problems.
Unable to Print
If you cannot print a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.
Symptom
Data remains in
the printer icon.
Cause
Remedy
The machine is not powered
on.
Switch the main power and power on.
The network cable is
disconnected from the
computer.
Connect the network cable to the computer.
The network cable is
disconnected from the
machine.
Connect the network cable to the machine.
The print mode is [Off-line]
on the machine.
Press the <Machine Status> button to check
the [Print Mode] on the [Machine Status]
screen. If [Print Mode] is set to [Off-line],
select [On-line].
An error occurred in the
machine.
Check the error details and take an
appropriate action.
The IP address or SMB
network path is not correctly
set.
Set the correct IP address or SMB network
path.
The network between the
computer and machine is
abnormal.
Check with your network administrator.
The port is not enabled.
Enable the port.
Refer to "Printer Environment Settings"
(P.425).
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.324).
The data has been
sent to the
machine.
The hard disk space of the
machine is insufficient.
Delete unnecessary data such as stored
documents (Charge Print, Private Charge
Print, and Secure Print) in folders to increase
free space.
The machine is connected to
multiple computers.
Wait for a while, and then try printing again.
The machine is out of paper.
Load paper in the machine.
No paper is loaded for the
specified paper size.
Load paper of the size specified.
Printing is interrupted by a
copy operation.
Cancel the interrupting operation.
An error occurred in the
machine.
Check the error details and take an
appropriate action.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.207).
525
22 Problem Solving
The Print Result is Not What was Expected
If the print result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Cannot print in
color.
[Output Color] is set to
[Black & White].
Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or
[Color].
Outputs are not
stapled.
The Finisher is not installed.
The Finisher is required to staple. Install the
Finisher, or change the print option settings
to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be
You cannot staple more than 50 pages.
stapled exceeds the maximum Reduce the number of pages to 50 or fewer.
number for stapling.
The document is
printed on a
different paper
size than
specified.
526
The document size is
different from the paper size
loaded in the specified tray.
Change the size of paper in the tray, or
change the print option to specify a tray that
contains the correct sized paper.
The image on the The image is larger than the
document edges is printable area.
missing on the
output.
Expand the printable area of the machine, or
reduce the image size on the printout.
The printed font
differs from the
font specified on
the computer.
Font replacement is set on
the print driver.
Check the font replacement table.
The printout is
not offset.
The machine does not offer
the Offset feature.
To output offset, the Offset Stacking Module
or the Finisher is required.
Printing is slow.
[High Resolution] is selected
for [Image Quality].
When image data, such as photos, is printed
with the high resolution, the print speed
becomes slow. Select [Standard] for [Image
Quality].
The specified
print options are
not enabled.
The print driver for another
model is used.
Install the print driver for the model.
The required optional kit is
not installed on the machine.
Check the optional components installed on
the machine, and set [Installable Options]
under [Configuration] in the print driver
again.
The document
edges are missing
on the printout.
The image is larger than the
printable area.
Expand the printable area of the machine, or
reduce the image size on the printout.
The output color
differs between
Secure Print and
Print Stored File.
This is because the print path
is different. The output color
of Print Stored File is
reproduced by the presence or
absence of dots, as with
copying or faxing. On the
other hand, the output color
of Secure Print is reproduced
using density by default, as
with printing.
To closer match the color of Secure Print and
files in folder, select [On] in [Image Options]
> [Print Page Mode] on the [Advanced] tab
of the print driver settings.
Trouble during Printing
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
The print color
differs from
before.
The color calibration is
incorrect.
Execute auto calibration.
Black lines are
printed.
The job is output from a print
driver for another machine.
Output the job from a print driver for the
machine to be used for printing.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
527
22 Problem Solving
Trouble during Faxing
This section describes how to resolve fax problems.
• An optional component is required to use the Fax features. For more information, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Note
Sending Problems
If you cannot send a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the remedy.
Symptom
528
Cause
Remedy
A Transmission
Report - Job
Undelivered is
output.
The fax was not sent because
of an error.
Check the Transmission Results in the
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If a
status code is displayed, refer to "Status
Code" (P.553).
Unable to
communicate
(general fax)
The phone line is not
connected correctly.
The machine is equipped with connectors to
which to connect phone lines.
Communication is enabled only when the
phone line is connected to the correct
connector.
When the cable connection is correct, the
On-hook feature allows you to call via general
lines.
The phone dialing method is
not available.
Specify the same dialing method as the one
(Tone/10pps) subscribed for the machine.
An error occurred with the
phone line.
Use a telephone near the machine to check
whether you can make a phone call. If the
phone call is disabled, the problem is in the
phone line, not in the machine.
The destination machine is
abnormal.
The data cannot be sent if the machine of the
recipient is turned off, is set to "manual"
receiving mode, or does not support G3
reception.
Call the recipient to confirm the machine
condition.
An incorrect fax number is
used.
Check the fax number and try sending again.
The number is not for fax
number.
If no peep sound is heard from the receiver
when you call the number, the number is not
for a fax number.
You forgot the external access
number.
When calling from an extension line, the
external access number is required.
When dialing, dial the external access
number such as "0", and then dial the fax
number.
When the switchboard is changed and you
cannot send faxes, try the external access
number "0*" instead of "0".
Trouble during Faxing
Symptom
Unable to
communicate
(general fax)
Cause
Remedy
When calling from an
abbreviated telephone
number, an external access
number is appended.
When calling from an abbreviated telephone
number to an external line, an external access
number such as "0" may be registered for the
abbreviated telephone number. Confirm the
telephone number of the receiver on the
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.
You are using a feature such
as the Polling feature that is
not supported by the
destination fax.
Confirm whether the destination fax supports
the feature.
The Authentication/
Accounting feature is being
used and the fax is being sent
directly from the computer.
When the Authentication/Accounting
feature is used and you send a fax directly
from the computer, you must set the user ID
and passcode registered on the machine to
the fax driver.
For details on the Authentication/Accounting
feature, refer to "Authentication and
Accounting Features" (P.477).
The image quality
is poor.
The document glass is dirty.
Clean the document glass.
Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and
Constant Velocity Transport Glass" (P.246).
The fax density is
inappropriate.
Adjust the fax density.
The sender's machine has a
problem.
Confirm with the sender.
Note
• Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not
just by a problem of the machine.
529
22 Problem Solving
Receiving Problems
If you cannot receive a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.
Symptom
Unable to
communicate
(general fax)
Cause
Remedy
The phone line is not
connected correctly.
The machine is equipped with connectors to
which to connect phone lines.
Communication is enabled only when the
phone line is connected to the correct
connector. When the cable connection is
correct, the On-hook feature allows you to
call via general lines.
An error occurred with the
phone line.
Use a telephone near the machine to check
whether you can make a phone call. If the
phone call is disabled, the problem is in the
phone line, not in the machine.
The machine is turned off.
The machine cannot receive a fax when
turned off. Switch the main power and power
on.
No paper is set.
Load paper in the machine to receive faxes.
Paper is jammed.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
control panel to remove the jammed paper.
Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.617).
The machine is in the System
Administration mode.
The machine cannot receive a fax in the
System Administration mode. Exit the
System Administration mode.
A machine password has been
set.
When a machine password has been set, the
machine accepts only data or polling fax sent
with the correct machine password in F code.
The machine is in manual
receive mode.
Receive the fax manually, or set [Fax
Receiving Mode] to [Auto Receive].
Refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.272).
530
The machine is in manual
send mode.
To use Fax information service, set the
reception mode to [Manual Send] on the onhook screen, enter an information code, and
press the <Start> button.
The document is not correctly
loaded on the sender's
machine.
Check with the sender.
Note
• Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not
just by a problem of the machine.
Trouble during Faxing
Symptom
The image quality
is poor.
Cause
The drum cartridge is
damaged.
Remedy
Copy a document. If the image quality is
poor, replace the drum cartridge with a new
one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges C, M,
Y, or K" (P.223).
The document glass of the
sender's machine is dirty.
The resolution setting on the
sender's machine is too low.
The one-page
document is
received split into
multiple pages.
When scanned on the
sender's machine, the
document was enlarged for
some reason.
Check with the sender.
Note
• Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not
just by a problem of the machine.
Check with the sender.
Note
• Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not
just by a problem of the machine.
You can set the machine to process such a
document by using the Auto Reduce on
Receipt feature and a border limit value for
page splitting. According to the setting
combination specified, the received
document is printed as follows:
Auto Reduce
on Receipt
/
Page Split
Border Limit
Within
border limit
Exceeding
border limit
Auto Reduce
on Receipt
ON
Auto Reduce
on Receipt
OFF
Automatically
reduces image
size and prints
it on one page.
Trims the
portion
exceeding
standard size
and then
prints.
Splits data at
equal ratio
and prints.
-
Refer to "Border Limit" (P.362), or "Auto
Reduce On Receipt" (P.363).
Although the
Folder Selector
feature is set,
however, the
received
document is
printed, and
cannot be stored
in the folder.
An unregistered folder is
specified on the Folder
Selector feature.
When using the Folder Selector feature,
specify a registered folder. If an unregistered
folder is selected, the received document
cannot be stored in the folder, and will be
automatically printed.
For information on how to register the folder,
refer to "Create Folder" (P.381). For
information on the setting of the Folder
Selector, refer to "Fax Received Options"
(P.365).
531
22 Problem Solving
Trouble during Scanning
This section describes how to resolve scan problems.
Unable to Scan with the Machine
If you cannot scan with the machine, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.
Symptom
The document is
not correctly fed
from the
document feeder.
Cause
The document is too small.
Remedy
The minimum size of the document that can
be loaded on the document feeder is A5.
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
The document type is
unsuitable.
The document feeder does not feed irregular
sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper clips,
or adhesive tape.
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
The document guides are set
in incorrect positions.
Adjust the document guides to the
document.
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
A piece of torn paper remains
in the document feeder.
Open the document feeder cover, and remove
the piece.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.624).
Documents of mixed sizes are
loaded.
When loading documents of mixed sizes, be
sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer
If you cannot import scanned documents to the computer, identify the symptom in the
following table to perform the remedy.
Symptom
Cause
Unable to find the The machine is not turned
scanner.
on.
532
Remedy
Switch the main power and power on.
The network cable is
disconnected from the
computer.
Connect the network cable to the computer.
The network cable is
disconnected from the
machine.
Connect the network cable to the machine.
The network between the
computer and machine is
abnormal.
Check with your network administrator.
Trouble during Scanning
Symptom
Unable to open a
folder.
Cause
The folder is unregistered.
Remedy
Register the folder.
Refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
The folder passcode has been
forgotten.
The passcode cannot be retrieved. Set the
passcode to [Off], and then set the passcode
again.
Refer to "Create Folder" (P.381).
Unable to import The scan driver is not
data from the
installed.
scanner because
of a TWAIN
transmission error.
Operation
terminates during
scanning.
The file size is too large.
Install the scan driver.
Lower the resolution, and import again.
533
22 Problem Solving
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)
If you cannot send a scanned document over the network, identify the symptom in the
following table to perform the remedy.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
A Transmission
Report - Job
Undelivered is
output.
Unable to transmit because of
the error.
Check the Transmission Results in the
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If a
status code is displayed, refer to "Status
Code" (P.553).
Unable to send
data over the
network.
The server is not correctly
specified.
Correctly specify the server.
The save destination is not
correctly specified.
Correctly specify the save destination.
When SMB is selected, the
shared name is not correctly
specified.
Correctly specify the shared name.
When SMB (UNC Format) is
selected, the save destination
is not correctly specified.
Correctly specify the save destination.
The login name is not entered
correctly.
Correctly enter the login name.
The password is not correctly
entered.
Correctly enter the password.
The time set on the machine
does not agree with that of
Windows, when SMB
transmission is performed to
Windows Server 2003 or
Windows Server 2008.
Synchronize the time settings of the machine
and Windows.
On Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, or
Windows XP, users who do
not set a password cannot use
SMB transmission.
Follow the steps below to change the settings
of network access:
1. Start Windows, and select [Control Panel]
> [Administrative Tools] > [Local
Security Policy].
2. Select [Security Settings] > [Local
Policies] > [Security Options].
3. Change [Account: Limit local account use
of blank passwords to console logon only]
to [Disabled].
Specify a DFS name space with a root
Is the root of the DFS name
space (\\Domain name\Shared comprised of less than four characters.
name) specified with more
than three characters.
534
Trouble during Scanning
Unable to Send E-mail
If you cannot send a scanned document using the E-mail feature, identify the symptom in
the following table to perform the remedy.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
A Transmission
Report - Job
Undelivered is
output.
Unable to transmit because of
an error.
Check the Transmission Results in the
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If a
status code is displayed, refer to "Status
Code" (P.553).
Unable to send e­
mail.
The mail address is incorrect.
Enter the correct mail address.
The data size exceeded the
maximum e-mail size.
Change the maximum e-mail size, or lower
the resolution.
Refer to "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.369).
The Image is not What was Expected
If the image is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.
Symptom
Cause
The image is dirty. The document glass or the
document cover is soiled.
Remedy
Clean the document glass or the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
The image is too
dark, or too light.
Part of the image
is missing.
The document is a
transparent type such as a
transparency film.
If the document is transparent, dirt on the
document cover may be copied on the image.
Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
document when scanning.
The document is colored,
rough, or a blueprint.
Adjust the copy density or image quality
when scanning.
The document is glossy
printing paper.
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
document glass, and shadows are sometimes
scanned, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
scanning.
The scan density is set to
[Darken] or [Lighten].
Adjust the scan density.
The setting for [Original
Type] is inappropriate for the
document.
Select an image quality appropriate for the
document.
The document is pasted or
folded.
The pasted or folded section may not be
laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
535
22 Problem Solving
Symptom
The image is not
the desired size.
Cause
The document glass or the
document cover is dirty.
Remedy
Clean the document glass or the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.246).
The document is a
transparent type such as a
transparency film.
Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
document when scanning.
The document is misaligned.
Load the document correctly.
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
The document guides on the
document feeder are not set
in the correct positions.
Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides to the document.
The document is a non­
standard size.
Specify the document size.
The document is folded.
Flatten the curl and load the document again.
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
Refer to "Scanning Procedure" (P.134).
536
The image is not
scanned in color.
[Color Scanning] is set to
[Black & White], or
[Grayscale].
Set [Color Scanning] to [Color].
The image is
coarse.
The resolution is too low.
Set the resolution higher.
Image is saved with high
compression.
Select a lower compression ratio in [Quality /
File Size].
Black-and-white
gradation is not
reproduced
properly.
[Black & White] is selected
for [Color Scanning].
Set [Color Scanning] to [Grayscale].
Network-related Problems
Network-related Problems
This section describes how to resolve network related problems.
When using SMB
When SMB is used, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the remedy.
When you cannot communicate with the machine
Cause
Check point
Remedy
The computer and the
machine are using different
protocols.
Although [Search for Other
Configure the machine and
Computers] under [Start] >
each computer to use the same
[Search] > [Other Computers] SMB operational protocol.
on the computer is displaying
the machine, [Network
Computer] does not display
the machine.
The machine belongs to
different network (subnet).
Although [Search for Other
Computers] under [Start] >
[Search] > [Other Computers]
on the computer is displaying
the machine, [Network
Computer] does not display
the machine.
If the machine and the
computers are set to different
networks, consult your network
administrator.
The host name specified for
the machine is already in use.
Print out Configuration Report
to confirm whether "Repetitive
Host Name" is printed in the
SMB status information.
Use Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool to change the host
name to a unique name, or
restore the machine settings to
the default settings.
When you cannot communicate with the machine or other SMB machines
Cause
If [Auto Master Mode] of SMB
is set to [On], the number of
machines whose information
can be stored is limited. The
number depends on the
network environment.
Check point
The machine or other SMB
machines cannot be searched
from the Network Computers
icon.
Remedy
Confirm the setting of [Auto
Master Mode] of SMB. If the
setting is enabled, change it to
[Off].
537
22 Problem Solving
When you cannot print
Cause
Check point
Remedy
The machine is processing a
print job from a different
computer.
(When [SMB (Spool)] is set to
[Off])
Confirm whether the machine
is processing a print job. (A
write error dialog is displayed to
indicate that there is no room
to store your print job.)
Wait until the machine
completes processing the print
job, or change the machine
setting to the [Spool] mode.
The connections to the
machine exceeded the
maximum number allowed.
Confirm whether the machine
is processing simultaneous
requests (print requests, status
queries, etc.) from multiple
computers. (A write error
dialog is displayed to indicate
that no more remote
computers can be connected.)
Wait for a while and try
printing again.
When you cannot delete documents from the [Print] window
Cause
Check point
Remedy
You are trying to delete all
print data displayed in the
[Print] window. (Only the
system administrator is allowed
to delete all data.)
Confirm whether you are trying
to delete the print data from
the [Print] menu. ([Cancel All
Documents] menu.)
Select the print data to delete,
and delete from the
[Document] menu in the
[Print] window. (Select
[Cancel].)
The print data has a different
owner.
Confirm whether the name
displayed as the owner for the
selected print data and the
user's login name to Windows
are the same.
Login to Windows using the
name displayed as the owner of
the print data, and then delete
the print data.
Others
Symptom
The message "Unknown
document name" is displayed
for the job name in the job
history instead of the correct
job name.
538
Remedy
Change the setting of the SMB receiving buffer to [Hard Disk
Spool] or [Memory Spool].
Network-related Problems
When using NetWare
The possible causes, check points, and remedies for problems when using NetWare are as
follows:
When you cannot print
Cause
Check point
Remedy
Network equipment, such as
hubs, does not support
automatic frame type
detection.
Confirm whether the data link
indicator of the network
equipment port to which the
machine is connected is lit.
Confirm whether the frame
types used by the file servers on
the network are standardized.
Specify the frame type set on
the connected file server as the
frame type for the machine.
A problem occurred on the
network between the computer
and the machine.
Use NWADMIN on the
computer to confirm whether
the machine object can be
browsed.*
Replace the faulty network
cable connected between the
computer and the machine.
Job sender (user or group
Use NWADMIN from a
name) is not specified in [User] computer to confirm whether
for the print queue.
the print queue object's [User]
information lists the job sender
(user or group name).*
Re-send the print data to the
print queue for which the job
sender (user or group name) is
registered as the [User].
Job transmission to the print
queue is prohibited.
Use PCONSOLE to confirm
whether [User can register to
the queue] is set to [Yes] under
[Current Queue Status] of
[Print Queue].
Use PCONSOLE to set the
item to [Yes].
Use NWADMIN on the
computer to confirm whether
the operator flag is being
confirmed with [Recognition]
of the print queue.*
Use NWADMIN on a
computer to confirm whether
each item of the operator flag is
being confirmed with
[Recognition] of the print
queue.*
Job sender (user or group
Use NWADMIN from a
name) is not specified in the
computer to confirm that the
user setting for the print server. print server's [User]
information lists the job sender
(user or group name).*
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to register job sender
(user or group name) to [User]
of [Print Queue].*
Re-send the print data to the
print queue whose [User] of
[Print Server Information]
includes the job sender (user or
group name).
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to register job sender
(user or group name) to [User]
information of the print
server.*
The print queue where the user
has transmitted the print data,
is not assigned to the machine.
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to check the print
queue's [Assignment] whether
the machine is assigned in the
printer list serviced by the print
queue.*
Re-send the print data to the
print queue which is assigned
to the machine.*
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to add the print
queue to the machine.*
539
22 Problem Solving
Cause
Check point
Print data format and the print
environment settings on the
computer do not match.
-
If the computer is running on
Windows, set it not to output
Ctrl-D.
The number of print queues
set for the machine exceeds the
maximum number allowed.
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to check on the print
queue list of [Assignment] for
the machine whether the
desired print queue is
assigned.*
Re-send the print data to the
print queue which is assigned
to the machine.*
The slave file server is not
configured. ([Bindery Service]
mode)
Use PCONSOLE from a
computer to confirm whether
the slave file server is registered
to [Service NetWare Server] on
the print server indicated by
[Print Server Information].*
Use PCONSOLE from
computer to register the slave
file server and reflect the
configured settings.*
The slave file server
configuration is mismatched.
([Bindery Service] mode)
Use PCONSOLE from a
computer to confirm whether
the printer type is set to
[Defined Elsewhere] under
[Print Server Information] >
[Printer] > [Printer xxx
Environment Settings].*
If the printer type is not set to
[Defined Elsewhere], change it
to [Defined Elsewhere], and
then reflect the configured
settings.*
The form number on the print
data and the form number set
to the printer do not match.
Use NWADMIN on a
computer to select the
machine and confirm whether
the start number of the form in
the environment settings
matches the number in the
print data.*
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to match the [Start
Form] number in the
machine's environment
settings to the number in the
print data.*
The level settings for the IPX
checksum do not match.
Use the set command from the
console screen on the file server
to confirm whether the IPX
checksum is set to level 2.
Enter the following command
from the console screen on the
file server to set the IPX
checksum to either level 0 or
level 1.
set Enable IPX Checksum=x
(x = 0 or 1)
The level settings for the NCP Use the set command from the
packet signature do not match. console screen on the file server
to confirm whether the NCP
packet signature is set to level
3.
Enter the following command
from the console screen on the
file server to set the NCP
packet signature to either level
0, 1, or 2, and restart the file
server.
set NCP Packet Signature
Option=x (x = 0, 1, or 2)
The default device name is
incorrect.
Print the Configuration Report
to confirm the last 6 digits (3
bytes) of the Ethernet address.
Set the device name using the
correct Ethernet address.
Print Configuration Report to
confirm whether the tree name
is specified.
Set the tree name.
The directory tree name is not
configured.
540
Remedy
Set a device name differing
from the default name.
Network-related Problems
Cause
Check point
Remedy
The context is not set.
Print Configuration Report to
confirm whether the context is
specified.
Set the context.
Connected to a different
printer object.
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to confirm, on the
layout information of the print
server, whether the correct
object is assigned.*
Use the Driver CD Kit from a
computer to correctly set the
file server name/tree name/
context/active mode.
The NetWare port on the
machine is not activated.
Print Configuration Report to
confirm whether the NetWare
port is activated.
Select the [Enabled] check box
of [NetWare] to activate the
port.
The file server is down.
Search for the file server on
[Network Neighborhood].
Start the file server.
There is another device on the
network with an identical
device name.
Turn off the machine and use
NWADMIN from a computer
to confirm whether the status
of the relevant printer object is
"Standby".
Use the Driver CD Kit from a
computer to set a different
device name.
The NetWare port is not
activated.
Print Configuration Report to
confirm whether the network
number is "0000000" (NetWare
server is down), if using IPX/
SPX. If using TCP/IP, confirm
whether the IP address is
"0.0.0.0" (static address
unspecified, or the DHCP
server is down).
In the case of IPX/SPX, start
the NetWare server. In the case
of TCP/IP, either set a static IP
address or start the DHCP
server.
Use Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool from a computer to
correctly set the file server
name/tree name/context/active
mode.
* : For more information on configuration and operations, refer to NetWare Online Documentation.
When "Switch the machine off" is displayed
Cause
Check point
A NetWare problem occurred.
-
Remedy
Restart the machine. Wait
until the screen completely
goes out to switch on the
machine power.
When print result is not what was expected
Cause
The printer language of the
print data and the printer
language configured on the
machine are different.
Check point
Confirm the printer language
on the machine.
Remedy
Match the printer language of
the print data and the printer
language configured on the
machine.
541
22 Problem Solving
When no notification is received
The possible causes, check points, and remedies when a computer that instructed a print job
does not receive notification are as follows:
When the printing problems are not notified
Cause
The user is not listed on the
print server notification
recipient list.
Check point
Use PCONSOLE on the
computer to confirm whether
the job user or user's group is
registered under [Print Server
Information] > [Printer] >
[Printer xxx Environment
Settings] > [Notify].
Remedy
Add the name of the job user or
the name of the user's group to
[Notify].
When the completion of the job is not notified
Cause
The [Notify] option was not
specified when the computer
transmitted the print data.
Netware command
[CASTOFF] has been
executed on the computer.
542
Check point
Confirm whether the [Notify]
option is specified when
transmitting the print data.
-
Remedy
Specify the [Notify] option
when transmitting the print
data.
Execute the NetWare
command [CASTON] on the
computer.
Network-related Problems
When using TCP/IP
The possible causes, check points, and remedies when using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012
When you cannot print
Cause
Check point
Remedy
The IP address is incorrect.
Request your network
administrator to check the
machine's IP address.
Set a correct IP address on the
machine.
The volume of the print data
sent in an instruction from a
computer exceeded the
maximum receivable volume
when the LPD spool is set to
memory spool.
Confirm the memory amount
for the LPD spool and the
volume of the print data
transmitted by an instruction.
If the one file of print data
exceeds the memory amount,
divide the file not to exceed the
amount.
An unrecoverable error
occurred during the printing
process.
Confirm whether any error
messages are displayed on the
control panel.
If the print data is divided into
multiple files and exceeds the
memory amount, decrease the
number of files not to exceed
the amount.
Restart the machine. Wait
until the screen completely
goes out to switch on the
machine power.
The machine is not set to the
Confirm the transport protocol
transport protocol
selected on the machine.
corresponding to the computer.
Select the transport protocol
corresponding to the computer.
The machine is trying to
process a data format that does
not match the data format of
the print data transmitted from
a computer.
Set not to output Ctrl-D.
-
When print result is not what was expected
Cause
Check point
Remedy
Selected printer language on
the machine does not match
the printer language of the
print data.
Confirm the selected printer
language on the machine and
the printer language of the
print data.
The computer is not using the
print driver supplied with the
machine (is using another
company's print driver).
Confirm whether the print
On the computer, select the
driver on the computer is the
print driver supplied with the
one supplied with the machine. machine. If the print driver is
not listed for selection, install
the print driver and then select
it. Operation is not guaranteed
if another company's print
driver is used.
Select the printer language on
the machine to match the print
data.
543
22 Problem Solving
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8
When you cannot print
Cause
Check point
Remedy
The LPD port is not activated.
Confirm whether the LPD port
is activated.
When printing with a printer
detected by using Bonjour,
Select the [Enabled] check box
of [LPD] to activate the port.
When using EtherTalk
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using EtherTalk are as
follows:
Cause
544
Check point
Remedy
Documents are printed by
another machine.
If a machine assigned the same
printer name already existed on
the network, the printer names
is automatically changed when
starting the machine.
Therefore, depending on the
timing of starting the printer,
the machine may be started
with a different name, and
documents are printed by
another machine.
A machine that is assigned the
same printer name may exist
on the network. Confirm the
printer name, and change the
name if it is duplicated.
The printer cannot be browsed
from clients.
If the machine is turned on
before it is connected to a
network, clients may not be
able to identify the printer
name and therefore cannot
browse the printer.
Turn the machine on after
connecting to the network. If
the machine is turned on while
disconnected from the
network, turn the machine off,
connect it to the network, and
then turn the machine on
again.
Network-related Problems
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Problems
The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool are as follows:
Symptom
Cannot connect to Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Remedy
Is the machine working properly?
Check whether the machine is turned on.
Is Internet Services (HTTP) port activated?
Print Configuration Report to confirm.
Is the Internet address correctly entered?
Confirm the Internet address again. If the problem persists,
enter an IP address to connect to Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Is a proxy server being used?
Depending on the proxy server, connections may not be possible.
Set the browser to [Not using proxy server] or set that particular
address to [Not using a proxy server].
The [Please wait] message is
continuously displayed.
Wait for a while as instructed.
If the status does not change, click the [Refresh] button.
If this does not impart any effect, confirm whether the machine
is operating correctly.
The [Refresh] button is not
functioning.
Are you using a specified browser?
Selecting the menu on the left
frame does not update the right
frame contents.
Refer to "Installation of Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool"
(P.418) to confirm whether your browser is supported.
The screen display is distorted.
Change the window size for the browser.
The latest information is not
displayed.
Click the [Refresh] button.
Characters are not correctly
displayed.
Use Western European language command.
Pressing [Apply] does not apply
the new settings.
Are the entered values correct?
If a value outside of the permitted range is entered, the update
will automatically be made within the range.
This may occur when the control panel is being operated or the
operation has just been completed.
When the automatic reset function is set, any setting configure
with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not applied until
setting the time set for automatic reset. Wait until then.
When you click [Apply], a
message such as "The server has
returned ineffective or
unrecognizable response" or
"No data" is displayed on the
browser.
Is the password correct?
The entries for Password and Confirm Password do not match.
Enter the correct password.
Cannot delete jobs.
Wait for a while, and click [Refresh].
Restart the machine.
545
22 Problem Solving
E-mail Features Problems
The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using E-mail Notification Service,
the Print E-mail feature, and the E-mail service as follows:
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot receive e-mail (Print E­ Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
mail).
Is [Receive E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Are settings such as the IP addresses for the SMTP server and
POP3 server (if POP3 is selected as the incoming mail protocol)
configured correctly?
Are the POP3 user name and password entered correctly?
Is [Domain Filtering] set?
Confirm whether your own domain is set to [Allow Domains],
on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Are the SMTP server and/or POP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
Cannot transmit e-mail (E­
mail Notification Service and
E-mail).
Is the E-mail address for the machine configured?
Is [E-mail Notification Service] set to [Enabled]? (For E-mail
Notification Service)
Is [Send E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Is the IP address for the SMTP server configured correctly?
Are the settings for notification of transmission configured
correctly? (for E-mail Notification Service)
Confirm the settings on the [Properties] tab of Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Is the destination address entered correctly?
Is the SMTP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
546
Network-related Problems
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems
The possible causes and remedies for problems when connecting to the Internet or intranet
are as follows:
When connection to the Internet/Intranet fails
Cause
Remedy
The Authentication feature
used on the remote server is
not supported by the machine.
Only Basic Authentication is supported by the machine. The
machine does not support NTLM/digest.
For security purposes, change to the Authentication feature
using SSL.
The remote linkage services
used does not support the
model or accessories of the
machine.
Purchase products/models/accessories supported by the remote
linkage services.
The IP address is incorrect.
Confirm the IP address. If the IP address is incorrect, either set a
static IP address or resolve the IP address using DHCP or
Autonet.
The IP gateway address is
incorrect.
Set the correct IP gateway address when connecting to the proxy
server, or to a Web server via the IP gateway.
The subnet mask is incorrect.
Set the correct subnet mask corresponding to your environment.
The DNS server address is
incorrect.
Confirm the DNS server address.
The DNS server selected
cannot resolve the address.
Select a DNS server that can resolve the address.
• When connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the address
of the proxy server.
• When not connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the
destination address.
The address that does not use a
proxy server is incorrect.
Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy server
are set. Even if addresses not through a proxy server are specified
using the FQDN, if a server is directly accessed using its IP
address, the registered server is not excluded. Set the address not
to use a proxy server.
Likewise, even if you directly specify an address that does not use
a proxy server, if a server is accessed with the FQDN, the
registered server is not excluded. Set an IP address with the
FQDN not to use a proxy server.
The desired server, or the proxy
server is down.
Confirm whether the desired server or the proxy server is
operating correctly.
The network cable is not
connected, or broken.
Confirm whether the network cable is correctly connected. We
recommend using a spanning-tree configuration, with which
network disconnection rarely occurs.
Cannot communicate because
of overloading of the server
application.
Wait for a while and try accessing again.
An error that is not displayed
on the control panel occurs.
Even though an error occurs during background processing, no
massage appears on the control panel. Display the [Job Status]
screen or print the Job History Report to confirm the result.
547
22 Problem Solving
Cause
Cannot access the proxy server,
firewall, or Web server as a
result of access control.
Remedy
The following types of access control are used. Confirm the
configured access control.
• Address (port) restriction
• SSL restriction
• User access restriction (including access right levels)
• Content block
• Scheme restriction (cannot use HTTP etc.)
• Transfer data size restriction
• Method restriction (cannot use POST etc.)
• HTTP header restriction (only accepting specified browsers
etc.)
• Time restriction (only available during a specific period of
time etc.)
When connection to a desired Web server fails
Cause
Remedy
The setting to use the proxy
server is not configured.
In the environment using the proxy server, you must configure
the machine to use the proxy server to connect to a desired Web
server. Make sure that you configure the settings to use the proxy
server.
The setting to use a proxy
server is configured even
though the environment does
not use a proxy server.
In an environment that does not use a proxy server, such as when
connecting to an intranet, do not make the settings to use the
proxy server.
The proxy server address is
incorrect.
When the settings to use a proxy server are configured, you
cannot connect to a desired Web server if the IP address of the
proxy server is wrong. Set the correct IP address of the proxy
server.
When the proxy server access
requires authentication, you
cannot connect to the server
because the user name or
password is incorrect.
Set the user name and password on the machine that allow
connection to the proxy server.
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems
The possible causes and remedies for problems when using an IPv4 or IPv6 address are as
follows:
Unable to connect using an IPv4 address
Symptom
When 0 (zero) is prepended to
the head of a value for the IPv4
address (for example:
192.0.2.010), connection fails.
548
Remedy
Do not prepend 0 (zero) to each value of an IPv4 address.
Network-related Problems
Unable to connect using an IPv6 address
Symptom
Remedy
You cannot connect to the
machine with the link-local
address.
When you specify the machine's link-local address, a scope ID
must be appended to the address.
For example, when you use Internet Explorer 7 on Windows
Vista to access the address "fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010", you must
append the Ethernet adapter local area connection number (for
example, 8) for Windows Vista to the address as follows:
fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010%8
The machine cannot connect
to a computer running
Windows OS that supports
IPv6.
Assign a static IPv6 address to the computer running Windows
OS that supports IPv6.
Then, register the IPv6 address on the machine as host address
to allow communication.
A device outside the router
cannot be searched.
When searching for a device outside the router via SMB, directly
specify the address. Multicasting is supported only within a local
link (FF02::1).
When SSL is enabled on Dell
When SSL is enabled, directly specify "https://[IPv6 address]".
Printer Configuration Web
Tool, even if you specify "http://
[IPv6 address]", you are not
redirected to "https://[IPv6
address]".
Unable to print using an IPv6 address
Symptom
Remedy
On an IPv6 network without a
DNS server, a computer
running Windows OS that
supports IPv6 cannot be
connected to a Windows
shared printer.
Register the computer name of the machine on the "hosts" file
stored on the computer running Windows OS that supports
IPv6. For example, register in the following file:
C:\Windows\system32\driver\etc\hosts
IPv6 communication cannot be
established with NetWare.
NetWare does not support IPv6 communication. Use IPv4 for
NetWare.
549
22 Problem Solving
Unable to scan using an IPv6 address
Symptom
Remedy
When the machine is
configured with only a linklocal address, file transfer fails.
Assign a global address to the machine.
When you specify the
computer name on a storage
destination server of the Scan
to PC (SMB) service in an IPv6
environment without a DNS
server, scan data cannot be
transferred.
Scan data cannot be transferred with SMB if a destination server
is specified using the computer name. Use the IPv6 format to
specify the server.
The machine does not operate
correctly if the mail address for
the E-mail service is specified
in IPv6 address literal format.
Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify an e-mail
address using the FQDN.
Other problems on IPv6 addresses
Symptom
Remedy
Unable to search devices with
IPv6 addresses in UPnP.
In an IPv6 environment, use Function Discovery of Web
Services on Devices (WSD).
In an IPv6 network with no
DNS server installed,
authentication fails if an SMB
authentication server is
specified using the computer
name.
Directly specify the IPv6 address to specify the computer name
of an authentication server.
When the Web Applications
In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a remote
service is used, you cannot
service's destination URL using the FQDN.
correctly specify the
destination URL using the IPv6
address.
Example:
http://[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
IPv6 addresses are not correctly
recorded on output job logs.
550
Use an IPv4 network for correct logging.
Media Print - Text Trouble
Media Print - Text Trouble
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Text
are as follows.
Symptom
[Media Print Text] is not
displayed on the
[Home] screen.
Cause
[Media Print] in Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool is
not checked.
Remedy
Check [Media Print] in Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool to enable the
service.
551
22 Problem Solving
Media Print - Photos Trouble
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Photos
are as follows:
Symptom
A blank sheet of
paper is output.
Cause
Remedy
Files that cannot be printed
(image files in other than
DCF1.0 format) are included
among the files specified for
printing.
Files that cannot be printed (image files in
other than DCF1.0 format) are not printed
with index printing. Specify printing again,
excluding the images not displayed for index
printing.
Note
552
• Note that editing or saving DCF1.0­
format image files on a computer
makes those files' format other than
DCF1.0.
Status Code
Status Code
This section describes status codes.
An error message and status code (***-***) are displayed if printing terminated abnormally
because of an error, or a malfunction occurred in the machine.
For faxing, a status code is also displayed on an Activity Report and a Transmission Report Job Undelivered.
Refer to the status codes in the following table to resolve problems.
Note
• If a status code is displayed, any print data remaining in the machine and information stored in the
machine's memory is not secured.
If a status code is displayed that is not listed in the following table, or if you cannot resolve
an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
Status Code
Cause and Remedy
003-311
003-318
003-319
003-320
003-321
003-322
003-323
003-324
003-325
003-326
003-327
003-328
003-329
003-330
003-331
003-332
003-333
003-334
003-335
003-336
003-337
003-338
003-339
003-340
003-341
003-342
003-343
003-344
003-345
003-346
[Cause]
003-700
[Cause]
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Too many documents are set in the document feeder after clearing the paper jam.
[Remedy] Check the output, and then replace the documents that have not been copied yet.
553
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
003-702
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
You tried to copy sides 1 and 2 of a document simultaneously specifying different
Reduce/Enlarge ratio for each side.
[Remedy] Specify the same Reduce/Enlarge ratio for both sides.
003-750
[Cause]
Unable to store any documents using the 2 Sided Book Copying feature.
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copying settings.
Refer to "Layout Adjustment" (P.83).
003-751
[Cause]
Unable to process the document because the specified scan area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
003-752
[Cause]
A mix sized document was to be scanned at 600 dpi in Color/2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or lower, and try scanning again.
003-753
[Cause]
A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [200 dpi], and scan the document again.
003-754
003-755
[Cause]
003-756
[Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Execute the job again.
The faxed document is completely blank.
[Remedy] Check whether the document is blank or whether the side of the document to be faxed
is loaded correctly.
003-757
[Cause]
A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [300 dpi] or lower, and scan the document again.
003-760
[Cause]
An incompatible combination of feature is specified for document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Confirm the selected options.
003-761
[Cause]
The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray differs from the paper size of the tray
selected for Auto Paper selection.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type Priority] settings.
003-763
[Cause]
An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart correctly on the document glass.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.248).
003-780
[Cause]
Failed to compress the scanned document.
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution or the ratio for [Reduce / Enlarge] to decrease the data size, or
split the data to send it separately.
003-795
[Cause]
When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the paper size specified, the
reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
• Change the paper size.
005-210
[Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
005-275
005-280
554
[Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Status Code
Status Code
010-311
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
010-319
010-328
[Cause]
010-330
010-331
010-332
010-333
010-334
010-335
010-338
010-339
010-340
010-344
010-345
010-346
010-347
010-355
010-398
[Cause]
012-210
012-211
012-212
012-213
012-221
012-223
012-224
[Cause]
012-260
012-263
012-282
012-283
012-284
012-291
[Cause]
An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Finisher malfunction
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Center Tray malfunction
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
555
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
Cause and Remedy
012-310
012-311
012-312
012-313
012-314
012-315
012-316
012-317
012-349
012-350
012-353
012-370
012-373
012-374
012-381
[Cause]
016-210
016-211
016-212
016-213
016-214
016-215
016-216
016-217
016-218
016-219
[Cause]
Finisher malfunction
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred in the software.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-220
016-221
016-222
016-223
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
[Cause]
016-229
016-230
[Cause]
016-233
[Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred in the software
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred in the software.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-234
016-235
016-236
016-237
016-238
016-239
556
[Cause]
An error occurred in the Authentication feature of the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
Status Code
Status Code
016-240
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-310
016-311
016-314
016-315
016-316
016-317
016-318
016-319
016-320
016-321
016-322
016-323
016-325
016-326
016-327
[Cause]
016-330
016-331
016-332
[Cause]
016-335
016-336
016-337
016-338
016-339
016-340
016-341
016-342
[Cause]
016-345
016-347
016-348
016-350
016-351
016-360
016-362
016-363
016-364
016-365
016-366
016-367
016-368
016-369
016-370
016-371
[Cause]
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
557
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
Cause and Remedy
016-372
016-373
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377
016-378
016-379
016-380
016-381
016-382
[Cause]
016-400
[Cause]
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
The user name or password for 802.1x authentication does not match.
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password. If the error still is not resolved,
check whether the network environment is set correctly.
016-401
[Cause]
The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same method as set for the
authentication server.
016-402
[Cause]
The authentication connection timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection and switch setting of the authentication device
physically connected to the machine via a network, and check whether it is connected to
the machine correctly.
016-403
[Cause]
The root certificate did not match.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication server and store the root certificate of the server certificate
of the authentication server into the machine.
If you cannot acquire the root certificate of the server certificate, set [Server Certificate
Verification] of [IEEE 802.1x Settings] to [Disabled] on the touch screen.
016-404
[Cause]
An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
016-405
[Cause]
An error occurred in the certificate stored in the machine.
[Remedy] Initialize the certificate.
For more information on initializing certificates, refer to "Delete All Certificates/Initialize
Settings" (P.308).
016-406
[Cause]
An error occurred in the SSL client certificate.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1)Store an SSL client certificate in the machine, and set it as the SSL client certificate.
2)If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine, select an option other than
[EAP-TLS] in [Authentication Method].
016-407
016-408
016-409
016-410
016-411
016-412
558
[Cause]
After automatically obtained the IP address, the machine failed to retrieve proxy server
settings from the DHCP server.
[Remedy] Modify the customized program and install it again.
Status Code
Status Code
016-450
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
The SMB host name already exists.
[Remedy] Change the host name.
Refer to "Host Name" (P.332).
016-453
[Cause]
Updating of the IPv6 address and host name for the DNS server failed.
[Remedy] Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is set correctly.
016-454
[Cause]
Unable to retrieve the IP address from DNS.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS configuration and IP address retrieve setting.
Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.328).
016-455
[Cause]
Connection to the SNTP server timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network cable connection and the IP address of the SNTP server are
correct.
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.295).
016-456
[Cause]
Received a message from the SNTP server stating that the server is not synchronized
with the standard time source.
[Remedy] Confirm the SNTP server settings.
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.295).
016-500
016-501
016-502
[Cause]
016-503
[Cause]
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact Customer
Support at dell.com/contactdell.
Unable to resolve the SMTP server name when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool whether the SMTP server settings are
correct. Also, confirm whether the DNS server settings are correct.
016-504
[Cause]
Unable to resolve the POP3 server name when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool whether the POP3 server settings are
correct. Also, confirm whether the DNS server settings are correct.
016-505
[Cause]
Unable to log into the POP3 server when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool whether the user name and password
used on the POP3 server are correct.
016-513
[Cause]
An error occurred in connecting to the SMTP server. Probable causes are as follows:
1)The SMTP server or network may be overloaded.
2)The source port number for SMTP is incorrect.
[Remedy] For 1), wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
For 2), confirm whether the source port number for SMTP is correct.
016-514
[Cause]
An error occurred during processing of an XPS document.
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing from a driver which supports XPS, print from the
application using another print driver (PCL, etc.).
If an error occurred while direct printing an XPS document (such as E-mail and Media
Print - Text), print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document Viewer.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
559
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-515
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
There was insufficient memory during processing of an XPS document.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Set [Image Quality] to [Standard]
• Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document Viewer.
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
For more information on [Image Options], refer to the help of the print driver.
016-516
[Cause]
The Print Ticket included in the XPS document includes an invalid description or a
print setting not supported by the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether there is a problem with the method of using the application that sent the
print job, or with the content of the print instruction.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check with the application
manufacturer that sent the print job for operations of the application, not with Dell.
If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-517
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
[Cause]
There is an error in the content described in the PostScript file.
[Remedy] Print with the PostScript driver. Furthermore, modify ProcessColorModel described in
the PostScript file so that the color mode does not change.
016-519
[Cause]
The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages specified, and the print
job is terminated.
[Remedy] Have your system administrator change the maximum limit of printable pages.
016-521
[Cause]
The smart card reader is disconnected from the machine while scanning the data with
digital signature.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power and connect the smart card reader, and then switch on the
machine power.
016-522
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. Unable to acquire an SSL client certificate.
[Remedy] The LDAP server is requesting an SSL client certificate. Set an SSL client certificate on
the machine.
016-523
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate data is incorrect.
[Remedy] The machine cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server. Register the root
certificate for the LDAP server's SSL certificate to the machine.
016-524
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate will expire soon.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You can clear this error by
selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS
Settings] on the machine; however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
validity of the LDAP server.
016-525
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate has expired.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You can clear this error by
selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS
Settings] on the machine; however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
validity of the LDAP server.
016-526
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server name does not match the certificate.
[Remedy] Set the same LDAP server address to the machine and to the SSL certificate of the
LDAP server. You can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL / TLS
Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] on the machine; however, note that
selecting this option does not ensure the validity of the LDAP server.
016-527
[Cause]
LDAP server SSL authentication error. This is an SSL authentication internal error.
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
560
Status Code
Status Code
016-528
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
You are logged out of the smart card authentication mode while scanning the data with
a digital signature.
[Remedy] Log in to the machine with the smart card, and then execute the operation again.
016-529
[Cause]
An error occurred when connecting to the Remote Download server. There was no
response from the server within the specified time (45 seconds).
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection. Check whether the Remote Download server is
correctly set on the network.
016-533
[Cause]
Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] The time difference between the machine and the Kerberos server exceeded the clock
skew limit value set on the Kerberos server. Check whether the clocks on the machine
and Kerberos server are correctly set. Also check whether the summer time and the time
zone are correctly set on the machine and Kerberos server.
016-534
[Cause]
Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] The domain set on the machine does not exist on the Kerberos server, or the Kerberos
server address set on the machine is invalid for connection. Check whether the domain
name and the server address have been correctly set on the machine. For connection to
Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server, specify the domain name in uppercase.
016-535
[Cause]
The specified file does not exist on the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the file.
016-536
[Cause]
An error occurred when accessing the DNS prior to connecting to the Remote Download
server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection with the DNS. Also check whether the Remote Download
server name is registered to the DNS.
016-537
[Cause]
Could not connect to the Remote Download server. The port of the destination Remote
Download server is not open.
[Remedy] Confirm the port in the network settings.
016-538
[Cause]
An error occurred when writing the remote download file to the hard disk. The file
obtained from the Remote Download server could not be written to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space, and delete files that are no longer required.
Alternatively, replace the hard disk.
016-539
[Cause]
Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-546
[Cause]
A Local User tried to obtain the information of another user.
[Remedy] Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-559
[Cause]
A remote download parameter error occurred. An invalid value is set for essential system
data.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings for essential system data.
016-562
[Cause]
Multiple entries containing the same smart card information were found in the guest
database of Active Directory.
[Remedy] Correct the guest database entries of Active Directory so that they do not contain the
same smart card information.
016-564
[Cause]
Failed to authenticate the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password to access the Remote Download server. If the
error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
561
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-569
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
Authentication Agent error
[Remedy] Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-574
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the host
or server name of the FTP server could not be resolved when accessing the DNS server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the DNS server. Check whether the FTP server name is
registered correctly on the DNS server.
016-575
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the
DNS server address was not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Specify the correct DNS server address. Or, specify the destination FTP server by using
its IP address.
016-576
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because it could
not connect to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Ensure that both the destination FTP server and the machine are available for network
communications, by checking the following conditions:
• The IP address of the server is set correctly.
• The network cables are plugged in securely.
016-577
[Cause]
Unable to connect to the FTP service of the destination server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Check whether the FTP service of the server is activated.
• Check whether the FTP port number of the server is correctly registered on the
machine.
016-578
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because of
unsuccessful login to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Check whether the login name (user name) and password are correct.
016-579
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the
scanned image could not be saved in the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Check whether the FTP server's save location is correct.
016-580
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the file
or folder name on the FTP server could not be retrieved after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-581
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the
suffix of the name of the file or folder exceeded the limit value when the machine was
connected to the server and the name of a file or folder on the server was determined.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan server. Also try moving
or deleting the files within the forwarding destination folder.
016-582
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because files
could not be created on the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Check whether the specified file name can be used in the save location.
• Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
562
Status Code
Status Code
016-583
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
Failed to create the lock directory in the FTP server while transferring data using FTP of
the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it manually, and then
execute the operation again.
• Check whether the specified name is available in the save location.
• Confirm that the specified name is not duplicated in the save location.
• Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-584
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because folders
could not created on the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Check whether the specified folder name can be used in the save location.
• Check whether the same folder name exists in the save location.
• Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-585
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because files
could not be deleted on the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-586
[Cause]
The machine failed to delete the lock directory while transferring data using FTP of the
Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Confirm the access privilege for the server.
• If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it manually, and then
execute the operation again.
016-587
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because folders
could not be deleted on the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-588
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the data
could not be written on the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-589
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the data
could not be read from the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-590
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because there
are duplicate file names.
[Remedy] Set [Do Not Save] for the action for file name conflict.
016-593
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because an
internal error occurred after connection to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
016-594
016-595
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because a
network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
563
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-596
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because a
network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
016-597
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because a
network error occurred.
[Remedy] Stop all accesses from the other devices, and then execute the operation again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-598
016-599
[Cause]
The size of an e-mail page exceeds the maximum message size because of page splitting.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Reduce the file size for [Quality / File Size].
• Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count" (P.369).
016-700
[Cause]
The job was suspended because the number of the digits for the Secure Print or Charge
Print passcode set on the print driver was less than the value specified in [Minimum
Passcode Length for Stored Jobs] on the machine.
[Remedy] On the print driver, set the passcode string equal to or longer than the value specified in
[Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs].
016-702
[Cause]
Unable to process print data because of insufficient print page buffer.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Set [Image Quality] to [Standard].
• Increase the print page buffer size.
For more information on the [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver. For more
information about memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.345).
016-703
[Cause]
The machine received an e-mail specified with an invalid folder number.
[Remedy] For errors occurring during fax transmission:
Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
For errors occurring during e-mail/fax reception:
Take one of the following measures:
• Register the specified folder number, and request the sender to send the e-mail/fax
again.
• Request the sender to send to an available folder.
If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-704
[Cause]
The folder is full, and hard disk capacity is insufficient.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the folder, and save the file.
016-705
[Cause]
You have not used the print driver for the machine.
[Remedy] Use the print driver appropriate for the machine.
If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-706
[Cause]
The hard disk space is insufficient because the number of Secure Print users exceeded
the maximum limit.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the machine, and delete unnecessary Secure Print users.
For more information on deleting users for Secure Print files, refer to "Printing and Deleting
Stored Jobs" (P.182)us".
016-708
[Cause]
Unable to annotate because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
564
Status Code
Status Code
016-709
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An error occurred during print processing.
[Remedy] Contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-711
[Cause]
The upper limit for the e-mail size has been exceeded.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then try sending the mail again.
• Reduce the number of pages of the document.
• Lower the resolution with [Resolution].
• Reduce the magnification with [Reduce / Enlarge].
• Ask your system administrator to increase the value set for [Maximum Total Data
Size].
• For color scanning, set [MRC High Compression] to [On] under [File Format].
016-712
[Cause]
Unable to process the document because the specified scan area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
016-713
[Cause]
The passcode entered does not match the passcode set on the folder.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-714
[Cause]
The specified folder does not exist.
[Remedy] Create a new folder or specify an existing folder.
016-715
[Cause]
The machine failed to access the ESCP form because the password of the ESCP form
does not match.
[Remedy] Enter the correct password of the ESCP form.
016-716
[Cause]
Unable to spool TIFF file because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files and users from the hard disk.
Refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" (P.182)
016-717
[Cause]
Unable to create a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered or a Transmission Report
because the transmission result information required for creating the report is not stored
in the machine's memory.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• If many scan documents are being processed, wait until the jobs are completed to
execute a new job.
• After completing the job that you want to confirm in a report, do not execute 200 or
more jobs before printing the report.
016-718
[Cause]
Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution, or cancel 2 sided printing or N up feature, and then print again.
016-719
[Cause]
Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient print page buffer.
[Remedy] Increase the size of the print page buffer.
016-720
[Cause]
An invalid command is included in PCL print data.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data and try printing again.
016-721
[Cause]
An error occurred during print processing. Probable causes are as follows:
1)Printing was instructed by the Auto Paper selection when [Paper Type Priority] is set
to [Auto Paper Off] for all paper in the [Common Service Settings].
2)ESC/P-K command error occurred.
[Remedy] For 1), when printing by the Auto Paper selection, set one of the paper types to other
than [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type Priority].
For 2), confirm the print data.
Refer to "Paper Type Priority" (P.302).
565
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-722
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
The specified staple position is not supported by the machine, or the paper size specified
is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and the paper size, and try printing again.
016-725
[Cause]
A scanned document stored in a folder was to be sent by fax using the Job Flow feature,
but the file in the folder could not be converted to fax data.
[Remedy] Do not use the Job Flow feature. Simply scan the document from the machine's [Fax]
screen to send it by fax.
016-727
[Cause]
A print job was cancelled without storing a file into a folder because the file was
determined as not containing any pages.
[Remedy] The file could not be stored into the folder because the machine determined the print
file as not containing any pages. Disable [Skip Blank Pages] on the [Advanced] tab on
the print driver, or add text to the file if the file is blank.
016-728
[Cause]
An unsupported tag is included in the TIFF file.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data.
016-729
[Cause]
Unable to print because the number of colors or the resolution of the TIFF file exceeds
the allowed range.
[Remedy] Change the number of colors or resolution for the TIFF file, and execute the operation
again.
016-731
[Cause]
Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.
[Remedy] Retry printing.
016-732
[Cause]
The form specified by emulation has not been registered at the host side.
[Remedy] Resend the form data.
016-733
[Cause]
Probable causes are as follows:
1)Unable to obtain the IP address (the string after "@" in the destination e-mail address)
when e-mail is sent.
2)DNS server was unable to resolve the Internet address (the string after "@") by the
DNS server when e-mail is sent.
[Remedy] For 1), confirm the e-mail address.
For 2), confirm the DNS server address.
016-738
[Cause]
Unsupported paper size was specified when specifying booklet creation with PostScript.
[Remedy] Specify a paper size supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
016-739
[Cause]
Used an unsupported combination of document size and paper size when specifying
booklet creation with PostScript.
[Remedy] Specify a combination of document size and paper size supported for booklet creation,
and try printing again.
016-740
[Cause]
Used an unsupported paper tray when specifying booklet creation with PostScript.
[Remedy] Specify a paper tray supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
016-741
016-742
016-743
016-744
016-745
[Cause]
016-746
[Cause]
An error occurred during the update process of the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
An unsupported feature is included in the received PDF.
[Remedy] Print using a print driver.
566
Status Code
Status Code
016-748
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
Unable to print because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of print pages by dividing the print data or by printing one copy at
a time when printing multiple copies.
016-749
[Cause]
The printer language received from the print driver is unsupported by this machine.
[Remedy] Use the machine's print driver for printing. If the error still is not resolved, contact
Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-750
[Cause]
The machine received a printing job ticket with a PDF or XPS from an application that
allows direct transmissions of files, but the printing job ticket data had a grammar or
print instruction unsupported by the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether you are correctly using the application and whether the print instruction
was correct.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check with the application
manufacturer that sent the print job for operations of the application.
If the error still is not resolved, have the Configuration Report, the Job History Report,
and the print data with the printing job ticket ready, and contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-751
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
[Cause]
Probable causes are as follows:
1)During the PDF Bridge processing, a syntax or parameter error occurred, an undefined
command was used, and a PDF file was damaged.
2)When [Print Processing Mode([408])] for the PDF Direct Print feature has been set
to [PS([1])], memory is insufficient.
3)When [Print Processing Mode([408])] for the PDF Direct Print feature has been set
to [PS([1])], a PDF file including OpenType fonts is processed.
[Remedy] For 1), use the print driver to print the document.
For 2), take one of the following measures:
• Use the print driver to print the document.
• Increase PostScript memory.
For 3), create a PDF file in which OpenType fonts are not included.
For more information on the memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.345).
016-752
[Cause]
Unable to process for PDF Bridge because of insufficient memory space.
[Remedy] Change the [Image Quality] setting from [High Resolution] to [High Quality], or from
[High Quality] to [Standard].
016-755
[Cause]
Attempted to process a print-protected PDF file.
[Remedy] Cancel the print protection using Adobe Reader, and try printing again.
016-756
[Cause]
Do not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-757
[Cause]
The passcode is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-758
[Cause]
The division does not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-759
[Cause]
The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages for this service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
567
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-760
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An error occurred during PostScript processing.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Set [Image Quality] to [High Speed].
• Increase PostScript memory.
For more information on [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver. For more
information on memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.345).
016-761
[Cause]
An error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] and execute the operation again. If the error still is
not resolved, set [Print Page Mode] to [On].
016-762
[Cause]
The specified printer language is not installed on the machine.
[Remedy] For [USB] in [Print Mode] under [Port Settings], specify correct printer language.
016-763
[Cause]
Unable to connect to the POP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the POP server IP address set on the machine.
016-764
[Cause]
Unable to connect to the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-765
[Cause]
Unable to send the e-mail because the hard disk on the SMTP server is full.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-766
[Cause]
An error occurred on the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-767
[Cause]
Unable to send the e-mail because the address is not correct.
[Remedy] Confirm the address, and try sending again.
016-768
[Cause]
Unable to connect to the SMTP server because the machine's mail address is incorrect.
[Remedy] Confirm the machine's mail address.
016-769
[Cause]
The SMTP server does not support delivery receipts (DSN).
[Remedy] Send e-mail without setting delivery receipts (DSN).
016-770
[Cause]
Direct Fax is restricted.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator whether Direct Fax is available. If it is available,
contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-772
[Cause]
The DNS server address is not set.
[Remedy] Set the DNS server address.
016-774
[Cause]
Unable to process compression conversion because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-775
[Cause]
Unable to process image conversion because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
568
Status Code
Status Code
016-776
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An error occurred during image conversion processing.
[Remedy] For errors occurring when forwarding with Store to Folder: The image conversion
processing for the part of the data may be completed. Retrieve each converted page from
the folder using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool" (P.421).
For errors occurring after instructing encryption or signature using a certificate:
Take one of the following measures:
• Check whether the certificate is valid.
• Set the correct date and time on the machine.
016-777
[Cause]
A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-778
[Cause]
The conversion processing of the scanned image was interrupted because of insufficient
disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-779
[Cause]
An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning. If using large-size paper such as A3 with [Resolution] set to [600 dpi],
specify [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or lower in [Layout Adjustment]. If the error still is not
resolved, contact Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
016-780
[Cause]
A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
016-781
Probable causes are as follows:
1)The mail server cannot be found during e-mail sending (TCP/IP session establishment
failed).
2)The machine received an SMTP server error from the mail server during e-mail
sending.
[Remedy] 1)Take one of the following measures:
- Check whether the network cables are plugged in securely.
- Check whether the IP address of the SMTP server is correct when an IP address is
used for server specification.
2)Enter the host name of the machine using ASCII characters.
Available ASCII characters are follows:
- alphabets
- numerals
Check whether or not ASCII characters are used in [Tools] > [System Settings] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Machine's E-mail Address / Host Name].
016-786
[Cause]
[Cause]
When using the Scan feature, the machine could not write the file to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power.
• Load paper on the paper tray as necessary.
• If the error occurs when sending an e-mail, take one of the following measures:
- Lower the resolution.
- Reduce the size.
- Reduce the number of pages, and divide the job into several e-mails to send.
- Send the job by setting [Color Scanning] to [Black & White].
569
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
016-788
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
Failed to retrieve a file from the Web browser.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then execute the operation again:
• Reload the browser page.
• Restart the browser.
• Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power.
016-790
[Cause]
Unable to send an e-mail with Split Send because of exceeding the maximum number
of splits allowed.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Reduce the file size for [Quality / File Size].
• Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count" (P.369).
016-792
[Cause]
Failed to acquire the specified job history when printing a Job Report.
[Remedy] The specified job history does not exist.
016-794
[Cause]
Media is not inserted correctly.
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.
016-795
016-796
016-797
[Cause]
016-799
[Cause]
An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
[Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
An invalid print parameter is included in the print data of the application, or the print
data and the Print Setup settings may not match.
[Remedy] Check the print data of the application and the Print Setup settings, and try printing
again.
017-700
[Cause]
ThinPrint.Engine connection timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-701
[Cause]
An error occurred while connecting to ThinPrint.Engine.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-702
[Cause]
The data sent to ThinPrint.Engine is invalid.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-703
[Cause]
The print data sent from ThinPrint.Engine exceeded the maximum size of the machine.
[Remedy] Split the job, and try printing again.
017-704
[Cause]
An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. Send the job again.
017-705
017-706
017-707
017-708
[Cause]
017-709
[Cause]
ThinPrint.Engine SSL authentication error.
[Remedy] Check the server certificate information (expiry date and address) that is registered to
ThinPrint.Engine.
An SSL communication error occurred between ThinPrint.Engine and the machine.
[Remedy] Check the settings of the machine.
017-713
[Cause]
The SMTP server does not support STARTTLS.
[Remedy] Change SSL/TLS communication setting to other than [STARTTLS].
570
Status Code
Status Code
017-714
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
SSL connection to the SMTP server failed.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the SMTP server supports SSL connection. If the server supports it,
check the port number of the SMTP server. If the error still is not resolved, contact
Customer Support at dell.com/contactdell.
017-715
[Cause]
SMTP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can avoid this error by
setting [SMTP - SSL / TLS Communication] in [SSL / TLS Settings] to [Disabled],
however the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-716
[Cause]
SMTP server SSL authentication error. It is before the valid period of the server
certificate.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can avoid this error by
setting [SMTP - SSL / TLS Communication] in [SSL / TLS Settings] to [Disabled],
however the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-717
[Cause]
SMTP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate expired.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can avoid this error by
setting [SMTP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] to [Disabled],
however the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-718
[Cause]
SMTP server SSL authentication error. The server name and certificate do not match.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can avoid this error by
setting [SMTP - SSL / TLS Communication] in [SSL / TLS Settings] to [Disabled],
however the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-719
[Cause]
SMTP server SSL authentication error. SSL authentication internal error.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
018-400
[Cause]
Although IPSec is enabled, the IPSec settings are inconsistent.
• Although [Authenticate by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], a
passcode is not set.
• Although [Authenticate by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE Authentication Method],
an IPSec certificate is not set.
[Remedy] Remove the inconsistency of the IPSec settings, and enable IPSec again.
• When [Authenticate by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], set the
passcode.
• When [Authenticate by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], set
an IPSec certificate.
018-405
[Cause]
An error occurred during LDAP authentication.
[Remedy] The account is disabled in the active directory of the authentication server, or the access
is set to disabled. Consult your network administrator.
018-500
[Cause]
The certificate does not exist in the authentication server.
[Remedy] Configure the server certificate. Or, cancel authentication.
018-501
[Cause]
Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the CA server.
018-502
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
computers allowed to login are restricted.
[Remedy] Confirm the property information for the specified user, and check whether the
computers allowed to login to the server are restricted.
571
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
Cause and Remedy
018-503
018-504
[Cause]
018-505
[Cause]
Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
Failed to log into the destination computer while transferring data using SMB of the
Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check whether the user name and password of the SMTP server registered in the
machine is correct.
Note
• The password cannot be confirmed. If you have forgotten the password, reset the password.
Consult your system administrator for the password reset procedure.
• When using Windows Server 2003, be sure to match the time set on the SMB server and the
machine.
• When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to change the account settings of the
shared folder so that file sharing with Windows users becomes available. For information about
necessary accounting settings, consult your system administrator.
The following is an example of a procedure for Mac OS X 10.6. It is recommended that users create
a dedicated account for data transfer. You can create and set the account on the dialog box that
appears by choosing Apple menu > [System Preferences] and then clicking [Accounts] icon.
1. From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then click [Sharing].
2. Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected, and then click [Options].
3. Select [Share files and folders using SMB].
4. Select the user accounts to enable for file sharing. Enter the user's password, then
click [OK].
5. Click [Done].
For information on how to change the account settings on other version of Mac OS, consult your
system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc.
018-506
[Cause]
Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
018-507
[Cause]
The authentication failed because the user name or password entered is not correct.
[Remedy] Enter the correct user name or password.
018-508
[Cause]
A server error occurred during authentication.
[Remedy] Check the status of the authentication server.
572
Status Code
Status Code
018-543
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
Probable causes are as follows:
1)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the
specified shared name does not exist.
2)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
Invalid characters are used in the specified shared name.
3)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
access privilege does not set on the specified shared name when the server is
Macintosh.
[Remedy] 1)Confirm that the specified shared name exists in the destination PC.
2)Take one of the following measures:
- Check whether the following invalid characters are included in the shared name set
in the machine: " / : | < > ; , * ? \ [ ] + =
- Check whether a space character is included at the top or end of the shared name
set in the machine.
- Check whether the shared name set in the machine is specified only by a period.
3)When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to change the access
privileges for the user for shared folder. For information about necessary accounting
settings, consult your system administrator.
The following is an example of a procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.
Note
• It is recommended to create a dedicated account for data transfer. You can create and set the
account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple menu > [System Preferences] and then
clicking [Accounts] icon.
1. From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then click [Sharing].
2. Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected.
3. Select the folder being shared from folders listed in the [Shared Folders] field.
4. Choose [Read & Write] as privilege option for the user listed in the [Users] field.
For information on how to change the access privilege settings on other version of Mac
OS, consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc.
018-547
[Cause]
The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the
number of users logging into the SMB server exceeded the limit when logging in to the
SMB server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
• Confirm how many users can access the shared folder.
• Check whether the number of login users have exceeded the limit.
018-556
[Cause] Received an error detection code from the HTTP server.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the specified drive and directory is available on the destination HTTP
server for the scanned document.
2)Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists, contact Customer Support
at dell.com/contactdell.
018-557
[Cause]
The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Modify the file name. Make sure that invalid characters are not contained in the
destination file name for the scanned document.
018-558
[Cause] Received an error code from HTTP server.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the specified directory exists on the destination HTTP server for the
scanned document.
2)Check whether the specified file exists on the HTTP server.
018-559
[Cause]
The same file name already exists.
[Do Not Save] is selected when duplicate file name exists.
[Remedy] Select any option other than [Do Not Save] in [File Name Conflict].
573
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
018-560
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
A user authentication error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 401).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• Login name
• Login password
• The HTTP server name
• The HTTP server path name
018-561
[Cause]
The hostname or the script storage location is not correct. (Received HTTP Status 404).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• The HTTP server name
• The HTTP server path name
018-562
[Cause]
A client-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 4xx other than 401 and 404).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• The server settings
018-563
[Cause]
A server-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 5xx).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• The server settings
018-564
[Cause]
DNS resolution for the specified hostname failed.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is registered on the DNS
server.
• The machine is connected to the DNS server.
• The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.
018-565
[Cause]
DNS resolution for the proxy server name set on the machine failed.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The proxy server name set on the machine is registered on the DNS server.
• The machine is connected to the DNS server.
• The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.
018-566
[Cause]
Unable to connect to the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The network cable connection on the machine
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
018-567
[Cause]
The followings may be the cause:
• The communication is disconnected while reading or writing due to some reason.
• Close process of the file failed due to some reason
[Remedy] Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by
PC.
574
Status Code
Status Code
018-568
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
An SSL/TLS connection error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• SSL settings for the HTTP server is correct.
• The HTTP server name
• The HTTP server path name
018-569
[Cause] The SSL server certificate may have a problem.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible
by PC.
2)Check whether the SSL server certificate is registered on the HTTP server.
3)Check whether the SSL server certificate is valid.
Check the followings:
- the certificate is unexpired
- the time set on the machine is correct
- the certificate is not on the discard list
4)Check the certificate path to the SSL server certificate, and import the required CA
certificate.
5)If the SSL server certificated is not registered on the HTTP server, disable the [Verify
Remote Server Certificate] setting.
018-570
[Cause]
A client certificate authentication error occurred on the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
• The SSL client certificate is registered on the machine.
• The device certificate is correctly registered on the HTTP server.
018-571
[Cause]
An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists, contact Customer Support at
dell.com/contactdell.
018-572
[Cause]
The specified context name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified context name is correct.
018-573
[Cause]
The specified connection name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified connection name is correct.
018-574
[Cause]
The specified volume name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified volume name is correct.
018-575
[Cause]
The specified user name or password contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified user name or password is correct.
018-576
[Cause]
The specified path name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified path name is correct.
018-577
[Cause]
The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified file name is correct.
018-578
[Cause]
The specified server or tree name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The network cable connection on the machine
• The NetWare server is accessible by PC
• The NetWare server or tree name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
575
22 Problem Solving
Status Code
018-579
Cause and Remedy
[Cause]
The hard disk on the NetWare server may be full.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The NetWare server is accessible by PC
• The free space of the server to store data
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-580
[Cause]
The specified volume name does not exist on the NetWare server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The NetWare server is accessible by PC
• The volume name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-581
[Cause]
The specified directory path does not exist on the NetWare server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The NetWare server is accessible by PC
• The directory path name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-582
The followings may be the cause:
• The login user does not have Open rights to the file.
• The login user does not have Create rights to create a file.
• The login user does not have Access rights to the directory.
• The login user does not have Read rights to the file.
• The login user does not have Write rights to the file.
• The login user does not have Delete rights of the directory or file.
• Made a delete request to the directories or files but all of them are read-only.
• Made a delete request to the directories or files but some of them are read-only.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2)Check the user has the following rights.
- Open rights to the file
- Create rights to a file
- Access rights to the directory
- Read rights to the file
- Write rights to the file
- Delete rights to the directory or file
3)Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-583
[Cause] A hard disk error occurred on the NetWare server.
[Remedy] 1)Check the status of the HDD on the NetWare server.
2)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
3)Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-584
[Cause]
576
[Cause]
The followings may be the cause:
• The communication is disconnected while reading or writing due to some reason
• Close process of the file failed due to some reason
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2)Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
Status Code
Status Code
Cause and Remedy
018-585
[Cause]
The followings may be the cause:
• The specified folder or file is in use by another user
• Made a delete request to the directories or files though some of them are in use by
another user
• Made a delete request to the directories or files though all of them are in use by
another user
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2)Check the status of use of the other users.
3)Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-586
[Cause]
Login to the NetWare server was denied.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
• The NetWare server is accessible by PC
• Login user name
• Login password
• Volume name
• Server or tree name
• Context name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-587
[Cause]
There are duplicate file names.
[Do Not Save] is set as a handling method when names are duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed in case of a file name duplication to other than [Do Not
Save].
018-588
[Cause]
Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected) after connecting to the
server.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in case of a file name
duplication, confirm that the file format is not multi-page.
018-589
[Cause]
Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in case of a file name
duplication, check the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct.
018-590
[Cause]
A file or folder of the same name was detected on the server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1)Execute the operation again by not accessing the same folder or the same server from
multiple machines.